Home

d-COLOR - Olivetti

1. settings Se Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan Ready to Print a E 2s Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Register Support Device Location CO Information n M Administrator Registration Network TWAIN Administrator Name CS gt Reset Settings E mail Address gt User Box Setting Extension No gt Standard Size Setting Input Machine Address Stamp Settings Device Name CT gt Blank Page Print Settings E mail Address 123 456 com gt Job Priority Operation a TA Tea cancer Flash Display Setting ex gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Settings Description Device Name Enter the name of this machine using up to 80 characters excluding spac es The name set here is used as a part of the subject of Internet fax E mail Address Enter the E mail address of this machine using up to 320 characters This E mail address is used as sender Internet fax address 10 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 3 Inthe administrator mode select Fax Settings Header Information then configure the following set tings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ie Ready to Print 2 User Maintenance eee Auth Account Box La Track Print Setting store adaress Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position Sender Fax No gt
2. Maintenance V E mail Setting gt E mail RX POP j Settings Print Setting Si Se Administrator Ready to scan B Ready to Print System Settings _ E mail RX POP E mail RX Setting ON POP Server Address I Please check to enter host name Login Name Co I Password is changed Password APOP Authentication orF Connection Timeout 30 Hsec Port Number 1 65535 I Use SSL TLS Port No SSL 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period confirm CN Do Not Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm M Check for New Messages Polling Interval 15__ min 1 60 ex cancer Description E mail RX Setting Select ON to use Internet fax ON is specified by default POP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server POP Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 Login Name Enter the login name when receiving E mails using the E mail server POP using up to 63 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 15 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a
3. OK cance d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 11 14 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 14 3 4 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main screen using a display pattern This machine provides three display patterns to display or hide function keys in each mode The display pattern can be changed to any of the three types above depending on function key usage con ditions In the administrator mode select System Settings Custom Function Pattern Selection then configure the following settings Ge Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Ready a pa i l a Maintenance Ea Security AEAT Network Box pima Track Ea Print Setting Eeen Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Custom Function Pattern Selection Register Support Copy Print Screen Pattern Full gt Information nae Network TWAIN Send Save Screen Pattern Full E Reset Settings g a User Box Setting Standard Size Setting A Stamp Settings oe aren Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings Preview Settings List Counter Selection Custom Function Profile User Account Settings Description C
4. Basic Setting Application Setting Configure the fax scan transmission option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 25 15 Registering a program 15 3 15 3 10 Registering a program without destination A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer The following describes the program that does not specify a destination You can only register the fax scan transmission option settings with the program so that it can apply to various types of destinations In the administrator mode select Store Address Program New No Destination then click OK to configure the following settings Maintenance gt Program Bp Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print s Box Print Setting gt C OO Fax Settings Wizard Program No Destination No 2 Name Basic Setting Fax Resolution Fine bd Scan Resolution 200 x 200 z File Type PDF z Outline PDF OFF x File Name Page Setting Multi Page Page Separation a 999 Subject Subject List Not Specified Text Text List Not Specified All Files Sent as one 1 E mai File Attachment Setting Settings
5. Enables a user not registered on this machine to log in as a public user When usage by public users is not allowed on this machine this mode is not available d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Login methods 3 3 Switching login modes When changing to other login mode after logging in to Web Connection log out of Web Connection once 1 Log out of Web Connection Q user Logout Change Password 2l D Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs E Information Job ei Box D Direct Print Y Device Information Device Information Device Name Device Location gt Configuration Summary gt Option Engine Serial Number ie bl Device Type Print Copy Scan Fax gt Meter Count Toner teins aS vow REGED 0 Magenta 100 Online Assistance Cyan 100 gt Change User Password Black 100 gt Function Permission Information gt Network Setting Information Paper Tray gt Print Setting Information Setect Tray Paper Size Paper Type Paper Status o Bypass 8 1 2 x11 LEF Plain Paper Empty gt Print Information f T O Tray 1 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready Co Tray 2 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready C Tray 3 8 1 2 x11 LEF Plain Paper Ready C Tray 4 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Plain Paper Ready PI Tray 1 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready Cc Pl Tray 2 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready Detail Output Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Saddle Tray Tray 3
6. cccccccceeeeeesseeeneseneseseeeeeseenensenseseeeeesssesenssceesesoeesesenenaseneeeseees 12 48 Managing based on the reference allowed group cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 50 Reference Allowed Gro UDs ea a 2s see aaraa ey hee cach nse hue cu gece Gelso es seen Shee ca deveav ee nag bees 12 50 Assigning a reference allowed Qroup esscceeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeeeseneeeeneeeeenneeees 12 50 Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed group for managemert 12 53 Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed Qroup essceeseeesseeeeesteeteneeees 12 53 Simultaneously setting an access allowed level and reference allowed Qroup ssceeeseeeeeees 12 54 Changing the function key display pattern by user OF aCCOUNt sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 12 57 OVGIVIOW EE E E pca dyad en bea dh Deck sdivs suede cca seiuttel cade la deedivil stab eceyy let ands N 12 57 Allowing changing the function key display pattern by user or ACCOUNT ceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeee 12 57 Selecting a function key display pattern Dy USEF eee eeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeesaeeeseaeenesseeeesaaes 12 58 Selecting a function key display pattern Dy ACCOUNT ee eeceeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseeeesaaes 12 59 Specifying the operations of the ID amp Print function 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeee
7. settings Be Administrator Logout 2 Ba Ready to Scan Ready to Print Print Setting S ddress Fax Settings Wizard Customize 1 E mail TX SMTP Y E mail Setting M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail ON EE mai 1x Sant E mail Notification ON F Total Counter Notification on SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0 Use SSL TLS OFF hd Port Number Bs a 65535 Port No SSL Es 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings validity Period Confirm X CN Do Not Confirm 7 Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm z Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Connection Timeout 60 isec Max Mail Size No Limit Server Capacity E moyen 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address i Authentication Setting POP before SMTP OFF POP before SMTP Time B lsec 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID IF Password is changed Password Domain Name Authentication Setting Set Value hd I Binary Division Divided Mail Size C Jkye 100 15000 Step100 ex Leaca Settings Description SMTP Authentication Select this check box to use the SMTP authentication As the authentication method of SMTP authentication the highest level method supported by your E mail server SMTP is automatically selected from the following methods e Digest MD5 e CRAM MD5 e PLAIN e LOGIN OFF not selected is specified by default User ID Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication using up to 64 characters
8. 12 13 4 Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed group for management Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed group A combination of the access allowed level and reference allowed group provides more flexible management For example assume that Level 3 is set as an access allowed level and Group B is set as a reference allowed group for a certain user In this case destinations the user can access are as follows e Destinations of Access Allowed Level 1 to 3 A1 to A3 B1 to B3 C1 to C3 Destinations belonging to Reference Allowed Group B B1 to B5 Tips e You can specify the access allowed level of each reference allowed group If you assign a reference allowed group for which an access allowed level is set to the address book you can manage destina tions by using both the access allowed level and reference allowed group d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 53 12 Limiting the access to destinations foreach user 12 13 Simultaneously setting an access allowed level and reference allowed group Set both an access allowed level and reference allowed group for a user To manage the address book by combining the access allowed level and reference allowed group register a reference allowed group for which an access allowed level is set and assign it to the address book 1 In the administrator mode select Security Address Reference Setting Edit then registe
9. Divided Mail Size L koye 100 15000 Step100 Settings Description POP before SMTP Select ON to use the POP Before SMTP OFF is specified by default POP before SMTP Time If necessary change the waiting time until starting E mail transmission af ter the POP authentication is successful Depending on your environment it may take time before the E mail trans mission is allowed after the POP authentication is successful In that case if a time period that is too short is specified E mail transmission may fail 5 sec is specified by default 7 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail RX POP and configure the fol lowing settings Maintenance rarer A Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Settings Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard E mail RX POP E mail RX Setting POP Server Address Login Name T Password is changed Password APOP Authentication Connection Timeout Port Number TM Use SSL TLS User Auth Account Track Box Customize T Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0 l OFF E 30 Zfsec 110 1 65535 Port No SSL 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm bd cn Do Not Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm j Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmatio
10. Permission Setting Select ON to use the single sign on function OFF is specified by default Host Name Enter the host name of this machine using up to 253 characters including only and for symbol marks In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting DNS Host Name to enter a host name Domain Name Enter the domain name of Active Directory using up to 64 characters Account Name Enter the account name that has a privilege to participate users in the Ac tive Directory domain using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the account you entered in Account Name using up to 64 characters excluding spaces and Timeout Change the time out time of domain joining processing if necessary 30 sec is specified by default 2 After entering required information in Step 1 click Ok The domain joining processing is executed 12 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentication 1 2 H 3 In the administrator mode select Network Single Sign On Setting Auto Log Out Time then change the time to hold authentication information on this machine gt Since the user can reuse authentication information while it is held on this machine they can use the services of this machine without performing authentication again gt 1 hour is specified by default Se Administra
11. Purpose Reference Communicate with the E mail server using SSL TLS page 7 6 Use of SMTP Authentication when sending E mails page 7 8 Use of POP Before SMTP Authentication when sending E mails page 7 10 Addition of a digital signature by encrypting E mails with S MIME page 7 13 Search for an E mail address using the LDAP server or Active Directory page 7 34 A late Reference f user authentication is installed on this machine the Scan to Me function is available with which the login user can easily transmit E mail to the login user s own address For details refer to page 12 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 3 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 1 Configuring basic settings for Scan to E mail Register the E mail server SMTP address and the administrator s E mail address 1 In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting ti Fax Settings Wizard Customize SMTP Server Address gt OpenAPI Setti es Administrator 2 ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs User seins vec EI 5 E mail TX SMTP M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail ON z E mail Notification ON x Total Counter Notification ON z I Please check to enter host name Use SSL TLS OFF Port Number Ps a 65535 Port No SSL 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period
12. WINS Server Address1 to Enter the WINS server address WINS Server Address2 This item is necessary when you do not automatically obtain the WINS server address using the DHCP Use the following entry formats e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Node Type Setting Select the name resolution method e B Node Query by broadcast e P Node Query the WINS server e M Node Query by broadcast and then query the WINS server e H Node Query the WINS server and then query by broadcast H Node is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the SMB printing environment 8 3 Using the direct hosting SMB service Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows you to specify the destination using the IP address IPv4 IPv6 or host name In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Direct Hosting Setting and then set Direct Hosting Setting to ON Default ON Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan g Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings User Auth Account Network Box Track Fax Settings Wizard Customize Print Setting Direct Hosting Setting Direct Hosting Setting ON TCP IP Setting i V SMB Setting Direct Hosting Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 3 Configuring the SMB printing environment 8 Resolving the name using LLMNR Using LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution enables you to resolve
13. 15 1 5 Settings Description File Path Enter the name of a destination folder in the WebDAV server specified in Host Address using up to 142 characters e Entry example scan User ID Enter the name of a user who is authorized to access the folder specified in File Path using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user you entered into User ID using up to 64 characters excluding SSL Settings When SSL is used in your environment select ON OFF is specified by default Proxy When a proxy server is used in your environment select ON OFF is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number 80 is specified by default Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 Registering a User Box A User Box can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration User Box then click OK to configure the following settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan E Ready to Print System User Maintenance Settings Track Print Setting S i Fax Settings Wizard Address Book User Box gt Group No
14. Basic Usage 3 3 1 How to access This section describes how to access Web Connection 1 2 Tips Start the Web browser Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field then press Enter gt Example When the IP address of this machine is 192 168 1 20 enter http 192 168 1 20 The Web Connection screen appears If you use Internet Explorer 6 in the IPv6 environment correct the hosts file then enter the host name in the URL field Example When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 add fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 IPv6_MFP_1 to the hosts file and enter http IPv6_MFP_1 in the URL field If you use Internet Explorer 7 8 9 or a Web browser other than Internet Explorer in the IPv6 environment enclose the IPv6 address in Example When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 enter http fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 3 3 Layout of Web Connection screen 3 2 3 2 Layout of Web Connection screen The Web Connection screen mainly consists of following three parts e Top of the screen Displays the name of login user and the status of the machine Left of the screen Displays the function menu of Web Connection Right of the screen Displays the contents of the selected menu This example shows the items in Information Device Information to explain sections in each screen 1 2 3
15. Those settings marked with an will take effect after the main switch is turned OFF ON IEEE802 1X Authentication Setting OFF Supplicant Setting User ID F Password is changed Password EAP Type OFF X EAP TTLS anonymous Inner Authentication Protocol MSCHAPv2 Server ID Client Certificates FFE Installed Encryption Strength ow E Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Conim gt Setting CN Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm ion Setting I Network Stop Time Stop Time E Jsec 30 255 Settings Description IEEE802 1X Authentica tion Setting Select ON to use IEEE802 1X authentication OFF is specified by default Supplicant Setting In IEEE802 1x authentication this machine acts as a supplicant client to be authenticated Configure the settings required for authentication by the authentication server User ID Enter a user ID using up to 128 characters This user ID is used for all EAP Type options Password Enter a password with 128 characters The password is used for all EAP Type options other than EAP TLS To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password EAP Type Select an EAP authentication method e Depend on Server The EAP Type provided by the authentication server will be used for authentication Configure the supplicant settings as required for this machi
16. 15 15 3 6 Registering a fax address program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the fax address program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration Fax then click OK to con figure the following settings Destination Information Select from Address Book Search from List Registered Address Number Check Destination Direct Input Destination one byte numeric T P E Line Setting No Selec Communication Setting Basic Setting Fax Resolution Fine pa File Type PDF F Outline PDF OFF E Simplex Duplex 1 Sided X Maintenance B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fz User Sial Auth Account Box ng Track Print Setting CO Fax Settings Wizard Customize Program Fax No 2 war 2 Sp Administrator Original Type Text Printed Photo Separate Scan OFF Density Standard Bleed Removal z O Standard Background Removal Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Informa tion Click Search from List
17. 17 S MIME Communication Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings E Mail Settings S MIME Communica tion Settings Configure settings to enable use of S MIME on this machine This function enables E mail encryption and addition of a digital signature and enhances E mail security Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use S MIME OFF is specified by default Digital Signature To add digital signature when sending E mails select a method to add it e Do not add signature Does not add the signature e Always add signature Always adds the signature The digital signa ture is automatically added without performing special setting before sending an E mail e Select when sending The user must select whether to add digital sig nature before sending an E mail Do not add signature is specified by default E Mail Text Encryption Select the method to encrypt the E mail text Method SDES is specified by default Print S MIME Information Select whether to print S MIME information when this machine receives an S MIME E mail NO is specified by default Automatically Obtain Cer Select whether to automatically obtain certificate from the received E mail tificates The obtained certificate is additionally registered in the E mail address that matches the E mail address described in the certificate NO is specified by default Certif
18. 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 60 sec is specified by default Max Mail Size If you restrict the size of an E mail to be sent in your environment select Limit No Limit is specified by default Server Capacity If you select Limit at Max Mail Size enter the maximum E mail size in cluding attachment E mails exceeding the specified size are discarded If you select Binary Division to divide an E mail this setting is invalid 10 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 Settings Description Binary Division Select this check box to divide an E mail The E mail is divided according to the size specified at Divided Mail Size This item is necessary if you oc casionally send E mails exceeding the maximum size specified on the E mail server side To read a divided E mail the mail soft receiving E mails must have a func tion to restore the divided E mail The mail soft without the restore function may not read the divided E mail OFF not selected is specified by default Divided Mail Size Enter the size to divide an E mail This item is necessary when Binary Di vision is enabled 5 Inthe administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail RX POP and configure the fol lowing settings
19. Allows you to manually assign the IPv6 global address e Global Address Enter the IPv6 global address e Gateway Address Enter the gateway address e Link Local Address Displays the link local address that is automati cally specified from the MAC address of this machine DHCPv6 Setting DNS Host Select whether to automatically assign the IPv6 global address using DHCPv6 ON is specified by default To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings DNS Host When connecting to this machine using the host name on the DNS server environment register the host name of this machine Settings Description DNS Host Name Enter the host name of this machine using up to 63 characters If your DNS server does not support the Dynamic DNS function register the host name of this machine on the DNS server Dynamic DNS Settings DNS Domain Select whether to enable the Dynamic DNS function When your DNS server supports the Dynamic DNS function the specified host name can be automatically registered on the DNS server or changes can be automatically updated as long as Enable is selected Disable is specified by default To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings DNS Domain Register the name of a domain this machine joins Settings Description Domain Name Auto Re trieval When u
20. CO IF Please check to enter host name 389 65535 s5 _Ja 65535 60 sec 5 300 Simple X c DO eI covet Settings Description External Server Name tered Enter the name of your Active Directory using up to 32 characters Assign an easy to understand name to the Active Directory to be regis External Server Type Select Active Directory Default Domain Name Enter the default domain name of your Active Directory using up to 64 characters Timeout Change the time out time to limit a communication with the Active Direc tory if necessary 60 sec is specified by default 12 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentication 1 2 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print Eg System JES Maintenance Settings Security Authi Accours Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings General Settings User Authentication Setting User Authentication Overwrite User Info gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Accoun
21. Use opening number J C Direct Input Temporary One Touch Name gt Subject j Index Auth Account Network Box Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name Logout 2 Q Customize ABC F Main Destination Information User Box No Search from List Registered Box Number 1 999999999 Limiting Access to Destinations Display ok Cancel Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination 15 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 1 Registering address books 15 Settings Description Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation User Box No Click Search from List and select a User Box from the list to save data If the User Box is already known you can manually enter the User Box number Limiting Access to Desti
22. d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 23 1 4 Notifying of the machine counter via E mail 14 5 Settings Description Register Notification Ad Enter the E mail address of the destination with 320 characters excluding dress spaces Select the notification schedule for each destination Also select whether to send eco related information Tips e If Send notice after setting complete is set to ON a test notification is sent to the registered mail ad dresses when you click OK 14 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 6 Managing the machine via SNMP 1 4 14 6 Managing the machine via SNMP Overview If you manage network devices using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP you can acquire the information of this machine and monitor it via the network This machine support the TCP IP and IPX envi ronments Using SNMP TRAP function enables you to notify the specified IP address or IPX address of a warning oc curred on this machine To manage this machine via SNMP follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure the settings for using this machine in a TCP IP or an IPX environment gt To use it ina TCP IP environment refer to page 2 3 gt To use it in an IPX environment refer to page 5 11 Configure the settings for using SNMP gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 14 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 25 Managing the machine via SNMP 14 6 Configurin
23. eeeceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeteaeeeeeseeeenanes 12 59 Specifying the operations of the ID amp Print function s sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 12 60 Configuring common settings when using the authentication function ccssseseseesseeeeeees 12 61 Restricting print jobs without authentication information cccsseeeeeeessseeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeees 12 62 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing ccssssseeessseeeeeeeeees 12 63 QVERVIOW A AE PE tense ved sudnesvuad cu tamewen oat tahluees varadecnocutintcesnuretascbalatntetentedadssbeceuataivaatasssainas 12 63 Permitting the Quick Authentication for Printing FUNCTION 0 eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeess 12 63 Registering the quick authentication for printing Server cecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeneeeeeess 12 64 USING SSL COMMUNICATION assisi ieaiai eaaa aaan Eaa aaa a aaa te aps aa anana asa 12 66 Using the authentication uUnit s ssssnsssnnsenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn annann nnen 12 68 Setting operations of the authentication unit essessesssiessreerresrrnnsinnerrtntrnnstnnnsinnntinntnnnennnnennnee 12 68 Authentication Unit IC card type cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeesaaeeeseeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 12 68 Authentication Unit biometric tyPe ccccececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeee
24. gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt List Counter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key Permission Setting Temporarily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings Header Footer Registration Logout 2 R Network Box Customize No 1 Name Color Black Pages Tst Page Only Size opt Text Type Times Roman Date Time Setting Date Type ores E Time Type None Distribution Number Text A Output Method Number ony H Start Number Specification i 1 99999999 Header Header String Date Time Setting Do Not Print Distribution Number Do Not Print Job Number Do Not Print Serial Number Do Not Print User Name Account Name Do Not Print Footer Footer String Date Time Setting Do Not Print zf Distribution Number Do Not Print z Job Number Do Not Print Serial Number Do Not Print f User Name Account Name Do Not Print Cancel Settings Description Name Enter the name of the header or footer to be registered using up to 16 characters When selecting a header or footer give it a name that helps you easily identify it Color If necessary select the pri
25. gt Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting gt Network Setting Clear gt Reset gt Format All Destination License Settings gt Edit Font Macro 14 8 4 Restarting the network interface Reset the controller of this machine and restart the network interface In the administrator mode select Maintenance Reset Reset then click Reset Be Administrator eS Ready to Scan E Ready to Print System Auth eer t Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Meter Count Reset gt ROM Version Controller is reset gt Import Export gt Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting gt Network Setting Clear Format All Destination License Settings gt Edit Font Macro 14 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 8 Managing the setting information 14 14 8 5 Deleting all address information All of the address information registered on this machine can be deleted In the administrator mode select Maintenance Reset Format All Destination then click Format System Settings Print Setting Si gt Meter Count ROM Version gt Import Export gt Status Notification Settin
26. gt Timer Setting Network Error Code Display Setting Qe Administrator D Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Security Auth Account Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Logout Network Box Customize Network Error Code Display Setting Error Code Display on lox cance Reference For details on the error codes refer to User s Guide Troubleshooting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 13 Displaying the network error code 5 5 5 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 6 Setting up the Operating Environment of Web Connection 6 1 Encrypting communication using Web Connection a L 6 Setting up the Operating Environment of Web Con nection 6 1 Encrypting communication using Web Connection You can enhance security by encrypting communication between the computer and Web Connection with SSL The SSL certificate is registered on this machine when it is shipped Therefore only enabling SSL TLS on this machine allows SSL encrypted communication immediately after the setup In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings SSL Setting then configure the following set tings User Maintenance Msn Ess Network Box Print Setting eee ae Psst seming Encryption Strength AEs 256 3DES 168 RC4 128 DES 56 RC4 40 SSL Setting Settings Se Administrator System P
27. Basic Setting Application Setting Configure the Scan option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 15 15 Registering a program 15 3 15 3 2 Registering an FTP program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the FTP program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration FTP then click OK to con figure the following settings ep Administrator e Ready to Scan Ready to Print z Maintenance ae cay uth ecoun Box racl Print Setting gt __ Fax Settings Wizard Customize 7 Address Book program FTP eenen Destination Information gt Subject Select from Address Book Tee gt Prefixjsuffix S Registered Address Number C Direct Input Host Address T Please check to enter host name CO File Path User ID Password anonymous OFF z PASV Mode OFF z Proxy orr E Port No Ri Ja 6ss3s Basic Setting Scan Resolution 200 x 200 File Type PDF ja Outline PDF OFF z File Name Page Setting Mul
28. Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default Synchronize WebDAV Cli ent Setting Select whether to use the proxy server for WebDAV transmission as a proxy server for the server where the dedicated software was installed To use a different proxy server select OFF and enter the proxy server in formation ON is specified by default Proxy Settings If you set the Synchronize WebDAV Client Setting to OFF register the proxy server Proxy Server Ad Enter the proxy server address dress Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number 8080 is specified by default User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password abs Reference Enter the passwor
29. Configure settings to enable use of S MIME on this machine This function enables E mail encryption and addition of a digital signature and enhanc es E mail security For details refer to page 17 23 To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings E Mail Settings E Mail TX SMTP Configure the settings to send an E mail from this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to send an E mail from this machine ON is specified by default Scan to E mail Select whether to use the E mail transmission function Using this function allows you to send the scanned original data as an E mail attachment ON is specified by default Status Notification Select whether to use the E mail notification function If a warning such as paper addition toner replacement or paper jam oc curs on this machine it can be sent to a registered E mail address ON is specified by default Total Counter Notification Select whether to use the total counter notification function Using this function allows you to send counter information managed by this machine to the registered E mail address ON is specified by default SMTP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server SMTP Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6
30. Fax Settings Wizard Customize External Server Registration User Authentication No 2 Active Directory z Setting External Server Name gt Account Track Settings External Server Type gt Prohibited Function Active Directory Login Setting Default Domain Name gt Print without Timeout so sec 5 300 Authentication i NTLM Simple Print ii fi h cation z Default Domain Name NDS Y External Server Settings Default NDS Tree Nam eTaul ree Name gt External Server Settings Default NDS Context Name LDAP Server Address I Please check to enter host name gt Public User Box Setting Port No 389 1 65535 gt User Account Common I Enable SSL Setti ing Port No SSL 1 65535 H TR sean to Search Base gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Timeout E0 sec 5 300 General Settings Simple X Counter Remote Control Search Attribute uid I Search Attributes Authentication Login Name it B T Password is changed Password Cancel Description Enable SSL Select this check box to use SSL communication OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL Normally you can use the original port number 636 is specified by default If necessary change the SSL communication port number 12 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 7 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication 12 12 7 Installing the NDS over IPX authenti
31. For details refer to page 17 6 DNS Host When connecting to this machine using the host name on the DNS server environment register the host name of this machine For details refer to page 17 6 DNS Domain Register the name of a domain this machine joins For details refer to page 17 6 DNS Server Settings To resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or IPv4 server on the network from this machine register your DNS server address IPv4 on this machine For details refer to page 17 7 DNS Server Settings To resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or IPv6 server on the network from this machine register your DNS server address IPv6 on this machine For details refer to page 17 7 IPsec Settings Configure settings to enable use of IPsec on this machine For details refer to page 17 7 IP Filtering Permit Ac cess Specify an IP address of a computer to which you want to allow access to this machine For details refer to page 17 11 IP Filtering Deny Access Specify an IP address of a computer to which you want to deny access to this machine For details refer to page 17 11 RAW Port Number Specify a RAW port number required for Port9100 printing For details refer to page 17 11 LLMNR Setting IPv4 Settings Select whether to use LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution For details refer to page 17
32. In the administrator mode select Print Setting Security Setting and configure the following settings Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print F r System Maintenance Settings Print Setting gt Basic Setting Security Setting gt PCL Setting Verify XPS OOXML Digital Signature OFF gt PS Setting Print XPS OOXML Errors on gt TIFF Setting _ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaammmMli l ee gt Interface Setting gt Assign Account to Acquire Device Info gt OOXML Print Settings Settings Description Verify XPS OOXML Digital Signature Select whether to verify a digital signature when printing an XPS or OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file with a digital signature added When ON is selected the data is not printed if the signature is invalid OFF is specified by default Print XPS OOXML Errors Select whether to print error information when an error occurs while print ing an XPS or OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 35 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 8 10 6 Configuring the default OOXML print settings Configure the default OOXML print settings for direct printing An OOXML file is compatible with the file type docx xlsx or pptx of Microsoft Office 2007 or later In the admin
33. Network Settings SMB Settings Set the SMB Server Message Block operating environment Settings Client Settings Description Configure settings to enable use of the SMB client function of this machine For details refer to page 17 16 Print Settings Configure settings to perform SMB printing on this machine For details refer to page 17 17 WINS Settings Register the WINS server when it is installed to resolve the name For details refer to page 17 17 Direct Hosting Setting Select whether to enable the direct hosting SMB service If enabled a peer can be specified using the IP address IPv4 or IPv6 or host name For details refer to page 17 17 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 15 17 Client Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings SMB Settings Client Settings Configure settings to enable use of the SMB client function of this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the SMB client function of this machine Using this function allows you to send the scanned original data to a shared folder of a computer ON is specified by default SMB Authentication Set ting Select an authentication method for SMB transmission according to your environment e NTLM v1 Performs the NTLM v1 authentication This option is availa ble in the NT domain environment e NTLM v2 Performs NTLM v2
34. Select the setting from those registered in SA in IPsec Setting Communication Type Select a direction of IPSec communication Action Select an action to be taken for the IP packets that met Peer Protocol Setting and Communication Type Protected Protect the IP packets that met the conditions Allow Do not protect the IP packets that met the conditions Deny Discard the IP packets that met the conditions Cancel Refuse the IP packets that met the conditions 13 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 7 Using the IEEE802 1X authentication 13 13 7 Using the IEEE802 1X authentication If IEEE802 1X authentication is installed in your environment configure the following settings Using IEEE802 1X authentication enables you to only connect devices authorized by administrators to the LAN environment Devices that are not authenticated will not be allowed to even join the network and this ensures rigid security In the administrator mode select Network IEEE802 1X Authentication Setting IEEE802 1X Authentica tion Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Y IEEE802 Authentication gt EEE802 1X Authenticati Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan EP Ready to Print a System Settings User Auth Account Network Box Track ress Fax Settings Wizard Customize IEEE802 1X Authentication Setting
35. Settings Description Paper Name Enter the paper name using up to 12 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the registered paper 15 36 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 9 Registering a paper name and paper type 1 5 Settings Description Paper Type Select a paper type Plain Paper is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 37 15 Using data management utility 15 10 15 10 15 10 1 Using data management utility Data Management Utility Data Management Utility is a tool capable of managing copy protect data stamp data and font macro data of this machine from a computer on the network Start up Data Management Utility from the Web Connection login page Tips Flash Player must be installed to use Data Management Utility To manage font or macro data use Internet Explorer and install Flash Player Ver 9 0 You cannot start up multiple Data Management Utilities at the same time Follow the below procedure to use Data Management Utility 1 In the Web Connection login page select the Data Management Utility to be started Web Connection Login Public User Registered User User Name Password Administrator View Mode C Flash HTML Flash Player is necessary to see in Flash form PLASRTEAYEA d User Assist F Display dialog box in case of warning Language English English Login Starting up Data Management
36. The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation Alas Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 17 10 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 2 10 2 Configuring the IP address fax environment Overview The IP address fax function is a function used to send and receive faxes within a limited network such as enterprise network In addition to IP address you can also use a host name and E mail address to specify the destination The SMTP protocol is used to send and receive IP address faxes Because the SMTP server function of this machine sends and receives data no server is required when sending or receiving a fax by specifying the IP address of the remote machine When using the IP address fax function follow the below procedure to configure the settings Y These items must be configured by your service representative in advance F
37. User Auth Account Box Track is reflected after reset Print Setting Scanner Settings 4 Scan Function OFF di m Scanner Name Scanner Location Er P SNMP Scanner Information g Connection Timeout o jsec 30 300 De oe ema __ Printer Settings Settings Description Scan Function Select ON to use the WS scan transmission function OFF is specified by default Scanner Name Enter the name of this machine when using it as a WS scanner using up to 63 characters excluding and a space Scanner Location If necessary enter the location where to install the scanner using up to 63 characters excluding spaces Scanner Information If necessary enter scanner information using up to 63 characters exclud ing spaces Connection Timeout Change the time out time to limit a communication with the computer if necessary 120 sec is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 29 Configuring the WS scan environment 7 5 Using the proxy server Configure settings for scanning through this machine in the environment where the multicast communication is restricted using the discovery proxy defined by WS Discovery Configure the setting if your environment requires the discovery proxy server In normal circumstances to perform scan transmission through this machine using the Web service the computer must be connected at a location where multicast communic
38. User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 11 13 Configuring certificate verification settings 13 3 13 3 2 Settings Description Address not using Proxy Server If necessary enter the address that does not use the proxy server Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Importing external certificates used for validating the chain Types of external certificates that can be imported Import external certificates used for validating the certificate chain certificate path in this machine The following certificates can be imported on this machine Type Description Trusted CA Root Certifi cate You must import the certificate of the CA that issued the certificate in ques tion on this machine in advance if you wish to validate the chain of a sub mitted certificate Trusted CA Intermediate Certificate You must import the certificate of the intermediate certificate authority on this machine in advance if the submitted cer
39. Web Management Tool d COLOR MIF 2 d COLOR MF252 d COLOR MF032 d COLOR MF452 d COLOR MF552 SS Code 576202 PUBLICATION ISSUED BY Olivetti S p A Gruppo Telecom Italia Via Jervis 77 10015 Ivrea ITALY www olivetti com Copyright 2012 Olivetti All rights reserved The mark affixed to the product certifies that the product satisfies the basic quality requirements C The manufacturer reserves the right to carry out modifications to the product described in this manual at any time and without any notice ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark ENERGY STAR The ENERGY STAR program is an energy reduction plan introduced by theUnited States Environmental Protection Agency in response to environmental issues and for the purpose of advancing the development and utilization of more energy efficient office equipment Your attention is drawn to the following actions which could compromise the conformity attested to above as well as the characteristics of the product e incorrect electrical power supply e incorrect installation incorrect or improper use or use not in compliance with the warnings provided in the User s Manual supplied with the product e replacement of original components or accessories with others of a type not approved by the manufacturer or performed by unauthorised personnel All rights reserved No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
40. When a PORT EPRT command is sent from an FTP client the data con nection is established only if both of the following conditions are satisfied e A port number less than 1024 is not specified e The IP address specified by the command is same as that specified when a control connection is established Enable is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 11 1 6 Using the machine WebDAV server for association 16 4 16 4 Using the machine WebDAV server for association Overview To use application software with which the WebDAV server of this machine is used to communicate config ure the WebDAV server function If a certificate for this machine is registered you can encrypt communication between the machine and ap plication software using SSL To use the WebDAV server of this machine for the association follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure the WebDAV server settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 16 12 3 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Encrypting communication between this machine and application software with page 16 13 SSL Configuring the WebDAV server settings Enable the WebDAV server Also set an access right to the WebDAV serv
41. e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 File Path Enter the service name at the path of the URL where the WS Discovery service is published in the discovery proxy server using up to 255 charac ters Enable SSL When using SSL to encrypt a communication with the discovery proxy server select ON OFF is specified by default Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the port number of the discovery proxy server Normally you can use the original port number When Enable SSL is set to OFF 80 is specified by default When Enable SSL is set to ON 443 is specified by default 7 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 5 Configuring the WS scan environment 7 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the computer is encrypted with SSL To encrypt SSL communication between this machine and the computer you must set the bidirectional SSL communication between them Before starting this procedure confirm the following Name resolution must have been performed in the DNS server If the certificate of this machine is not the one issued by the Certificate Authority CA you must register the certificate of this machine in Trusted Root Certification Authorities of the computer e Create a certificate in the computer side in advance and associate it with the TCP IP communication port default port number 5358 To make SSL commu
42. e System E Zi Weer it Maintenance tings Security E Network pom Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Create User Box Type Public Owner Name Public Opep ayatem User eee Box Operation UserBoxsetting DeleteUserfox gt Create System User Box 3 Use User Box Attribute Change to change User Box settings Qe Administrator L togout 21 eB Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fs Maintenance Eiere rr MRJ AEC i pa p Settings 3 Track Print Setting R Fax Settings Wizard Customize User Box Attribute Change gt Create User Box User Box Number 1 gt Open System User Box User Box Name box1 gt Create System User Box inex Aee H I User Box Expansion Function is changed Confidential RX C New Communication Password Retype New Communication cK Password I User Box Password is changed New Password Retype New Password I User Box Owner is changed Type Public ox cancel 11 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 1 Creating and editing a User Box 11 Settings Description User Box Name Change the User Box name using up to 20 characters Index Change a character to index search a target User Box using User Box Name User Box Expansion Func tion is changed This item is available when the Fax Kit is installed Select this check box to change the Confidential RX function using a User Box To add the Confidential RX function select ON for Confidential RX Also
43. gt Edit Font Macro Install License Iflicense is successfully enabled the main body will automatically reboot Enter a Function Code m Function Code Enter the License Code License Code 3 o Cancel Tips e To enable the advanced function the extension memory included in the Upgrade Kit must be installed 14 46 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 11 Using an advanced function by registering the license 14 Enabling the function using the token number Automatically perform a procedure from a step to register a license in this machine via the Licence Manage ment Server LMS on the Internet to a step to enable an advanced function on this machine This machine must be able to connect with the Internet because you must enter a token number included in the token certificate and obtain information required for enabling the advanced function from LMS In the administrator mode select Maintenance License Settings Install License and enter the token number then click OK Print Setting gt Meter Count gt ROM Version gt Import Export gt Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Setting gt Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time gt Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting gt Reset gt Get Request Code gt List of Enabled Functions gt Edit Font Macro SS mes sey License Settings
44. gt Install License Sp Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan a Ready to Print eg User Auth Account Box Track Wizard Customize ddress Fax Settings Install License if license is successfully enabled the main body will automatically reboot Please enter the Token Code No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 No 9 No 10 EIT UIT TTT JT o Cancel Tips e To enable the advanced function the extension memory included in the Upgrade Kit must be installed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 47 14 Updating the firmware of this machine 14 12 14 12 Updating the firmware of this machine Overview A firmware for this machine can be downloaded from the Internet to update the machine firmware You can keep using the machine even while downloading a firmware To download a firmware for this machine from the Internet and update the machine firmware follow the below procedure VY The firmware must be updated by your service representative For details contact your service repre sentative 1 Prepare for downloading a firmware gt Configure the proxy server setting and specify the time to automatically download a firmware gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 14 48 2 Update the firmware of this machine gt To update the firmware automatically by specifying the time refer to page 14 50 gt To update the firmware manually refer to page 14 51
45. gt Status Notification Setting Port Number 162 1 65535 gt Total Counter Notification Pr Setting Community Name public Alert gt i m eee Replenish Paper Tray Daylight Saving Time I JAM Timer Setting I PM Call gt Network Error Code Display F Replace Staples Setting Replenish Toner Reset I Finisher Tray Full gt License Settings I Senice Call gt Edit Font Macro I Job Finished I Hole Punch Scrap Box Full I Waste Toner Box Full I Drum Unit Developing Unit Life I Fusing Unit Yield I Transfer Roller Yield I Transfer Belt Unit Yield Ozone Filter Yield OK Cancel Settings Description Notification Address Specify the address to be notified of the machine status e f IP Address is used as the destination enter the IP address IPv4 IP address IPv6 or host name using up to 253 characters e If the destination is an IPX Address enter the address by an 8 digit hexadecimal number Port Number If the destination is an IP Address change the port number if necessary Normally you can use the original port number Node Address If the destination is an IPX Address enter the node address by an 12 digit hexadecimal number Community Name Enter the community name using up to 15 characters Replenish Paper Tray Select this check box to send a notification when paper on tray runs out JAM Select this check box to send a notification when paper jam occurs
46. Adjust Connect to the NTP server and adjust the date and time of this machine 4 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 Configuring Network Settings of this Machine 5 1 Using in the IPv4 environment 5 5 5 1 Configuring Network Settings of this Machine Using in the IPv4 environment Overview To use this machine by connecting it to the IPv4 network follow the below procedure to configure the set tings 1 Setting the method to assign an IP address to this machine gt For details on how to assign an IP address refer to page 5 4 If you resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or server on the network from this machine register your DNS server address to this machine gt For details on how to register the DNS server refer to page 5 5 gt When you are using the DHCP server information of the DNS server used for resolving the name may be able to be obtained automatically If your DNS server supports the Dynamic DNS function register the host name and domain name of this machine and enable Dynamic DNS if necessary gt For details on how to register the host name of this machine refer to page 5 6 gt For details on how to register the domain name refer to page 5 7 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 3 Using in the IPv4 environment 5 1 Assigning an IP address To use this machine in the IPv4 network environment assign an IP address to this machine I
47. Administrator Information Administrator Name Extension No Admin E mail Address gt When you are in the public user mode click To Login Screen gt When you are in the mode other than the public user mode click Logout The Login screen appears 2 Selecta login mode and enter required information gt To log in to the administrator mode refer to page 3 9 gt To log in to the user mode refer to page 3 11 3 Click Login The screen for the selected login mode appears Tips If you do not operate this machine for a given period of time after you log in to Web Connection you will automatically be logged out e If the authentication setting is changed on the Control Panel while you are logging in to the user mode of Web Connection you will automatically be logged out d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 3 Login methods Logging in to the administrator mode Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to configure settings for this machine 1 2 On the Login screen select Administrator and click Login Web Connection Login Public User C Registered User User Name Password g Administrator View Mode Flash HTML Flash Player is necessary to see in Flash form Faerie Va User Assist F Display dialog box in case of warning Language English English X Starting up Data Management Utility Flash Player is required to use the Data Management Utility Manage C
48. COMMUNICATION cd sis csieoiecia test oohet A r eile ddev a a e cen ernie 7 31 Configuring the TWAIN scan environment ccseeeceeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesneneeeeseseenneeeeeeseneeeeeeeseseenens 7 32 OVGIVICW 4k cohen es A ee i nied deeded a A ha 7 32 Configuring the basic settings for the TWAIN SCAN essceeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeenaeeeennneeeeed 7 32 Changing the Control Panel lock time ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaeesesaeeeesneeseeneetenaeees 7 33 Searching for a destination using the LDAP Servel csssseeeeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesenees 7 34 OVGIVIOW Aen Aa ee en en ee ii a ee ee E 7 34 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP SearcCh ceeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeetesaeeeeeaeeeesneeeeeneeeeeaeees 7 34 USING SSE COMMUNICATION sanne taney ier eerie aaea aa a ane anain 7 37 ing the Printing Environment Configuring the LPR printing EnvirOnMentt cccesseseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessenaeeeeeesseaeeeeeeseeeneneess 8 3 OVOIVIOW nane atna ese cecal casters Nass EE NaS Gores ial aa CS se need anata a ss Sante concn guts e en in hoe 8 3 Enabling HPD sic nonae ae Renee ae etter Siete 8 3 Contents 2 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 2 Configuring the Port9100 printing ENViroONMent ccceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneseeeneeenss 8 4 COVEN IW AEE A E nents ob Shave uae canis arta taza E E E E rate ae eae ate 8 4
49. Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Synchronize WebDAV Cli ent Setting To access a server with the dedicated software installed via a proxy server enter your proxy server Internet ISW Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Internet ISW Settings Synchronize Use a proxy server registered in WebDAV Client Set tings Individual Settings Register a required proxy server separately from the proxy server registered in WebDAV Client Settings Enter the proxy server address port number and the user name and password required to log in to the proxy server Configure the settings to download the machine firmware via the Internet and update the existing firmware For details contact you
50. Default Address Sort Select the list order of destinations by registration number and registration Method name If you select the registration name destinations are sorted according to Sort Character specified for the destinations Registered No is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 39 1 4 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 10 Settings Description Default Address Display Select the button or list type to display destinations Method One Touch Button Layout is specified by default 14 10 4 Changing the default scan data file name Change the default file name of scanned original data when saving it The file name is initial of the function text to be added date sequential number page number file extension In the administrator mode select System Settings Scan File Name Settings then configure the following settings Qs Administrator Logout Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fs Maintenance Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Scan File Name Settings gt Register Support Function Mode Initial Attach a Information Supplementary File Name Device Name z gt Network TWAIN Arbitrary Characters gt Reset Settings User Box Setting ex Cancel gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Prin
51. E mail Setting is reflected after reset ZRS Friendly Name gt IPP Setti ma SSL Setting OFF FTP Setting Publication Service Disable gt SNMP Setting Certificate Verification Level ae 2 Settings SMB Setting ea make Validity Period Confirm l Y DPws m E Zail Key Usage Do Not Confirm gt DPWS Common Chain Do Not Confirm Settings Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm 7 ox Cancel Description Friendly Name Enter the name of this machine to be displayed when searching for this ma chine using the Web service through a computer using up to 62 charac ters excluding spaces Use a name that helps you easily identify this machine Publication Service When using this machine in one of the following environments select En able e Environment where NetBIOS is disabled on the computer loaded with Windows Vista or later e Environment constructed so that only communications using IPv6 are allowed Up to 512 destinations can be detected in Publication Service including detection counts by NetBIOS Disable is specified by default 7 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 5 Configuring the WS scan environment 7 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings Scanner Settings then configure the following settings Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings
52. Enter the name of this machine when using it as a WS printer using up to 63 characters excluding and a space Printer Location If necessary enter the location where to install the printer using up to 63 characters excluding spaces Printer Information If necessary enter printer information using up to 63 characters excluding spaces d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 5 Configuring the WS printing environment 8 Using the proxy server Configure settings for printing through this machine in the environment where the multicast communication is restricted using the discovery proxy defined by WS Discovery Configure the setting if your environment requires the discovery proxy server In normal circumstances to print data through this machine using the Web service the computer must be connected at a location where multicast communication is available for this machine However installing the discovery proxy server at a location where unicast communication is available for this machine enables print ing through this machine In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Extension Settings then configure the following settings Sp Administrator 21 ready to Scan B Ready to Print s User Maintenance 3 peed Auth Account Box ettings Track Print Setting St Fax Settings Wizard Customize DPWS Extension Settings Enable Proxy OFF tt
53. Fax TX settings 9 8 Flash display setting 6 8 Format all destination 74 35 Forward TX setting 9 74 FTP 75 4 FTP server 76 77 Function display key 74 75 74 77 Function display key permission setting 74 74 Function on off setting 9 70 Function permission 72 43 G Get request code 74 45 Group 75 74 H Header information 9 5 Header footer position 9 6 Header footer registration 75 33 Help 3 79 How to access 3 3 l ID amp print delete time 77 17 IEEE802 1X authentication setting 73 23 Import 74 32 Incomplete TX hold 9 72 Install license 74 46 Interface setting 8 38 Internet fax 70 3 15 11 Internet ISW settings 74 48 IP address fax 70 78 15 12 IP address IPv4 5 4 IP filtering 73 76 IPP print 8 70 IPPS print 8 73 IPsec setting 73 77 IWS settings 76 77 J Job log 74 37 Job log settings 74 36 Job priority operation settings 74 42 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 18 3 18 Index by item 18 1 k Layout of Web Connection screen 3 4 LDAP authentication 72 26 LDAP search 7 34 LDAP IC card authentication setting 72 69 Limiting access to destinations 12 47 Line parameter setting 9 3 LLTD setting 5 72 Login mode 3 7 Login screen 3 6 LPR print 8 3 M Machine setting 4 3 Main menu 3 72 Main menu default settings 74 9 Main menu display settings 74 77 Manual setting 4 5 Max allowance set 72 46 Memory RX setting 9 73 Meter count 74 30 Meter count and device confirmation Tx setting
54. File Attachment Setting You can select the E mail attachment method when Page Setting is set to Page Separation e All Files Sent as one 1 E mail Attaches all files to one E mail e One 1 File per E mail Sends one E mail for each file All Files Sent as one 1 E mail is specified by default Simplex Duplex Select whether to scan the front and back sides of an original automatical ly You can only scan a single side of the first page and both sides of the remaining pages automatically e 1 Sided Scan one side of an original e 2 Sided Scan both sides of an original e Cover Sheet 2 Sided Scans a single side of the first page and scans both sides of the remaining pages 1 Sided is specified by default Original Type Select the setting appropriate for the contents of the original and scan the original with the optimum image quality Text Printed Photo is specified by default Color Select a color mode for scanning originals There are four color modes Auto to scan based on the original color Full Color Gray Scale and Black and White Auto is specified by default Separate Scan When there are too many original sheets that cannot be loaded into the ADF at the same time if you load them in several batches and handle them as one job select ON You can also scan the original using both ADF and Original Glass alter nately OFF is specified by defa
55. Friendly Name eT SSL Setting orF z Publication Service Disable Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm ox cance Enabling the Distributed Scan Management Enable the Distributed Scan function In the administrator mode select Network Distributed Scan Function Settings and set Distributed Scan Function Settings to ON Default OFF System Maintenance Settings Distributed Scan Function Settings D Administrator Ready to Scan Ready to Print r User Auth Account Network Box Track Distributed Scan Function Settings Distributed Scan Function Settings OFF Cancel 16 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 7 Allowing for upload of contents to this machine 16 16 7 Allowing for upload of contents to this machine If the Internal Web Server IWS function is enabled you can transfer Web page contents to this machine and use the machine as a Web server Transfer the Web page contents to this machine using WebDAV You can also use static content and script base dynamic content to fit your environment Tips To use the IWS function ask your service representative to configure settings For details contact your service representative In the administrator mode select Network IWS Settings
56. Network Box f F User System Settings Security Auth Account Track Power Key Setting Enter Power Save Mode Power Saving Fax Scan Awake from Power Save Mode by Touching Control Panel Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count Power Settings gt ROM Version Low Power Mode Setting 15 Minute 10 240 gt Import Export Sleep Mode Setting 30 Minute 15 240 Status Notification Setting Power Consumption in Sleep Mode Enabled v P tti e gt Total Counter Noti ower Save Settings Low Power Setting Sleep Sub Power OFF v Immediately Standard ON Lok Cancet_ Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro Settings Description Low Power Mode Setting Change the time required to automatically change to the Low Power mode after you did not operate this machine In the Low Power mode the display of the Touch Panel is turned off to re duce power consumption The default is 15 min allowable range 2 to 240 min Sleep Mode Setting Change the time required to automatically change to the Sleep mode after you did not operate this machine Sleep mode provides a greater power saving effect than the Low Power mode However the time required to return to the normal mode is longer than the time required to recover from the Low Power mode The default is 20 min allowable range 2 to 240 min Power Consump
57. Print Setting Y TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings mI pce letwork Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps 7 and then ON when changing settings RAW Port Number M Port 1 r00 a 65535 M Port 2 9112 1 65535 M Port 3 fo13 a 65535 M Port 4 ras a 65535 M Port 5 9115 1 65535 M Port 6 foie _ a 6553s d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 3 Configuring the SMB printing environment 8 8 3 Configuring the SMB printing environment Overview The SMB printing function is a function used to print data by directly specifying this machine on the compu ter This machine is shared using the SMB Server Message Block protocol If the WINS server is installed to resolve the name register it Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows communications using the IP address IPv4 IPv6 or host name Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows you to use the SMB printing function even in the IPv6 environment Using LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution enables you to resolve the name even in an environ ment with no DNS server This function is supported in an operating system of Windows Vista or later Win dows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 It is useful to resolve the name in the IPv6 environment When using the SMB printing function follow the below procedure to configure th
58. Print Setting Store adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position RX Data Operation Settings gt Line Parameter Setting C Memory RX Setting gt TX RX Settings C Forward TX Setting 5 C PC Fax RX Setting Function Setting TSI User Box Settings None gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting 2 When using two lines select the line for which the TSI Routing function is set and click Edit gt If no additional line is connected go to Step 3 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 3 At TSI User Box Settings configure the following settings gt Line Parameter Setting TSI User Box Setting ON gt TX RX Settings coil eben Foy eer soils aie Automatically Print gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting Maintenance Print Setting Header Footer Position TSI User Box Settings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print System Settings OK Register Forwarding Destination Cancel Settings Description TSI User Box Setting Select ON to use the TSI Routing function OFF is specified by default Action when TSI User Box is not set Select the action to be taken by the machine if a fax number TSI is not regis tered and no forwarding destination is received e Automatically Print Prints a received fax withou
59. Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs sao j User Maintenance Settings Security Auth Ae Za Network Box Print Setting ee Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings External Server Registration User Authentication No z Account Track Settings External Server Type Active Directory gt Prohibited Function Active Directory Authentication Setting Public User Box Setting Port No 389 _ 1 65535 gt User Account Common I Enable SSL cag Port No SSL 636 ___ 1 65535 gt Scan to Home Settings Sanh gt peann eu EL Timeout 60 Isec 5 300 Folder Settings General Settings Simpl x gt Counter Remote Control Se Administrator External Server Name Default Domain Name Timeout 60 sec 5 300 NTLM Default Domain Name NDS Settings Default NDS Tree Name Default NDS Context Name Search Attribute IE Search Attributes Authentication Login Name I Password is changed Password Cancel Settings Description External Server Name Enter the name of your LDAP server using up to 32 characters Assign an easy to understand name to the LDAP server to be registered External Server Type Select LDAP Server Address Enter your LDAP server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220
60. Start TLS at Use SSL TLS change the communication port number if necessary Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Port No SSL If you select SMTP over SSL at Use SSL TLS change the SSL commu nication port number if necessary Normally you can use the original port number 465 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item 7 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment Settings Description Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation EN Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of
61. This option is available when File Type is set to PDF or Compact PDF while the PDF processing function is enabled Selecting ON linearizes a PDF file to quickly load the first page in the Web browser OFF is specified by default PDF A This option is available when File Type is set to PDF or Compact PDF while the PDF processing function is enabled Selecting PDF A 1a or PDF A 1b allows you to create a PDF file based on PDF A OFF is specified by default Searchable PDF This option is available when File Type is set to PDF or Compact PDF while the searchable PDF function is enabled Selecting ON creates a searchable PDF file using the OCR character rec ognition technology e Language Selection Select a language for OCR processing Select the language used in the original to correctly recognize text data e Adjust Rotation Select Adjust to automatically perform the rotation adjustment for each page based on the direction of text data detected by OCR processing e Document Name Auto Extraction Select ON to automatically extract a character string appropriate for a document name from the OCR character recognition result and specify it as a document name OFF is specified by default Character Recognition This option is available when File Type is set to PPTX while the search able PDF function is enabled Selecting ON creates a searchable file using the OCR c
62. UDP has been selected in Protocol Identification Setting specify the port number used for IPsec communication 6 Inthe administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting IPsec Enable IPsec then click OK 13 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 6 Using IPsec communication 1 3 7 n Enable IPsec configure the following settings Gp Administrator ia l B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print o Maintenance cage Network Box Print Setting Customize TCP IP Setting Enable IPsec Terme Seng Pee a Dead Peer Detection 15 Cookies Disable ane ICMP Pass Disable E gt E mail Setting ICMPv6 Pass Disable gt LDAP Setting Default Action Allow No Name Edit Delete SNMP Setting pa Create Delete opus setings 4 E l OK Cancel Settings Description IPsec Select ON to use the IPsec Dead Peer Detection If no response can be confirmed from the peer in a certain period the SA with the peer is deleted Select a time that elapses before sending survival confirmation information to the peer how has not responded Cookies Select whether to enable the defense using Cookies against denial of service attacks ICMP Pass Select whether to apply IPsec to the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Select Enable to allow the ICMP packets to pass without applying IPsec to the I
63. Us er ID using up to 64 characters e Domain Name Enter the domain name realm for SMTP authentica tion using up to 253 characters This item is necessary when the SMTP authentication method is Digest MD5 Enter the domain name if two or more domains realm exist When only one domain realm exists no entry is required The domain name is no tified from the E mail server SMTP at the initial communication and communication is automatically performed using that domain name e Authentication Setting Select whether to synchronize the SMTP au thentication with the user authentication of this machine This item is necessary when the user authentication is installed on this machine Use Set Value Uses values entered at User ID and Password Use User Auth ID and Password Uses the user name and password of the registered user of this machine as User ID and Password for the SMTP authentication Use Set Value is specified by default POP Before SMTP Authentication Select whether to use POP before SMTP Configure the setting if your environment requires the POP Before SMTP Authentication for sending an E mail OFF is specified by default POP Before SMTP Time If necessary change the waiting time until starting E mail transmission af ter the POP authentication is successful 5 sec is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 21 E Mail RX POP To displa
64. and select a destination fax address from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination fax address select Direct Input and enter the address e Destination Enters the destination fax number e Line Setting If two lines are used select the line used to send a fax If No Selection is selected either line whichever is not busy is used for trans mission e Communication Setting As necessary specify how to send a fax to a destination you wish to register Only one destination can be specified Basic Setting Appli cation Setting Configure the fax transmission option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Destinations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 21 15 Registering a program 15 3 15 3 7 Registering an Internet fax address program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the Internet fax address program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration Internet Fa
65. d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 27 17 WebDAV Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings WebDAV Settings Configure the WebDAV transmission environment and the WebDAV server function setting of this machine Settings Description WebDAV Client Settings Configure settings to enable use of the WebDAV client function of this ma chine For details refer to page 17 28 WebDAV Server Settings Configure settings to enable use of the WebDAV server function of this ma chine For details refer to page 17 29 Proxy Setting for Remote To use the remote diagnosis system via a proxy server register the proxy Access server currently used For details refer to page 17 30 WebDAV Client Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings WebDAV Settings WebDAV Client Set tings Configure settings to enable use of the WebDAV client function of this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the WebDAV client function of this machine Selecting this option sends the scanned original data to the WebDAV serv er ON is specified by default Proxy Server Address To access to the WebDAV server via a proxy server enter your proxy serv er address Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Exa
66. e 10 22 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in COIOM cceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 10 23 er Box Environment Creating and editing a User BoX cccssssseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeenneeneeeessneneeeesssnneeeeeesseneeaeseesaeeeneeeenssenees 11 3 Creating a User Box aisina ch ditt dain T a neve denies EE E a eed a a raaa alaa 11 3 Changing User BOX Settings sesoses edipa ieena eanan a a Aa aa aS catesdeacuathaacusd cabucendctadevstadacetcdeanecode 11 4 Creating and editing a System User BOX ssssuunsrennunnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 11 6 Creating a Bulletin Board User BoX eescceeeseceeesneeseneeeeenaeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeseeaeeesnaeeeesaeeeeseeeeseeeteeneeeee 11 6 Creating a Relay USer Boxes cs ccicisssicicescveideacesausnectsuzcveasagsenceiasaxienaaseceteqacasaseddasdeaszeatnsasacaacdosaceeanaienade 11 7 Creating an Annotation User Box 0 cceesceeeeseeeeeeneeseeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeesaeeeeeaeeeesneeseneeeseaeeeee 11 8 Changing Bulletin Board User Box settings eesccesseeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeseeeseaeeeeeneeeee 11 9 Changing Relay User Box settings ccceessseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeneneeenaeeess 11 10 Changing Annotation User Box SettinS cceeeceseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeessaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseeeseneneeeeaes 11 11 Configuring User Box Environment cccccseecceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
67. enter the password for confidential RX using up to eight characters The entered password is required for sending a fax using Confidential TX to this machine Inform the sender of the password you entered here User Box Password is changed To change the password of a User Box select this check box then enter a new password using up to 64 characters excluding User Box Owner is changed Select this check box to change the type or owner user of a User Box Select Public Personal or Group depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings e f Personal is selected specify the owner user e If Group is selected specify the owner account d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 2 11 2 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 2 1 Creating a Bulletin Board User Box Bulletin Board User Box is a box used to save multiple types of fax documents required for polling If announcement and other fax documents are stored in Bulletin Board User Boxes by purpose and if recip ients are notified with the relating box numbers the users can select the required fax documents and they can be polled Tips e To use Bulletin Board User Box an Fax Kit is required In the administrator mode select Box Create System User Box Bulletin Board User Box then configure the following settings Se Administrator Logo
68. ox cancer F Description Mode using SSL TLS Select a mode to perform SSL communication e Admin Mode Uses SSL communication in the administrator mode only e Admin Mode and User Mode Uses SSL communication in both the administrator mode and user mode e None Does not use SSL communication None is specified by default Encryption Strength Tips Select the SSL encryption strength Select it according to your environment AES 256 3DES 168 RC4 128 DES 56 RC4 40 is specified by default When Internet Explorer is used in Windows XP Server 2003 an SSL communication https connection is disabled if the encryption strength is set to AES 256 A late Reference You can create a new certificate without using the certificate registered when it is shipped For details refer to page 13 3 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 6 Changing the administrator password 6 2 6 2 Changing the administrator password You can change the administrator password of this machine from Web Connection Y 2 Tips To display this page select Security PKI Settings SSL Setting in the administrator mode to en crypt communications between your computer and Web Connection using SSL For details refer to page 6 3 In the administrator mode select Security Administrator Password Setting and enter a new admin istrator password using up to 64 characters excludi
69. set Custom Function Profile User Account to Allow Default Restrict Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print Fa System User DE Maintenance S y Security Auth Account Network Box ettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Custom Function Profile User Account gt Register S rt Custom Function Profile eee User Account Allow i Network TWAIN OK C gt Reset Settings OK _cancet_ User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Customize System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings List Counter Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account Function Display Key d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 57 1 2 Changing the function key display pattern by user or account 12 14 Selecting a function key display pattern by user In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Registra tion Edit then configure the following settings Be Administrator Ba Ready to Scan a Ready to Print User Regis
70. when a fax is sent The sender name which is specified by default is automatically added Sender Name Displays registered sender names Edit You can register up to 20 sender names Use this option to use different sender names depending on the destina tion No Displays the registration number Sender Name Enter a sender name using up to 30 characters Delete Click this button to delete the registered sender name 5 Inthe administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting IP Address Fax Operation Set tings then configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan Ready to Print a User Auth Account Box Track ess Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position IP Address Fax Operation Settings Operating Mode Mode 1 Sending Colored Documents Allow E ee ene d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 21 1 0 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 2 Settings Description Operating Mode Select an operation mode of IP address fax according to your environment e Mode 1 This mode allows communication between Olivetti models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and between models com patible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ Communica tions and Information Network Association of Japan However because a unique method developed by Olivetti is used to send a color fax only the Olivet
71. 11 To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Assign an IP address IPv4 to this machine Settings Description IP Application Method Select the method to assign the IP address to this machine according to your environment Auto Input is specified by default Manual Input Assign the fixed IP address to this machine Enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Auto Input Automatically assigns the IP address using DHCP or other protocols Pressing Auto Input allows you to select an Auto Input option e DHCP Settings ON is specified by default e BOOTP Settings OFF is specified by default e ARP PING Settings ON is specified by default e AUTO IP Settings ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 5 17 IPv6 Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings Assign an IP address IPv6 to this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use IPv6 ON is specified by default Auto IPv6 Settings Select whether to automatically assign the IPv6 global address of this ma chine ON is specified by default ON Automatically assigns the IPv6 global address based on the prefix length notified from the router and the MAC address of this machine OFF
72. 13 11 8 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 6 Configuring the Bonjour printing environment 8 8 6 Configuring the Bonjour printing environment This machine supports Bonjour used on Mac OS Bonjour technology runs based on TCP IP enabling you to automatically configure the network settings for networked devices and find available services Enabling the Bonjour function on this machine enables the computer to automatically detect this networked machine and display it as an addable printer in the list In the administrator mode select Network Bonjour Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print Cn 2 System Maintenance Settings Print Setting S _ Bonjour Setting Bonjour orr Bonjour Name ae Settings Description Bonjour Select ON to use Bonjour OFF is specified by default Bonjour Name Enter a Bonjour name that is to be displayed as the name of connected de vice using up to 63 characters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 19 Configuring the AppleTalk printing environment 8 7 Configuring the AppleTalk printing environment This machine supports AppleTalk used on Mac OS AppleTalk connection is supported in Mac OS 9 2 0S X 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 AppleTalk is the generic name of a group of network protocols that enables automatically configure file shar ing settings and printing settings for net
73. 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port No If necessary change the LDAP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 389 is specified by default Search Base Specify the starting point to search for a user to be authenticated using up to 255 characters The range from the entered origin point including the following tree struc ture is searched Example of entry cn users dc example dc com Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the LDAP server 60 sec is specified by default General Settings Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server Select one appropriate for the authentication method used for your LDAP server e Simple e Digest MD5 e GSS SPNEGO e NTLM v1 e NTLM v2 Simple is specified by default Login Name Log in to the LDAP server and enter the login name to search for a user using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 64 characters excluding To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Domain Name Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server using up to 64 char acters If GSS SPNEGO is selected for General Settings enter the domain name of Active Directory Use
74. 17 5 IPV4 SettINGS r n aa a a aia ae e a a a a aA 17 5 Rela E E A E A EE E T E A T EN E 17 6 DNS HOSt iian a a e a a a aa ainda Siete EE reia 17 6 IPNRA ona a E A E A TTET 17 6 DNS Server S ttings PVA aeaea aa aa aaa aa aaa aa peace Aa oaea aaan Mace pea r aa ar aaa aAa Er A aiaa 17 7 DNS Server Settings Py O aae aa aa a a aaae aa E Aaa a e e E aaraa AEA TAE ERATARA REA 17 7 IPSEC SOttiniGSs E E E 17 7 19 8 IPSEC SA SOttin GS cass cagetente cchaeeneck caked cae Doc chaneve ng sskere dadecshureva sd odeevsneds avhugedadecsbusdend ethvsedadestbieenadd anara 17 8 Raa EEE EET A deuuasladd seyenstsadaaus delbnsadeaactiedadanadasnlaseaneflasiadensheadseazadtant davai 17 9 Protocol Setting isand ee aeaa aandra eaa paa aea raa abaan Aaea aA a A da ae a aa K undbevasta Grau derecsuace ears 17 9 Enable IPSEC umrin T AANA E ea 17 10 Communication CHECK ae enaa raaa a aa araa A aaa Na aeaa ira aan aa Eea aa ag 17 10 P Filtering Permit ACCESS rsoataie rn a a een ev deen ee 17 11 IP Filtering Deny ACCESS amsema atanena taana aane adaa endana dasacenestavedcnsebechavednedssvuentuedstheve 17 11 RAW Port Number aniani steed Stes iv N ee ee eee 17 11 JEEMNR Setting PEE TE EAT EAE A TE 17 11 NetWare Settings miiie aara sna seer ccaspesbaccends ste riaa iaaa Eaa colavepediccinrigeabaricntae 17 12 IPX S ttin GS i cacchssensegestvicassdsnaiiesneasdecveseraiasdhenavaseiedesaacsiapecainacuascetentaes ca Loa a RE Ea Ea ai aa 17
75. 1x authentication check the authentica tion status and configure the certification verification items Using IEEE802 1x authentication enables you to only connect devices authorized by administrators to the LAN environment Devices that are not authenticated will not be allowed to even join the network and this ensures rigid security Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use IEEE802 1x authentication OFF is specified by default Auth Status Displays the status of IEEE802 1x authentication on this machine Reset Job Settings Reset the current setting Certificate Verification To verify the certificate select items to be verified Level Settings e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Web Browser Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Web Browser Setting Select whether to enable the Web browser function of this machine Enable is specified by default Tips To use the Web browser function the Upgrade Kit UK 204 or i Option L
76. 3 4 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 5 11 6 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 mnan tha Alatias ely Env Envi AMaAh t Configuring the Internet fax environment OVOGIVIOW as deiade cee atise treet ees Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving an Internet faXx eseeeeeeeseseeeeeseetesseeeeneees 10 4 Checking a fax reCeption ici iiiccccssticcssestsessnssastadadasnedensagapacsnsaaieecadaadasennbdeaaajezestdanasesnedcatejessesaeapeanes Specifying the reception ability of this machine Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white e 10 10 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission iN COIOM ceeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeees 10 11 USING SSL TES COMMUNICATON ses ccisscseisssssctaescceasecccnscoezacatesdacaeavanaccaatasesauaegsaatendduahigaasasenaaauenaienens 10 12 Using the SMTP authentication 0 ce eecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeesaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeseaeeeesnneeeneeeeees 10 14 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication eeceesseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeessaeeeeeneeseneeeeeeneeeees 10 16 Configuring the IP address fax environMent s ssssssusseunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 10 18 OVEIMIOW s runsaana a e p e En 10 18 Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving faxes using IP address fax s 10 19 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white
77. 4 5 2 usert Logout Change Password R 6 Ready to Scan re Ready to Print 2 _ 7 g E etena Gas Y Device Information Device Information Device Name Device Location gt Configuration Summary gt Option Engine Serial Number gt c bl Device Type Print Copy Scan Fax Meter Count Toner Yellow gt Eco Info 9 Magenta Online Assistance PERA Cyan gt Change User Password Black gt Function Permission Information gt Network Setting Information Paper Tray Print Setting Information Select Tray Paper Size Paper Type Paper Status 7 F e Bypass 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Plain Paper Empty gt Print Information t 10 C Tray 1 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready i F Co Tray2 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready oO Tray 3 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Plain Paper Ready Tray 4 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Plain Paper Ready O PI Tray 1 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready O PI Tray 2 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready Detail Output Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Saddle Tray Tray 3 Administrator Information Administrator Name Extension No Admin E mail Address No Item Description 1 Login user name Displays the login mode and user name Click the user name when you log on as a registered user to con firm the user information 2 Status display Displays the status of this machine Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this ma chine with icons
78. 452 362 282 222 11 Creating and editing a User Box 11 1 Settings Description Auto Delete Document Specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in last printed or sent form a User Box to the date time when it is to be deleted automat ically e Do Not Delete Keeps the file in the User Box e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted e Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted User Box Expansion Func tion This item is available when the Fax Kit is installed Select whether to add the confidential RX function to the User Box To add the Confidential RX function click Display then select the Confidential RX check box Also enter the password for confidential RX using up to eight characters The entered password is required for sending a fax using Confidential TX to this machine Inform the sender of the password you entered here 11 1 2 Changing User Box settings If you log in to the administrator mode you can change settings for a registered User Box or delete it without entering the password for the User Box 1 In the administrator mode select Box Open User Box to select a user box 2 Click User Box Setting gt Clicking Delete User Box deletes the User Box you selected Qe Administrator Logout 2 e Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fz
79. 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 1 4 Changing function keys in Fax Scan mode Select the function key to be displayed on the main screen in the fax scan mode and the send or save settings screen in the User Box mode You can register up to 7 function keys 1 In the administrator mode select System Settings Function Display Key Send Save to select the number of the function key for which you wish to change the setting then click Edit Se Administrator 2 i Ready to Scan B Ready to Print g User aoe sei on a Ne a Track Print Setting A Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Send Save Function List Register Support No Function Name Edit Information 1 Color Edit gt Network TWAIN 2 _ Resolution Eat gt Reset Settings 3 Simplex Duplex Edit gt User Box Setting 4 File Format Edit Standard Size Setting 5__ Scan Size Esi z Stamp Settings j6 E E mail Settings Es 7 None Edit Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User gt Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings List Counter Custom Function Pattern Selection Custom Function
80. 64 characters excluding a symbol e ep Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User Auth Account Box Track System Settings Maintenance Print Setting 5 70 0 Fax Settings Wizard Customize Subject Registration No 1 Subject Cane Registering the body Register the body used for sending E mail messages or Internet faxes Up to 10 bodies can be registered and a body can be selected from them before transmission In the administrator mode select Address Book Text Edit and enter a text to be registered in Text using up to 256 characters excluding a symbol e Sp Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User Auth Account Box Track System Maintenance Settings Print Setting VN Fax Settings Wizard Customize Text Registration d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 31 15 Registering a prefix and suffix of each destination 15 6 15 6 Registering a prefix and suffix of each destination Register a prefix and suffix of an E mail address If a domain contains many E mail addresses register a character string domain name following an at mark as a suffix This recalls the registered domain name when you enter an E mail address facilitating your entry You can also register a long domain name of an E mail address to prevent entry mistakes Up to 8 prefixes suffixes can be registered In the administrator
81. Account etwork Settings MAER Network LLEIS f Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard gt General Settings Public User Y User Au i Function Permission Setting Copy Full Color Black Scan Full Color Black Save to External Memory Restrict External Memory Document Scan Restrict Public User Fax Full Color Black Print Full Color Black Account Track Settings User Box Allow gt Prohibited Function Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black Login Setting Manual Destination Input Allow bd gt Print without Mobile PDA Allow Authentication Simple Print Limiting Access to Destinations Authentication Setting I Reference Allowed Group External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting Registered Reference Group Number gt User Account Common Setting a gt Scan to Home Settings I Totalo gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings M Access Allowed Level Counter Remote Control fox ox Cancel Settings Description Function Permission Restricts functions available to public users if necessary For details refer to page 12 43 Limiting Access to Desti Restricts destinations public users can access if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 Tips When a public user attempts to use a restricted function the loin screen appears to switch the user For example if color copying is restricted for a specific public user the login screen appears when the p
82. Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 37 12 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication 12 8 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings gt User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting gt External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings gt General Settings General Settings Qe Administrator Logout Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fz System User Maintenance y Security Etiujetestiia Network Box Settings mak oa User Authentication Overwrite User Info Default Authentication Method Public User Access Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Account Track Account Track Input Method Synchronize User Authentication amp Synchronize ji Account Track Number of Counters Assigned for prr Users 500 1 999 When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Skip Job Z Cancel Wizard Customize ON With Login 0__ Minute 1 600 Settings Description User Authentication When performing authentication using an external authentication server select ON Ex
83. Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control User Authentication Overwrite User Info Default Authentication Method Public User Access Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Account Track Account Track Input Method Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Number of Counters Assigned for Users When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Qe Administrator Logout 2 D ready to Scan iy Ready to Print fa Stein User we Security COLCA Network Box Settings hack ss Customize ON MFP External Server ON External Server ON With Login 600 _ Minute 1 600 on I Synchronize z 500 1 999 Skip Job 7 ox Cancel Settings User Authentication Description When performing authentication using an external authentication server select ON External Server or ON MFP External Server If you want to configure setting so that you can log in to this machine using its authentication function in consideration of an occurrence of some sort of problem on the external authentication server select ON MFP Exter nal Server Overwrite User Info When the external server authentication is used authenticated user infor mation is also managed on this machine If the number of users who have executed the external server authentication reaches the maximum number of users this machine ca
84. Configuring the Scan to E mail environment Settings Description Domain Name Enter the domain name realm for SMTP authentication using up to 253 characters This item is necessary when the SMTP authentication method is Digest MD5 e Enter the domain name if two or more domains realm exist e When only one domain realm exists no entry is required The domain name is notified from the E mail server SMTP at the initial communi cation and communication is automatically performed using that do main name Authentication Setting Select whether to synchronize the SMTP authentication with the user au thentication of this machine This item is necessary when the user authen tication is installed on this machine e User Authentication Uses the user name and password of the regis tered user of this machine as User ID and Password for the SMTP au thentication e Set Value Uses values entered at User ID and Password Set Value is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 1 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication Configure the setting if your environment requires the POP Before SMTP Authentication for sending an E mail The POP Before SMTP authentication is a function that performs POP authentication using the E mail server POP before sending an E mail and allows E mail transmission only when the authentication is succe
85. Configuring the basic TCP Socket settings Enable TCP Socket In the administrator mode select Network TCP Socket Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a User Maintenance Sea Auth Account Network Box Settings Track Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP Socket Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing TCP Socket TCP Socket Port Number 9158 1 85535 F Use SSUTLS Port No SSL TLS TCP Socket ASCll Mode Port No ASCIl Mode 9160 1 65535 1 65535 Settings Description TCP Socket Select this option to use TCP Socket ON selected is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number 59158 is specified by default Tips If you click OK after changing multiple port numbers collectively in Web Connection or on the Control Panel a port number duplication error may appear If a port number duplication error appears change multiple port numbers one by one instead of changing them collectively 16 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 1 Associating via TCP Socket 16 Using SSL communication Use SSL to encrypt communication between this machine and application software via TCP Socket 1 Register a certificate for this machine and enable SSL communication gt For details refer to page 13 3
86. Customize gt Machine Setting Fax TX Settings d mase Support Cancel Setting cane a Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings cae gt User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Blank Page Print Settings 9 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 2 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a fax 9 9 2 4 Adjusting the image quality depending on the resolution of a received fax When printing a received fax specify to give priority to the image quality or to the printing speed according to the resolution of the received fax In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Fax Print Quality Settings then configure the following set tings Sp Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan g Ready to Print g 2 System Maintenance Settings Box Header Footer Position Fax Print Quality Settings gt Line Parameter Setting Low Resolution Prioritize Quality z TX RX Settings High Resolution Prioritize Speed z Function Setting gt PBX Connection Setting OK gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings gt Network Fax Setting gt Header Information Fax Print Quality Settings Settings Description Low Resolution Select whether to give priority to image or speed when printing a received fax having a low resolution If Prioritize Quality is selected an image is corrected Prioritize Quality is specified by default High Resolution Select whether to give
87. Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Basic Setting Application Setting Configure the fax scan transmission option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 15 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 15 15 3 11 Configuring the fax scan transmission option settings A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes details on the option settings In Basic Setting configure the basic option settings for the fax scan mode Settings Description Fax Resolution Scan Resolution Set a resolution to scan the original Fine 200 x 200 is specified by default File Type Select the file type used for saving the scanned data For the file type select PDF TIFF JPEG XPS PPTX and other types We recommend that an important original is converted to a PDF file that can be encrypted PDF is specified by default Outline PDF This can be configured when the File Type is set to Compact PDF If you select ON the text is extracted from the original and converted into a vector image OFF is specified by default PDF Web Optimization
88. Description Registering and Changing Addresses Allow is specified by default Select Restrict to disable registering and changing addresses by users Biometric IC Card Infor mation Registration ers Restrict is specified by default This item is available when the Authentication Unit is installed Select Restrict to disable registering biometric IC card information by us Changing the From Ad dress dress From address dress Allow is specified by default e Admin E mail Address Set the administrator s E mail address to To disable changing the sender s address From address by user for E mail transmissions select Admin E mail Address or Login User Ad e Login User Address When user authentication is installed set the us er s E mail address to From address If the user s E mail address is not registered Set the administrator s E mail address to From ad Synchronize User Authen tication amp Account Track By User authentication and account track Allow is specified by default Select Restrict to disable the user s synchronization setting between user d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 27 1 3 Using the copy security function 13 10 13 10 Using the copy security function Enable the copy guard function and password copy function To use the copy guard function and password copy function the Security Kit is required In the adm
89. Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password DPWS Settings Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 characters To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings DPWS Settings Configure the settings for print and scan using the Web services such as Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS Using the Web service function of Windows Vista or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 al lows you to automatically detect this machine connected to the network and easily install it as a Web service printer or a Web service scanner Settings Description DPWS Common Settings Configure settings to detect this machine using the Web service For details refer to page 17 31 DPWS Extension Settings Configure settings to perform Web service printing or scanning using the discovery proxy defined by WS Discovery in the environment where the multicast communication is restricted For details refer to page 17 31 Printer Settings Configure settings to perform Web service printing For details refer to page 17 32 Scanner Settings Configure settings to perform Web service scanning For details refer to page 17 32 17 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 DPWS Common Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings DPWS Sett
90. Feet Mah as eM hla here satan ches Sue Sean anata eared Baad Sova babel cates tage oes S 7 3 Configuring basic settings for Scan to E mail eeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeesesaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaas 7 4 Using SSL TLS COMMUNICATION 00 0 eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeeeeaeeeenaneeseaneeesaeeeeeaeeeeaeees 7 6 Using the SMTP authentication sissioni pear a aaa NE ai d aN 7 8 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication ssessesssieesieereeriresrnnsirnerrnntrrnnsinnnttnnnrnnntrunntnnnsnnnnne 7 10 USING S MIME ear aeri bea conkstiawaiet cag cacpdcatecabsstacnied caddies caadbesasccencz clexinavesaniaedeseecherataveestecadapradsecansads 7 13 Configuring the SMB transmission ENvirOnMentt ceeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 7 14 Overview e Nie ial cea ee ni av ne eee Ea 7 14 Configuring basic settings for the SMB transmMiSSiOn esscseseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeneeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneetens 7 15 Using the WINS Seven ccividdel nth de nner iy aise dina iin salient 7 16 Using the direct hosting SMB S rviCe e cceeeseeeesneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeensaeeeeeas 7 17 Resolving the name using LLMNR cceeesceeesseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaneesesaeeeeaaeeseneeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeaaeeseeeeenneeeeea 7 18 Using in the DFS environment ccceseccesesceeseseeeeseeneeeeceeeseeeeeessacesaseeeesesceseseceeneneeeeeseeeseseaneneees 7 19 Configuring the FTP trans
91. If you have not configured authentication settings on this machine the screen in the public user mode appears instead of the Login screen The screen that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled on this machine Also operations available after you log in differ depending on the information you enter in this Login screen Web Connection Login Public User Registered User User Name Password E Administrator View Mode Flash HTML Flash Player is necessary to see in Flash form Ereren z User Assist F Display dialog box in case of warning Language English English Starting up Data Management Utility Flash Player is required to use the Data Management Utility Manage Copy Protect Data Manage Stamp Data S 4iManage Font Macro 1 1 Can only run on Windows Internet Explorer and Flash Player Version 9 and above environments Item Description Login Select a mode to log in The login mode differs depending on the user type The user mode and administrator mode are available as login modes For details refer to page 3 7 View Mode Select the view mode of Web Connection The flash view enables excellent expressive power for the following items e Status icons and messages e Status of Paper Tray in Information Device Information screen e Status of Job screen User Assist Enables display of warning contents in the dialog box when a
92. Large Size Black 0 o Full Color 0 o E Scans 0 0 Fax TX 0 Fax RX 0 Total by Color Total 0 Black 0 Color 0 Paper Size Type Counter Paper Size Paper Type Count 11 x 17 Not Specified 0 8 1 2 x 14 Not Specified 0 8 1 2 x 11 Not Specified 0 5 1 2 x8 1 2 Not Specified 0 A3 Not Specified 0 B4 Not Specified 0 B5 Not Specified 0 A4 Not Specified 0 AS Not Specified 0 Others Not Specified 0 14 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 7 Checking the printer information 14 14 7 2 Checking the ROM version Check the ROM version of this machine To check the information of ROM version of this machine select in the administrator mode Maintenance ROM Version Logout 2 Se Administrator gt Import Export Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting Scanner gt Network Error Code Display Printer Setting ADF Finisher eee RU License Settings zu Panel CPU ae m EER DSC1 DSC2 MFP Controller BOOT Program MFP Controller Linux Base ES MFP Controller Kernel Program MFP Controller SubSet MFP Controller Operation Panel Message Data Fax Board Controller1 Fax Board Controller Engine Parameter Loadable Device Driver1 Loadable Device Driver2 sD Voice Data Movie Data Dictionary Data OCR Library MFP Controller System MFP Controller Print Controller S MFP Controller Print
93. Logout Confirmation Display Setting User Authentication Setting Account Track Settings Network Customize Color ON E Logout 2 2 Box Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Counter Remote Control Lok Cancet Description When necessary select whether to handle single color and 2 colors as color print or white and black print This option is required when color print is restricted or the maximum numbers of color copies and black and white copies are managed When you treat single color or 2 color printing as black printing you can man age only full color printing as color printing Color is specified by default Logout Confirmation Display Setting Select whether to display the logout confirmation screen on the Touch Panel when you log out of the login mode Recipient User or Public User during op eration of this machine ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 61 12 Restricting print jobs without authentication information 12 17 12 17 Restricting print jobs without authentication information Select whether to allow print jobs without authentication information
94. MF552 452 362 282 222 3 3 Login methods Logging in to the user mode In the user mode you can use the functions such as box operations and direct print You can log in as a reg istered user or public user To log in as a registered user select Registered User on the Login screen Enter the user name and password then click Login Login View Mode User Assist Language Web Connection Public User Registered User User Name Password q y Administrator Flash HTML Flash Player is necessary to see in Flash form Rate fs F Display dialog box in case of warning English English kd Login Starting up Data Management Utility Flash Player is required to use the Data Management Utility Manage Copy Protect Data g Manage Stamp Data iManage Font Macro 1 1 Can only run on Windows Internet Explorer and Flash Player Version 9 and above environments Tips e Displaying a list of user names enables you to select a login user To display a list of user names on the Control Panel press Utility Administrator Settings User Authentication Account Track Us er Authentication Setting Administrative Settings and set User Name List to ON When an external authentication server is used select the server To log in as a public user select Public User then click Login on the Login screen d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 User Mode Overvi
95. MF552 452 362 282 222 3 4 User Mode Overview Favorite Setting Collectively displays frequently used functions as a single tab Favorite Setting is displayed only when you log in to the flash view To register a function as Favorite Setting drag and drop its menu into the Favorite Setting tab Customize Enables you to select a screen to be displayed after logging in to the user mode 2 usert Logout Change Password 2 Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print 2 Information Job a Box Dl Direct Print option The following settings will be saved in Cookie If Cookies are deleted the default screen will become the Information Screen Initial Screen after login Main Menu Information Device Information Ss Job 5 C Box C Direct Print Store Address Customize d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Using the Shortcut Function 3 5 Using the Shortcut Function Registering a function in Bookmarks of the Web browser Each Web Connection function page can be registered in Bookmarks of the Web browser Display a page of a function to be registered in Bookmarks and register it in Bookmarks of the Web browser Tips For details on how to register a function in Bookmarks refer to your Web browser s Help function If a page of a registered user is registered in Bookmarks while user authentication is enabled the page used to log in to the user mode will be display
96. Meter Count Import Export gt ROM Version Device Setting Authentication Information gt Status Notification Setting Address gt Total Counter Notification Copy Protect Stamp Setting Restriction Code List Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Export import Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro 2 Specify a location to save the exported file gt When exporting the Authentication Information or Address enter the password if necessary The file is saved on the computer Tips ter the certificate again after importing the address on this machine For details on the list of inhibited codes contact your service representative When an E mail address with a registered certificate is exported the certificate is not exported Regis d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 33 14 Managing the setting information 14 8 14 8 3 Resetting the network settings The network settings of this machine can be reset to the factory default status In the administrator mode select Maintenance Reset Network Setting Clear then click Clear Print Setting amp Administrator eS Ready to Scan GB Ready to Print Synen Cae Box Settings Track Fax Settings Wizard Customize Meter Count Network Setting Clear gt ROM Version Network setting is returned to the factory defaults gt Import Export Clear
97. Monitor Sound Vol ume Send If necessary adjust the volume of speakers when sending a fax if Line Monitor Sound is set to ON 10 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring basic fax settings Settings Description Line Monitor Sound Vol ume Receive If necessary adjust the volume of speakers when receiving a fax if Line Monitor Sound is set to ON 20 is specified by default 9 1 2 Configuring connection settings for a PBX environment You can connect this machine to a Private Branch Exchange PBX environment Using PBX enables you to connect multiple telephones and faxes of the organization to the public telephone network In the administrator mode select Fax Settings PBX Connection Setting then configure the following set tings Se Administrator F Logout 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Maintenance Bee Security Auth Account Network Box Trac Print Setting store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position PBX Connection Setting gt Line Parameter Setting I PBX Connection Setting gt TX RX Settings Outside Line 0 9999 gt Function Setting Ee gt Report Settings Settings Description PBX Connection Setting Select this item to use this machine in a PBX environment OFF not selected is specified by default Outside Line Enter an outside line number using up to four digits The out
98. Port No SSL 26s 1 565535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Print witho elal Expiration Date Confirm X Y Simple Print CN Do Not Confirm x Authentication Setting Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm P Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Register Simple Print Search Base Authentication Server Timeout o sec 5 300 LDAP IC Card General Settings Simple a Authentication Setting Login Name cf F External Server Settings I Password is changed gt Authentication Device Passon D Settings Domain Name E e z7 Public User Box Setting Use Referral ON Stree Search Attribute uid Setting External Server Connection No Selection gt Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Lok Cancel Settings Authentication Card ID Number Counter Remote Control Settings Description Server Address Enter the LDAP server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port No If necessary change the LDAP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 389 is specified by default Search Base Specify the starting point to search for a user to be authenticated using up to 255 characters The range from the entered origin point including the following tree struc ture is searched Example of e
99. Power key to shift to the Power Save mode Low Power or Sleep mode Hold down the Power key to shift to sub power off mode Sub Power OFF is specified by default Enter Power Save Mode When this machine receives a print job from a fax machine or computer in the Power Save mode select the timing to switch to the Power Save mode after the print job has ended e Normal Switches to the Power Save mode based on the time speci fied in Low Power Mode Setting or Sleep Mode Settings e Immediately Switches to the Power Save mode immediately after a print job has ended Immediately is specified by default Power Saving Fax Scan Select whether to give priority to the power saving when returning from the Sleep or sub power off mode to a mode other than the copy mode When returning to a mode without printing such as the scan fax mode do not adjust the temperature of the Fusing Unit in this machine reducing the power consumption You can set this option when you have selected an option other than Copy in Priority Mode that is selected by Administrator Settings Sys tem Settings Reset Settings System Auto Reset on the Control Pan el e Power Save The temperature of Fusing Unit is not adjusted when the machine returns to the normal mode e Standard The temperature of Fusing Unit is adjusted when the ma chine returns to the normal mode Standard is specified by default Awake
100. Profile User Account Function Display Key Permission Setting Y Function Display Key Send Save gt Temporarily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings gt Default Address Display Settings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 17 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 2 Select a function to be assigned to a shortcut key gt Functions are grouped by category Click Display to display the functions in each category ena bling you to select a target Be Administrator Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print User es scm stn ae Track gt Machine Setting Function List Register Support None Information Basic Setting gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings Simplex Duplex gt User Box Setting Resolution gt Standard Size Setting Color cE sso Ei Blank Page Print Settings E mail Settings gt Job Priority Operation REL Original gt Flash Display Setting Display pacuctomize Quality Density gt System Connection Display Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Stamp Composition Diss gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User Application Display gt Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Fax Settings Display gt Main Menu Display Settings Box Print Setting Store Ares Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Preview Settings gt List Counter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Cust
101. Ready to Scan Ready to Print gC Use Maintenance Se Auth Account en Box Print Setting TCP IP Setting E mail RX POP POP Server Address Please check to enter host name T Password is changed Password APOP Authentication OFF Connection Timeout 30 isec Port Number 1 65535 I Use SSL TLS Port No SSL fees a 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm ba CN Do Not Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm M Check for New Messages Polling Interval 5 Imin 1 60 Cancel Settings Description APOP Authentication If you use APOP in your E mail server POP select ON OFF is specified by default Use SSL TLS When using SSL to encrypt a communication with the E mail server POP select this check box OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 995 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by d
102. Save Authentication Setting Information Reconnection Settings Disable Z gt Account Track Settings Reconnect for every login LTS racion Set Reconnect Interval Login Setting Reconnection Time Minute 1 1440 gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print ox cancer Authentication Setting ies Y External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Settings Description Temporarily Save Authen tication Information To temporarily save authentication information in the main unit against a case where an external authentication server shuts down select Enable Disable is specified by default Reconnection Settings If necessary change the time to reconnect to the authentication server e Reconnect for every login Connects to the authentication server at the time authentication is carried out on this machine If the authentica tion server is in the shutdown state at the time authentication is carried out on this machine first confirm that the authentication server is down and use the temporarily saved authentication information to log in to this machine e Set Reconnect Interval Connect to the authentication server at the time specified in Reconnection Time and check the status of the au thentication server If the authenticat
103. Secondary DNS Server2 Settings Description DNS Server Auto Obtain To manually enter the DNS server address select Disable When using the DHCP select Enable Then the DNS server address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server Enable is specified by default Primary DNS Server Enter the address of your primary DNS server d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 5 Using in the IPv4 environment 5 1 Settings Description Secondary DNS Server1 When using multiple DNS servers enter the address of your secondary to Secondary DNS DNS server Server2 Registering the host name If your DNS server supports the Dynamic DNS function registering the host name to this machine enables the DNS server to resolve the host name and IP address name dynamically Doing this enables a computer on the network to connect to this machine using the host name In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator B Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings User Auth Account Network Box Track Wizard Customize Print Setting Y TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting gt TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset ee yr s REE Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changin
104. Setting Configure the Scan option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 17 15 Registering a program 15 3 15 3 3 Registering an SMB program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the SMB program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration SMB then click OK to con figure the following settings Be Administrator Logout 2 e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print rs Maintenance See Security auth account Network Box Trac Print Setting gt Fax Settings Wizard Customize la Address Book Program SMB gt Group i No 2 Temporary One Touch P Subject Select from Address Book gt Text Search from List gt Prefix Suffix Registered Address Number Direct Input Host Address IF Please check to enter host name File Path A User ID C SSS SSR Password Cei Basic Setting Scan Resolution 200 x 200 File Type PDF Outline PDF orr E File Name E Page Setting Multi Page Settings Descript
105. Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Settings Description Temporarily Save Authen tication Information To temporarily save authentication information in the main unit against a case where an external authentication server shuts down select Enable Disable is specified by default Reconnection Settings If necessary change the time to reconnect to the authentication server e Reconnect for every login Connects to the authentication server at the time authentication is carried out on this machine If the authentica tion server is in the shutdown state at the time authentication is carried out on this machine first confirm that the authentication server is down and use the temporarily saved authentication information to log in to this machine e Set Reconnect Interval Connect to the authentication server at the time specified in Reconnection Time and check the status of the au thentication server If the authentication server is in the shutdown state use the authentication information temporarily saved in the main unit to log in Set Reconnect Interval is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 23 12 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 5 Using the WINS server If the WINS server is installed to resolve the name set the WINS server address and the name resolution method In the administrato
106. Settings Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt Custom Function Pattern Selection Logout 2 Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print a System x Missy Maintenance sath Security Auth Account Network Box jettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting List Counter ea a Meter Count and Device Fra EET Confirmation Tx Settings mna Network TWAIN OK Cancel 14 44 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 11 Using an advanced function by registering the license 1 4 14 11 Using an advanced function by registering the license 14 11 1 Issuing the request code To use an advanced function by registering the license kit with this machine you must access the Licence Management Server LMS to obtain the function and license codes The following explains how to issue the request code required for requesting LMS for function and license codes In the administrator mode select Maintenance Licence Settings Get Request Code then click OK Tips Se Administrator D Ready to Scan Cy Ready to Print System Settings Security Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings User Auth Account Track Wizard gt Meter Count Get Request Code gt ROM Version Do you want to get a Request Code gt Import Export gt Status Notification Setting gt Total Counter Notification Setting gt Date Time Settin
107. Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control A late Reference For details on how to use the Scan to Home function refer to User s Guide Scan Operations d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 17 12 Employing the Active Directory authentication 12 4 Using the single sign on This machine supports the single sign on of Active Directory If this machine joins the domain of Active Directory the user authenticated by Active Directory can use the functions of this machine transparently For example once you log in to your computer you can print data from this machine without setting authentication information in the printer driver 1 In the administrator mode select Network Single Sign On Setting Domain Login Setting then register the domain this machine joins Maintenance Be Administrator Logout 2 e Ready to Scan QB Ready to Print fs User eee coy Auth Account Box Track I Fax Settings Wizard Customize Domain Login Setting Permission Setting orr E If you select ON and click the OK button the join domain process will start Host Name Domain Name CLS E Account Name C SS Password Sse Timeout Bo Jsec 5 300 Single Sign On Setting gt Domain Login Setting Settings Description
108. The following information can be exported from this machine Item Description Device Setting Various settings of this machine Counter Information of various types of counters on this machine Select counter information to be exported from counters for respective us ers or accounts and others Authentication Informa tion Authentication information to be managed by this machine Select whether to export all authentication information or only user regis tration information If necessary the authentication information file to be exported can be en crypted using password Address The information of addresses registered on this machine Select information to be exported from all address information address book group program and E mail subject body If necessary the address information file to be exported can be encrypted using password Copy Protect Stamp The registration information of copy protect or stamp Restriction Code List The restriction codes list of our depreciated the OpenAPI connection ap plication How to export the information 1 In the administrator mode select Maintenance Import Export to select the information to be export ed then click Export Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print ag System 2 sey Settings Security Audticcount Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt
109. Touch Name d gt Subject Index Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name eae ABC gt Prefix Suffix I Main Destination Information Host Address I Please check to enter host name Loo File Path L User ID Eo E Password LoS i Limiting Access to Destinations Display Cancel Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation Host Address Enter the destination computer name host name or IP address using up to 253 characters e Example of computer name host name entry HOME PC e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 To specify the host name use uppercase letters File Path Enter the shared folder name of the computer specified in Host Address usin
110. Track Input Method in Step 1 Password Retype Pass word Enter the password to log in to this machine using up to 64 characters ex cluding Function Permission Restricts functions available to the account if necessary For details refer to page 12 43 Max Allowance Set Tips Sets the maximum number of sheets the account can print and User Boxes it can register For details refer to page 12 46 If you click Continue Registration after registering an account you can register another account suc cessively without going back to the account list screen e If you select Stop Job at Temporarily stop use you can temporarily disable the registered account 12 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentication 1 2 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentication Overview When you use Active Directory of Windows Server for user management you can restrict users of this ma chine by authentication using Active Directory Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine When employing the Active Directory authentication follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP addr
111. User Box Settings C None gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting 2 When using two lines select the line for which the Forward TX function is set and click Edit gt When using a single line go to Step 3 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 3 At Forward TX Setting configure the following settings Maintenance Settings gt PC FAx Tx Setting gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings Network Fax Setting gt Header Information Print Setting Store Address e 575 gt Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Y Function Setting gt Fax Print Quality Settings Se Administrator Logout 2 E Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print s System l Box f User Security Auth Account Settings Awan Wizard Customize Forward TX Setting Fax Forwarding Settings Output Method Forward amp Print m Forward Dest Select from Address Book Registered Address Number Select from Group Registered Address Number Gheck Destination Direct Input Forwarding Destination Numeric characters T P Line Setting hd File Format File Format Pr E Page Setting Multi Page Page Separation 1 1 999 E mail Attachment Method ox Cancel Settings Descriptio
112. a er soto ler Max Search Results ioo s 1000 gt OpenaPt setting Authentication Method anonymous Se I password is changed Password ___ CY 7 LTD Setting somain Name gt SSDP Settings Select Server Authentication Method evase A Use Referral Jon Search Condition Attributes Name bal Search orr Maintenance Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User System foes Ea va Ea Initial Setting for Search Details Name o ti awd E mail o A Fax Number o A Last Name o sti iw d First Name R A ciy o g Company Name or s i swd Department OR kd I Search Attributes Authentication Search Attribute Lox cancer Settings Description LDAP Server Name Enter the registered name of the LDAP server using up to 32 characters Use a name that helps you easily identify the server Server Address Enter your LDAP server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port Number If necessary change the LDAP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 389 is specified by default Search Base Specify the starting point to search for a destination using up to 255 char acters The range from the entered origin point including the following tree struc tu
113. a specified page the date time that the original was scanned You can select a print position in the page and format OFF not selected is specified by default Compose Page Select this option to print all page numbers and chapter numbers You can select a print position and format OFF not selected is specified by default Compose Header Footer Select this option to print text or date time on the top and bottom margins in a specified page Select a content from previously registered ones OFF not selected is specified by default Compose Stamp Select this check box to print a text such as PLEASE REPLY and DO NOT COPY on the first page or all pages You can select the text to be printed from the registered fix stamps and ar bitrary registered stamps OFF not selected is specified by default Stamp Combine Method When combining date time page header footer and stamp select wheth er to combine them as text or an image Image is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 29 1 5 Registering a temporary one touch destination 15 4 15 4 Registering a temporary one touch destination The temporary one touch function registers a combination of address information and the fax scan transmis sion option settings temporarily with this machine A temporary one touch destination is deleted once data is sent to the registered destination or when the ma chine is turned
114. a trust by the Certificate Authority ed Certificate Authority CA for issuing a certificate for the machine When CA the data is returned from the Certificate Authority after its review register the data with this machine A late Reference You can also use a certificate exported from other device by importing it on this machine For details refer to page 13 10 For details on how to use different certificates depending on the application protocol refer to page 13 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 3 13 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL 13 1 Using the certificate registered upon shipment Select a login mode to enable SSL communication Also select the SSL encryption strength In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings SSL Setting then configure the following set tings Settings Ss Suen Encryption Strength SSL Setting Qe Administrator Logot Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a2 User a k System A Maintenance Settings Ct Auth Account Network p Box Track Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize None a AES 256 3DES 168 RC4 128 DES 86 RC440 OK Cancel Description Mode using SSL TLS only Select a mode to perform SSL communication e Admin Mode Uses SSL communication in the administrator mode e Admin Mode and User Mode Uses SSL communic
115. aa EEEa arana a eaa aaan da E EE A a AAE iai 17 37 IEEE802 1x Authentication SettingS ccccccescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeescaaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseeuaaeeeenes 17 37 Web Browser Setting eis a a aaaea a eaaa aaaea aaaea e tesa Ea iea naa aeaaea iaaa aa iaaa 17 37 Blu t oth Setting n minten a a aaa ea pai anara aaa ad aa aaae 17 38 Single Sign On Setting sinsi atin eed a a eea aara 17 38 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Contents 9 TIWS SOtti nS fics acs A T sedea cong 2 Ue becoaa ied i ence upc ten gk a E A 17 38 Remote Panel Settings sirintina perir dadeeshuss cecuail cvscedeadishevainrdtscatedsalecenauseatastbeedeattwed 17 39 Server Settings Remote Panel SettingS c cceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 39 Client Settings Remote Panel SettingS 0 0 eeeceeeseeeessneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeenneeenneeeess 17 39 Internet ISW Settings s ca ahi teh a iraia aenima nie ae di 17 40 Inc 18 1 index by Mem iveucii ee eer Aa ea oe en eee eects 18 3 18 2 Bre x by DUT sche EE ce canoe teach eteha cen T T 18 6 Contents 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 Web Connection r 1 Web Connection Web Connection Web Connection is a built in utility software product for management use By using a Web browser on your computer you can simply confirm the status of this machine and configure various machine settings Although
116. access allowed level ccccecceecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeees 12 47 Access Allowed Levels iirinn niarra a ea e a A a a O at dy EEE e i 12 47 Setting the access allowed leVel cccscccceeeeeseseeeeeseneseseeeeeseeneeseasesseeeessueeenssceeseseeeseseenseeneeeseees 12 48 Managing based on the reference allowed group cccceeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeenes 12 50 Reference Allowed Groupies ccna sic ani aannaaien ra aian ana epaia raaa aaae aana eaa aaura 12 50 Assigning a reference allowed Qroup esscceessseeeeeeeeeeneeeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeseneeeesaeeeesaeeeeenneeeneeeseneeeesa 12 50 Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed group for management 12 53 Combining the access allowed level with the reference allowed Qroup esscsesseeeeseeeeesneeeeneeees 12 53 Simultaneously setting an access allowed level and reference allowed QrOup seeeeseeeeeees 12 54 Changing the function key display pattern by user OF aCCOUnt ssssssssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 12 57 OEE AE E RE A A E svarewdivsccayeidedsunty sateen iprussiuedandavedeadidrtevareda 12 57 Allowing changing the function key display pattern by user OF ACCOUNT essssssesereerreerresreresrees 12 57 Selecting a function key display pattern Dy USEF 0 eee eeeceeeneeeeneeeeeneeseaeeteeeeeesaeeeseeeeennneeesaaes 12 58 Selecting a function key display pattern Dy ACCOUNT
117. access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 15 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 15 15 3 9 Registering a group program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the group program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration Group then click OK to con figure the following settings Maintenance gt Program Print Setting Fax Settings Se Administrator Logout Ready to Scan a Ready to Print System Settings Program Group No 2 Name E Destination Information Group Registered Address Number Basic Setting Fax Resolution Fme H Scan Resolution 200 x 200 File Type PDF hd Outline PDF orr E File Name C Page Setting Multi Page L _ a 999 Page Separation Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination group from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books
118. address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 N Configure the FTP server settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 16 11 Configuring the FTP server settings Enable the FTP server Configure the security relevant settings In the administrator mode select Network FTP Setting FTP Server Setting then configure the following settings Bx Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print 2 Pe Maintenance Se Security Auhecount Box rack Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt TCPIIP Setting J FTP Server E mail Setting FTP Server ON amp rs LDAP Setting Deny Reception Command Allow x aes PORT Command Enhanced Enabie IPP Setting Security Y FTP Setting Ok Cancel gt FTP Server Setting Settings Description FTP Server Select ON to use the FTP server ON is specified by default Deny Reception Com mand Select a command to deny a receiving job from an FTP client when using the FTP server of this machine Set this option to return an error when a PORT EPRT command or PASV EPSV command is sent from an FTP client to this machine Allow is specified by default PORT Command En hanced Security Select whether to enable the security of this machine against FTP bounce attacks This option is not available if Deny Reception Command is set to PORT EPRT
119. after reset Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm 7 ox cance Description Friendly Name Enter the name of this machine to be displayed when searching for this ma chine using the Web service through a computer using up to 62 charac ters excluding spaces Use a name that helps you easily identify this machine Publication Service When using this machine in one of the following environments select En able e Environment where NetBIOS is disabled on the computer loaded with Windows Vista or later e Environment constructed so that only communications using IPv6 are allowed Up to 512 connection destinations can be detected in Publication Service including detection counts by NetBIOS Disable is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the WS printing environment 8 5 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings Printer Settings then configure the following settings Settings es Administrator ready to scan B Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings User Auth Account Track Wizard Customize Print Setting St Printer Settings is reflected after reset Print Function OFF Printer Name Printer Location _ 4 Printer Information Description Print Function Select ON to use the WS printing function OFF is specified by default Printer Name
120. and IP Address Fax functions ask your service representative to configure set tings For details contact your service representative e To use the IP Address Fax function the Fax Kit is required SMTP TX Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Network Fax Settings SMTP TX Set tings To use IP address fax set up the operating environment of the SMTP transmission function on this machine Settings Description Port No If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 60 sec is specified by default SMTP RX Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Network Fax Settings SMTP RX Set tings To use IP address fax set up the operating environment of the SMTP receiving function on this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the SMTP receiving function ON is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 300 sec is specified by default
121. as required ON Selected is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 5 1 4 Managing the machine power for power saving 14 1 Settings Description Power Save Mode Select a power save mode to which the machine enters based on the Setting weekly timer e ErP Auto Power OFF A mode that provides a higher more effective power saving effect In this mode you cannot receive all jobs e Sleep This mode has a lower power saving effect than the ErP Auto Power OFF mode however it allows you to receive print jobs from a fax machine or computer The received jobs are printed when the ma chine returns to the normal mode Sleep is specified by default Date Setting Specify the date by day Work Time Setting Specify the operating time for each day of the week Select the check box for a day of the week you wish to set the timer and enter the time period that power is turned on Use Power Save Select this check box if you wish to turn the power off when the machine is not used during lunch break Also enter the range of time during which the power is turned off OFF not selected is specified by default Use Overtime Password Select this check box to restrict the use of this machine in the Power Save mode using a password Also enter the password using up to eight char acters excluding and To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box th
122. ata cccccecccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaeeaeeesesaaeeeeeseecaaeeeeeeseneeeeeneees 15 40 Managing the font Macro data eeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneeeesneeeeeaeeeeeneeeesaeeeeeaeeeensaeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeaeeesnneeess 15 41 ti Nith Ext lical Associating via TCP Socket 2 issiccctencesie de coc cache ccctecseteceedce des ccntteedescuceaeeenscuseee Ea apanan aaas iaaa aa Naiak aai 16 3 OVGIVIEW o inne ee ate eee ae ae ene ve ended i lie cat 16 3 Configuring the basic TCP Socket settings cceeseeeesneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeeeaeeeeseneeeeeaeeeenneeess 16 4 USING SSL COMMUNICATION sssri asuted vas oe cca cea Seni dusba dasdadcessas aN Ee Ea Saa Taar AA Ei gay ceudiceadbcen de sctevaneseeeaat 16 5 Associating Via OpenAP eaaa coe 5 pear ra aaa aaa cesseceeeedeseccdees fe cshccepieceeceuctycetecucecteccestetees 16 6 OVGEIVICW A escteieievetiiieieaeesiel ll oi iene ioe elon Fae eh Nea Teea a ad 16 6 Configuring the basic OPenAPI SettingS cc eeeeceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeesaneeeeaeeeesaeetesneeeseneetens 16 7 USING SSL COMMUNICATION siirinsesi erasana aarda orada aaraa apaa aaia a raa Adgastinbepeckeeeane 16 9 Using the machine FTP server for association sssssnuneeennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 16 11 OET REN A E EE E A EA E O ET Ss de ee A A nee 16 11 Configuring the FTP server settings eesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeeesane
123. attribute must start with an alphabet character uid is specified by default External Server Connec Select the external server name to be used as a part of user information tion when authentication using the quick authentication for printing server is successfully completed from the external servers registered on this ma chine The external server selected here is used for the following purpose e Using as a part of authentication information saved on this machine e Using for restricting the functions of this machine or managing the maximum allowance No Selection is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 65 12 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing 12 18 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the LDAP server is encrypted with SSL Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL encryption communication with the LDAP server In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Simple Print Authentication Setting Register Simple Print Authentication Server Edit then configure the following settings Sp Administrator __ Logout 2 e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print System User pte Maintenance Settings Security puunceou Network Box i rack Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Register Simple Print Authentication Server gt User Authentication S
124. authentication This option is available in the NT domain environment e NTLM v1 v2 Performs NTLMv1 authentication when NTLMv2 authen tication fails This option is available in the NT domain environment e Kerberos Performs Kerberos authentication This option is available in the Active Directory domain environment NTLM v1 is specified by default Authentication Setting if Kerberos Fails If Kerberos is selected in SMB Authentication Setting select whether to perform NTLM authentication when Kerberos authentication has failed e Enable NTLM v1 v2 NTLMv2 authentication is performed when Ker beros authentication fails and NTLMv1 authentication is performed when NTLMv2 authentication fails This option is available when both the Active Directory and NT domains are specified e Disable NTLM Assumes that authentication fails when Kerberos au thentication has failed Disable NTLM is specified by default User Authentication NTLM Select whether to use user authentication via the NTLM server ON is specified by default DFS Setting Select whether to use DFS when the distributed file system DFS is in stalled OFF is specified by default Single Sign On Setting Configure the single sign on function for SMB transmission By using the user authentication information login name and password of this machine as SMB destination authentication information host name and passwor
125. automatically You can prevent the unauthorized use of documents by creating a document that can identify the creation date and time and the serial page number of each document In the administrator mode select Box Create System User Box Annotation User Box then configure the following settings Be Administrator Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Maintenance Sees Security Auth Account Print Setting ae ee Fax Settings Wizard gt Open User Box Create System User Box Annotation gt Create User Box User Box Number a TTR Use opening number C Input directly 0 999999999 User Box Name I Assign User Box Password User Box Password Retype User Box Password Auto Delete Document Do Not Delete Do Not Keep Specify days ay E Specify Time _ min 5 720 Count Up Byjob Stamp Elements Primary Field Cc 7 Secondary Field I Date Time Setting Date Type ozn E Time Type M 23PM Print Position Top Density Normal Number Type Numberony ox Cancel Settings Description User Box Number Registration number of the box Select Use opening number to automat ically assign the smallest available number When specifying a number se lect Input directly and enter a value between 1 and 999999999 User Box Name Enter the User Box name using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the User Box Assign User Box Pass When restricting usage of User Box using a password select this che
126. ay E Settings Description Sender Fax No Enter the fax number of this machine using up to 20 digits including sym bols and spaces The fax number you entered is printed as a TTI Default Select the default setting for the sender name The sender name which is specified by default is automatically added when a fax is sent If an additional line is connected to your machine you can select in the ad ministrator mode Fax Settings TX RX Settings Individual Sender Line Setup to configure default sender name setting by line Sender Name Displays registered sender names Edit You can register up to 20 sender names Use this option to use different sender names depending on the destina tion No Displays the registration number Sender Name Enter a sender name using up to 30 characters If an additional line is connected to your machine you can select in the ad ministrator mode Fax Settings TX RX Settings Individual Sender Line Setup to use a sender name setting by line Delete Click this button to delete the registered sender name d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a fax 9 2 9 2 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a fax 9 2 1 Specifying how to print the sender name reception information Specify how to print sender information and reception information of a fax to be
127. by default Fax Select whether to allow use of the fax and network fax functions Black Only allows black and white transmission only Full Color Black is specified by default Print Select whether to allow printing of the print function Black Only allows black and white printing only Full Color Black is specified by default User Box Select whether to allow to use files saved in the User Box This option is disabled for an account Allow is specified by default Print Scan Fax TX Select whether to allow to print scan data and fax TX data Black Only allows black and white printing only Full Color Black is specified by default Manual Destination Input Select whether to allow direct input of a destination G3FAX SIP Fax Only allows direct input of a fax number only This option is disabled for an account Allow is specified by default Mobile PDA Select whether to allow printing files from a Bluetooth compatible device This option is available when printing of files from a Bluetooth compatible device is enabled on this machine This option is disabled for an account Allow is specified by default Biometric IC Card Infor mation Registration Select whether to allow registration of bio authentication information and IC card authentication information This option is disabled for a public user or account Restrict is specified by default d Co
128. by default Link Local Address Displays the link local address The link local address is automatically specified from the MAC address of this machine Global Address Enter the IPv6 global address Enter this item to manually specify the address Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 global address using up to 128 charac ters Use this item to manually specify the address Gateway Address Enter the gateway address Use this item to manually specify the address DNS Server Setting IPv6 Register the address of the IPv6 compatible DNS server DNS Server Auto Ob tain To manually enter the DNS server address select Disable When using the DHCPV 6 select Enable Then the DNS server address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server Enable is specified by default Primary DNS Server Directly enter the address of your primary DNS server Use this item to manually specify the address Secondary DNS Server1 to Second ary DNS Server2 When using multiple DNS servers enter the address of your secondary DNS server d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 3 Using in the IPX environment 5 5 3 Using in the IPX environment This machine supports the IPX IPX is the NetWare communication protocol which is the network operating system of Novell In the administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then
129. by identifying them Allow voy can set privileges to use the functions of this machine by user For example you can set so that specific users can use the color print ing function but other users can use only the black and white printing function Also you can set it up so that users unidentified by this ma chine public users are not allowed to print data e You can also limit access to destinations for each user Based on the degree of importance of the address and relation with users you can set it up so that specific users can access all destinations but other us ers can access only a part of destinations Configuring settings according to the business requirements of users pro vides you with security measures and cost reductions simultaneously Accounting You can record the use status of this machine by user Analyzing it by user enables efficient operation of this machine For example depending on the use status of this machine you can man age the maximum number of sheets each user can print This encourages users to develop awareness of costs contributing to cost reduction d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 3 12 Overview of User Authentication and Account Track 12 1 The user authentication methods are classified into three types MFP authentication external server authen tication and MFP authentication External Server Authentication Authentication Method Description MFP authentication The
130. currently being performed and the job to be performed Job History Enables you to check the log of jobs processed on this machine Communication List Enables you to confirm the list of results of scan transmission fax trans mission and fax reception Box Enables you to create a user box on this machine print a file from the user box and send a file 8 usert Logout Change Password 2 Ready to Scan aB Ready to Print s Information Job Open User Box Public gt Create User Box Box is the function to save documents in the machine zE ESERE LEAT Documents in the Box can be used for printing sending etc Smee User Box Number a 1 999999999 Create System User Box User Box Password C7 oe User Box List Search from Index fal a Page Display 50 page E pam T Time Stored ji box 07 27 2011 10 16 f2 box2 07 27 2011 10 16 p box3 07 27 2011 10 28 Menu Description Open User Box Enables you to open a Public Personal or Group User Box print send or download a file saved in the User Box and change the setting of the User Box For details on how to use a file in a User Box refer to User s Guide Box Operations Create User Box Enables to create a new User Box 3 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 4 User Mode Overview Menu Description Open System User Box Opens the System User Box Bulletin Board Polling TX Me
131. data size is the smallest MMR is specified by default 10 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in color If necessary change the default compression type setting when sending a fax in full color or gray scale In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting Color Grayscale Multi Value Com pression Method then configure the following settings es Administrator ready to scan ry Ready to Print System Settings Maintenance Print Setting Store Address Customize Fax Settings gt Header Footer Position Color Grayscale Multi Value Compression Method gt Line Parameter Setting Color Grayscale Multi Value JPEG Colo Compression Method _ gt TX RX Settings Function Setting ok Cancel gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings Multi Line Settings V Network Fax Setting gt Color Grayscale Multi Value Compression Method gt Header Information Settings Description Color Grayscale Multi Val Select the default compression type for transmission in full color or gray ue Compression Method scale e JPEG Color Compresses image data in color JPEG format e JPEG Gray Scale Compresses image data in black and white JPEG format e Unset Compress data according to the compression type s
132. default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 13 9 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 Settings Description Memory RX User Box Enter the password to restrict accesses to the Memory RX User Box using Password up to eight digits 9 3 5 To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Using the Forward TX function Forward TX transfers a received fax to a pre specified destination Faxes can be forwarded to personal e mail addresses or saved in a shared folder in a computer Received faxes can be converted to files that can be handled by a computer which saves printing costs Tips e This function cannot be used together with the following functions PC Fax RX TSI Routing Compulsory Memory RX When using two lines you can select in the administrator mode Fax Settings TX RX Settings In dividual Receiving Line Setup to use the Forward TX function by line 1 In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Setting RX Data Operation Settings Forward TX Setting then click OK Sp Administrator ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Customize gt Header Footer Position RX Data Operation Settings gt Line Parameter Setting Memory RX Setting gt TX RX Settings Forward TX Setting x 2 C PC Fax RX Setting Y Function Setting TSI
133. device 8 2 Inthe administrator mode select System Settings System Connection Setting and set Bluetooth Print Settings to ON Default ON ee Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print ga ee FE e lt m Print Setting f S Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting System Connection Setting Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting orra Application Connection Setting PageScope My Panel Manager ON gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings My Spool ON gt User Box Setting Bluetooth Print Settings ON F Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings ox Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 29 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 1 Specifying the default print settings These settings are used for operations unless specified through the printer driver You can configure default settings for tray finisher processing and the number of copies In the administrator mode select Print Setting Basic Setting then configure the following settings amp Administrator Logout 2l e Ready to Scan B Ready to Print 2 Maintenance System Settin
134. entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Binary Division Select whether to divide a large E mail before sending it Using this func tion divides an E mail based on the setting of Divided Mail Size This item is necessary if the maximum capacity of an E mail to be sent is restricted in the E mail server OFF is specified by default Divided Mail Size Enter the size to divide an E mail when selecting ON for Binary Division Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 60 is specified by default Server Capacity Enter the maximum E mail size that is available in the E mail server SMTP Press No Limit to clear the selection and enter the size E mails exceeding the specified size are discarded This setting is disabled when ON is selected in Binary Division No Limit is specified by default SSL TLS Settings Select the method to encrypt communications with the E mail server SMTP Select SMTP over SSL or Start TLS according to your environment OFF is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default 17 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Settings Description Port Number SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the origi
135. following the symbol brackets are unneces sary e Example of host name entry ipaddrfax host example com To enter a host name or mail address a DNS server must be specified on this machine Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Destination Machine Type Select whether the recipient machine supports color print Mono Model is specified by default Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 13 15 Registering a group 15 2 15 2 Registering a group A group can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer Multiple one touch destinations can be grouped and managed as a single group In the administrator mode select Store Address Group New Registration then configure the following settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan E Ready to Print a User Maintenance Pho EE aera EE Box Print Setting S Fax Settings Wizard Customize ress Bi Group 5 Index Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC I Main gt T Destination Information Scan Fax Address gt Prefidsutis _ Search fom tit R
136. gt Delete Time Setting gt Standard Size Setting 11 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 4 Configuring System User Box environment 11 Settings Description Auto Delete Secure Docu ment Select this check box to specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in a Secure Print User Box to the date time when it is to be de leted automatically In addition set a time to automatically delete files e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted 1 day is specified by default ID amp Print Delete Time 11 4 3 Specifying operations Select this check box to specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in an ID amp Print User Box to the date time when it is to be delet ed automatically In addition set a time to automatically delete files e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted This option is available if user authentication has been adopted 1 day is specified by default of printed ID amp print documents Select whether to ask the user if they want to delete the file from the ID amp Print User Box after it is printed or to always delete the file without making confirmation In the administrator mode select Syste
137. in In addition select which screen of the Box tab should be displayed A specified user box can also be opened Direct Print Displays Direct Print after logging in Store Address Displays the Store Address tab after logging in In addition select which screen of the Store Address tab should be displayed Favorite Setting Tips Displays Favorite Setting in the user mode after you have logged in to the flash view Settings configured here are saved using the Cookies function of your Web browser Therefore the set tings may not be saved when Deleting Web browser Cookies Logging in to Web Connection from another Web browser Logging in to Web Connection from another computer Logging in to the computer using another user name d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 6 5 Changing the time period until automatic log out 6 4 Changing the time period until automatic log out If you do not operate this machine for a given period of time after you log in to Web Connection you will automatically be logged out If necessary you can change the time period before you are automatically logged out The time until automatically log out can be specified for the administrator mode and the user mode respec tively For example if you set a short time for the administrator mode where settings can be changed you can decrease the likelihood of operation by a third party On the other hand if you se
138. is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 9 16 Associating via OpenAPI 16 2 Settings Description Expiration Date Con firmation A late Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 16 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 3 Using the machine FTP server for association 16 16 3 Overview Using the machine FTP server for association To use application software with which the FTP server of this machine is used to communicate configure the FTP server To use the FTP server of this machine for the association follow the below procedure to configure the set tings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP
139. managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default DPWS Extension Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings DPWS Settings DPWS Extension Set tings Configure settings to perform Web service printing or scanning using the discovery proxy defined by WS Discovery in the environment where the multicast communication is restricted Settings Description Enable Proxy Select whether to use a discovery proxy OFF is specified by default Register Proxy Register a discovery proxy server to perform Web service printing or scan ning Select a number to be registered and configure the following items Host Name Enter the discovery proxy server address Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 File Path Enter the service name at the path part of the URL where the WS Discov ery service is published in the discovery proxy server using up to 255 char acters Enable SSL Specify whether to use the SSL for a communication with a discovery proxy server OFF is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number of the di
140. method to manage users of this machine using the authentication function of this machine Since user information is managed inside this machine you can use it only by registering it For details refer to page 12 6 External server authentica The method to manage users of this machine by synchronizing it with Ac tion tive Directory or LDAP server When Active Directory or LDAP server is used for user management in your environment you can use user information managed using the server This machine supports the following server types e Active Directory For details refer to page 12 13 NTLM For details refer to page 12 20 LDAP For details refer to page 12 26 NDS NDS over IPX For details refer to page 12 31 NDS NDS over TCP IP For details refer to page 12 36 MFP authentication Ex The method using a combination of the authentication function of this ma ternal server authentication chine and authentication by an external server Even if some sort of problem occurs on the external authentication server you can use this machine using its authentication function Account Track Employing the Account Track function enables you to manage multiple users by account Account authenti cation information is managed internally by this machine A password can be set by account to restrict users from using this machine Also this function allows you to restrict available functions or manage the use status of t
141. mode select Address Book Prefix Suffix Edit and register prefixes and suffixes Se Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print g User Maintenance Ses se Aartuaccount Na Box Print Setting S i Fax Settings Wizard Customize a Prefix Suffix CO P A p Settings Description Prefix Enter a prefix using up to 20 characters excluding spaces Suffix Enter a suffix using up to 64 characters excluding spaces 15 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 7 Registering the information to be added to header footer 15 15 7 Registering the information to be added to header footer When printing an original you can recall the registered header footer and print it at the top or bottom of a page Up to 20 headers footers can be registered In the administrator mode select System Settings Stamp Settings Header Footer Registration Edit then configure the following settings System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Qe Administrator Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print User Security Auth Account ck gt Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting gt Header Footer Registration Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting
142. nations 15 1 6 Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 Registering a fax address A fax address can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult proc ess using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration Fax then click OK to configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting 5 00 Fax Settings Wizard gt Address Book Address Book Fax Be Administrator B Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs User 3 ystem Security Auth Account Network Box jettings Track Customize No Use opening number C Direct Input L Name LoS Y Index Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC I Main Destination Information Destination E one byte numeric T P E No Selection Display Line Setting Communication Setting Limiting Access to Destinations Display ox Cancel Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easil
143. new password Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server POP as required 30 sec is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server POP Normally you can use the original port number 110 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 7 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Settings Description Check for New Messages Select this check box to check for incoming faxes by periodically connect ing to the E mail server POP on this machine Also enter an interval for connecting the E mail server POP at Polling Interval ON Selected is specified by default Checking a fax reception Configure the settings for requesting or responding the Internet fax transmission result and the setting re garding the exchange of capability information between machines In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting I Fax Advanced Setting then con figure the following settings ep Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print a User Maintenance SYSTEM Security Auth Account Network Box Settings k r Print Setting Store Address I 0r Customize gt Header Footer Position 1 Fax Advanced Setting gt Line Parameter Setting MDN Request ON F gt TX RX Settings DSN Request OFF TEA MDN Response ON a M MDN DSN Re
144. nnmnnn 7 27 OVGIVIOW ia eaa a evan ached er a ee 7 27 Configuring the basic settings for the WS scan transmission eseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeneeeeeneeeees 7 28 Using th proxy SOrver iiss cies aa a eaea eaea iaae EA a isl Aan e Ee A salves EEANN 7 30 Using SSL COMMUNICATION cc saziaseieaacatesaiaeacdantcaesaagiauscedaedhdcvasuecs duadanasndadevdeeaqesde da caueacanadepayeedsaccasenans 7 31 Configuring the TWAIN scan environment cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeseenees 7 32 OVOIVIOW onamo ornan aaa Matson he te Rae ae Tea Mods Ue cared stats tates ean ae EA EANA r aS 7 32 Configuring the basic settings for the TWAIN SCAN es eeeesseeteseeeeeseeeeeneeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeennneeeed 7 32 Changing the Control Panel lock time ceeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee senescence eeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeesesneeesneeeenaeees 7 33 Searching for a destination using the LDAP Servel cssssseeeeesseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneseenees 7 34 OVGIVIOW EPET T E E tana cheiiacetaauauiadeaadiuetiteaed 7 34 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP search u sssesssssreerrrsrirrsrinnsrrnnrrrnstinnstnnnsinnetnnnsennnennnenn 7 34 Using SSL COMMUNICATION ic sescisisesevaiten cevaegeaienenavacdinasseededprecatine Snalacnanihdesaesteauasdsvaacecaaacesdeacdeacessenaes 7 37 Configuring the LPR printing environment cccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeessnneeeeeeesseeneeeensseeneneess 8 3 OV EIVIOW
145. password to a destination for which fax destinations are restricted by passwords Closed Network RX enabled select ON Also enter the password OFF is specified by default 15 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Registering a program 15 Settings Description F Code Select Enable to enable F Code TX Also enter SUB Address and Pass word Disable is specified by default Original Direction When scanning a double sided original you can specify the original load ing direction so that the vertical direction is set correctly after scanning Top is specified by default 2 Sided Binding Direction Select the biding position of original when scanning both sides of the orig inal Auto is specified by default Special Original Select an original type when scanning special documents e Same Width Different Width Even for an original with pages of differ ent sizes by using ADF you can scan data while detecting the size for each page e Z Folded Original Even folded originals the original size can be de tected accurately e Long Original Load the long original which cannot be placed on the Original Glass and larger in the feeding direction than the full standard size 11 x 17 or A3 on the ADF There is no need of entering the original size in advance but ADF will detect the size automatically Normal is specified by default Skip Blank Page s During
146. priority to image or speed when printing a received fax having a high resolution If Prioritize Quality is selected an image is corrected Note that for a high resolution fax image correction is less effective relative to a low resolution fax Prioritize Speed is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 1 Enabling disabling the fax functions Enable or disable fax transmission and reception functions such as Confirm Address that prevents wrong fax transmission F Code TX and Relay RX In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Setting Function ON OFF Setting then con figure the following settings Se Administrator E Logout 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fsi Maintenance NE Security auth Account Network Box Ta Wizard gt Header Footer Position Function ON OFF Setting gt Line Parameter Setting F Code TX fon gt TX RX Settings Relay RX ON Y Function Setting Relay Printing OFF gt Function ON OFF Destination Check Display Function orra Setting I Number Display Function Name Display Function Confirm Address TX Confirm Address Register Cancel gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings gt Network Fax Setting gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings Sett
147. refer to page 15 3 2 Register the certificate of this machine to be added to E mails as digital signature gt For details refer to page 13 3 3 Inthe administrator mode select Network E mail Setting S MIME then configure the following Qe Administrator togou E Ready to scan ry Ready to Print x System Leet Maintenance 5 Security Auth Account Box Settings Tak Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize k ing S MIME gt E mail RX POP To select ON the administrator s e mail address specified in the device registration creation Digital Signature EJ i Digital Signature Type A a E Mail Text Encrypt Method DES g Automatically Obtain Certificates FFE Print S MIME information FF Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm z Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt Network Fax Setting P WebDAV Settings ox cancer gt OpenAPI Setting Settings Description S MIME Comm Setting Select ON to use the S MIME To select ON the E mail address of the certificate of this machine must match the E mail address of the administrator OFF is specified by default Digital Signature To add digital signature when sending E mails select a method to add it e Always add signature Always adds the signature The digital signa ture is automatica
148. same number is added to the file as one job e By Page Adds a number per page Change Stamp Elements To change Stamp Elements select this check box and change settings e Primary Field Add any text up to 40 characters e Secondary Field Add any text at the beginning of the annotation us ing up to 20 characters Date Time Setting Select the format for the date and time Print Position Select a position in which the annotation is printed Density Select the density of characters of the date and time and an notation to be printed Number Type Select the digit number of annotation 11 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 3 Configuring User Box environment 11 11 3 Configuring User Box environment 11 3 1 Specifying the maximum number of User Boxes You can set the maximum number of Public User Boxes that can be registered on this machine by the user In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Public User Box Setting and then select the Set the maximum number of User Boxes check box Default OFF not selected In addition enter the maximum number of Public User Boxes that can be registered in this machine by the user unit box Bp Administra 2 D Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs Sorn User i Maintenance Settings Security enn Account Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings gt User Auth
149. screen using a display pattern 14 12 14 3 5 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main screen Individual specification 14 13 OVEIVIOW A esti ete oe cepa de te ee ceves ne et eren evel eee a hate tava E hee 14 13 Allowing the change of functions keys in each MOE cccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecaeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeennaees 14 14 Changing function keys in COPY MOE 1 eesseeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseaeeseseaeeeeeaeeeteneeeesaeeteaes 14 15 Changing function keys in Fax SCan MOG ssccceseceeeseeeeeseeeeceeaeeeseneeceeaeeeseaeeeesaeeeseaeeeessneeesaes 14 17 14 3 6 Allowing the change of display language on the TOUCH Panel eessceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeaes 14 19 14 4 Notifying of the machine status Via E mail cccs seeccessseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesens 14 20 OVGINIOW E dae cree Seine Shes eat ee ee a eae ee cate E oe tet d 14 20 Configuring the machine status notification SettiNGS ccccecceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeesenaeeeeeeeenaeeees 14 20 14 5 Notifying of the machine counter Via E mail eecceseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesnneeeeeesseneeeeeeeseneeeeeeenees 14 22 OVGPVIOW EATE EA ATE EEE sss cotadd Me abstaerhar a tied ag aden ETES 14 22 Configuring the Counter notification settings cccccecceeseeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeenaeeees 14 23 14 6 Managing the machine via SNMP 1ccsss
150. setting flow The current setting item is displayed in dark gray by which you can confirm the setting flow step you are in Click one of the previous setting items to return to it and redo set tings Purpose of the wizard Displays the title of the wizard being set Check Job Displays the setting item conforming to the flow Tips If you return to one of the previous setting items in the flow you must redo settings at that item The settings subsequent to the item to which you returned are not saved To finish the wizard during the setting process click Setup is completed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 21 3 Restricting use of Web Connection 3 7 3 7 Restricting use of Web Connection If you do not want other people to use Web Connection you can restrict use of Web Connection on the Control Panel On the Control Panel press Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings HTTP Server Settings and set Settings to OFF Default ON Specify the http settings Administrator Settings gt Network Settings gt HTIP Server Settings PSHC Settings Utility Administrator Settings le Network Settings ail Settings 07 29 2011 09 18 3 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring Basic Information Settings of this Machine 4 1 Registering information of this machine 4 Configuring Basic Information Settings of this Ma chin
151. settings for the LDAP IC card authentication essssssesesreserresrreerrrerrrnerrnserneee 12 70 Using SSL COMMUNICATION c essivscsecsesschaseqcasacsdenqsds sinna asiaani aeiiae kani ana a aa A a iiaeia 12 72 Recording the authentication card ID in counter information of this machine sssr 12 73 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Contents 5 13 1 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate Via SSL ccssseeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeees 13 3 OVOIWIOW ANERE E sibuseceuscteeedanteusts otlehanutys siedccusesctuttede seidasti saateaicggieavauired hustac adentuntugeveuscentegs 13 3 Using the certificate registered UPON SNIPMENL ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeteaaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesnneeeenaeees 13 4 Self CreatinG a COrtifiCAtes i ccasccassssaacaausendaataeesadeenscacavaanscnaaasadasaigcavhsenaesszevavadedasabecatapscnadeptasesene 13 5 Requesting the Certificate Authority for issuing a Certificate cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeennees 13 6 13 2 Managing the certificates for this MACHING cs eccceseeseeeeeeeesneeeeeeseseneeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeees 13 8 13 2 1 Using different certificates depending on the application ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaee 13 8 13 2 2 Exporting a CSMiticate asvios cece hie Tepes seach te ces tps ath Satara een iat ead ane Stet ad eee 13 9 13 2 3 Importing a certificate is aciiaeaiitee iii daa eee 13 10 13 2 4 Deleting acertit
152. settings for the user authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 7 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 Specify how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 out Restrict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 12 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 2 Employing the MFP authentication 12 Configuring basic settings for the user authentication Enable user authentication In addition register the user on this machine 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Qe Administrator togou d Ready to Scan a Ready to Print s Sen User Maintenance Settings Security Amt Reco Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt User Authentication User Authentication ON MFP x Sco Over
153. stamp data eeseeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeaneeesaaeeseaneeeesaeeeesaeesesaeeeseeeeseaeeeeeneeennneeess 15 40 15 10 4 Managing the font macro ata cccccecceeseseceseeeesescereseeneeeeeeesesceeeeesenesceesesceeeesseeseseeaeseeeeeenenerens 15 41 ociating with External Application 16 1 Associating Vid TCP SOCKET amiar raeadr aandaa aaea nadaan araa naana aa ded shee eevee ransa raa Saaai aandaa 16 3 OCETA EAT E EE E E T E E A A E TT 16 3 Configuring the basic TCP Socket settings cceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeesaneeseeeeeseneeeeeaeeeesneeess 16 4 USING SSL COMMUNICATION iis stccccisistecise case cadiecaansescaanceadaanescavaceaacadedasdedes sdteancauedadastsshendthasaestacceeaande 16 5 16 2 Associating Via OPenAP sccscssscssscesescesscessseussoeessessonessaeesuessnessaneegesnaaeeeneesaeusgusseaessanuseaensaennas 16 6 OVONVIQW i care clare E A T E eieehtes Godue cuaubensat sie eh ahdinastt E T ceetiaayearead 16 6 Configuring the basic OPenAPI SettingS eeesceeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaneeeeaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeneenens 16 7 Using SSL COMMUNICATION ccccseciasticaavszeiaceescdentcnennbaiadsaesaedht cvasceesiuadacantatasdeeandadstacaaeacanecepasdedsacceeseaes 16 9 16 3 Using the machine FTP Server for ASSOCIATION 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeesenneeeesesseeneeeess 16 11 OVORVIOQW NENE E E E E E E E ovalthgaalesioguatecvaguedeauanegasedveiasredeset A 16 11 Configuring the FTP server s
154. the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 636 is specified by default Certificate Verifica tion Level Settings To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default 17 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Settings Description Authentication Type Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server Select one appropriate for the authentication method used for your LDAP server Anonymous Simple Digest MD5 GSS SPNEGO NTLM v1 NTLM v2 Anonymous is specified by default Select Server Au thentication Method Select the LDAP server authen
155. the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 1 Using the SMTP authentication Configure the setting if your environment requires the SMTP authentication for sending an E mail If the SMTP authentication is used the user ID and password is sent from this machine when sending an E mail to perform authentication To use the SMTP authentication enable the SMTP authentication on this machine In addition enter infor mation required for authentication In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print 2 Maintenance ae uih account Box Print Setting Store re Fax Settings Wizard Customize Pe TCP 1P Setting E mail TX SMTP M E mail TX Setting E mail RX POP Scan to E mail on a E mail Notification on gt smme Total Counter Notification Jon SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name PR FTP Setting Port Number Bs 1 655
156. the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Login Name Enter the login name when receiving E mails using the E mail server POP using up to 63 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 15 characters APOP Authentication Select whether to enable APOP authentication when logging in to the E mail server POP This item is available when using APOP in your environment OFF Disable is specified by default Check for New Messages Select this check box to check for incoming Internet faxes by periodically connecting this machine to the E mail server POP On is specified by default Polling Interval Specify the interval to connect to the E mail server POP when Yes is se lected for Check for New Messages 15 min is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222
157. the driver of this machine is stored using up to 127 characters Enter an appropriate URL to suit your environment Engine Serial Number Enables you to confirm the serial number of this machine d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 4 3 Setting the date and time for the machine 4 4 3 Setting the date and time for the machine Manually configuring settings Manually specify the current date and time of this machine In the administrator mode select Maintenance Date Time Setting Manual Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print 2 User Sal A System f Maintenance Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count Manual Setting gt ROM Version Date gt Import Export Year 2011 Month 7 gt Status Notification one Setting Day 29 Total Counter Time Notification Setting Hour B 48 Date Time Setting Minute Manual Setting Time Zone cmt o 00 F gt Time Adjustment Setting OK Cancel gt Daylight Saving Time Lox cancel Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Settings Description Date Specify the current date of this machine e Year Enter the current year e Month Enter the current month e Day Enter the current day Time Specify the current time of this machine e Hour
158. the function in the Active Directory do main environment e Kerberos NTLMv2 v1 Select this to use the function in an environ ment both the Active Directory domain and NT domain exist NTLMv2 authentication is performed when Kerberos authentication fails and NTLMvi authentication is performed when NTLMv2 authentication fails NTLM v1 is specified by default In Mac OS X 10 7 set SMB Authentication Setting to NTLM v1 v2 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 2 Using the WINS server If the WINS server is installed to resolve the name set the WINS server address and the name resolution method In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting WINS Setting then configure the following set tings Be Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print s Maintenance Sines Security AuthfAccoun eo Box Print Setting store Address Fax Settings Ee T id E E WINS Setting gt E mail Setting WINS on gt LDAP Setting Auto Obtain Setting Enable gt IPP Setting j WINS Server Address1 0 0 0 0 k FTP Setting WINS Server Address2 0 0 0 0 Node Type Setting B Node o Cancel Settings Description WINS Select ON to use the WINS server ON is specified by default Auto Obtain Setting Select Enable to automatically obtain the WINS server address This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled Enable i
159. to be assigned to a shortcut key gt Functions are grouped by category Click Display to display the functions in each category ena bling you to select a target Print Sening store adaress gt Machine Setting gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User gt Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt List Counter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key Permission Setting gt Temporarily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings gt CopyiPrint Be Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print System Auth Nee pian EJ an et o Customize EJ Fax Settings Wizard Function List None Basic Setting ese amp Original Type Duplex Combine Finishing Original g el g S 3 2 i o lt 3 gs fo H E Q a kz Composition E g py Security To Logout ox canca 14 16 d Color MF552
160. to be sent in your environment select Limit No Limit is specified by default 7 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment Settings Description Server Capacity If you select Limit at Max Mail Size enter the maximum E mail size in cluding attachment E mails exceeding the specified size are discarded If you select Binary Division to divide an E mail this setting is invalid Binary Division Select this check box to divide an E mail The E mail is divided according to the size specified at Divided Mail Size This item is necessary if you oc casionally send E mails exceeding the maximum size specified on the E mail server side To read a divided E mail the mail soft receiving E mails must have a func tion to restore the divided E mail The mail soft without the restore function may not read the divided E mail OFF not selected is specified by default Divided Mail Size Enter the size to divide an E mail This item is necessary when Binary Di vision is enabled 2 Inthe administrator mode select System Settings Machine Setting and enter the E mail address of the administrator of this machine into E mail Address using up to 128 characters excluding spac es gt The E mail address entered here is used as a sender address From address of E mails to be sent from this machine Maintenance Print Setting Stor
161. to the authenticated share folder Scan to Author ized Folder Scan to Authorized Folder Authentication information of the users who have logged in to this machine is used for accessing a shared folder on the network allowing them to send original data scanned on this machine This function is called Scan to Authorized Folder Using the Scan to Authorized Folder function allows you to limit destinations for each user The function also allows users to access the share folder using the authentication information generated when they logged on this machine This enhances security without damaging users ability to easily operate the machine To use the Scan to Authorized Folder function the following settings are required on this machine Settings Description User Authentication Enable user authentication SMB Send Enable the SMB send function SMB Registration Register the SMB destinations e Addresses other than SMB cannot be used concurrently with Scan to Authorized Folder If address book group and program data other than SMB are registered delete all of them e The User ID of the registered SMB address must be left blank Limit user s registra tion change of address Disable user s registration change of address Limit Public User Function When public users accesses are allowed disable the scan function for public users Delete LDAP server regis tration If the LDAP server i
162. to the function selected in Function Name Click OK Application setting templates Web Connection provides the following templates Each template provides different custom items prede fined for each application WalkUp Fax No Button Name Function Name Keyboard initial val Options Type ue 1 Sender Name CS Name ASCII Walkup Fax Number CS PersonalFaxNumber ASCII TEL Number CS PersonalVoiceNum ASCIl gt ber 4 Subject Subject ASCII Billing Code 1 BillingCode1 ASCII Billing Code 2 BillingCode2 ASCII Fax with Account No Button Name Function Name Keyboard initial val Options Type ue 1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup 2 Sender Name CS Name ASCII n 3 Password Password ASCII 4 Password Auth Authentication None 5 Subject Subject ASCII 6 Billing Code 1 BillingCode1 ASCII 7 Billing Code 2 BillingCode2 ASCII 8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet z 9 Hold For Preview HoldForPreview No 16 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 9 Associating with the fax server 16 Secure Docs No Button Name Function Name Keyboard initial val Options Type ue 1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup 2 Pas
163. up to 20 characters E mail Address Enter the E mail address of the administrator of this machine using up to 128 characters excluding spaces This E mail address is used as the sender s E mail address Therefore to use the E mail TX function you must configure settings Extension No Enter the extension number of the administrator of this machine using up to eight characters Input Machine Address Register the name and E mail address of this machine Device Name Enter the name of this machine using up to 80 characters The name specified in this item is used as a part of a file name given auto matically for example when using a scan transmission E mail Address Enter the E mail address of this machine with 320 characters excluding spaces This E mail address is used as sender Internet fax address Therefore to use the Internet fax function you must configure settings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Registering support information 4 2 Registering support information Enter the support information of the machine such as contact name information for the machine and online help URL Registering support information enables the user to confirm it by selecting Information Online Assistance in the user mode of Web Connection In the administrator mode select System Settings Register Support Information then configure the fol lowing settings Se Admin
164. user e Do Not Synchronize Select this option when the user joins multiple accounts To log in to this machine enter the user name then specify the account e Synchronize by User Enables the user to select whether to synchro nize the user authentication and account authentication Synchronize is specified by default Number of Counters As signed for Users When using user authentication and account track in conjunction enter the number of counters to be assigned to the user Up to 1000 counters can be assigned to the user and account collectively For example if you assign 950 user counters you can assign up to 50 ac count track counters When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the maximum number of sheets that each account can print Here se lect an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 11 12 Employing the account track function 12 3 2 In the administrator mode select tration then register an account gt General Settings User Authentication Setting Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings gt Pub
165. which are jobs instructed without con figuring the correct user authentication or account track settings using the printer driver In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Print without Authentication and set Print without Authentication to Restrict Defaul t Restrict Black Only allows black and white printing only Full Color Black allows both color printing and black and white printing System Maintenance Settings General Settings User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Q Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print Security User Auth Account Network Box Track Wizard Customize Print without Authentication Print without Authentication Restrict z OK cance Tips e If print jobs without authentication information are allowed they are counted as public user jobs 12 62 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 18 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing 1 2 12 18 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing Overview Configure settings so that authentication without a password based only on the user name is allowed when the printer driver is used for printing in an environment where user authentic
166. xlsx or pptx file Prioritize Speed is specified by default 8 10 2 Specifying the default PCL print settings Configure the PCL settings Specify the default values for PCL symbol set In the administrator mode select Print Setting PCL Setting then configure the following settings Settings Maintenance gt TIFF Setting gt Security Setting gt Interface Setting Wits su Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Basic Setting PCL Setting gt PCL Setting Symbol Set PC 8 Code Page 437 z gt PS Setting Typeface Resident Font Courier z Se Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan QD Ready to Print a Sec User ae Settings Security eu boa Network Box C Download Font 0 999 Font Size Scalable Font 12 00 Point 4 00 999 75 gt Assign Account to Bitmap Font 10 00 __ Pitch 0 44 99 00 Acquire Device Info Line Page 64 5 128 gt OOXML Print Settings CR LF Mapping OFF pal gt Page Layout Settings OK Cancel Description Symbol Set Select the font symbol set to be used PC 8 Code Page 437 is specified by default Typeface Select Resident Font or Download Font to specify the font to be used e Resident Font Select a font from those installed on this machine e Download Font Select a font from those downloaded to this machine This option is displayed when a download font exists Courier is specified by default Font Size Specify
167. 0 SMTP Authentication I Password is changed Password Domain Name Authentication Setting I Binary Division Divided Mail Size C Jkye 100 15000 Step100 eg canca Settings Description Use SSL TLS Select the method to encrypt communications with the E mail server SMTP Select SMTP over SSL or Start TLS according to your environment OFF is specified by default Port Number If you select Start TLS at Use SSL TLS change the communication port number if necessary Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Port No SSL If you select SMTP over SSL at Use SSL TLS change the SSL commu nication port number if necessary Normally you can use the original port number 465 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item 10 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 Settings Description Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certi
168. 0004 PCL Font RAM PelFontinternal4 0005 PCLFont RAM PclFontinternal5 0006 PS Font RAM PsFontinternal1 0007 PS Font RAM PsFontinternal2 0008 PS Font RAM PsFontinternal3 0009 PS Font RAM PsFontinternal4 0010 PS Font RAM PsFontinternalS 0011 PCL Font HDD PclFontHdd1 Add Delete d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 41 15 Using data management utility 15 10 3 Specify the font or macro to be added and click OK Font Macro settings Set the font macro to add Select type destination and the file For PCL font macro ID must be specified Type Add PCL Font Destination HDD a D YS 82787 Please set the top level ID f not entered it will be 1001 Add File Reference Cancel Settings Description Type Select a type of font or macro to be added Destination Select where to save font or macro e HDD Save the font or macro to the hard disk on this machine e RAM Save the font or macro to the memory on this machine When you turn off the power of the machine the saved font macro will be erased To continuously use font or macro data save it in the HDD ID Enter a font or macro ID number for PCL font or PCL macro If it is not entered the available ID is assigned automatically Add File Click Reference and specify the location of a font file or macro file Tips Clicking System displays the system menu The following menu items are available in the sy
169. 1 4 Configuring System User Box environment 11 4 1 Deleting all secure documents All files saved in the Secure Document User Box are deleted In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting Delete Secure Print File then click OK Se Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs S User J EEE Print Setting Store Ad a Wizard Customize Machine Setting Delete Secure Print File gt Register Support Are you sure you want to delete all secure print documents Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings gt Delete Secure Print File gt Standard Size Setting 11 4 2 Automatically deleting files from a System User Box Specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in or last printed from a Secure Print User Box or ID amp Print User Box to the date time when it is to be deleted automatically In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting Delete Time Setting then config ure the following settings Se Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan Ready to Print fs System User Maintenance Settings RU AL Cent Box Print Setting Store s Wizard Customize Machine Setting Delete Time Setting gt Register Support M Auto Delete Secure Document Information specify days Iday gt Network TWAIN C Specify Time L Jmin 720 gt Reset Settings W 1D amp Print Delete Time C specify Time L min s 720 ec cancer
170. 1 In the administrator mode select Network LDAP Setting LDAP Setting then configure the follow ing settings Se Administrator Logout 2l Ready to Scan Ready to Print rs Maintenance E n Security AuthfAccoun emo Box Trac Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting LDAP Setting E mail Setting Enabling LDAP ON n Search Result Display E mail gt IPP Setting l Settings Description Enabling LDAP Select ON to use the LDAP search OFF is specified by default Default Search Result Dis Select which of the following must be preferentially displayed the fax play Setting number or E mail address as a result of LDAP search This item is available when the Fax Kit is installed E mail is specified by default 7 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 7 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server 7 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network LDAP Setting Setting Up LDAP Edit then configure the following settings ri res Fax Settings Wizard Customize 7 TCP IP Setting seting Up LDAP LDAP Server Name A gt LDAP Setting Server Address I Please check to enter host name 5 234 riers D cnatiesst PR FTP setting Port Number SSL s5 a 65535 gt SNMP setting Certificate Verification Level Settings gt sme setting Validity Period conim es z Key Usage Do Not Confirm Aiia Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm 7 Search Base B Teaia
171. 12 NetWare Print Settings scicccicceventecsi si Svuceccegrensesastededadacsausededeateagecaazathbeedadeedevcctedeudecebdeinathatiaedsceeevs 17 12 User Authentication Setting NDS ccececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 17 13 AIPTP Sernver SettingS 2 c csscschet aa detidtee tees ivtisbite chi ele elle eel ds E T 17 13 FTP Settings esiaine aea eei aaa a ae dueqeuhcehanadlenadsdeeueyacchadadsandelszeas hans dasiedsaderauderae 17 14 FT PALX Settings i ar a a a a Reta Reo ye A E TA 17 14 FTP Server Settings mirins Ace gh ee ed eae ee aed aa eai aS 17 15 SMB Settings tess ties nanie naaa a e tances id eres eaeed Septal staged et as 17 15 Client SOttingS iieii aea Aa ra aN a r haben a E a a a 17 16 ARAETA ae Ea E E eee SAA A et 17 17 WINS Settings e ee ed ee ek 17 17 Direct Hosting Setting s iccsiccecssistiesseaiadcacecesdiaceceanscedsatesenses cassecadasdaesanaceaducseed ies dacsaneiavadaveeadeatiadene 17 17 EDAP Settings ee aee eie aio Recreate her ii ae eel a Pathe ele uated chi Reve Ree 17 18 E Mail Settings Network SettingS cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeaeeeens 17 20 E Mail TX SMTP Sesssieevatecatecssicsascteagacomnsueaeeactendedie ceatedendyastecita tas aa pra pa Ear aparia raai ieira Ea 17 20 E Mail RX POP aa e aea A aa Ger aes Ae iinet tdi eect 17 22 S MIME Communication SettingS ccccccceeseceeeeeeeseeeaee
172. 17 30 DPWS Settings roni a stcevguln a a a a ea a Ah iaa ianea 17 30 DPWS Common Settings ssiru aaa aaiae a ana eae a aaa ae 17 31 DPWS Extension Settings aaaea aaa aaa a Aa paces cnastunedegtatlnceee chat aia AEE Staa EE 17 31 Printer Settings DPWS Settings cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesecaeeeeeeeecaneeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeees 17 32 Scanner Settings E EEATT E 17 32 Distributed Scan Settings iinei ccc cctendeastcotestatvnis cavsasacctuacaashcetavieaseactanterogs daa Tiai oerien 17 32 SSDP Settings aiii chachecasguedsaneany asda desanxedaccavecdencdssencidapacaseacupacetaetuesensudeasdssiesanieeaaselduasdsadeunetteye 17 33 Detail Settings r raaa a aa a Ea paaa aa apaa aAA RAE AREE EA ebadacenieentezetbavetidevesirandinedic 17 33 DEVICE SOTHING EEE E EEE T T 17 34 Mime Adjustment Setting sciccisccissccacaiescacctce verse coasscaacoucecasceseseecscaavalensascadeisesescasecadseecdaacdecssunca etenaie 17 34 Status Notification Setting rnentri a e seit duntnrnseanddeitele 17 35 Total Counter Notification SettingS cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeecaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseeueaeeeeees 17 36 PING Confirmation niiina iaai aeaa aaa aaia AE EEEa raae aaeain aaan 17 36 SER Seting he a e A aA r i a S de ea aa es aea ea a eases N ANE 17 36 EPD Setting densin a te dete ne 17 36 Pretix Suffde Setting aina a a apd Gath cates e A aa Ar aaea ana aaa e aaaea tat 17 37 Error Code Display Sett
173. 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 10 e If asingle IP address is allowed to access you can only enter the ad dress in one side of the range IP Filtering Deny Access To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IP Filtering Deny Ac cess Specify an IP address of a computer to which you want to deny access to this machine Settings Description Enable Disable Select whether to specify an IP address that denies access to this ma chine Disable is specified by default Set 1 to Set 5 Enter the range of IP addresses that deny access using the following for mat e Entry example 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 10 e lf asingle IP address is allowed to access you can only enter the ad dress in one side of the range RAW Port Number To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings RAW Port Number Specify a RAW port number required for Port9100 printing Item Description Port 1 to Port 6 If necessary change the RAW port number When not using a port select OFF The following shows the default settings Port 1 9100 Port 2 9112 Port 3 9113 Port 4 9114 Port 5 9115 Port 6 9116 LLMNR Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings LLMNR Setting Select whether to use LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution Using LLMNR enables you to reso
174. 2 D Ready to Scan B Ready to Print cs Maintenance eae TA o eo Box Track Print Setting Store Fax Settings Wizard Customize Z Teri setting E mail TX SMTP M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail on E mail Notification on erre Total Counter Notification on SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name gt iPP setting Use SSL TLS OFF ha gt FTP setting port number Ps aessa gt snmp setting Port No SSL s5 a 65535 gt SMB Setting Certificate Verification Level Settings gt DPWS settings Validity Period confirm gt Bonjour seting pe nex cenimi Chain Do Not confirm E gt AppleTalk Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Network Fax Setting Connection Timeout 60 Esec gt WebDAV Settings Max Mail Size No timit E gt OpenaPi setting Server Capacity E voyea 100 gt TCP Socket Setting Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address Se Authentication Setting gt LTD setting POP before SMTP JorF gt SSDP Settings POP before SMTP Time B jse 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID LDLo T Password is changed Domain Name C Authentication Setting Set Value f I Binary Division Divided Mail Size kbye 100 15000 Step100 Settings Description Use SSL TLS Select the method to encrypt communications with the E mail server SMTP Select SMTP over SSL or Start TLS according to your environment OFF is specified by default Port Number If you select
175. 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network TCP Socket Setting then configure the following set tings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print g System Settings TCP Socket Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing TCP Socket TCP Socket Port Number 9158 1 65535 F Use SSUTLS Port No SSL TLS 59159 1 65535 TCP Socket ASCII Mode Port No ASCII Mode E9160 1 65535 Settings Description Use SSL TLS Select this check box to use SSL communication OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL TLS If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 59159 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 5 1 6 Associating via OpenAPI 16 2 16 2 Associating via OpenAPI Overview To use application software that communicates with this machine via OpenAPI configure the OpenAPI set tings of this machine If a certificate for this machine is registered you can use SSL to encrypt communication between this ma chine and a client when the machine acts as a server By using the Simple Service Discovery Protocol SSDP function of this machine you can associate with OpenAPI connection application software smoothly To perform the association via OpenAPI follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as s
176. 22 7 37 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server 7 7 Settings Description Expiration Date Con firmation A late Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 7 38 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 Configuring the Printing Environment 8 1 Configuring the LPR printing environment 8 8 Configuring the Printing Environment 8 1 Configuring the LPR printing environment Overview LPR printing is performed via the network using the LPR protocol It is mainly used in UNIX based operating systems When using the LPR printing function follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Enable LPD gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 8 3 Enabling LPD In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting and set LPD to Enable Default Enable Se Ad
177. 35 SN Port No SSL Ess a 65535 SMB Setting Certificate Verification Level Settings gt DPwS settings validity Period Confirm H Chain Do Not Confirm E gt AppleTalk Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt Network Fax Setting Connection Timeout 60 sec WebDAV Settings Max Mail Size No Limit gt Openapi setting Server Capacity C moyea 100 gt TCP Socket Setting Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address E 7 ca etting Authentication Setting gt utp setting POP before SMTP orF gt ssop settings POP before SMTP Time E sec 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID CO T Password is changed Password Domain Name Authentication Setting I Binary Division Divided Mail Size C koye 100 15000 Step100 Settings Description SMTP Authentication Select this check box to use the SMTP authentication As the authentication method of SMTP authentication the highest level method supported by your E mail server SMTP is automatically selected from the following methods e Digest MD5 e CRAM MD5 e PLAIN e LOGIN OFF not selected is specified by default User ID Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User ID using up to 64 characters excluding To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password 7 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 1
178. 4 5 Notifying of the machine counter via E mail Overview The counter information managed by this machine can be sent to the registered E mail address The infor mation is useful for seeing the picture of the machine operating status To send the counter information via E mail follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 Configure the Scan to E mail environment gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 3 gt Inthe administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX GMTP and set Total Counter Notification to ON Configure the counter notification settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 14 23 14 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 5 Notifying of the machine counter via E mail 1 4 Configuring the counter notification settings Register destination E mail addresses Up to three destination E mail addresses can be registered Also set the notification schedule In the administrator mode select Maintenance Total Counter Notification Setting then configure the fol lowing settings Ge Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs Print Setting Meter Count Total Counter Notification Setting ROM Version Model Name gt Import Exp
179. 5 charac ters public is specified by default e Notification Items Select an item to be notified automatically Set an item to be notified to ON E mail 1 to E mail Select this item when specifying a notification destination with an E mail 10 address e Edit E Mail Address Enter the destination E mail address e Notification Items Select an item to be notified automatically Set an item to be notified to ON d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 35 17 Total Counter Notification Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Total Counter Notifica tion Settings Configure the setting for sending counter information managed by this machine to a registered E mail ad dress Settings Description Notification Schedule Set Specify the notification schedule by Daily Weekly or Monthly Up to ting two schedules can be registered You can use different schedules for dif ferent purposes Notification Address Set Register notification addresses Also select a notification schedule to be ting applied e Edit E Mail Address Enter the destination E mail address using up to 320 characters e Eco Related Information Select whether to notify eco related infor mation as well as counter information Notify is specified by default e Schedule Settings Select a schedule to be applied to a destination from the schedules regi
180. 52 362 282 222 12 8 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication 12 External Server in Step 2 select User Auth Account Track External Server y Save Authentication Information in the administrator mode and configure the Qe Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to scan EY tovto Print 2 User Maintenance Sve security COLCA Network Box Settings Track i Wizard Customize Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings gt General Settings User Authentication Setting Temporarily Save Authentication Information Temporarily Save Authentication Information Reconnection Settings Disable Z gt Account Track Settings Reconnect for every login LTS racion Set Reconnect Interval Login Setting Reconnection Time Minute 1 1440 gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting Y External Server Settings Cancel gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control 3 Ifyou select ON MFP Settings Temporaril following settings Settings Description Temporarily Save Authen tication Information To temporarily save authentication information in the main unit against a case where an external authentication server shuts down select Enable Disable is specified by default Reconnection Settings I
181. 52 362 282 222 15 23 15 Registering a program 15 3 Settings Description Destination Informa tion Click Search from List and select a destination IP address fax from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination IP address fax select Direct Input and enter the IP address fax Destination Type Select an address type of the destination Address Enters the destination IP address or host name You can also specify a destination by E mail address To specify a destination by E mail address enter the destination IP address or host name following ipaddr fax To enter an IP address following the symbol put the IP address in brack ets Example of IP address IPv4 entry ipaddrfax 192 168 1 1 To enter an IP address IPv6 enter IPv6 following left bracket Example of IP address IPv6 entry ipaddr fax IPv6 fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 To enter a host name following the symbol brackets are unnecessary Example of host name entry ipaddrfax host example com Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number Destination Machine Type Select whether the recipient machine sup ports color print Basic Setting Appli cation Setting Configure the Scan option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Destinations Limit
182. 6 13 9 Disabling user s operation of registration Change cccceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 13 27 13 10 Using th copy security TUN CtlOn ssaa anaran daadaa iaaea atnan naea aenar aasa aae aana auaa a e ara aaa ria 13 28 13 11 Saving the operation log of the Control panel ssssnusssennunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 13 29 14 1 Managing the machine power for power SAaVINg sssssssesssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 14 3 14 1 1 Setting the Power key Power Save FUNCTION eeecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaneesnaeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeees 14 3 14 1 2 Switching to Power Save mode at specified time Weekly Timer eeseeesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeees 14 5 14 2 Configuring the daylight saving time SettingS ccsssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseenees 14 7 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment cccseseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneneeaeeeeseneneeeeesseeees 14 8 14 3 1 Changing a Function to be Assigned to a Register Key cccesseessnceeeeseeeeseneeseneeeeesaeeeesneeeeeaeees 14 8 14 3 2 Selecting functions to be arranged in the MAIN MENU eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeess 14 9 14 3 3 Changing the theme of the Main MENU e cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaneeseaeeseesaeeeseneeeeneeens 14 11 14 3 4 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main
183. 62 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 15 15 3 8 Registering an IP address fax program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the IP address fax program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration IP Address Fax then click OK to configure the following settings gt Program Maintenance Print Setting S Fax Settings Wizard Se Administrator 2 B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print i User i Track Customize E J Program IP Address Fax No 2 Name Destination Information Select from Address Book Search from List Registered Address Number Direct Input Destination Type Address Port No Destination Machine Type Basic Setting Fax Resolution Fine E File Type PDF hd Outline PDF ord Simplex Duplex sided Original Type Text Printed Photo gt Color auto Separate Scan forra Density o standard Bleed Removal z O Standard 7 Background Removal Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program d Color MF552 4
184. 6bff fe1 0 2f16 Port No If necessary change the LDAP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 389 is specified by default Search Base Specify the starting point to search for a user using up to 255 characters The range from the entered origin point including the following tree struc ture is searched Example of entry cn users dc example dc com Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the LDAP server 60 sec is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 27 12 Employing the LDAP authentication 12 6 Settings Description General Settings Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server Select one appropriate for the authentication method used for your LDAP server Simple is specified by default Search Attribute Enter the search attribute to be used for search of user account using up to 64 characters including a symbol mark The attribute must start with an alphabet character uid is specified by default Search Attribute Select this check box to enable the attribute base authentication when Simple is selected for General Settings If this check box is selected the user does not need to enter all of the DN Distinguished Name when performing authentication via the LDAP server On this screen enter authentication information to be used when y
185. 8 32 Port9100 printing 8 4 Power settings 74 3 Prefix suffix 75 32 Preparation 2 3 Print without authentication 72 62 Program 75 75 Protocol setting 73 8 PS setting 8 33 Public user 72 45 Public user box setting 77 73 R Real time preview 74 47 Register support information 4 4 Registered key settings 74 8 Relay user box 77 7 77 70 Remote diagnosis system 76 78 Remote panel 76 25 Report settings 9 23 Reset 74 34 Reset settings 74 38 Restrict user access 73 27 ROM version 74 37 S MIME 73 74 Scan file name settings 74 40 Scan server 76 75 Scan to authorized folder settings 73 26 Scan to E mail 7 3 Scan to FTP 7 20 Scan to home 72 77 Scan tome 72 40 Scan to SMB 7 74 Scan to WebDAV 7 22 Security setting 8 35 Set paper name by user 75 36 Simple print authentication setting 72 63 Single sign on 72 78 12 47 SMB 75 6 SMB print 8 5 SNMP setting 74 25 SSL 73 3 SSL setting 6 3 13 4 Status notification setting 74 20 Subject 75 37 System connection setting 8 28 16 14 16 24 T TCP socket 76 3 TCP socket setting 6 7 TCP IP setting IPv4 5 3 TCP IP setting IPv6 5 8 Temporarily change language 74 79 Temporary one touch 75 30 Text 75 37 TIFF setting 8 34 Time adjustment setting 4 6 Total counter notification 74 22 TSI user box settings 9 78 TWAIN scan 7 32 TX operation log setting 73 29 TX RX setting 9 7 User authentication 72 3 User box 77 3 11 4 15 8 User box operation 77 79 Us
186. 8 39 Authentication card ID number 72 73 Authentication unit 72 68 Auto logout 6 6 R B Basic setting 8 30 Blank page print settings 74 47 Bluetooth setting 8 28 Bonjour 8 79 Bulletin board user box 77 6 77 9 Certificate verification settings 73 77 Closed network RX 9 77 Copy security 73 28 Custom function pattern selection 74 72 Custom function profile user account 72 57 Customize 6 5 Data management utility 75 38 Date time setting 4 5 Daylight saving time 74 7 Default address display settings 74 39 Default function permission 72 44 Delete secure print file 77 76 Delete time setting 77 76 Delete unused user box 77 73 Device certificate setting 73 5 73 6 13 9 13 10 DNS domain name setting 5 7 DNS host 5 6 DNS server setting 5 5 Document delete time setting 77 74 Document hold setting 77 75 E Edit font macro 75 35 E mail 75 3 Enlarge display settings 74 38 Export 74 33 External certificate setting 73 72 External memory function settings 77 78 F Fax 15 9 Fax print quality settings 9 9 Fax TX settings 9 8 Flash display setting 6 8 Format all destination 74 35 Forward TX setting 9 74 FTP 75 4 FTP server 76 77 Function display key 74 75 74 77 Function display key permission setting 74 74 Function on off setting 9 70 Function permission 72 43 Get request code 74 45 Group 75 74 if Header information 9 5 Header footer position 9 6 Header footer registration 75 33 Help 3 79 How t
187. AIN gt Reset Settings By misao z Ready to Scan Ready to Print User Maintenance 5 Lebel Security Auth Account Network Box ettings y BA I Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard External Memory Function Settings Save Document Print Document USB to User Box Customize V User Box Setting External Memory Function Settings gt Standard Size Setting Cancel Settings Description Save Document Select whether to enable to save files on a USB memory OFF is specified by default Print Document Select whether to enable to print files from USB memory ON is specified by default USB to User Box Alas Reference Select whether to enable to save files from a USB memory into a User Box OFF is specified by default f user authentication is enabled on this machine you must set a permission for every user to save files in USB Memory Save Document and read files from USB Memory USB to User Box For details refer to page 12 43 11 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 6 Disabling user s operation of registration change of a User Box 11 11 6 You can enable or disable each user s ability to create edit and delete a user box In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting User Box Operation then config ure the following settings Disabling user s operation of reg
188. Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Status Notification Set ting Configure the setting for notifying to the registered E mail address when a warning such as for toner replace ment or a paper jam occurs on this machine Settings Description Register Notification Ad Register an address where to notify a warning that occurred on this ma dress chine IP Address 1 to IP Select this item when specifying a notification destination with an IP ad Address 5 dress or host name e Address Enter the address of the destination in any of the following formats Example of host name entry host example com Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6b fe10 2f16 e Port Number If necessary change the port number 162 is specified by default e Community Name Enter the community name using up to 15 charac ters public is specified by default e Notification Items Select an item to be notified automatically Set an item to be notified to ON IPX Address Select this item when specifying a notification destination with an IPX ad dress e Address Enter the network address and node address of the destina tion Network Address Enter the network address using eight hexadecimal characters Node Address Enter the node address using 12 hexadecimal charac ters e Community Name Enter the community name using up to 1
189. CMP ICMPv6 Pass Select whether to apply IPsec to the Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 Select Enable to allow the ICMPv6 packets to pass without applying IPsec to the ICMPv6 Default action Select an action to be taken if no settings meet the IPsec Policy while IPsec communication is enabled Select Deny to discard IP packets that do not meet the IPsec Policy set tings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 21 13 Using IPsec communication 13 6 8 From IPsec Policy in Enable IPsec click Create then configure the following settings gt IP packet conditions can be specified to pass or allow the IP packets that meet each of the condi tions Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print a U Maintenance Sah Security Autuhecoun Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize IPsec Policy Name Peer 2 Protocol Setting z IPsec Setting x Communication Type Send a ti Action Protected v gt IPP Setting FTP Setting Eo ok cancel gt SNMP Setting Settings Description Name Enter a name for the IPsec policy 1 to 10 characters Peer Select a peer setting Select the setting from those registered in Peer in IPsec Setting Protocol Setting Select a protocol Select the setting from those registered in Protocol Setting in IPsec Set ting IPsec Setting Select a peer setting
190. CP IP ON z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings IPv4 IP Address Setting Method Auto Setting z M DHCP L BootP M ARP PING M AutolP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway IPv6 ON Auto IPv6 Setting ON DHCPV6 Setting ON m Link Local Address Prefix Length Gateway Address DNS Server Setting IPv4 DNS Server Auto Obtain Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server1 1 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server2 0 0 0 DNS Server Setting IPv6 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server2 i ox cancer Settings Description TCP IP Select ON to use the TCP IP ON is specified by default IPv6 Select ON to use the IPv6 ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 9 Using in the IPv6 environment 5 2 Settings Description Auto IPv6 Setting Select ON to automatically specify the IPv6 global address The IPv6 global address is automatically specified based on the prefix length notified from the router and the MAC address of this machine ON is specified by default DHCPv6 Setting Select ON to automatically specify the IPv6 global address using the DHCPv6 ON is specified
191. Changing the RAW port NUMDET 0 ccceeeescnecesceeeeseneeeeeceseeceeeseeceeeseaseneeeeeseseeesaseneeseeeeeseseeeeeeenenesees 8 4 8 3 Configuring the SMB printing ENvironMent ccseesseeesseeessceeenenenesseeneneeeeneneeeenseneenseeeneneeeeenes 8 5 OV EIMIOW E OE E EEE EEE E E EE E OE 8 5 Configuring basic settings for the SMB printing eesssseseessrrserrrerrrssirnerinnerinnttnnstnnnrnnetnnntnnnnrennnennn 8 6 Using the WINS Serverin anii a Maeve a A aa a aa AE E a ee Ae EE aaa 8 7 Using the direct hosting SMB ServiCe eeseeesseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeseaeeseaaeesesaeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeneeeeeas 8 8 Resolving the name using LLMNR cc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeegeaaeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeee 8 9 8 4 Configuring the IPP printing environment ssesssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanmanna 8 10 OVEIMIOW iinarte ra ea elev dak vee pE e aT ELSA A dies a n aren aia 8 10 Configuring basic settings for the IPP printing eesssessssssressrresrrsernssirnsrnrsrinnntnnnstnnsrinnernnntnnnennnnna 8 10 Using the IPP authentication oerein aara ceatieliat ened rA aea aa aeni 8 12 Communicating using SSL IPPS ee eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaneeesaeeeeesaeeeeaeeeesaeeesseeseseaeeeseneeeenaeees 8 13 8 5 Configuring the WS printing environment eccceeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneaeeeeseesneeeeeeseeeeneees 8 14 OVGINIOW cn sc4 0 sires teeta t
192. Changing the function key display pattern by user or account Overview This machine provides three display patterns to display or hide function keys in each mode If user authentication or account track is installed on this machine you can select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed in each mode screen for each user or account track For example you can configure settings so that only basic functions are normally displayed on the screen and all functions are displayed on the screen when a specific user or account logs in to this machine If you select a display pattern according to your environment you can increase productivity when using this ma chine To select a function key display pattern for each user or account follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Allow changing the function key display pattern by user or account gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 57 2 Selecting a function key display pattern by user or account gt To change the function key display pattern by user refer to page 12 58 gt To change the function key display pattern by account refer to page 12 59 Allowing changing the function key display pattern by user or account Configure setting to select a display pattern of the function keys to be displayed on the screen in each mode for each user or account track In the administrator mode select System Settings Custom Function Profile User Account
193. Controller Font MFP Controller Print Controller Demo Page MFP Controller MIO MFP Controller PIC eS Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print ga User AE system Settings Auth Account Box Track gt Meter Count ROM Version d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 31 14 Managing the setting information 14 8 14 8 14 8 1 Managing the setting information Writing the setting information to this machine Import Types of information that can be imported Various types of setting information which are saved exported from this machine to the computer can be written imported to this machine You can migrate setting information that is exported from other device of the same model to exchange the device The following information can be imported on this machine Item Description Device Setting Various settings of this machine Authentication Informa Authentication information to be managed by this machine tion To import the authentication information enter the password that was specified for export Address The information of addresses registered on this machine for export To import the address information enter the password that was specified Copy Protect Stamp The registration information of copy protect or stamp Restriction Code List How to import This is a list of restriction codes for the OpenAPI connection application 1 In the administr
194. Description Compression Type Select the check boxes of the compression types of a fax job the machine can receive Paper Size Select the check boxes of the paper sizes of a fax job the machine can re ceive Fax Resolution Select the check box of the resolution of a fax job the machine can receive d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 9 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white If necessary change the default compression type setting when sending a fax in black and white In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting Black Compression Level then configure the following settings EES 2 gt Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting Black Compression Level gt TX RX Settings gt Function Setting gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings V Network Fax Setting Black Compression Level gt Header Information Be Administrator 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print f User Maintenance oyoo Auth Account Box 2 Track Black Compression Level Wizard Customize fe ee Settings Description Black Compression Level Select the default compression type for transmission in black and white e MH The data size is larger than MMR e MR The data size is intermediate between MH and MMR e MMR The
195. Enter the current hour e Minute Enter the current minute e Time Zone Select a time zone time difference from the world standard time to suit your environment d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 4 5 4 Setting the date and time for the machine 4 3 Automatically configuring settings using NTP Using the NTP Network Time Protocol server allows you to automatically adjust the date and time of this machine Register the NTP server used To periodically adjust the date and time by connecting to the NTP server spec ify an interval for adjusting the date and time Y To adjust the date and time using the NTP server you must connect this machine to the network 1 In the administrator mode select Maintenance Date Time Setting Manual Setting then configure the Time Zone setting gt For details on how to configure Time Zone setting refer to page 4 5 2 Inthe administrator mode select Maintenance Date Time Setting Time Adjustment Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User z System Settings Security nen aoe Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Meter Count Time Adjustment Setting gt ROM Version Time Adjustment Setting OFF gt Import Export Auto IPv6 Retrieval ON E gt Status Notification NTP Server Address T Please check to enter host name Setting 0 0 0 Total Counter
196. For details refer to page 12 53 reference allowed group Managing based on the access allowed level Access Allowed Level This function sorts out destinations registered in this machine from Level 0 to Level 5 in order of importance to set the upper limit of the access level access allowed level for each user For example assume that Level 3 is set for a certain user as an access allowed level In this case that user can access destinations in Access Allowed Level 1 to 3 but cannot access destinations in Access Allowed Level 4 and 5 v 1 Lv 2 Lv 3 Lv 4 Lv 5 Tips e The access allowed level set for the user is Level 0 by default Level O users can access only the des tinations at level 0 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 47 1 2 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 12 13 Setting the access allowed level 1 In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book Edit select Set direct Reference Allowed Level then set the access allowed level for the address book Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fz User Maintenance raa Auth Account Box Track Sole lie ts Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Address Book Address Book E mail No Use opening number Direct Input E Name e1 Sort Character Index Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name DEF E I Main Destination Informat
197. IPsec Settings IPsec Settings Protocol Setting Specify a protocol used for IPsec communication Up to 10 protocols can be specified Select a group then press Edit Settings Description ON OFF To register protocol settings select ON OFF is specified by default Group Name Enter the protocol name using up to 10 characters Protocol Identification Setting Select a protocol used for IPsec communication Do Not Set is specified by default Port Specification Method Tips If TCP or UDP has been selected in Protocol Identification Setting specify the port number used for IPsec communication To check the registered protocol settings select a group name then press Mode Check d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 9 17 Enable IPsec To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPsec Settings En able IPsec Configure settings to enable use of IPsec on this machine Also specify the policy for IPsec communication In IPsec Settings register items IKE Settings IPsec SA Settings Peer and Protocol Setting Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use IPsec OFF is specified by default IPsec Policy Configure the policy to apply for IPsec communication IP packet conditions can be specified to pass or allow the IP packets that meet each of the conditions Select
198. K 101 v3 is required d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 37 17 Bluetooth Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Bluetooth Setting Select whether to enable Bluetooth Invalid is specified by default Tips The Local Interface Kit EK 607 is required to use the Bluetooth function e The settings by the service representative are required to use the Bluetooth function For details con tact your service representative Single Sign On Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Single Sign On Setting Join the machine to the Active Directory domain and establish the single sign on environment You can set this option by selecting External Server Authentication or Main External Server in Adminis trator Settings User Authentication Account Track General Settings User Authentication General Settings Settings Description Domain Login Setting Configure settings to join services of this machine in a domain Joining services of this machine in the domain allows the user to use them if authenticated once by Active Directory ON OFF Select whether to use singe sign on Enter the host name domain name account name and password then press OK to execute domain joining processing OFF is specified by default Host Name Enter the host name of this machine using up to 253 characters Enter the host name you
199. LL AES GMAC Key Length 128 x M NULL ESP Authentication Algorithm M MD5 M SHA 1 M SHA 2 Key Length M AES XCBC AH Authentication Algorithm F MD5 T SHA 1 F SHA 2 Key Length 256 X T AES XCBC I AES GMAC Key Length 128 X I Perfect Forward Secrecy Diffie Hellman Group IKEv1 Group 2 E Diffie Hellman Group IKEv2 Priority Croup 2 E Priority2 for E Priority3 jor E Priority4 jor E Manual Key Settings Encryption Algorithm NULL Key Length 128 z Authentication Algorithm MD5 X Key Length 256 zj SA Index Receiving C 256 4294967295 Sending 7 256 4294967295 Common Key Encryption Receiving Sending Common Key Authentication Receiving Sending 0K canca Settings Description Name Enter the SA name 1 to 10 characters Encapsulation Mode Select an IPsec operation mode Security Protocol Select a security protocol 13 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 6 Using IPsec communication 13 Settings Description IKE Setting Configure IKE settings used for this SA Authentication Meth Select an authentication method od ESP Encryption Algo Security Protocol ESP configure the ESP encryption algorithm rithm ESP Authentication Security Protocol ESP configure the ESP authentication algorithm Algorithm AH Authentication Al Security Protocol AH configure the AH authentication algorithm gorithm Perfect Forward Se Select this
200. Line Parameter Setting Sender Fax No i gt TX RX Settings Function Setting TTI List Beez aa No Default Sender Name Edit Delete Connection in a 1 e Edit Delete gt Report Settings t 2 e Edit Delete gt Multi Line Settings 3 Edit Delete gt Network Fax Setting 4 6 Edit Delete Haa 5 C Edit Delete gt Fax Print Quality Settings 6 e Edit Delete Settings Description Line 1 Line 2 Select the default setting for the sender name The sender name which is specified by default is automatically added when a fax is sent Sender Name Displays registered sender names Edit You can register up to 20 sender names Use this option to use different sender names depending on the destina tion No Displays the registration number Sender Name Enter a sender name using up to 30 characters Delete Click this button to delete the registered sender name d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 5 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Maintenance V E mail Setting Print Setting re res Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt E mail TX SMTP Sp Administrator 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print s User zE Track E mail TX SMTP M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail ON z E mail No
201. ME select this check box and reg ister a user s certificate Click Browse and specify the location of the cer tificate to be registered e To register the certificate the E mail address must be matched be tween the certificate and the destination to be registered e Only the DER Distinguished Encoding Rules format is supported as a file of certificate information Limiting Access to Desti nations 15 1 2 Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 Registering an FTP destination An FTP destination can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration FTP then click OK to configure the following settings omy pte 4 Maintenance Print Setting S i Fax Settings Wizard Sp Administrator B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print System Settings No Use opening number C Direct Input I Name Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC I Main Destination Information Host Address Please check to enter host name File Path User ID Password anonymous OFF PASV Mode OFF Proxy OFF Port No fet _ 1 65535 Limiting Access to Destinations Display Settin
202. MP version you use Select SNMP v1 IPX when you use SNMP in an IPX environment UDP Port Setting If necessary change the UDP port number Normally you can use the original port number SNMP v1 v2c Setting When you use SNMP v1 v2c configure the settings relevant to SNMP v1 v2c Read Community Name Enter a read only community name 1 to 15 characters excluding spaces and 14 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 6 Managing the machine via SNMP 14 Settings Description Write Community Name Select this check box to allow read and write Also enter a community name used for reading and writing 1 to 15 characters excluding spaces y gt 5 and SN MP v3 Setting Context Name When you use SNMP v3 configure the settings relevant to SNMP v3 Enter the context name using up to 63 characters excluding spaces and Discovery User Name Select this check box if you allow a user for detection Enter a user name for detection 1 to 32 characters excluding spaces and Read User Name Enter a read only user name using up to 32 characters excluding spaces and Security Level Select a security level for the read only user auth password If auth password or auth password priv password is selected from Se curity Level enter an authentication password for the read only user
203. OFF In the administrator mode select Address Book Temporary One Touch then configure the settings The temporary one touch destination to be registered is the same as the registered program address Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print f User Maintenance Sian Auth Account Box Settings Track Print Setting S i Fax Settings Wizard Customize Temporary One Touch List The address is temporarily registered It is deleted by the power off of the main body Allows you to register destination scan settings and communication settings into one Program key Temporary One Touch No Name Edit Delete Rapin Dae Regeren oee Registration Delete wn i i fl i F Tips However Registration of Certification Information and Limiting Access to Destinations are not avail able for temporary programs 15 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 5 Registering the subject and body of an E mail 15 15 5 Registering the subject and body of an E mail Registering the subject Register the subject used for sending E mail messages or Internet faxes Up to 10 subjects can be registered and a subject can be selected from them before transmission In the administrator mode select Address Book Subject Edit and enter a subject to be registered in Subject using up to
204. OFF PASV Mode OFF Proxy OFF x Port No 21 1 65535 Cancel Settings Description Application Setting Configure an application to be registered Application Name Enter the application name using up to 16 characters Server Setting Configure a server for using the application Host Address Enter the host address of the server for using the application using up to 15 characters including a period File Path Enter the destination file path using up to 96 characters 16 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 9 Associating with the fax server 16 Settings Description User ID Enter the user ID used to log in to the server using up to 47 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User ID using up to 31 characters anonymous When authentication is not required in the destination server select ON PASV Mode When the PASV mode is used in your environment select ON Proxy When a proxy server is used in your environment select ON Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number 5 Select a custom item you wish to configure and click Edit gt Application Registration User Maintenance by hiai T Auth Account Box z Track Print Setting 50 i Fax Settings Wizard Customize Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan Ready to Print f Application Registration Custom Item L
205. OFF is specified by default Printer Name Enter a printer name to be displayed on the selector using up to 31 char acters Zone Name If necessary enter the zone name of this machine using up to 31 charac ters Current Zone The current zone name is displayed Bonjour Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Bonjour Setting Configure the Bonjour operating environment when using this machine in the Mac OS control Enabling the Bonjour function on this machine enables the computer to automatically detect this networked machine and display it as an addable printer in the list Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use Bonjour OFF is specified by default Bonjour Name Enter a Bonjour name that is to be displayed as the name of connected de vice using up to 63 characters TCP Socket Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP Socket Settings Configure the TCP Socket operating environment To use application software that communicates with this machine via TCP Socket configure the TCP Socket settings of this machine Settings Description TCP Socket Configure settings to establish a communication with this machine via TCP Socket For details refer to page 17 26 TCP Socket ASCII Mode Configure settings to establish a communication with this machine via TCP Socket ASCII Mode Enabling TCP S
206. ON is specified by default Multicast TTL Setting Change TTL Time To Live for SSDP multi cast packet if necessary 1 is specified by default Detail Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Configure the detailed network settings Settings Description Device Setting Check the MAC address of this machine enable or disable LLTD Link Lay er Topology Discovery and specify the network speed For details refer to page 17 34 Time Adjustment Setting Configure settings to automatically adjust the date and time of this ma chine using the NTP Network Time Protocol server For details refer to page 17 34 Status Notification Setting Configure the setting for notifying to the registered E mail address when a warning such as for toner replacement or a paper jam occurs on this ma chine For details refer to page 17 35 Total Counter Notification Setting Configure the setting for sending counter information managed by this ma chine to a registered E mail address For details refer to page 17 36 PING Confirmation Send a ping to the device communicating with this machine to check for proper connection For details refer to page 17 36 SLP Setting Select whether to enable the SLP Service Location Protocol For details refer to page 17 36 LPD Setting Select whether to enable the LPD Line Printer Daemon Fo
207. ON prevents the generation of white lines at the boundaries of colors in graphs or figures OFF is specified by default Black Overprint Select whether to print so as to prevent white space being generated around a black character or figure e Text Figure Adjacent portion between a text and figure is overprinted with black Use this setting when a white line appears around the black portion in a graph or figure e Text Black is overprinted on the adjacent colors in the text portion Use this setting when a white line appears around the text e OFF The data is printed as is without overprinting with black OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 33 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 8 10 4 Specifying the default TIFF print settings Specify how to determine the size of print paper when directly printing TIFF or JPEG image data The settings are enabled when data is printed from a USB memory device or Bluetooth compatible device or directly printed using the Direct Print function of Web Connection In the administrator mode select Print Setting TIFF Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance gt Basic Setting gt PCL Setting gt PS Setting oJ eri gt Security Setting gt interface Setting gt Assign Account to Acquire Device Info gt OOXML Print Settings f User System pis ree Sedna Security Aut
208. PM Call Select this check box to send a notification when periodic inspection is re quired Replace Staples Select this check box to send a notification when staples run out Replenish Toner Select this check box to send a notification when toner runs out Finisher Tray Full Select this check box to send a notification when the finisher tray is full Service Call Select this check box to send a notification when a service call occurs Job Finished Select this check box to send a notification when a job is completed Hole Punch Scrap Box Full Select this check box to send a notification when hole punch scrap must be removed Waste Toner Box Full Select this check box to send a notification when the waste toner box must be replaced Drum Unit Developing Unit Life Select this check box to send a notification when replacing a drum unit or development unit 14 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 6 Managing the machine via SNMP 14 Settings Description Fusing Unit Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the finishing unit must be replaced Transfer Roller Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the transfer roller unit must be replaced Transfer Belt Unit Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the transfer belt unit must be replaced Ozone Filter Yield Select this check b
209. Password Changes the password of the login user Synchronize User Authen tication amp Account Track Enables the login user to change the settings for synchronizing your own user authentication and account track Function Permission Infor mation Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account Network Setting Informa tion Enables you to check the network settings of this machine Print Setting Information Enables you to confirm the information on the settings for the printer func tion of this machine Print Information Prints font or configuration information d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 13 3 User Mode Overview 3 4 Job Enables you to check the job currently being performed and the job log 2 usert Logout Change Password 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Information fe L5 PH Box Direct Print fe B a 5 amp gt Job History Refer to Job History for finished jobs gt Communication List All Select the Job Type and click Go All Select the TX Method For Fax Tx select the Fax All 5 Line Page Display by 50 cases 1 7 co To view the details regarding a specific job select the corresponding Job No I Select All On Off Document Time No of eS en rey Address su i Copies Status Menu Description Current Jobs Enables you to check the job
210. Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User ID using up to 64 characters excluding To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password 10 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 Settings Description Domain Name Enter the domain name realm for SMTP authentication using up to 253 characters This item is necessary when the SMTP authentication method is Digest MD5 e Enter the domain name if two or more domains realm exist e When only one domain realm exists no entry is required The domain name is notified from the E mail server SMTP at the initial communi cation and communication is automatically performed using that do main name Authentication Setting Select whether to synchronize the SMTP authentication with the user au thentication of this machine This item is necessary when the user authen tication is installed on this machine e User Authentication Uses the user name and password of the regis tered user of this machine as User ID and Password for the SMTP au thentication e Set Value Uses values entered at User ID and Password Set Value is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 15 1 0 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication Configure the setting if yo
211. Port No 23 1 65535 Notification Setting vosterrine sexing ea Y Date Time Settini a Polling Interval Ba 1 240 Manual Setting Time Adjustment ae I Lee gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Settings Description Time Adjustment Setting To automatically adjust the date and time of this machine via the NTP serv er select OFF OFF is specified by default Auto IPv6 Retrieval Select ON to automatically specify the NTP server address In the IPv6 environment the NTP server address can be automatically specified by DHCPv6 ON is specified by default NTP Server Address Enter the NTP server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port No If necessary change the NTP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 123 is specified by default Auto Time Adjustment To periodically adjust the date and time by connecting to the NTP server select ON Also specify an interval for adjusting the date and time at Poll ing Interval OFF is specified by default Polling Interval If you select ON for Auto Time Adjustment specify an interval to auto matically adjust the date and time of this machine unit hours 3 Click
212. Preparing for downloading a firmware Configure the settings for downloading a firmware to this machine You can download it either via FTP or HTTP Configure the appropriate settings to suit your environment In the administrator mode select Network Internet ISW Settings Proxy Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Gp Administrator Logout 2 B Ready to Scan Ready to Print s User Maintenance Ps scent Auth Account Box ettings Track gt Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Proxy Settings oap semg 0 E Pe Proxy Server Address R check to enter host gt FTP Setting Proxy Server Port Number 21 1 65535 7 SNMP Seting HTTP Setings F AppleTakc sering O R E Login Name gt Network Fax Setting M Password is changed Internet ISW Settings gt Proxy Settings 14 48 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 12 Updating the firmware of this machine 14 Settings FTP Setting Description Configure the settings for downloading a firmware via FTP Proxy Connection Select ON to connect with the Internet via a proxy OFF is specified by default Proxy Server Ad dress Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the p
213. Print e Print using RAW port Print using SMB Restrict users from using this device Do Not Authenticate User Authentication Only Account Track Only User Authentication amp Account Track External Authentication Server To configure settings using the wizard log in to the administrator mode then select Wizard Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Sectings Print Setting wizard O O The setup required for the selected workflow can be accomplished through the wizard Wizard Setup is completed The setup is performed according to the procedure outlined in the operation objective Please select a setting TX Setting for scan documents Network print settings Restrict users from using this device Next 3 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 6 Using the Help function 3 The wizard screen is comprised of the following components Sp Administrator P Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting TX Setting for scan documents Wizard The setup required for the selected workflow can be accomplished through the 2 wizard TX Setting for scan documents Administrator Address Setting E mail Address g 7 Administrator Address 3 E mail TX SMTP SMTP Application Setting Setup is completed No Item Description 1 Flow Displays the
214. Reconnection Time and check the status of the au thentication server If the authentication server is in the shutdown state use the authentication information temporarily saved in the main unit to log in Set Reconnect Interval is specified by default 12 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 7 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication 4 Print Setting Y NetWare Setting gt NetWare Setting Customize pee 7 Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print System I Spey r Fax Settings Wizard NetWare Setting is reflected after reset IPX Setting forra Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Ethernet Frame Type Auto Detect NetWare Print Mode OFF x PServer Print Server Name E T Password is changed Print Server Password CL N Polling Interval D jsec a 65535 Bindery NDS Setting NDS x Bindery File Server Name Ee NDS NDS Context Name Ty NDS Tree Name Cc Nprinter Rprinter Print Server Name EE _ 4 Printer Number 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting oN ox Settings Description In the administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then configure the following settings IPX Setting Select ON to use this machine in the IPX environment OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is spec
215. Referral Select whether to use the referral function if necessary Make an appropriate choice to fit the LDAP server environment ON is specified by default Search Attribute Enter the search attribute to be used for search of user using the LDAP server using up to 63 characters including a symbol mark The attribute must start with an alphabet character uid is specified by default User Name Select how to obtain the user name when logging in to this machine e Use Card ID Uses the card ID in the IC card as user name e Acquiring Uses the user name obtained from the server Enter the at tribute to be searched as the user name uid at User Name At tribute Use Card ID is specified by default External Server Connec tion Select the name of the external server to be used as authentication infor mation saved on this machine The authentication information is saved on this machine when the LDAP IC card authentication is successfully completed This authentication infor mation includes the user name and the external server name As authentication information to be saved on this machine the name of ex ternal server registered on this machine can be registered No Selection is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 71 12 Using the authentication unit 12 19 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the LDAP server is encr
216. Report TX Result Report Check Remark Column Print Setup Network Fax RX Error Report Every 100 Comm If TX Fails ON ON J ON 7 ON z ON 7 ON All Destinations 7 Not Specify 7 Normal Printing hd ON Logout 2l Q MDN Message DSN Message Print E mail Message Body Print Cancel Settings Description Activity Report Select whether to print a report containing results of faxes sent and received To print it select when to print it e OFF Does not print an activity report e Daily Prints an activity report at a specified time you entered at Output Time Settings every day e Every 100 Comm Prints an activity report every 100 communications e 100 Daily Prints an activity report at a specified time you entered at Output Time Settings every day In addition a report is printed every 100 communications Every 100 Comm is specified by default TX Result Report Select when to print a report containing the results of fax transmission e Always The report is printed every time a fax has been transmitted e If TX Fails The report is printed if a fax transmission has failed e OFF The report is not printed If TX Fails is specified by default Sequential TX Report Select whether to print a report containing results of faxes sent by polling and broadcast ON is selected by default Timer Reservation TX Report Select whethe
217. Scan When scanning an original that contains blank pages select whether to ex clude blank pages from scanning OFF is specified by default Thin Paper Original Reduce the original feed speed of the ADF to prevent thin paper from pa per jam OFF is specified by default Despeckle Selecting ON scans an original using the ADF while removing dusts on the Slit Scan Glass OFF is specified by default Book Original Select this option if you scan two page spreads such as book and catalog separately into the left and right pages or scan a page spread as a single page e Method Select a method to scan two page spreads from Book Spread Separation Front Cover and Font Back Cover e Center Erase Erases the shadow created in the center when the orig inal cover cannot be closed properly due to the thickness of the origi nal e Bind Direction If Separation Front Cover or Front Back Cover is selected for Method select an output bind position of two page spreads to be scanned Select Left Bind for originals of left binding and Right Bind for originals of right binding OFF not selected is specified by default Frame Erase Erases an area of an identical specified width along the four sides of an original You can erase the four sides of the original to different widths OFF not selected is specified by default Compose Date Time Select this option to print on
218. Scan File Name Settings Description Graphic Outlining data in the Outline PDF format OFF is specified by default Select the outline processing accuracy of images graphics when saving The outline processing accuracy is improved in the order of LOW MID DLE and HIGH If you select OFF outline processing is not performed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 43 14 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 10 14 10 9 Allowing transmission of the machine usage frequency or function settings information Information relevant to usage frequency of this machine and the machine function settings can be transmitted to Olivetti The information about this machine will be used by us for the improvement of service and functions in future Tips Information about IP address and others related to security as well as private information such as ad dress books will not be transmitted In the administrator mode select System Settings List Counter and set Meter Count and Device Con firmation Tx Settings to Allow Default Restrict Reset Settings User Box Setting Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display
219. Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User gt Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings List Counter Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key Permission Setting gt Temporarily Change Language Settings Description Copy Print Select whether or not to allow a change of function keys to be displayed on the main screen in the copy mode and the print settings screen in the User Box mode Restrict is specified by default Send Save Select whether or not to allow a change of function keys to be displayed on the main screen in the fax scan mode and the send or save settings screen in the User Box mode Restrict is specified by default 14 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 Changing function keys in copy mode Select the function keys to be displayed on the main screen in the copy mode and the print settings screen in the User Box mode You can register up to 14 function keys 1 In the administrator mode select System Settings Function Display Key Copy Print to select the number of the function key for which you wish to change the setting then click Edit gt Keys No 1 to No 7 are assigned to basic function 1 and No 8 to No 14 are to basic functio
220. Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 Settings Description Confirm Address Regis Select whether to require the user enter a fax number twice to register it ter when for example registering a destination or forwarding destination This is helpful to prevent the fax number from being incorrectly registered OFF is specified by default 9 3 2 Using the Closed Network RX function Closed Network RX is a function that restricts the peers by passwords You can use this function only when the remote machine is one of our models that have the Password TX function In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Setting Closed Network RX and select the Password is changed check box Default OFF not selected Then enter the password to restrict com munication peers using up to four digits Inform the peer of the password you entered here Se Administrator ready to scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fax Settings Customize gt Header Footer Position Closed Network RX gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Y Function Setting I password is changed Closed Network RX Password gt Closed Network RX gt PBX Connection Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 11 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 9 3 3 Using the Fax Retransmit f
221. System Maintenance Settings D ready to Scan fy Ready to Print fs User Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings gt User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User gt Enlarge Display Settings Customize Initial Screen after User Login If No Selection is selected the user can set the default screen No Selection Main Menu Information Job C Box Registered Box Number Direct Print Direct Print Store Address Favorite Setting Cancel Settings Description No Selection If you select No Selection you can set the initial display screen No Selection is specified by default Main Menu Displays the Main Menu after logging in Information Displays the Information tab after logging in In addition select which screen of the Information tab should be displayed Job Displays the Job tab after logging in In addition select which screen of the Job tab should be displayed Box Displays the Box tab after logging
222. TCP IP authentication eeseeesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeees 12 37 Sending to your address Scan tO Me eccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseseaeeeenseeeeeeeeessseeeeeeessennees 12 40 Constructing a single sign on environment for the SMB transmiSSiON cssseeseseseees 12 41 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or account cessseeeee 12 43 Restricting available functions by user OF ACCOUNT ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeaneeeeeeeeeeneeeenneeenaees 12 43 Specifying the default function permission setting when the external server authentication VS USOC a oo 227 cape EE E E E ated ease T E ugudceg ua daa E E EO A 12 44 Restricting functions available to public USELS ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeenaeeees 12 45 Managing the maximum number of copies by user OF aCCOUNt s ssssunssnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 12 46 Limiting the access to destinations for each USEP eccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeeeneneeneeeenseees 12 47 Methods to limit access to destinations 00 0 ececceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 47 Managing based on the access allowed level ccccscceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeenneeetess 12 47 Access Allowed LOVGl tics ccscect si ccuee hand na a aeaa a a ae a tad aea a aa aaa a tov bed cansadecngeeepencddyeors aaiae 12 47 Setting the access allowed leVel
223. Utility Flash Player is required to use the Data Management Utility Manage Copy Protect Data Manage Stamp Data Manage Font Macro 1 1 Can only run on Windows Internet Explorer and Flash Player Version 9 and above environments gt For details on Manage Copy Protect Data refer to page 15 39 gt For details on Manage Stamp Data refer to page 15 40 gt For details on Manage Font Macro refer to page 15 41 2 Enter the administrator password of this machine Administrator Password OK Cancel Data Management Utility starts up 15 38 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 10 Using data management utility 1 5 15 10 2 Managing the copy protect data Copy Protect is a function that prints a text such as Copy and Private as a concealed text concealed security watermark in all pages You can register or edit copy protect data using Data Managing Utility Up to eight units of copy protect data can be managed 1 In the Web Connection login page start the Manage Copy Protect Data The copy protect data list registered on this machine appears 2 To register or edit the copy protect data click Edit gt Clicking Delete deletes the registered copy protect data The copy protect data will not be deleted until you click Export to the device and write it to this machine System Copy Protect List Delete Delete 3 Register or edit the copy pr
224. X key usage Bo Nor contin El Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Primer settings ox cance gt Bonjour Setting _ Settings Description SSL Setting Select ON to make SSL communications OFF is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation A late Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page
225. a group then press Edit ON OFF Select whether to use the IPsec policy OFF is specified by default Group Name Enter a name for the IPsec policy using up to 10 characters action Select an action to be taken for the IP packets that meet Peer Protocol and IPsec Settings e Protected Protect the IP packets that met the conditions e Allow Do not protect the IP packets that met the conditions e Deny Discard the IP packets that met the conditions e Refuse Refuse the IP packets that met the conditions Select Group Select Peer Protocol and IPsec Setting from the registered settings Communication Select a direction of IPSec communication Type Common Settings Configure common settings for IPsec policy e Cookies Select whether to enable the defense using Cookies against denial of service attacks Invalid is specified by default e ICMP Pass Settings Select whether to apply IPsec to the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Select Enable to allow the ICMP packets to pass without applying IPsec to the ICMP Invalid is speci fied by default e ICMPv6 Pass Settings Select whether to apply IPsec to the Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 Select Enable to allow the ICMPv6 packets to pass without applying IPsec to the ICMPv6 Invalid is specified by default e default action Select an action to be taken if no settings meet the IPsec P
226. a keyword for address search and display by registered name WXYZ 7 I Main Destination Information Host Address I Please check to enter host name I Password is changed Password is currently set OFF OFF 80 1 65535 File Path User ID Password SSL Settings Proxy Port No Limiting Access to Destinations Display ox Cancel Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation Host Address Enter the host name or IP address of the destination WebDAV server using up to 253 characters e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 7 15 Registering address books 15 1
227. a response message is received after the specified waiting time the machine ignores the message 24 hours is specified by default Maximum Resolution If necessary switch the maximum resolution that this machine can sup port Ultra Fine is specified by default 10 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 Settings Description Add Content Type Infor Select whether to add Content Type information to an Internet fax when mation sending it OFF is specified by default Specifying the reception ability of this machine This machine notifies its reception capability when returning a MDN response Change the contents that are notified upon return of an MDN response as necessary In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting Internet Fax RX Ability then con figure the following settings Se Administrator 2 ready to scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fax Settings Customize gt Header Footer Position Internet Fax RX Ability gt Line Parameter Setting Compression Type MH gt TX RX Settings Mi MR M MMR Function Setting W JPEG Gray Scale gt PBX Connection Setting M JPEG Color gt Report Settings Paper Size a4 gt Multi Line Settings M B4 Fax Resolution standard M Super Fine ___ gt Header Information Settings
228. a sep arate file Multi Page is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 Settings Description E mail Attachment Meth You can select the E mail attachment method when the forward destina od tion is an E mail address and Page Setting is set to Page Separation 9 3 6 e All Files Sent as one 1 E mail Attaches all files to one E mail e One 1 File per E Mail Sends one E mail for each file All Files Sent as one 1 E mail is specified by default Using the PC Fax RX function PC Fax RX is a function that automatically saves a received fax to the Compulsory Memory RX User Box or a user box specified in F Code SUB Address A stored fax job can be read from the user box into a computer Tips e This function cannot be used together with the following functions Compulsory Memory RX Forward TX TSI Routing When using two lines you can select Fax Settings TX RX Settings Individual Receiving Line Set up in the administrator mode to enable the PC Fax RX function for each line 1 In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Settings RX Data Operation Settings Fax RX Settings then click OK Sp Administrator ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print 2 Logout 2j User Maintenance Sn Security Auth Account Network Box ings Track Print Setting Store Address g 0 6 Wizar
229. able is specified by default Deny Access Select Enable to specify IP addresses refused to access Also enter the range of IP addresses If a single IP address is refused to access you can only enter the address in one side of the range e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Disable is specified by default 13 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 6 Using IPsec communication 13 13 6 Using IPSec communication Configure the settings if IPsec is installed in your environment The IPsec technology prevents the falsification or leakage of data on the IP packet basis by using encryption technology As IPsec encrypts data in the network layer secure communication is ensured even if you use protocols in an upper layer or applications that do not support encryption 1 In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting IPsec IPsec Setting then click OK 2 Click Edit from IKEv1 or IKEv2 in IPsec Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting TCP IP Setting IKEv1 Settings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print fz System Wizard Customize Encryption Algorithm F DES CBC F 3DES CBC T AES CBC Key Length fe Authentication Algorithm T MD5 I SHA 1 T SHA 2 Key Length pe of Encryption Key Validity Period 28800 sec 600 604800 Diffie Hellman Group Group 2 Negotiation Mode Main Mode Settings Description Enc
230. according to a request from the E mail server POP SSL TCP Socket If this machine is used as a TCP Socket client it sub mits a certificate of the machine according to a request by the TCP Socket server SSL LDAP If this machine is used as an LDAP client it submits a certificate of the machine according to a request by the LDAP server SSL WebDAV Client If this machine is used as a WebDAV client it submits a certificate of the machine according to a request by the WebDAV server SSL OpenAPI If this machine is used as an OpenAPI server it en crypts transmission from an OpenAPI client to the ma chine SSL Web Service If this machine is used as a Web service server it en crypts transmission from a client to the machine It is used when a computer running Vista or later Win dows revision accesses the machine via HTTPS SSL IPsec Used to activate IPsec communication on this machine 13 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 2 Managing the certificates for this machine 13 Protocol1 Protocol2 Application SSL Remote Panel When the control panel on this machine is operated re motely with the dedicated software it is used for the following applications e Submitting a certificate of this machine in the client settings according to a request by the server in which the dedicated software installed Encrypting communication in the server settings from a client viewing the control panel of
231. ache nade se eth awake dn ct cie ned de wceckendayccunclaccduceauescedseusnecuceeecans 15 15 Registering an E mail address program ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeescaaeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 15 Registering an FTP program ccs n ae aa del cb cesta sched ie tee labia aaa a aaa aa na a aeaiia 15 16 Registering an SMB program cs ccccseceeeseeeeeeseeesesceseseeceneseeeeeneeeeesseeeesaeseseseeseeseeeneseneseseeenseeeness 15 18 Registering a WebDAV program ccccceeeeceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeedaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeeeeetes 15 19 Registering a User Box program cceccceseceeceseeeseseeeeseeceneseneesneeeeeseneeeseeeeeeseeeeeseneeeseneseseeeneneetess 15 20 Registering a fax address PrOQrarm eeceeeseeeeeseeeseneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeseneesesaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeneeens 15 21 Registering an Internet fax address program cecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseeeueeeeseseneeeess 15 22 Registering an IP address fax program cccccccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeesaaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseeeneeeeees 15 23 Registering a group PrOQKaIM e a a a eadk aid ay ceed Hed ea el ae ete 15 25 Registering a program without destination eeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeeeeesnneeeenaeeess 15 26 Configuring the fax scan transmission option Settings 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeetesnneeesaaes 15 27 Registering a temporary o
232. aeeneess 6 7 Configuring settings for display in flash ViOW ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseecaeeseeeeseneaeetees 6 7 Restricting the flashi View na an aar a eased Ba hace tas hacen abcess is Paste teh eae a esd apie EAE aE halle 6 8 1 Er Configuring the Scan to E mail environment ccssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeneeeens 7 3 COVEIVIOW feces deca Be ecg dhete aed Mats catia ee es eee es esata eel Tok E cele 7 3 Configuring basic settings for Scan to E mail 2 0 eee eeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeae 7 4 Using SSL TES COMMUNICATION s ssaceccsciecs cecevensccetvctetecscasbesateestiecensescaubteavsiadva ceaceedasecusbededeeaasesuearventtes 7 6 Using the SMTP authentication cccccceseceseseeeeseeceeseeeesseeeenesecenesceeeeseeeesensenseeeesseeneteseneseseeeeeenenees 7 8 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication ceceesceeesseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeeeaaeeesneeeeneeeeeeeeeneaas 7 10 Using S MIME ETETA ATA A T aebasdqana sanaaaagaenadansaeaaeds 7 13 Configuring the SMB transmission CNVirOnNnMen ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeensneeeeeeeseeeeeeees 7 14 OVGIVIOW E ET ET FET E TETE casa sehnag A E TA E steed boul pdeesaeativeeadd 7 14 Configuring basic settings for the SMB transmissSion eseeeseeesresesressresrrrerrnnsirnssinnerinerinnsrinnsrene 7 15 Using the WINS Server see aneirin eenaa aaa a Eea ranae a n aaan Sa aeaea hiia r
233. aira ara aiai raiadas a aiian Eaa anena 7 16 Using the direct hosting SMB SErviCe esceeesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseneeneneaeeeeeas 7 17 Resolving the name using LLMNPR cccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseeneeeeseeenaes 7 18 Using in the DFS environment cceeeeeeecceeeseeeeeseeeeesceeeeeceeessseeeesseseneseneesnaceseseseesseeeneneeeneseaeeneees 7 19 Configuring the FTP transmission environment ssssuunseenunnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 7 20 COVOIVIOW arianna ra Aee aana tus a eae Son Se daadaa aa AT a aa TA Ta i eaS aeae a EE 7 20 Configuring basic settings for the FTP transmission esscceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 7 20 USING TNE Proxy SEV E aeneus sn ccsans chan eaae ena aeaa aai a sh ent ad sunneeuguatveuseeheuade a r aranana 7 21 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment ssssssunnseenunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 7 22 OVE AE A A A A E E A TE E ty came 7 22 Configuring basic settings for the WebDAV transmission ccceeeseeesseeeeneeeeeneeteeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 23 USING The Proxy SeN OM cieccFiveawcieetinasaredeutedeveatgunsbeulvedyntensuievecsciedveteasavavaen sn Naaa aaea anea inaa TaTari 7 24 Using SSL commu niIcaAtONine e a A ae aa E a I 7 25 Configuring the WS scan environment sssssnnsssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn
234. ame to be displayed as a shared name in uppercase letters up to 15 characters including a symbol mark but not to be used at the beginning and the end of the character string Print Service Name Enter a print service name in uppercase letters up to 12 characters ex cluding and Workgroup Enter a work group name or domain name in uppercase letters using up to 15 characters excluding lt gt and WORKGROUP is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 3 Configuring the SMB printing environment 8 Using the WINS server If the WINS server is installed to resolve the name set the WINS server address and the name resolution method In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting WINS Setting then configure the following set tings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print s Maintenance ae auth account vem Print Setting Wizard Customize WINS Setting WINS ON z Auto Obtain Setting Enable z WINS Server Address 0 0 0 0 WINS Server Address2 0 0 0 0 _ E Node Type Setting B Node V SMB Setting gt WINS Setting Lox _cancet_ gt K Settings Description WINS Select ON to use the WINS server ON is specified by default Auto Obtain Setting Select Enable to automatically obtain the WINS server address This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled Enable is specified by default
235. an ED Ready to Print User System Maintenance Setti Auth Account nus Track Print Setting Wizard gt General Settings User Registration M Reference Allowed Group F Access Allowed Level Co 7 Y User Authentication No Setting Use opening number User Registration Input directly 1 1000 User Name LoS E E mail Address L E User Password L i Retype User Password gt Account Track Settings Temporarily stop use Continue Job Prohibited Function Login Se Function Permission gt Print without Copy Full Color Black gt Buthentication Scan Full Color Black Simple Print Save to External Memory Restrict AL SES External Memory Document Scan Restrict External Server Settings Fax Full Color Black eee ea Print Ful Cotorttack E gt User Connon User Box Allow Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black Biecan ts Home Manual Destination Input Allow A z Mobile PDA Aiow E gt Scan to Authorized Folder Max Allowance Set Counter Remote Control Total Allowance F Total 1 1 9999999 Individual Allowance F Color 7 4 8999999 F Black 1 1 9999999 Box Administration T Box Count 1 0 1000 Limiting Access to Destinations tego 2 2 Customize Search from List Registered Reference Group Number I Totalo 12 56 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 14 Changing the function key display pattern by user or account 1 2 12 14
236. and messages If you click this icon when an error occurs you can check the error status such as consumables paper trays or user registration infor mation 3 Message display You can check the operating status of this machine with the mes sage 4 To Login Screen Logout Click this button to log out of Web Connection Change Password Changes the password of the registered user Click this button to jump to the user password change screen This button is enabled only when you log on as a registered user 3 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 2 Layout of Web Connection screen 3 No Item Description 6 Help Displays the online help of Web Connection Detailed descriptions of the currently set functions can be viewed 7 Refresh Click this button to update the screen 8 Menu category Menu items are divided into some categories depending on each content The available menu categories vary depending on which optional units are installed on this machine Menu Click the category of the menu to display the menu items of that category 10 Information and settings Click the menu at the left of the screen and the contents of that menu will appear d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Login methods 3 3 Login methods Login screen When you access Web Connection this screen appears first Enter the required information such as a user name and log in to Web Connection Tips
237. annotation Changing Bulletin Board User Box settings As necessary specify the fixed text date and time and print position to be If you log in to the administrator mode you can change settings for a registered Bulletin Board User Box or delete it without entering the password for the Bulletin Board User Box Tips To use Bulletin Board User Box an Fax Kit is required 1 In the administrator mode select Box Open System User Box Bulletin Board User Box to select a user box 2 Click User Box Setting gt Clicking Delete User Box deletes the User Box you selected gt Open User Box gt Create User Box gt Create System User Box Se Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan Ready to Print I 7 T User Maintenance Sees Security Auth Account Network Settings aS at i Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize User Box User Box Number 4 Name bbs box1 Public Owner Name Public Type Open System User Box f Box Operation User Box Setting Delete User Box Cancel 3 Use User Box Attribute Change to change User Box settings a Administrator togou D Ready to Scan Ready to Print fs Maintenance Seea gt Open User Box gt Create User Box gt Create System User Box a 5 Security Auth Account Network Settings i Track Print Setting store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Open System Us
238. ase check to enter host name gt Copy Security CT See z fato Pogoni Proxy Server Port Number oso 1 65535 gt Administrator Password User Name Setting po a M Password is changed P TX Operation Log Password Staats Address not using Proxy Server F Please check to enter host name OK Cancel Settings Description Certificate Verification Settings Select ON to verify reliability of the certificate for peer ON is specified by default Timeout Change the time out time of certificate expiration confirmation if neces sary 15 sec is specified by default OCSP Service Using the Online Certificate Status Protocol OCSP enables you to check online whether or not the certificate is expired Select this check box to use the OCSP service Enter the URL of the OCSP service using up to 511 characters If URL is left blank the URL of the OCSP service embedded in the certif icate will be used Proxy Settings To confirm the expiration date via a proxy server register the proxy server currently used Proxy Server Ad Enter the address of the proxy server you are using dress Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number 8080 is specified by default
239. asic settings for the Active Directory authentication Register your authentication server on this machine In addition change the authentication method of this machine so that authentication is performed using the registered authentication server 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then configure the following settings System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store 4 gt General Settings User Authentication Setting Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Simple Print Authentication Setting V External Server Settings External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Sp Administrator amp Ready to Scan a Ready to Print User LLEIS External Server Registration No External Server Name External Server Type Active Directory Default Domain Name Timeout NTLM Default Domain Name NDS Default NDS Tree Name Default NDS Context Name LDAP Server Address Port No I Enable SSL Port No SSL Search Base Timeout General Settings Search Attribute T Search Attributes Authentication Login Name T Password is changed Password Auth Account Customize 2 Active Directory o Jsec 5 300 C
240. ating the machine Control Panel remotely 16 10 Settings Description Client Setting To control the Control Panel of this machine remotely using the dedicated software select ON OFF is specified by default Server Address Enter the address of the server where the dedicated software was installed Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port Number If necessary change the port number of the server where the dedicated software was installed 443 is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the timeout time of communication with the server where the dedicated software was installed 60 sec is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Do Not Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default
241. ation in both the administrator mode and user mode e None Does not use SSL communication None is specified by default Encryption Strength Select the SSL encryption strength Select it according to your environment AES 256 3DES 168 RC4 128 DES 56 RC4 40 is specified by default 13 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL 1 3 Self creating a certificate Create a certificate with this machine The Certificate Authority CA is not required for a self created certifi cate and it can be used simply after entering necessary information for creating the certificate 1 In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting New Regis tration Create and install a self signed Certificate and enter information required for creating a cer tificate then click OK The certificate is created and installed on this machine It may take several minutes to create a certifi cate Se Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print 2 Maintenance System Settings Print Setting Wizard Y PKI Settings Create and install a self signed Certificate gt Device Certificate Setting Common Name 10 122 20 72 Organization org Organizational Unit div Locality loc State Province state Country US Admin E mail Address imfp mail com Validity Start Date 2011 05 14 07 25 44 Validity Peri
242. ation is available for this machine However installing the discovery proxy server at a location where unicast communication is available for this machine enables it to perform scan transmission In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Extension Settings then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting gt DPWS Extension Settings User Syse Auth Account Box Settings Track Gp Administrator Logout 2 D Reaay to Scan Ready to Print z Fax Settings Wizard Customize DPWS Extension Settings Enable Proxy OFF I Proxy1 Proxy Server Address T Please check to enter host name File Path Enable SSL OFF E Proxy Server Port Number 80 1 65535 I Proxy2 Proxy Server Address T Please check to enter host name File Path Enable SSL oF E Proxy Server Port Number E 1 65535 T Proxy3 Proxy Server Address I Please check to enter host name File Path Enable SSL 8c 1 65535 Proxy Server Port Number Settings Description Enable Proxy Select ON to use the discovery proxy OFF is specified by default Proxy1 to Proxy3 Register the discovery proxy server used on this machine Proxy Server Ad dress Enter the discovery proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1
243. ation is employed This function is called the Quick Authentication for Printing function When using the Quick Authentication for Printing function follow the below procedure to configure the set tings 1 Permit the Quick Authentication for Printing function gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 63 2 Register information of the LDAP server for confirming the user name quick authentication for printing server in an environment where external server authentication is employed gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 64 3 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Communicate with the LDAP server using SSL page 12 66 Permitting the Quick Authentication for Printing function Allow the Quick Authentication for Printing function By this you can print data from the printer driver only based on user name authentication without a password in an environment where MFP authentication is em ployed In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Simple Print Authentication Setting Simple Print Authentication Setting and then set Simple Print Authentication Setting to Allow Default Restrict Q Administrator Logout Ready to Scan ED Reavy to Print a hae User Maintenance Line Security tranterim Network Box ettings rack Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings Simple Print Au
244. ator mode select Maintenance Import Export to select the information to be import ed then click Import Se Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print Logout 2l Box User ga ee Security Auth Account Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard z Meter Count Import Export gt ROM Version Device Setting oe ae Authentication Information gt Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification C Address C Copy Protect Stamp Setting Restriction Code List Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting Network Error Code Display Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro Export Import 2 Specify the location of the file to be imported and click OK gt To import the Authentication Information or Address enter the password that was specified for export The import process starts Tips The counter information cannot be imported e For details on the list of inhibited codes contact your service representative 14 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 8 Managing the setting information 14 14 8 2 Saving the setting information of this machine Export Types of information that can be exported Various types of setting information of this machine can be saved exported to the computer Use this func tion to back up various types of setting information of this machine
245. aximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default 12 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 5 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 3 If you select ON MFP External Server in Step 2 select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information in the administrator mode and configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan EY rezov 20 Print fs Syster User Maintenance ve Security EOE Ty Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings gt General Settings gt User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Settings TEK Temporarily Save Authentication Information Disable 7l Temporarily Save Authentication Information Reconnection Settings Reconnect for every login Set Reconnect Interval Reconnection Time Minute 1 1440 Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting cancel Y External Server Settings gt Temporarily Save Authentication Information gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home
246. by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default NetWare Print Mode Select PServer OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 23 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 8 Settings Description Print Server Name Enter a print server name to enable Pserver using up to 63 characters ex cluding 3 L lt gt and Enter the print server name registered in the Pconsole Print Server Pass word If necessary enter a print server password using up to 63 characters Polling Interval Set a job inquiry interval 1 sec is specified by default Bindery NDS Setting Select NDS Bindery Setting NDS is specified by default File Server Name Enter the priority file server name to be used in the Bindery emulation mode using up to 47 characters excluding lt gt l and In the NetWare 4 x Remote Printer mode NDS From the client log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority 2 Start NWAdmin Select an organization or department container for the print service and select Print Services Quick Setup from the Tools menu Fill in Print Server Name Printer Name Print Queue Name and Print Queue Volume Then set the Type of the printer to Other Unknown and save them Load
247. c users For details refer to page 12 45 When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the maximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 7 12 Employing the MFP authentication 12 2 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Reg istration New Registration then register a user Print Setting General Settings Y User Authentication Setting gt User Registration gt Account Track Settings Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Track User Registration No Use opening number Input directly User Name E mail Address User Password Retype User Password Temporarily stop use Function Permission Copy Scan Save to External Memory External Memory Document Scan Fax Print User Box Print Scan Fax TX Manual Destination Input Mobile PDA err 2 D Rea
248. ca sees ETEA E adeesaths ida ciceeasedanne dates geesnuoadtsesstasie lines AA Uataegt 17 6 DNS Domain Sei sects ccdes eae cotececapeants steachcctuscavesacenshatagectecteaseghesteves sterbanveesbuctanys sensetavapavnceiasaneet cetavasecs 17 6 Contents 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 DNS Server Settings IPVA rnise nania aa aana eve aa aa dace eaeedescastbecden covuie an aa i ai aeaa 17 7 DNS Server Settings IPV6 sensein inaina iraa ranan naana aana a aa ariaa aa aaraa a aaraa aaraa aa Epeka kanaa Kini 17 7 Uaa E AEE E AE E T EE E 17 7 KE Senings Ponsiano event ARa ae ER SA TEN a Ae 8 eect sea ees ea Sa e a Eaa 17 8 Ps c SA Settings iiine an td ee ee eed teed 17 8 POON E E A A S A E A T A E E NET 17 9 Protocol Seting karni in A E A a Ana aT Er 17 9 Enable IPSEC miaa eare a aua aa enaa cesta EA a ea aE ates Taaa Aaaa Ee aa aa Ra aa E cesta 17 10 Communication Checkin anien eai a ag eee a eaaa ENEA a ie 17 10 IP Filtering Permit AGCESS aaa i22 22hi ssaces ceahs fide a iaa a a aaa a aa a a aaa Eaa Aaaa iaaii aaea aaea 17 11 IP Filtering Demy ACCESS erin aae ce a a a a a r a Aaaa a Aaa a aaa a aiaiai 17 11 RAW Port NUM ber ai aea aa aaa aa aaaea ee AAE eare aaea EAA a aa Aa a ER 17 11 ELMNR Setting ieee aaie e e Raa e E a aa 17 11 NetWare Settings ii siccccdacsesaasnesanasceasaseanacecenstaseseiaossavencanasdacatactasdaariesaauacasasacecatacenasacgbasazcabapeaeaze 17 12 E Ae a E E A E T E E A 17 12 NetWare Print Setti
249. can fax program is created Specify Icon Select an icon to be displayed on the main menu if necessary when a shortcut key is created for a copy program or fax scan program 14 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 14 3 3 The background color etc of the main menu can be changed according to your preference Changing the theme of the main menu In the administrator mode select System Settings Main Menu Display Settings and select your favorite theme Default Theme 1 gt Machine Setting Register Support Information Network TWAIN Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings BEX Reference For details on the theme for the main menu refer to User s Guide Control Panel Main Menu Display Settings Main Menu Display Settings Customize Qp Administrator Ready to Scan GB Ready to Print System User 7 Maintenance as Security Auth Account Network jettings CEES Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Theme 1
250. can transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the E mail address program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration E mail then click OK to con figure the following settings Maintenance Ci J Sp Administrator Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print 2 System Settings Customize j Destination Information Select from Address Book Search from List Registered Address Number Check Destination Direct Input E mail Address I Registration of Certification Information Display the registration screen of certificate information after the program registration is completed Basic Setting Scan Resolution 200 x 200 File Type ror H Outline PDF jor File Name C Page Setting Multi Page Page Separation E 1 999 Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination E mail address from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination E mail address select Direct Input and enter the address To register certificate information select the Registration of Certification Information check box Only one destination can be specified
251. canning to authorized folders Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ON User uncer Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Logout 2 2 Cancel 13 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 9 Disabling user s operation of registration change 13 13 9 Disabling user s operation of registration change This machine can disable the following user s operations Registering changing addresses Registering the biomet ric IC card information e Changing the sender address From address for E mail transmissions e Synchronizing user authentication and account track for each user In the administrator mode select Security Restrict User Access then configure the following settings Settings Qe Administrator Logout Ready to Scan ED Reavy to Print a User Maintenance SYstem feet Auth Account Network Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize PKI Settings Restrict User Access gt Certificate Verification Registering and Changing cet Settings Addresses a pean Biometric IC Card Information male Address Reference Registration a Setting Changing the From Address Allow gt Restrict User Access Synchronize User Authentication amp fay S E Account Track By User wd Copy Senay l gt Auto Logout ii Cancel gt Administrator Password gt TX Operation Log Settings
252. cation Overview When you use NDS Novell Directory Service of NetWare 5 1 or later for user management you can restrict users of this machine by authentication using NDS Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine This section describes how to use NDS authentication in the IPX environment NDS over IPX using NetWare 5 1 or later Apply the latest service pack to each NetWare version When employing the NDS over IPX authentication configure settings using the following procedure Configure basic settings for the NDS over IPX authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 32 2 Setthe following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 sey how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 ou Restr
253. ceadg a ha teed a a aa teva cue aves ate elie ee evn Gots ods ae aaae Be Ea erika aaa 12 3 ACCOUNT WACK PEE ses sdetslcestade dee casi dada E E eetaghadiieedd 12 4 Combining user authentication and ACCOUNT traCk cecceececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 5 Employing the MFP authentication cccsssecceessseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseenenaeeeessneeeeeeeesneeaeesesseseeaeeeeeens 12 6 OVGIVIOW E A E E E dybactun stage ivece AE IA E 12 6 Configuring basic settings for the user authentication 2 2 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseneaeeeeetees 12 7 Employing the account track FUNCTION 2 ccceseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeneeessenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeensseeeenenseaes 12 10 OVOIVIOW feo esas sane alesse EEATT esa nasa ceatvageicdeavad eens bealsaeli ted estat aeeisa E EAEE S 12 10 Configuring basic account track settings cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseceeeeeetenenaeeeeess 12 11 Employing the Active Directory authentiCation ccsssseeeceesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeneeseees 12 13 OVGINIOW coe eee Aen Ove ae enti hehe 8 eae Seek heen eect 12 13 Configuring basic settings for the Active Directory authentication ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 12 14 Sending to Your Computer Scan to HOME esceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeneesesaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeeneees 12 17 Using the single SIGN ON is i222 teal cree a cde dks e ice ieee ded dante doea
254. ces so dee cneesescd ecien el caved E E E T A E T 8 3 Enabling U PD ieiicccciscoceesasheeensesdvattennn shehcacdsezsnstienavasenaiecanesdag aus ccdevaceuaathd dy qsteaded aaetantsuncced dauduzaaeuceacaaateds 8 3 Configuring the Port9100 printing CNVirONMeN cssseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessneeeeeeensneeeeeeeeseeeeneees 8 4 OVOMVIOW exces E A EA A TA T E E T jeidel vexed saves E E E 8 4 Changing the RAW port NUMDEDM cceceeeecceseseeeesseceseseneeseceeeseseesesenseneeeeeseneeseseeseneseeessseneseneaeeeeees 8 4 Configuring the SMB printing EnvironMentt cccceseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesseeeeeesesseneeeeeneseeeeeeeess 8 5 OVGIVIEW Sensei ee ok ei eee he adel E dias Settee tinea ewe See eee 8 5 19 2 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 10 1 8 10 2 8 10 3 8 10 4 8 10 5 8 10 6 8 10 7 8 11 8 12 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 1 3 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 3 4 9 3 5 9 3 6 9 3 7 9 3 8 9 4 9 5 Configuring basic settings for the SMB printing sesssssiessreesrrrerrssriresrrrnrinntrrnnsrnnnrinnrrnnntnnnernnnnnnnne 8 6 Using th WINS ServEr a mieie aapa a aaaea eeaeee Aa aaraa Eaa dati chvassecpndbceusiehbnaucaueccta s 8 7 Using the direct hosting SMB S rvViCe eescceeseeeeeneeeeeeneeteeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaneeesnneeenaees 8 8 Resolving the name using LLMNR ccessceeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaeeeeesneeeseae
255. ch External Phone Call Monitor o Hsec orr Line Monitor Sound Volume Send o 0 31 20 0 31 External Phone Call Time Audio Recognition Setting External Phone Disconnection Answering Machine Connection Settings Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Volume Receive Cancel Description Dialing Method Select the line type according to your environment Receive Mode Select a receive mode e Auto RX Automatically start receiving a fax if the call is a fax call e Manual RX Manually request the reception of a fax Select this mode if a phone is connected to this machine and you expect frequent voice calls Auto RX is specified by default Number of RX Call Rings If necessary change the number of times the phone rings before automat ically receiving a fax 2 x is specified by default Number of Redials If the machine fails to send a fax successfully it automatically redials the same destination after a certain period of time has elapsed If necessary change the number of redials The setting range varies according to the local standards Redial Interval If necessary change the redial intervals when you specified a value in Number of Redials 3 min minutes is specified by default Line Monitor Sound Select whether to play sounds on the telephone line from speakers during fax communication OFF is specified by default Line
256. character input such as address entry and network setting is a difficult process using the touch pan el it can be carried out easily if you use the computer Operating environment Item Specifications Network Ethernet TCP IP Web Browser In Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 7 8 9 e Mozilla Firefox 3 5 or later On Mac OS 9 x Mac OS X e Mozilla Firefox 3 5 or later On Linux e Mozilla Firefox 3 5 or later JavaScript and Cookies must be enabled by your Web browser Flash Player Adobe Flash Player e Plug in Ver 7 0 or later required to select Flash based display e Plug in Ver 9 0 or later is required to use the Data Management Utility font macro data management d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 2 Operations Required to Use Web Connection Configuring network environment settings 2 M 2 2 1 Operations Required to Use Web Connection Configuring network environment settings Overview To connect this machine to the network TCP IP follow the procedure below to configure settings 1 Assigning an IP address to this machine gt f this machine has a fixed IP address enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway For details refer to page 2 3 gt To automatically obtain the IP address of this machine using DHCP enable the Auto Input function for automatically obtai
257. check box if you wish to increase the IKE strength crecy Selecting this check box increases the time spent for communication Diffie Hellman Select the Diffie Hellman group Group IKEv1 Diffie Hellman Group IKEv2 Manual Key Settings When using a device that does not support automatic key exchange using IKE configure each parameter manually Encryption Algorithm Select the algorithm to be used for encryption Authentication Algo Select the algorithm to be used for authentication rithm SA Index Specify the SA Security Parameter Index to be added to the IPsec header Common Key En Specify the common key used for encryption cryption You can specify different common keys respectively for send and receive Common Key Au thentication Specify the common key used for authentication You can specify different common keys respectively for send and receive From Peer in IPsec Setting click Create and register peers of this machine gt You can register up to 10 peers Qe Administrator Logout r Ready to Scan E Ready to Print fz U Maintenance pra Security Aut ccount Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Ooo he Single Address DE ess FT E mail Setting Subnet Settings gt LDAP Setting IPAddress poon in 7 E Subnet Mask RE j C Set Range Bi Set 0 gt SNMP Setting Pre Shared Key Text SMB Setting Ke
258. ck word box and then enter a password using up to 64 characters excluding Auto Delete Document Specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in last printed or sent form a User Box to the date time when it is to be deleted automat ically e Do Not Delete Keeps the file in the User Box e Do Not Keep Select this option to use a document to give an annota tion only without saving or using it for copying e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted e Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted 11 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 2 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 Settings Descri ption Count Up e By Select the unit for adding a number to a file By Job or By Page e By Job Adds a number per file Even if a file has multiple pages a same number is added to the file as one job Page Adds a number per page Stamp Elements 11 2 4 added ing to a file e Primary Field Add any text up to 40 characters e Secondary Field Add any text at the beginning of the annotation us up to 20 characters Date Time Setting Select the format for the date and time Print Position Select a position in which the annotation is printed Density Select the density of characters of the date and time and an notation to be printed e Number Type Select the digit number of
259. configure IKE Internet Key Exchange SA Security Association IPsec peer or IPsec protocol settings IKE Settings Configure settings required to create a common key for IPsec For details refer to page 17 8 IPsec SA Settings Configure SA Security Association required for encrypted communica tion For details refer to page 17 8 Peer Register the peer of this machine to use IPsec For details refer to page 17 9 Protocol Setting Specify a protocol used for IPsec communication For details refer to page 17 9 Enable IPsec Configure settings to enable use of IPsec on this machine Also specify the policy for IPsec communication For details refer to page 17 10 Communication Check Select this option to confirm IPsec communication error logs For details refer to page 17 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 7 17 IKE Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPsec Settings IPsec Settings IKE Settings Configure settings required to create a common key for IPsec Settings Description IKEv1 Settings or IKEv2 Select IKEv1 Settings or IKEv2 Settings depending on your IKE version Settings Encryption Algorithm Select the encryption algorithm to create a common key used for commu nication Authentication Algo Select the authentication algorithm to create a common k
260. configure the fol lowing settings Bp Administrator 2 Ready to Scan Ready to Print ga User ac settings ESE Ara Ea a Track Print Setting sore ares re r Fax Settings Wizard Customize Era NetWare Setting is reflected after reset IPX Setting OFF Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Ethernet Frame Type Auto Detect NetWare Print Mode OFF ba PServer Print Server Name T Password is changed Print Server Password v NetWare S sa LE Polling Interval L__ sec 1 65535 gt NetWare Sett Bindery NDS Setting NDS E Bindery File Server Name NDS NDS Context Name Cc NDS Tree Name Nprinter Rprinter Fite Saver heh Printer Number 255 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting ON F odl cance Settings Description IPX Setting Select ON to connect to the IPX environment OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default Tips e In the administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Status to confirm the Net Ware connection status d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 11 Displaying this machine on the network map 5 4 Displaying this machine on the network map Using Windows Vista or later Windows Vista Windows 7 Server 2008 or Server 2008 R2 allows you to dis play this machine on th
261. conim E on Do Nor Confirm i Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Connection Timeout 60 Esec Max Mail Size No Limit Server Capacity E moyen 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address E Authentication Setting POP before SMTP OFF H POP before SMTP Time 5__ sec 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID T password is changed CT Password Co CL Domain Name Authentication Setting Set Value g koye 100 15000 Step100 I Binary Division Divided Mail Size Settings E mail TX Setting Description Select this check box to transmit E mails ON Selected is specified by default Scan to E mail Select ON to use the Scan to E mail ON is specified by default SMTP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server SMTP Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 60 sec is specified by default Max Mail Size If you restrict the size of an E mail
262. ct Server Authentica tion Method Select the LDAP server authentication method e Set Value Use the settings of Login Name Password and Domain Name e User Authentication Synchronizes with the user authentication of this machine Uses the user name and password of the registered user of this machine as Login Name and Password e Dynamic Authentication The system prompts you to enter the user name and password at LDAP searching Set Value is specified by default Use Referral Select whether to use the referral function if necessary Make an appropriate choice to fit the LDAP server environment ON is specified by default Search Condition At tributes Select attributes to be specified when performing the LDAP search The setting can be switched between Name cn and Nickname display Name Name is specified by default Search Select ON to display candidate destinations when entering a part of the name to search for a destination via the LDAP server OFF is specified by default Initial Setting for Search Details Specify LDAP search conditions Search Attributes Authen tication Tips Select this check box to enable the attribute based authentication when Authentication Method is set to Simple and Select Server Authentica tion Method to Dynamic Authentication If this check box is selected the user does not need to enter all of the DN Di
263. ctenay cs ectcenei ce ceeantay cd ennceecdazectapuccedsencceceds soucdnaccesects 15 14 R gistering POI AIM ies s asa cat ewe set cence sence cede ee ease etc detec aaea aena siae Aaa aiaeei aeaaeai 15 15 Registering an E mail address program cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesceaeeseeseeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeees 15 15 Registering am FTP program raige aieiaa aaa hades aa aaa a aaa ea Taa che iaaii 15 16 Registering an SMB program cesccccseceeesereeeeeeeesesceseseecenssceeneseeesesseeeseeeeeseseeeeeseeeeaseneseseeessereeess 15 18 Registering a WebDAV program a a a e Eaa aa a a a aa aa a a aaa aaan niaaa Naata 15 19 Registering a User Box program cceeecceeesseeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaneeceaaeeeesaeeeseneesesaeeeseaeesesaeeeseneeseeeess 15 20 Registering a fax address PrOQraM eeceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaeeeesaeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseneesesaeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeeeeesseeess 15 21 Registering an Internet fax address program c cceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeaaeeeesesenaeeeees 15 22 Registering an IP address fax program cceeeseeeesseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeesaneeesneeeesneeseeeeeeeneeees 15 23 Registering a QrOUP prO g A a a a a T aae a Taaa a a aT e a A aaa aaa Aa Aa Aa a A Eaha aeaa Tiaa i oiae anian 15 25 Registering a program without destination eeceeesneeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseeneeensaeeess 15 26 Configuring the fax scan transmission Option Settings eeeeeeee
264. cters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password 7 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 4 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the WebDAV server is encrypted with SSL Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL encryption communication with the WebDAV server Enable SSL for WebDAV destinations registered on this machine In addition specify how to verify the cer tificate 1 In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book WebDAV and set SSL Settings to ON Default OFF gt To directly enter a destination WebDAV server configure SSL setting when entering the destination Se Administrator D ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Maintenance oe NTA Box Track Print Setting gt _ Fax Settings Customize Address Book Address Book WebDAV gt program Use opening number Name ee or character N ces wozz I Main Destination Information Host Address T Please check to enter host name C File Path Cl User ID Ecl T Password is changed Password is currently set Password Cl SSL Settings orr E ny ora Port No 80 1 65535 Limiting Access to Destinations ox d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 25 7 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment 7 4 2 Inthe administrator mode select Netw
265. ction is supported in an operating system of Windows Vista or later Win dows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 It is useful to resolve the name in the IPv6 environment In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting and set LLMNR Setting to Enable Default Disable Se Administrator Ready to Scan Ready to Print Maintenance Spe AE Settings k E eee Print Setting TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting Customize TCP IP ON z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps he Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings IPv4 DNS Host DNS Host Name Dynamic DNS Setting Disable z LLMNR Setting Disable z DNS Domain Name Setting DNS Domain Auto Obtain Enable DNS Search Domain Name Enable Auto Retrieval Enable DNS Default Domain Name DNS Search Domain Namel DNS Search Domain Name2 DNS Search Domain Name3 Ll ee 7 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 2 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 Using in the DFS environment Configure setting when a DFS Distributed File System is installed in your environment In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Client Setting and set DFS Setting to Enable Default Disable Sp Administrator Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Pri
266. d you can avoid the problem of having to specify SMB des tination authentication information allowing construction of a single sign on environment for SMB transmission e Default Domain Name Enter the default domain name to be added to the host name of the destination at SMB transmission using up to 64 characters If the domain name of the destination is not specified by the user when sending data using SMB the domain name specified here is added This item is not required when Active Directory is used as an authenti cation server e SMB User Credential Setting Select whether to use the user authen tication information login name and password of this machine as SMB destination authentication information host name and password OFF is specified by default e Edit SMB User Credentials This option is available when ON is se lected in SMB User Credential Setting If you select Restrict an SMB destination is registered including the user ID and password specified at login If you select Allow you can specify whether to register an SMB destination including or excluding the user ID and password If you select Reg excl ID and Password and register an SMB destina tion the user ID and password are automatically added at SMB trans mission Restrict is specified by default 17 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Print Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Setti
267. d and enter the address of your secondary DNS server DNS Server Settings IPv6 To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings DNS Server Settings IPv6 To resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or server on the network from this ma chine register your DNS server address IPv6 on this machine Settings Description DNS Server Auto Obtain Select whether to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server When using DHCPv6 the DNS server address can be specified automati cally Enable is specified by default Priority DNS Server Enter the address of your primary DNS server Secondary DNS Server 1 or Secondary DNS Server 2 IPsec Settings When using multiple DNS servers select a number to be registered and enter the address of your secondary DNS server To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPsec Settings Configure settings to enable use of IPsec on this machine The IPsec technology prevents the falsification or leakage of data on the IP packet basis by using encryption technology As IPsec encrypts data in the network layer secure communication is ensured even if you use protocols in an upper layer or applications that do not support encryption Settings Description IPsec Settings Specify parameters required for IPsec communication You can
268. d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Remote Panel Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Remote Panel Settings Configure settings for remotely controlling the Control Panel of this machine from another computer Settings Description Server Settings Configure settings to operate the Control Panel of this machine via a Web browser on a different computer For details refer to page 17 39 Client Settings Configure settings to operate the Control Panel of this machine using dedicated software on a different computer For details refer to page 17 39 Server Settings Remote Panel Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Remote Panel Settings Server Settings Configure settings to operate the Control Panel of this machine via a Web browser on a different computer Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to operate the Control Panel of this machine via a Web browser on a different computer OFF is specified by default Server Settings If necessary change the port number e Password Authentication Specify the password to restrict access to this machine using up to 64 characters OFF is specified by default e IP Filtering Permit Access Select whether to specify an IP address that allows access to this machine If Enable is selected enter the range of IP addresses that are allowed to acces
269. d Customize gt Header Footer Position RX Data Operation Settings gt Line Parameter Setting Memory RX Setting gt TX RX Settings Forward TX Setting 3 3 PC Fax RX Setting Y Function Setting TSI User Box Settings C None gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting 2 When using two lines select the line for which the PC Fax RX function is set and click Edit gt When using a single line go to Step 3 3 At PC Fax RX Setting configure the following settings 9 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting Maintenance Print Setting Fax Settings gt Header Footer Position PC Fax RX Setting Line Parameter Setting PC Fax RX Setting gt TX RX Settings Se Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print a User seen ee oe Track Receiving User Box Destination M password Check Communication Password one byte numeric oc _cance_ Settings Description PC Fax RX Setting Select Allow to use the PC Fax RX function Restrict is specified by default Receiving User Box Desti Select the location where you want to a received fax saved from Memory nation RX User Box or Specified User Box a User Box specified in F Code SUB Address Memory RX User Box is specifie
270. d by default Print Select whether to print a received fax after it has been received ON is specified by default Communication Pass word If you select Specified User Box for Receiving User Box Destination specify whether to check the communication password Sender ID for PC Fax reception To confirm the communication password select the Password Check check box then enter a communication password using up to eight digits d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 9 3 7 Using the TSI Routing function TSI Transmitting Subscriber Identification is a sender s fax number TSI Transmitting Subscriber Identifica tion Routing is a function that automatically sorts incoming faxes into preset boxes or redirects them to user computers or E mail addresses based on the fax numbers of the senders TSIs Tips This function cannot be used together with the following functions Forward TX Compulsory Memory RX PC Fax RX When using two lines you can select in the administrator mode Fax Settings TX RX Settings In dividual Receiving Line Setup to use the TSI Routing function by line In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Settings RX Data Operation Settings TSI User Box Settings then click OK Se Administrator 2j Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fs User Maintenance iaa Auth Account Box Track
271. d of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 77 16 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 10 Operating the machine Control Panel remotely 1 6 Accessing the machine directly Configure the settings for accessing this machine directly from another computer on the network and oper ating the Control Panel of the machine using a Web browser In the administrator mode select Network Remote Panel Settings Remote Panel Server Settings then configure the following settings Maintenance Remote Panel Settings Remote Pan Settings Box Print Setting Store Add Fax Settings Wizard Customize Sp Administrator 2 B Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a User 3 omegi Auth Account Network Track Remote Panel Server Settings Server Setting OFF Port No SSL 1 65535 Password Authentication OFF T Password is changed Current Password Co New Password Cr Retype New Password E IP Filtering Permit Access Disable Sett booo foooo set2 moo moo Y Set3 moo mo Set5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 el Server Settings De
272. dard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting Customize System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings Preview Settings List Counter Qe Administrator Logout Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print User oe g ae Track Print Setting Store Adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Preview Settings Real time preview OFF 2 ox 14 10 6 Printing a stamp on blank pages Print date time or stamp on blank pages inserted by the cover seat or inter sheet function In the administrator mode select System Settings Blank Page Print Settings and set Print Setting to Print Default Do Not Print gt Machine Setting Register Support Information Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings i System ila Qs Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan GD Ready to Print a User Auth Account Box Track Print Setting Store Adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Blank Page Print Settings Print Setting Print cas d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 41 14 Setting the operat
273. ddress using DHCP select Auto Input then specify the auto input method Auto Input is specified by default IP Address Enter the fixed IP address assigned to the machine Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask Default Gateway Enter the default gateway d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring network environment settings 2 1 Confirming the IP address Confirm the IP address assigned to this machine When you access Web Connection you need the IP ad dress of this machine In the Control Panel select Utility Device Information then confirm the IP address of this machine ility gt Device Information Function Version Version 4 Utility IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 IPv Address 07 29 2011 09 11 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 2 2 Confirming Web browser settings 2 2 2 Confirming Web browser settings The Web Connection page may not be displayed correctly or changed settings may not be applied depend ing on your Web browser settings Before using Web Connection confirm the following settings in the Web browser JavaScript Must be enabled Cookies Must be enabled BEX Reference For details on how to confirm and change settings refer to the Help of your Web browser d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 2 5 Confirming Web browser settings 2 2 2 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 Basic Usage 3 1 How to access 3
274. de cesta dente gaendceapenedanchgeades 12 18 Employing the NTLM authentication c ecccecssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeessneeeeeeessseeaeeeeseees 12 20 19 4 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 11 1 12 11 2 12 11 3 12 12 12 13 12 13 1 12 13 2 12 13 3 12 13 4 12 14 12 15 12 16 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 19 1 12 19 2 12 19 3 13 1 COV OMVIOW 235 25 Seas caches oct cdc da tbeaG sau tuaut A E T Gace acts cunaud E A A E E EEEN 12 20 Configurig basic settings for the NTLM authentication 0 0 0 eeeceeesseeeeneeeeenneeeeeneeeesneeeeeeeeeeneees 12 21 Using t e WINS Server jsscesiescevesecciseseeseatigsavesesanscecnoscanda ina cananeceedacdapaccasaanegsaatiecsacsbaeenssaendanteastaneae 12 24 Using the direct hosting SMB S rvViCe eeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeaneeesaaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeees 12 25 Employing the LDAP authentication eccccssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneneeeesseneeeeeeeseneneeeeeeees 12 26 OVEMVIGW TE dente veasnc ebsaagasnacexesceceecvee caasbecewzeca te subehasacesantzeguseennesssbepaua T 12 26 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP authentication eesseesseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeneeeeesaeeeennees 12 27 USING SSL COMMUNICATION nsdir ee aa ea a pa dunes A aa EA RAR AAAA Eran Eara Installing the NDS over IPX authentication OVGIVIOW iho ce ch ies ate a a E a eaaa ean AE aaa aae a A a reaa E A Aa a Ea E Con
275. destination using the IP address IPv4 IPv6 or host name In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Direct Hosting Setting and then set Direct Hosting Setting to ON Default ON System Maintenance Settings Print Setting V SMB Setting gt Direct Hosting Setting User Auth Account Network Box Track Sp Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print ga ress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Direct Hosting Setting Direct Hosting Setting ON F d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 25 12 Employing the LDAP authentication 12 6 12 6 Employing the LDAP authentication Overview When you use the LDAP server for user management you can restrict users of this machine by authentication using LDAP Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine When employing the LDAP authentication function follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings for the LDAP authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 27 Set the following
276. details on configuring the setting refer to page 14 14 Change function keys to be displayed on the screen in each mode gt For details on how to change the function keys to be displayed on the main screen in the copy mode and the print settings screen in the User Box mode refer to page 14 15 gt For details on how to change the function keys to be displayed on the main screen in the fax scan mode and the send or save setting screen in the User Box mode refer to page 14 17 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 13 14 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 Allowing the change of functions keys in each mode Allow a change of function keys to be displayed on the main screen in each mode In the administrator mode select System Settings Function Display Key Permission Setting then set Copy Print or Send Save to Allow Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan GB Ready to Print a User Maintenance Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Function Display Key Permission Setting gt Register Support Copy Print Allow Information Send Save Allow gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings OK Cancel gt User Box Setting Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection
277. dy to Scan Greasy to Print g Seaton User f Maintenance die Auth Account Box Settings _Ja 1000 m 5 SS Continue Job Restrict Restrict Allow Full Color Black z mw H anw Max Allowance Set Total Allowance F Total E o 9999999 Individual Allowance F Color 1 1 9999999 1 1 9999999 F Black Box Administration F Box Count E ii i oow Limiting Access to Destinations I Reference Allowed Group Search from List Registered Reference Group Number zi Totalo PE M Access Allowed Level Settings Description No User registration number Select User opening number to automatically assign the smallest available number When you want to specify a number select Input directly and then enter a number User Name Enter the user name to log in to this machine using up to 64 characters E mail Address If necessary enter the E mail address of the user using up to 320 charac ters excluding spaces If the E mail address is registered the Scan to Me function is available to the user For details refer to page 12 40 User Password Retype User Password Enter the password to log in to this machine using up to 64 characters ex cluding 12 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 2 Employing the MFP authentication 1 2 Settings Description Function Permission Restricts functions available
278. dy to Scan a Ready to Print g i System EEA Print Setting Store Address gt Machine Setting Flash Display Setting gt Register Support Flash Display Allow 7i Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings gt User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the Scan Environment 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 EE 7 Configuring the Scan Environment 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment Overview The Scan to E mail is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine as E mail attachment Since this machine supports S MIME and SSL TLS encryption and POP before SMTP authentication secu rity can be assured When the LDAP server or Active Directory is used for user management you can search for or specify E mail address from the server When using the Scan to E mail follow the below procedure to configure the settings l Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 NO Configure basic settings for Scan to E mail gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 4 3 Set the following options according to your environment
279. e 4 1 Registering information of this machine Register device information of this machine such as the name installed place and information of the admin istrator Registering device information enables you to confirm it by selecting Information Device Information Configuration Summary in the user mode of Web Connection In the administrator mode select System Settings Machine Setting then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout D Ready to Scan EB keav to Print fa User Maintenance Security Auth Account Network Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings gt Machine Setting Machine Setting gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings gt User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Device Location Administrator Registration Administrator Name E mail Address Extension No Input Machine Address Device Name E mail Address Wizard Customize Settings Description Device Location Enter the location where to install this machine using up to 255 charac ters Administrator Registra tion Register information on the administrator of this machine Administrator Name Enter the administrator name of this machine using
280. e is specified by default Reconnection Settings H necessary change the time to reconnect to the authentication server Reconnect for every login Connects to the authentication server at the time authentication is carried out on this machine If the authentica tion server is in the shutdown state at the time authentication is carried out on this machine first confirm that the authentication server is down and use the temporarily saved authentication information to log in to this machine e Set Reconnect Interval Connect to the authentication server at the time specified in Reconnection Time and check the status of the au thentication server If the authentication server is in the shutdown state use the authentication information temporarily saved in the main unit to log in Set Reconnect Interval is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 29 12 Employing the LDAP authentication 12 6 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the LDAP server is encrypted with SSL Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL encryption communication with the LDAP server In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then config ure the following settings Settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan E rezov to Print User Auth Account LLEIS System Settings Maintenance Print Setting
281. e Address Fax Settings Machine Setting Machine Setting gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print s User Saree Security Auth Account Network Box Settings Sea Device Location Administrator Registration Administrator Name E mail Address Extension No Input Machine Address Device Name E mail Address ox Cancel Tips The sender E mail address can be changed on the Touch Panel before sending the E mail if neces sary e If user authentication is installed on this machine the E mail address of the login user is used as the sender s E mail address d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 5 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 1 Using SSL TLS communication Encrypt communications between this machine and the E mail server SMTP using SSL or TLS This ma chine supports the SMTP over SSL and Start TLS Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL TLS encryption communication with the E mail server In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Sp Administrator
282. e Directory is used as an authentication server the domain name of Active Directory is added to the login name When other authentication method is used the domain name entered at Default Domain Name is added OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 44 12 Constructing a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission 12 10 Settings Description Edit SMB User Creden tials If you have selected ON at SMB User Credential Setting select whether to allow registration of the SMB destination including authentication infor mation same as that for user authentication When you want to allow only users whose authentication information for user authentication matches that for SMB destination to access the SMB destination select Restrict Restrict is specified by default User Authentication NTLM Select ON to use the single sign on function ON is selected by default 12 42 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 11 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or account 12 12 11 12 11 1 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or account Restricting available functions by user or account Employing User Authentication or Account Track enables you to restrict available functions by user or ac count For example you can set it up so that specific users or accounts can use the color printing function b
283. e Nprinter Rprinter using up to 63 char acters excluding lt gt and Enter the print server name registered in the NWadmin Printer Number Enter the Nprinter Rprinter number 255 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 25 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 8 In the NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 Print Server mode NDS Y When you select the Print Server mode the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server From the client log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority 1 2 Start NWAdmin 3 Select an organization or department container for the print service and select Print Services Quick Setup non NDPS from the Tools menu A Type of the printer to Other Unknown and click Create 5 Log in to the administrator mode of Web Connection Fill in Print Server Name Printer Name Print Queue Name and Print Queue Volume Then set the 6 Inthe administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then configure the following settings Settings Bp Aarinisrator 2 i Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fsi Maintenance User Track Lea ddress Fax Settings Wizard Customize NetWare Setting is reflected after reset IPX Setting orra Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Ethernet Frame Type Auto Detect NetWare Pr
284. e Super G3 mode select this option e ECM Off Generally faxes are sent while checking that the fax data is free of errors by using ECM Error Correction Mode To reduce the time required to send a fax select this option e International Communication Select this option to send a fax to areas where communication conditions are poor Faxes are sent at a lower speed e Check Destination Select this option to use Check Dest amp Send The fax number specified for fax is checked against the remote fax number CSI and the fax is sent only when they match Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 1 Registering address books 15 15 1 7 Registering an Internet fax address An Internet fax address can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration Internet Fax then click OK to configure the following settings Sp Administrator B Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Maintenance Be anes Print Setting S Fax Settings Wizard Customize Address Book Internet Fax Pomp O Use opening number Eee vvectrou m Name C a j Specify a keyword for address search and display by regi
285. e Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 4 and later Default Domain Name Enter the default domain name of your authentication server using up to 64 characters The default domain name cannot be prefixed by an asterisk k The default domain name must be uppercase letters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 21 12 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 5 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings gt User Authentication ing gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings General Settings General Settings LLET Gp Administrator Logout D Ready to Scan Ready to Print a rere User Maintenance Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Wizard User Authentication Overwrite User Info Default Authentication Method Public User Access Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Account Track Account Track Input Method Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Trac Users When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Customize ON MFP Exter
286. e computer if necessary 120 sec is specified by default Distributed Scan Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Distributed Scan Settings This machine can be integrated into the system using the Distributed Scan Management Select whether to use the scan function associated with the distributed scan server of Windows Server 2008 R2 The function sends the original data scanned on this machine to the distributed scan server When receiving the file the scan server carries out SMB Send or Scan to E mail or sending to Microsoft Office SharePoint Server based on the registered PSP POST SCAN PROCESS OFF is specified by default Tips Enable WS scan and configure the SSL communication settings in advance This machine must join the Active Directory domain in advance 17 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 SSDP Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings SSDP Settings Select whether to use the SSDP Simple Service Discovery Protocol or not To use SSDP change the mul ticast TTL as necessary Using SSDP allows that software on the network or other services search for services which can be supplied by this machine It also notifies that services have been started on this machine This function is available when using services such as OpenAPI Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use SSDP
287. e data registered on this machine to the computer as a file Import Write the data stored in a file to this machine Exit Exit the utility Managing the stamp data You can register or edit stamp data using Data Managing Utility Up to eight units of stamp data can be man aged Y You cannot edit or delete stamp data that was registered on this machine when it was shipped 1 In the Web Connection login page start the Menage Stamp Data The stamp data list registered on this machine appears 2 To register or edit the stamp data click Edit gt Clicking Delete deletes the registered stamp data The stamp data will not be deleted until you click Export to the device and write it to this machine System 2 Stamp List Delete Exportto the device 3 Register or edit the stamp data and click OK gt You can edit data while checking the result in the preview Edit Stamp No 1 Stamp Name Stamp image file Scan Zoom Magnification 100 10 100 200 300 400 50o 10 500 Preview OK Cancel 15 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 10 Using data management utility 1 5 Settings Description Stamp Name Enter the stamp name using up to 16 characters Stamp image file Click Scan and specify the location of the image BMP file used as a stamp Zoom Magnification Specify the zoom ratio of the stamp image Th
288. e eaa aa aaa e a cundeh aa ae 1 3 Operations Required to Use Web Connection 2 1 2 2 Configuring network environment SettingS cccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessneneeeeenseeeaeeeeneseneeeeeeseeneneeeess 2 3 OVGIVICW A AE E E E A E he A O E givhe 2 3 ASSIGNING An P address smiir eaa aeaaea eaa aaa a a aaa a A riaan 2 3 Contirming the IP address iada a eaaa aa Aa EE aAA TA E E A a N 2 4 Confirming Web browser SettingS cccssseeecesseeeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeseeeeeeeseeseaeeseessneeeeeeeessenneeeeeseeeanenss 2 5 Basic Usage 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 5 3 6 3 7 HoW to ACCESS sise ns ceivecccdectecucccnacuets cceceisucawecdasin sedceuiscncuavndessdueiendeaucutsoudesousuie duasassscdcecsucuvundeusy sdeekesute 3 3 Layout of Web Connection Screen ccccssseeeeeeeessneeeeeeesnneneneeeesnneeeeeeesnenaaeseesssneeeeeesssneeeeeeeesens 3 4 BOGEN OS 5 3 T TT cd cc tented Seve occ cete sen etieneesdeectetGescecshaeecs T 3 6 LOGINS COCR aens iire Resi iieaaeta oie AE EA a Aaaa a aaa Geaa rear 3 6 LOGIT MOCO EE E E A A te sdnedupaluadencees cuts th otecntnavedesnseelutenas 3 7 SWITCHING IOGIN MODES vise veesiiacecetisseevecceangadee die cuvecce sh vebyensedeegeesedeuyaracustecy dgadeedevienasaiieetsieadeiaes vecnest 3 8 Logging in to the administrator MOC escceeseeeeeneeeeenneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeneeeesaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaees 3 9 Loggingiin to the User Modein r a A e aa A Aae 3 11 User Mode Ov
289. e in the remarks column of the activity report if user authentication or account track is enabled for this ma chine e Normal Printing The line status or sending setting will be printed e User Name Printing The user name for user authentication will be print ed e Account Name Printing The account name for user authentication will be printed Normal Printing is specified by default Network Fax RX Error Report Select whether to print a report if the machine has failed to receive an Inter net fax or IP address fax ON is selected by default MDN Message Select whether to print a report notifying that an Internet fax has been sent to the recipient machine ON is selected by default DSN Message Select whether to print a report notifying that an Internet fax has been sent to the mail server of the recipient machine OFF is specified by default Print E mail Message Body Select whether to print a report notifying that an Internet fax has been suc cessfully received after it was received The report has the subject and mes sage body of an Internet fax Print is specified by default 9 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 O Configuring the Network Fax Environment 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 1 0 a 10 Configuring the Network Fax Environment 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment Overview Internet Fax is a function used t
290. e network map The network map is very useful for checking the location and information of this machine as well as for net work troubleshooting Also when you click the icon of this machine on the network map you can access Web Connection To display this machine on the network map enable LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery In the administrator mode select Network LLTD Setting and set LLTD Setting to Enable Default En able Sp Administrator Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print User Auth Account Network Track Wizard System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fax Settings Customize LLTD Setting LLTD Setting Enable z gt LLTD Setting or E cance d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 5 Displaying the network error code 5 5 Displaying the network error code If an error relating to the network occurs on this machine the Touch Panel displays an error message with a brief description To view detailed information for troubleshooting purposes you can configure settings so that the error code is displayed simultaneously In the administrator mode select Maintenance Network Error Code Display Setting and set Error Code Display to ON Default OFF System Settings gt Meter Count gt ROM Version gt Import Export Status Notification Setting gt Total Counter Notification Setting gt Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time
291. e ratio can be adjusted in in crements of 1 Preview Enlarges a stamp image You can check the image details 4 Click Export to the device gt Clicking Undo returns to the state before the change The registered or edited stamp data is written to this machine Tips Clicking System displays the system menu The following menu items are available in the system menu Auto Protect Setting Lock the computer screen if a specified amount of time has elapsed without the machine being operated You can change the time until the screen is locked E Export Save the data registered on this machine to the computer as a file Import Write the data stored in a file to this machine Exit Exit the utility 15 10 4 Managing the font macro data You can add or delete font macro data using Data Managing Utility Y To manage font or macro data use Internet Explorer and install Flash Player Ver 9 0 or later 1 In the Web Connection login page start the Manage Font Macro The font macro data list registered on this machine appears 2 Toadd font or macro data click Add gt The lists of font and macro can be switched by Font Macro gt Clicking Delete deletes the selected font or macro data System 2 Font Macro List on FontMacro All 2 No Type Destination Name ID 0001 PCL Font RAM PelFontinternal1 0002 PCLFont RAM PclFontinternal2 0003 PCLFont RAM PclFontinternal3
292. e settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 Configure basic settings for the SMB printing gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 8 6 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Resolve the name using the WINS server page 8 7 Use the SMB printing function in the IPv6 environment page 8 8 Specify a destination with a host name in an environment where the DNS server is page 8 9 not running Supported in the computer loaded with Windows Vista or later d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 5 Configuring the SMB printing environment 8 3 Configuring basic settings for the SMB printing Enable the SMB printing In addition specify information to share this machine with SMB In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Print Setting then configure the following set tings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Print Setting SMB Print OFF z NetBIOS Name Cc 7 Print Service Name L Workgroup WORKGROUP ox cancel WINS Setting Client setting gt Direct Hosting Setting Settings Description SMB Print Select ON to use the SMB printing function OFF is specified by default NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS n
293. e the following settings Se Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan B Ready to Print 2 User Maintenance Sa Auth Account Network Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Ac gt Fax Settings Wizard Customize OpenAPI Use SSL TLS Non SSL Only z Port Number 0001 1 65535 Port No SSL 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Client Certificates Do not request v Validity Period Confirm z CN Do Not Confirm z Key Usage Do Not Confirm z Chain Do Not Confirm z Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm z Settings Description Use SSL TLS To use SSL communication select SSL Only or SSL Non SSL SSL Only is specified by default Port No SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 50003 is specified by default Certificate Verification To verify the certificate select items to be verified Level Settings If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Client Certificates Select whether to request a certificate from clients that connect to this ma chine Do not request not request is specified by default Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate
294. e verified tion Level Settings If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item e Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Network Stop Time Specify the delay time between the start of an authentication process and the end of network communication if necessary If an authentication process does not succeed within the specified time all network communication will stop To specify the delay time select the Network Stop Time check box and enter the delay sec in Stop Time To restart the authentication process after network communication stopped reboot this machine Tips In the administrator mode select Network IEEE802 1X Authentication Setting IEEE802 1X Au thentication Trial to confirm the current authentication status The authentication process can be acti vated for the authentication server 13 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 8 Sending data to the authenticated share folder Scan to Authorized Folder 1 3 13 8 Sending data
295. easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation Destination Type Select an address type of the destination IP Address is specified by default 15 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 1 Registering address books 15 Settings Description Address If IP Address or Host Name was selected for Destination Type enter the destination IP address or host name e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 e Example of host name entry host example com Also enter a domain name If E mail Address was selected for Destination Type enter the destina tion mail address To specify a destination by E mail address enter the destination IP address or host name following ipaddrfax To enter an IP address following the symbol put the IP address in brack ets e Example of IP address IPv4 entry ipaddrfax 192 168 1 1 To enter an IP address IPv6 enter IPv6 following left bracket e Example of IP address IPv6 entry ipaddr fax IPv6 fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2F16 To enter a host name
296. ecified Time Se Administrator 2 B Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs System x aie _ pii ii Fax Settings Customize Update Firmware at Specified Time Update Firmware at Specified Time Disable z Firmware Update Start Time Hour 0 Minute 0 o canca Settings Description Update Firmware at Spec ified Time Select Enable to enable this machine to automatically update the firmware at the specified time Disable is specified by default Firmware Update Start Time Enter the time when this machine should update the firmware automatical ly 14 50 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 12 Updating the firmware of this machine 1 4 Updating the firmware manually Download a firmware from the Internet to this machine and update the firmware manually You can keep using the machine as usual while downloading a firmware However you cannot use this machine while updating the machine firmware When the firmware updating process has been completed this machine reboots automatically In the administrator mode select Network Internet ISW Settings Firmware Update Parameters then configure the following settings e Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print fs System Settings Maintenance Print Setting E TopnP seming Firmware Update Parameters Firmware Download Status Bio E Download a firmware update The device is available for nor
297. ected is specified by default Individual Allowance To manage the upper limit by color printing or black and white printing sep arately select the check boxes of items to be managed then enter the maximum allowance OFF not selected is specified by default Box Administration To manage the upper limit of User Boxes that can be registered select the Box Count check box then enter the maximum allowance OFF not selected is specified by default 12 46 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 1 2 12 13 12 13 1 12 13 2 Limiting the access to destinations for each user Methods to limit access to destinations You can limit access to destinations for each user on this machine The following three methods are available to limit access to destinations Method to limit access Description Managing based on the ac Sorts destinations depending on the importance level and set the upper cess allowed level limit of the access level for each user For details refer to page 12 47 Managing based on the Sorts destinations into groups A user can only access permitted destina reference allowed group tions in the group For details refer to page 12 50 Managing based onacom Set the access range based on a combination of the important level of a bination of the access al destination and the relationship between the destination and the user lowed level and the
298. ed in the MAIN MENU 1 eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeaeeteeneeeeeeneeeenneeess 14 9 Changing the theme of the Main MENU e cceeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeteaeeeeeaneeseaneeeeeaeeeseneeeeneeess 14 11 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main screen using a display pattern 14 12 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main screen Individual specification 14 13 OVGINIOW AA EEP E AEE ETAT E tid ses ee eid Aue gaa doe Atos 14 13 Allowing the change of functions keys in each MOCE cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeaees 14 14 Changing function keys in COPY MOE eeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseaeeseseaeeseeaeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaes 14 15 Changing function keys in Fax ScCan mode cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseccaeeeeeseceeeeeessenneees 14 17 Allowing the change of display language on the TOUCH Panel eesseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeaes 14 19 Notifying of the machine status Via E mail c cccs eeceessseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeesseeeeeeesees 14 20 OVGIVIOW nn a a Si ae Rat ead ents he teeta eta eee 14 20 Configuring the machine status notification SettiNGS cccceccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeneeeees 14 20 Notifying of the machine counter Via E mail c eccccsesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesneneeeeeseeneeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeees 14 22 COV SII OW tad os arid T esa eters Meagan wwe cates oh
299. ed when displaying a registered page If a page in Administrator mode is registered in Bookmarks the page used to log in to Administrator mode will be displayed when displaying a registered page Creating a shortcut for a specific page You can create a shortcut to each Web Connection function page at any location such as the desktop of your computer To create a shortcut drag and drop the icon displayed in the address bar of the Web browser to any location on your computer 3 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 6 Using the Help function 3 3 6 Using the Help function Using the online help Log in to Web Connection and click and you will be able to display the online help The online help shows you the detailed descriptions of the function being set To display the online help you must connect your computer to the Internet Displaying the meaning of the setting in the popup window In the Network menu that appears after you log in to the administrator mode of Web Connection you can use the popup help Placing the mouse cursor over the item of the screen On Mouse or clicking the item On Focus displays the description of that item in the pop up window While confirming the meaning of the item you can configure network settings In the screen to log in to the administrator mode you can specify the method to display the popup help Web Connection Select Login Administrator Admin Mode Adm
300. eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 16 19 Sending the machine operating status eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeesaeeseeaeeeesaeeeseaeesensneeenaees 16 19 Allowing read and write of the machine setting information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 16 19 Associating with the fax server ccccssseccceseseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeessneeeeeeesenneeseeeseneeaaesesseenaaeeseeseneaeesessnes 16 20 OVGIVIOW EE EEE T E E EE aes sede s a Abies E TE 16 20 Registering applications sssini a riein eea a ada iaeoe eit eee a See ek eee eee 16 20 Application setting templates viisiin anae a e a AE ANA aa iia 16 22 Associating with the fax server communicating in E Mail format eeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 16 24 Operating the machine Control Panel remotely eccccsseseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessneneeeeeesnenees 16 25 OVGINIOW inc sh Sie eta Send Deters iat eee ah eR eer A EE at anh ee E EE ath ence enete a 16 25 Using the dedicated software escceseceeescceceseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeesesceeeeecesseoeeseseeeeesseeeeneeeesesceeneneneess 16 25 Accessing the machine directly ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeceeeseeseeeaee 16 27 Setup Buttons Administrator Settings Administrator Settings srn iae Aa aae aaaea ananena Aa Eaa ah EEEn aN E aaa Taai 17 3 Network Settings mamn e aeaa a aiden NaN die 17 4 PEG PAIP Settings see e aa aa aae e aa Aaa AA Aa pA
301. eeeeeeensseeaeeeeesseeeeesenssneneeeeeseaes 5 8 Using in the IPX environment 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensneneeeeeeessneeeeeeesneenaeeeessneeaaeeeeseeneaeeeesssenneeeess 5 11 Displaying this machine on the network Map ssssunnnnenunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 5 12 Displaying the network error COCC ccccessseeeeeeeeseneeeeeessnnneeeeesenneeeeeeeesenneneeeesneeaeeeenseseeeeeesenes 5 13 t ting Envi Encrypting communication using Web Connection sssuunsssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnmnnn 6 3 Changing the administrator password cccsseseeeeeeesseeneeeeeesnneeeeeeseeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeseseaneeeenseneaeeeens 6 4 Customizing the initial SCree n ce2 ccscsscceceeseecce cesses deewcee aane akanda aaia adana anaandaa nakadaan anaid 6 5 Changing the time period until automatic 1OG OUt s ssnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 6 6 Configuring flash view settings ccsssseeceeeeseeeeeeeeseneeneeeeesenneeeeeseseneeseessenenaaeeeseeneaeeeseseseneeeeess 6 7 Configuring settings for display in flash viewW s ssssssssesssssnresssrrnnnssertnnnsstennntnstttnnnnennnnnnsennn nennen 6 7 Restricting the flash VEW aeaa eaa a aa eE T a aa a anid es eaaa Aa aaae sea aaa A E les aa eraai anaia 6 8 Er Configuring the Scan to E mail environment cccsseseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseneeeeeeens 7 3 COV EIMIOW E dead SA in
302. eeeenseeeeeeseenenseneenseenseseenensnnenesseenensnenenes 4 3 Registering support information cccceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeensseeneeeeenseneeeeeesnneneaeeesseenaeeeeensnneneeeenenees 4 4 Setting the date and time for the machine s susssnnssunnsnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannamamma 4 5 Manually Configuring Settings s sess aningen arei eaaa Kaaa eaa EEEa E A Kaaa 4 5 Automatically configuring settings using NTP ceeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeaeeeesaeeeeseneeseneeeegs 4 6 Configuring Network Settings of this Machine 5 1 Using in the IPV4 environment ss sssssnssnnnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn ennnen nnana nnn 5 3 STAVE E E E E E E E E E A T 5 3 Assigning an IP ACQNCSS ninaa tsi tds E a A a EEE eat AEE REE 5 4 Registering the DNS server used by this machine s nsnesnesnnnesrenrnsennnnnnnnnnnnnrnnennrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 5 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Contents 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 8 1 Registering the hostname sc ccctccccissutecceedsedeasensayscdeaecelseusuieatenetecnsnienanseauetddetedhsazevecenacedenscasnatieaeagadeds 5 6 Registering the domain name pisapisao reur nae aeaaeae aaee eana aaa Ea Ea cecuade csagcedestudecadeareeccteds 5 7 Using in the IPv6 environment 2 ccessseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeeeenneeeeeeessn
303. eeeesaeeeseaeeeseaeeeesaaeeeesaeeeenneenas 9 11 9 3 3 Using the Fax Retransmit fUNCtION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeseeeeeas 9 12 9 3 4 Using the compulsory Memory RX FUNCTION 0 00 ee ee eeeeee sence tence eeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseaeeteaeeeeeneeeeeas 9 13 9 3 5 Using the Forward TX fUNCt ON ic se cpecseetavecueci dicvestecedceedectideaeettiaie ene ntieateaveveabencnede vue Bedorevaundansete 9 14 9 3 6 Using the PC Fax RX TUNCON aresce cesecepey ater cctrebeeres shot chaetyesbuuneeateptaecpntperegeendepeantenteatgenitees teemeeheee 9 16 9 3 7 Using the TSI Routing fUnCtion 0 2 eccceceseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseneneseeeeeeseeeeseseneseeeseseneeeseeeenseneesesees 9 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Contents 3 9 3 8 Restricting PC FAX tranSMiSSion ccesscesesesesseeeeseecesesceeeenenenesceeeeeeeesaesensseeeseseeeseseeeeassnaeeesees 9 21 9 4 Using an additional line 9 5 Specifying fax report print CONCITIONS cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeneeaeeeeseneeeeeeesenenens 9 23 gt ork 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax ENViIrONMENK ccsseeeceeseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeesneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeessenees 10 3 ONE AT EEE ae eed Se ca 2 od O auites fades teats E dude Tevet E 10 3 Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving an Internet faXx ceeeeeeesseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneees 10 4 Checking a fax receptio
304. eeeeseaaeeeeeseaaaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesenenaeeeeees 17 23 SNMP Settings iaoei na a a a o A E nina A ES a TA A 17 24 AppleTalk Settings nprap nins ea aa fase ea aaea na agian adaa aa a a eaaa a eaS 17 25 Bonjour Setting ranae eee ti ae ae ie ey 17 25 EGP Socket Settings A E 515 sees easel es ne ceca ad ete utente Siete des eee cee ee 17 25 EGP SOCK et iini vais eh eda esti ice cancia sve dna veeaviand a a SEEE AEE E aa EAA aE aTa 17 26 TCP Socket ASCII Modo irinari di anrai evscccnasetbvcuencedacdscaskanusecaganseanacacdvesdvecestindeddeacva 17 26 Network Fax Settings aroeira desceacautipccheredacecshecideavisievantcd aari iea Eea Eae Parona aara darti 17 26 Network Fax Function Settings ccecccceseceesseceseseeeeesceenensceseseceesseeeseseeeeeseeeesesceseseesesseeeeeseeenes 17 27 SMTP LX SOUINGS iieri ennei ppan earen a aaan taaa aa aaa A EAA EAE aaas ASAREE a 17 27 SMTP RX Settings paoiir aparani en aae cvedeeueascqiansticpaudsdeasabensajedeasedaheshenaascuaveabaestiadeend 17 27 WebDAV Settings aii eaaa aeaaaee N S aa aaaea a Aaa ae a aa aA Aa E AO EEEa A eNA aa aia 17 28 WebDAV Client SettingS r i eaa aaee araa a ech pd data ee lap sgesacakepdaniacelaaeeazacdapddcaaa ieginaeescciateeas 17 28 WebDAV Server SettingS iesin iiaeaa aaaeeeaa aiee seini Enee apaa ak eda Mp kane TETAN 17 29 Proxy Setting for Remote ACCESS ccccesececeseneceseeeeeneeeeeeeneeeseeeeseceseseeeesceeeseseeeeseeseseseeeseneeeees
305. eeeeseeeeeeeesseeeaeeeseseeneeeeeesseneneesesseenaes 11 13 Specifying the maximum number of User BOXES 0 cc ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeenneeeeeneeeenaaes 11 13 Deleting all empty User Boxes cccseseeseceeeseeeesseceseseneeneseeenenceeneseaeseeeeeseseeenseeasesaeseseseeesesenenes 11 13 Automatically deleting files from a User BOX eescceeseceeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeseseeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeseesensaeeeeeas 11 14 Specifying how to process a file after printing or transmission cesceeesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeees 11 15 Configuring System User Box environment ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesenneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeesseeeees 11 16 Deleting all Secure COCUMENIS cccceececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeaaeeeseaaeaeeeseecaaeeeeeeseeseeeeeess 11 16 Automatically deleting files from a System User BOX esscceeeeeseesneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeeneneeeeea 11 16 Specifying operations of printed ID amp print COCUMENTHS ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeteneeeeeeeeenaeeees 11 17 Configuring the USB Memory Device SettingS ssssesccessseeeeeeessseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesneneeeeseseenees 11 18 Disabling user s operation of registration change of a User BOX sscccsssseeeeeseesseeeeeeeseees 11 19 from in Overview of User Authentication and Account Track ss sssensssunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 12 3 User Authentication 0s sc 33 t s0e
306. eeeesesneeeeeesseneeeeeesseeeeeseesees 12 20 OVGIVIOW estes E E shock a castaledectpes ace sea suattan edd seine checaes E Mls ev oueceay deve typivaaeschaes 12 20 Configurig basic settings for the NTLM authentication 00 0 0 eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeeeeneees 12 21 USING THE WINS Serve aiaa a a caved cuduenges banat avuseeaddalbersnaenuuteseedaedstvhagenteedtenedsn 12 24 Using the direct hosting SMB S rvViCe eeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaeetesaeeeeeneees 12 25 Employing the LDAP authentication cc ecccessseeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeessneeeeeessneeneeeeessneneeeeeneas 12 26 OVGIVIOW AE AT E eh hid dae AT E E et ee a 12 26 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP authentication eeseceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeneeeennes 12 27 USING SSL COMMUNICATION ieii aenn hve don codeine vee ai A a Senco 12 30 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication ccccsseececcesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeneeeesseneeeeeeseseeneneeeeees 12 31 OVGIVIOW itn Rarer a a e E daira a ni aoan Aaaa r ae elias 12 31 Configure basic settings for the NDS over IPX authentication sssssseesseeerreerrresrrnserrrerirrerresrennne 12 32 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication ccccsssseeeeessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeessseeneeeeesseeeeeeeenees 12 36 OVEIVIO WIG erecta etre aaah th coh pete An T a mes ea aaa a cas ahs ati rece ah cute connie Rea 12 36 Configuring basic settings for the NDS over
307. eeeesneeesees 14 33 Types of information that can be exported cccccceceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesceaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeseeaaee 14 33 How to export the information a a a ae e a a a a a a a aaa Ea e aT Ae Ea aa aaa aa ra idno aena E 14 33 Resetting the network settings ccccccecceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseaaaeeeeesenaaeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 14 34 Restarting the network interface cccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseecaaeeeeeeseeneeeeeeees 14 34 Deleting all address information cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeessaaeeeseeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 14 35 Outputting job logs is aaa raaa aaraa a geckeadeteceeea idence sees aE aE a sedunlacgecessnctes eseceaste stecdesanecdecte 14 36 Operations required to use this FUNCTION 2 eee eeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaneeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeesaeeteeneeeeaes 14 36 Downloading job OJS E eieaa r aa Taaa a araara as aare a aaa TA a A ASAE aaa a aa AE aaia nai e arsada EAA Eaa ian 14 37 Setting the operating environment for this Machine ccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeee 14 38 Configuring default settings for Normal Display and Enlarge Display collectively eee 14 38 Setting the action for switching the display to Enlarge Display ceesseeeesteeeeseeeeneeeeeeneeeeenees 14 38 Configuring the default method to display destinations ceeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeee
308. eeeeteeeeeenaeeesaaes 14 39 Changing the default scan data file NAME eeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeseeeeeeesaeeseneeseaeeeeeaeeeesneeeneeeens 14 40 Previewing the original being scanned in realtiMe cccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecaeeeeeeseenaeeeeenes 14 41 Printing a stamp on blank pages cccecccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeieeeeeeees 14 41 Setting the Skip job CONITIONS a a i aa e a ae a a aaa E aa a Aaa Aa a aaa a aaraa aahua iaa RES 14 42 Setting the processing accuracy of outline PDF eeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeesneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeennees 14 43 Allowing transmission of the machine usage frequency or function settings information 14 44 Using an advanced function by registering the license ccssssseccessseeeeeesseneeeeeeessneneneeeneee 14 45 Issuing the request codeine e aae a aaa ee da eo tauera adraia aa 14 45 Enabling the advanced fUNCtiON iiia aaaea ea eaaa a aaaea naana araa iaaa aaa aaia 14 46 Enabling the function using the function and license codes esssessieerieerrrssrrnssrrnrirrsrrnnerrnnsrene 14 46 Enabling the function using the token NUMDET eeceeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeaneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeenneeees 14 47 Updating the firmware of this MaChiNC cccceseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeneeeeeeesnneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 14 48 OVERVIGW E E T E A E E T 14 48 Preparing for downloading a fir MWALe escce
309. eees 13 8 Using different certificates depending on the application cccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaee 13 8 Exporting a certificate va sveciec ecea cnt decks chase ccndeetich caeenteas raaraa aure Eia AEn aa EA enaren reseau 13 9 Importing a certifi a Ei r este at ei eet ees a a edie aeaaea eh Glee ent eet 13 10 Deleting a Certificate i titia dain iia dete id van wae A E 13 10 Configuring certificate verification Settings ccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseneeeeeesseneeeeeeseeeeeee 13 11 Verifying a Certificate for peer 2 ceeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaaee 13 11 Importing external certificates used for validating the chain cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 13 12 Types of external certificates that Can be imported cece ceceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaee 13 12 POW 10 AMP OM 2 32 nes a eesti Rca eee te epee ce ees needed E 13 13 Registering user s certificates automatically on this machine cccccesesssensesseessssseeeeeeeees 13 14 Controlling the access to this machine by IP AdCIreSS eccceseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeseeeeeeseneenees 13 16 Using IPsec COMMUNICATION 222 acess aio cse ese ice ee ces Santee tees detec feed cde cece cectee tec teccneetedtvedeantecteccussetetvece 13 17 Using the IEEE802 1X authentication cccccsseccecceseseeeeeeeseeneeeeeesseneeeeeeeesneneeeeeessnnaee
310. eeesseeeees 12 60 Configuring common settings when using the authentication function 2 cceeeeeeeeee 12 61 Restricting print jobs without authentication information cccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeenees 12 62 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing ccssssseeessseeeeeeeeees 12 63 OVGIVIOW A A a ie el Are alvin cep ce E E a deuac denen deere cee eee AET 12 63 Permitting the Quick Authentication for Printing FUNCTION 0 eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteneeteesneeeeeneeteneeeess 12 63 Registering the quick authentication for printing Server cccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 12 64 USING SSE COMMUNICATION si ccisececsesecsadencasachiceusedg caaseanecicenaabacdatatecededscaaantandadcerdecveterssdededegesaeteese 12 66 Using the authentication Uniit ccccsssececcesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessneneeeeeeseneeeeeessneneaeseessneeeeeeesseeeeeeenseees 12 68 Setting operations of the authentication UMit eee eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeds 12 68 Authentication Unit IC Card type a aree eaea ar mearan an paea taa sanaaa aak raa iTe a ara iiaeaa na Eede 12 68 Authentication Unit biometric tyPe ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteaaeeeeecegaaaeeeeeescaeeeeeeseneeeeeesenaaee 12 69 Authenticating in the LDAP server using the authentication card LDAP IC Card Authentication 12 69 OE NE EEE RE EAE E T T E A A T 12 69 Configuring basic
311. eeessseeneeeess 13 23 Sending data to the authenticated share folder Scan to Authorized Folder 000 13 25 scan to Authorized Folder iciiz csietee es beeeei tien be deck eaa E ties dba A 13 25 Limiting the direct input Of addresses 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teense teaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaneeeeeeeseeneeeenaeeeeeneeees 13 26 Disabling user s operation of registration Change ccccesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeensnneneeeeseneeeeeeensenes 13 27 Using the copy security FUNCTION ecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeesesneeeeeeeseneeeaeeeseneeeeeeeeseseenenenss 13 28 Saving the operation log of the Control panel ccsseseeeeeceeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseneeeeeneseenees 13 29 Managing the machine power for power SAVING ccccseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeseneeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 14 3 Setting the Power key Power Save FUNCTION eecceeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaeeseeneeeneees 14 3 Switching to Power Save mode at specified time Weekly Timer essceeesseeeeseeeeeenreeeeneeeeseeees 14 5 Configuring the daylight saving time SettingS csssseeeeceesseeeeeeeeessneeeeeeeseseeaeeeesseseeeeeeeesenees 14 7 Customizing the Control Panel environment cccsssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeseneeeeeeesesneeeeeessenees 14 8 Changing a Function to be Assigned to a Register Key cescceesseeeessceeeeseeeeeeeeeeenneeeesaeeeesneeeesaeees 14 8 Selecting functions to be arrang
312. een dus Geese tad anand cata an Sees Sateen IE 14 22 Configuring the Counter notification settings ccccececeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeeeeeees 14 23 Managing the machine via SNMP ccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneneeeeeneneeeeeseeeseeeaeeeesssneeeeeeeseneeeeeseens 14 25 OVGIVIOW cee ai ee a ee 14 25 Configuring the settings for using SNMP ccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseceeeeeeseeeaeeees 14 26 Checking the printer information ccceeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeseeeeeeaeeeseneeeaeseeseseneeeesesenees 14 30 Checking the counter of this machine cccseeceseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneesenesesensensecesseseeeeseeseseseeeneenetes 14 30 Checking the ROM Versioncies ccesarsiasssecasiserscsngeasiscnancessaanuaceukstaeeucatasuatesactiasaobbaaaessavhseianasdeedenticans 14 31 Managing the setting information ccsssseeecesseeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessseeeeeeessneeneeeeessenneeeeeneas 14 32 Writing the setting information to this Machine IMpPOrt ccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeees 14 32 Types of information that can be imported cccccceseeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeees 14 32 HOW TOMI OME E E chicedeaes Sodeacucedesivetecaadedeacavenacuncestasyelsaehds oaGvaded la vcs dius Moesbes E 14 32 Saving the setting information of this machine Export ccccceeee scence eeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeees
313. eeneeeeeneeeeaes 3 19 Using the wizard when configuring function settings eeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeneeeeteneeenaaes 3 20 Restricting use Of Web Connection 1cccccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeneeaeeeesseeeaeeeeessnneeeeeesseeeeeeesees 3 22 Configuring Basic Information Settings of this Machine 4 1 4 2 4 3 Registering information of this machine ccccsseeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseseeeeeeeesseneeeeeesseenee 4 3 Registering s pport information ecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeessnnneeeeessneeeeeseeeseneneeeeseeees 4 4 Setting the date and time for the machine 2 ecccesseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeesseeeeeeenseeeenees 4 5 Manually Configuring settings eecceeseeeesseeeeneeeeesaeeeeaneeseaeeeessaeeeesaeeeesaeeesaeesesaeeessaeeeseaeeeseeeeeenaeees 4 5 Automatically configuring settings USING NTP ceeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeseneeeeaeeeesneeeeseneeseneeeegs 4 6 Configuring Network Settings of this Machine 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 Using in the IPv4 environment ccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeensneeeeeeeeseeneeeeesssenaaeeeensenaeeeeesseneeeeseesaes 5 3 OVOIVIOW EEA EE shes eee hace ts ale E TAE TAE TEE 5 3 ASSIGNING alt P Address siisii igrana aenn araar paap aa aaa aa cat raara aa aaa ataripean 5 4 Registering the DNS server used by this machine ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeseaeee
314. eeseeesseecesneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeeeneesesaeeeeeeeeeneaeeseeneeesneeees 14 48 Updating the firmware automatically at the specified time 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteneeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaeeens 14 50 Updating the firmware Manually eesceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeseneeeeneeees 14 51 US I Informati Registering address DOOKS cccsssseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesnseeeeeesseneeaeeeesseneaaeeeesseneaeeeesssennaeeesaaes 15 3 Registering E 1maill AGCreSS ismingni a aaa aa aas a a a eaa aa aaaea 15 3 Registering an FTP destination ccccccsccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaneeeeeesaaeeeeeeessaaeeeesessaaeeeetesseeeeeeeeenees 15 4 Registering an SMB destination eeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeaneesneeeeeaeeeeeas 15 6 Registering a WebDAV destination ci ceesceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseneeseneeessneeeeneeeenaas 15 7 Registering asUS6r Box smisk rantai na eaaa anaa aaa a aE re Ri Taaa dvastereeetheaeteastesenewarerenensts 15 8 Registering a tax address w ictni ela Oe ela i eee deel dee de ee 15 9 Registering an Internet fax addresS 0 ceeeeeceeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeessaaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 15 11 Registering an IP address fax destination esceeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeessaeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeaeeess 15 12 ReGIStering a Group cecnncs lt cecccctase cece ctads coetece tas du en
315. eesneeeenneees 8 35 Configuring the default OOXML print SettingS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeesneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeesaeees 8 36 Configuring the default combination settings eeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneeteeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeneeesnaeeees 8 37 Specifying the time out time by interface ss eeccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseneeeeeessesneeesesseneeeeeeeseseenees 8 38 Restricting users from obtaining device information USING PASSWOMG sssseeeesseeeeteeeees 8 39 Configuring basic fax Settings ccccssseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeesseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeesseeeaeeseneseeaeeeenseseeneneess 9 3 Configuring the line usage SETTINGS eeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseaeeeeesneeeeeneeeesaaeeeseeeensneeeeaes 9 3 Configuring connection settings for a PBX ENViIrONMeNt ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeae 9 4 Registering the sender information 2 ccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeecaeeeeseeseaeeseeenaeees 9 5 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a faXx ccsssseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 9 6 Specifying how to print the sender name reception inforMation cesesceeeseeeeesneeeeeseeeesneeseneetees 9 6 Changing print settings When receiving a fAX 0 eeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeaae 9 7 Canceling stamp setting when sending a faX 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaeeee
316. eeteeeeeeees 14 33 19 6 14 8 3 14 8 4 14 8 5 14 9 14 10 14 10 1 14 10 2 14 10 3 14 10 4 14 10 5 14 10 6 14 10 7 14 10 8 14 10 9 14 11 14 11 1 14 11 2 14 12 Types of information that can be Exported ccccececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeaaee 14 33 How torexport the informations a a r ee sh uate ante ea edie 14 33 Resetting the network settings cccceccecceeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeseaaeeeseseeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 14 34 Restarting the network interface ccccsccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeescaaeeeeeeeneneeeeeeees 14 34 Deleting all address information cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeesaaeeeseesseaaeeeeeesseeeeeeees 14 35 Outputting job logs cesses scsi eee aa a ete a a daaa a p aaa Aara add Aai aa ec de seated PAEA iaaa raia dees 14 36 Operations required to use this FUNCTION eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeteeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeaeeeseaeeteneeeesaeeeeeneeeeaes 14 36 Downloading jOb logs 2 sana a a aa aa a T ae hed ae ee 14 37 Setting the operating environment for this Machine cccssseeeceeseseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeneeeeee 14 38 Configuring default settings for Normal Display and Enlarge Display collectively ee 14 38 Setting the action for switching the display to Enlarge Display cceseeessseeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeesnees 14 38 Configuring the default m
317. efault Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation Aldis Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 77 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 1 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 Using S MIME The S MIME is one of E mail encryption methods By using this function you can add the E mail encryption and digital signature functions to avoid the risk such as interception of E mails or spoofing other sender To use the S MIME register a certificate on this machine In addition enable S MIME on this machine 1 Register a certificate used for E mail encryption to the destination of E mail transmission gt For details
318. egister on this machine the E mail address of the user whose certificate you wish to register VY This machine must be able to receive E mail messages 1 In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting S MIME then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan GE Ready to Print 2 Ea Maintenance System Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting S MIME S MIME Comm Setting OFF Email RX POP To select ON the administrator s e mail address specified in the device registration needs to correspond with the e mail address specified at the time of certification gt LDAP Setting Digital Signature Type MDS gt IPP Setting E Mail Text Encrypt Method 3DES R FTP Setting Automatically Obtain Certificates Zeo aae aa iS b SMB Setting Validity Period Confirm Y DPWS Settings Key Usage Do Not Confirm Bonjour Setting Chain Do Not Confirm gt NetWare Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt pleat Sting WebDAV Settings Cancel gt OpenAPI Setting Settings Description S MIME Comm Setting Select ON to use the S MIME To select ON the E mail address of the certificate of this machine must match the E mail address of the administrator OFF is specified by default Automatically Obtain Cer To register digital signature user s certificate select ON ti
319. egistered Address Number z Totalo Check Destination Check Destination Limiting Access to Destinations Display Settings Description Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation Scan Fax Address Click Search from List and select destinations you wish to include in the registered group You can register up to 500 destinations in a group You can also register different types of destinations such as E mail address and fax number in a group Check Destination If necessary click Check Destination to check the registered address books Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 1 5 15 3 Registering a program 15 3 1 Registering an E mail address program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax s
320. electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without permission in writing from the Publisher Mo Table of contents 1 Web Connection WD CONMCCHON iisciccssaccidascnaiiestasdesziavsenscaateiasepegienseddeauedeacsceeteetaaantesesanees satiecaesdsadeateceasedeanescazansaeaa eed 1 3 OPSrating SNVIFOAMEME vices cdesscerssatedesuscnedececesstesissaectestencstenessdevedssddecacacdeasseevedsaacadsaceceabiepasetendedeadeds 1 3 Operations Required to Use Web Connection 2 1 2 2 Configuring network environment SettingS ccccesseeeeeeeesseneeeeeseneneeeeenseneaeeeseeseneeeeeeseseaneeeess 2 3 COV GIVIGW AEE T E E icdkia cas outeuses bauerisen sedi A 2 3 ASSIGNING AN IP AAAPESS isinna oana aada iia disa deiade aaao adada tiada kaa kaskadu 2 3 Contirming the IP Address arenadan aa eea ae nanai aa Neda aaraa Naia ataia 2 4 Confirming Web browser SettingS cccsseeeecesseeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeneaeeseeseseeeaeeensseaeaeeeesseenaaeess 2 5 Basic Usage 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 5 3 6 3 7 How to ACCESS aicicstsdistcsncsdcntessncecce stadia sseuntseantuedende ds eucuddvusecncbidescsdeesisnseecudsusndlasessvoudasdgcusunsiudacuaaceaase 3 3 Layout of Web Connection SCreen ccccesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesnennenesesseneaeeeesseneeaeseeeeneaeeeeesennaneneesenens 3 4 L gin MONO ivcsess czeseccevccesrcetes cxeeiendecateieceedenieie de
321. elete files as the time from the date time the file was last printed or sent This delete time is used as the time to delete files from an existing User Box and from a User Box you will create In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting Document Delete Time Setting then configure the following settings Be Administrator 2 Ba Ready to Scan B Ready to Print g i User Maintenance 5 as Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Document Delete Time Setting gt Register Support Delete Setting OFF Information Delete Time Setting gt Network TWAIN Do Not Delete gt Reset Settings Specify days ida Y User Box Setting Specify Time E Jmin 720 Cancel Document Delete Time Setting gt Standard Size Setting Settings Description Delete Setting Allows the administrator to set the time to delete files from User Boxes au tomatically If you set to ON you cannot set a file delete time for each User Box when the box is created by a user OFF is specified by default Delete Time Setting Sets a time to automatically delete files from a User Box e Do Not Delete Keeps the file in the User Box e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted e Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted 11 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 3 Configurin
322. en enter a new password OFF not selected is specified by default Enable Tracking Function Select this check box to use the learning function that automatically sets the weekly timer schedule to fit your office use status To use the learning function select Auto Standby Adjustment Level to specify the level at which it is judged that this machine is inactive As the level is higher it is more easily judged that this machine is inactive There fore the off time is set to a longer time Select the Clear Usage Data check box to delete data of the use status learned in this machine and the schedule that is set automatically as the learning result ON Selected is specified by default 14 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 2 Configuring the daylight saving time settings 14 14 2 Configuring the daylight saving time settings Enable the daylight saving time function on this machine You can also set the daylight saving time to be au tomatically enabled on this machine at the specified date In the administrator mode select Maintenance Daylight Saving Time then configure the following set tings Gp Administrator Logout 2 d Ready to Scan EP Ready to Print a System eat a Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Meter Count Daylight Saving Time ROM Version Daylight Saving Time OFF gt Im
323. enance S stem eto Auth Account Box Settings Ti Print Setting Store Wizard Customize Remove a Certificate Issuer Requesting Certificate Subject Validity Period Are you sure you want to remove the certificate e Tips e The certificate specified as default cannot be deleted Before deleting it specify another certificate as default 13 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 3 Configuring certificate verification settings 13 13 3 13 3 1 Configuring certificate verification settings Verifying a certificate for peer You can configure the settings for verifying reliability of the certificate expiration date CN key usage etc To check the expiration of certificate register the URL of the Online Certificate Status Protocol OCSP serv Ice In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print 2 System Car Maintenance y Security Auth Account Network Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize PKI Settings Certificate Verification Settings gt Certificate Verification Certificate Verification Settings ON z Settings Timeout 15 sec 5 300 gt Address Reference F OCSP Service CO URL gt Restrict User Access Proxy Settings eae ae Proxy Server Address Ple
324. ence Allowed Level ba d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 51 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 12 13 3 Y User Authentication Setting User Registration gt Account Track Settings Se Administrator e Ready to Scan E Ready to Print User Registration No Use opening number Input directly User Name E mail Address Retype User Password Temporarily stop use Function Permission Copy Scan Save to External Memory Continue Job x Full Color Black Full Color Black x Restrict z External Memory Document Scan Restrict z Fax Full Color Black Print Full Color Black x User Box Allow Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black gt Manual Destination Input Alow SO Mobile PDA Allow E Max Allowance Set Total Allowance F Total 1 1 9999999 Individual Allowance F Color 1 1 9999999 F Black 1 1 9999999 Box Administration T Box Count 1 0 1000 Limiting Access to Destinations Reference Allowed Group F Access Allowed Level Registered Reference Group Number I Totalo 0 Be cos In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Reg istration Edit then select the Reference Allowed Group check box and assign a reference allowed group to the registered user 12 52 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 1 2
325. ensneeeeaees 5 5 Registering the host Maine ai cicccsiccescsucedadccneucde esnuccadecnacssnti cues coutedeads AAE Eana AE Aa Ee ia Seada EAA raTa ET onak 5 6 Registering the domaiN name ccesscccesesesseeeseseeeensceeesesenesenecenaneeessseeesasensesseeesseseeseeeesenssceeeneneas 5 7 Using in the IPV6 environment ccccseeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeeeeeeseneeeeeeessnneneeeesneeaeeeeessenaeeeeesneneeeeenenees 5 8 Using in the IPX environment 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnnneeeeeeesseeeeeeessenneeeeeessnaeaeeeesseeeeeesenssenneeeess 5 11 Displaying this machine on the network MAP ssssuunnennnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 5 12 19 1 5 5 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 8 1 8 2 8 3 pe En nel nn n Encrypting communication using Web Connection ssssunssennunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 6 3 Changing the administrator password sssssssssnunnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 6 4 Customizing the initial screen cccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeesenneeeeeeeseneeaeeeeesneeaeeeesenenaeeeeeseeeeaeeeess 6 5 Changing the time period until automatic 1OG OUt ssssssssunssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mannanna nn 6 6 Configuring flash view settings ccssssseeeeeeesseeeeeeesnseeeeeeeesseneeeeeessnneeeeeesenaneaecessnneeeeeessese
326. ent log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority Start Pconsole Select Quick Setup from Available Option list box and press the Enter key Fill in Print Server Name Printer Name and Print Queue Name Set the Type of the printer to Oth er Unknown and save them Terminate Pconsole by pressing the Esc key Log in to the administrator mode of Web Connection 7 Inthe administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print a User s System Maintenance Auth Account Network Box aati mak Ea Print Setting Store adress o Fax Settings Wizard Customize Ei gt TCP IP Setting NetWare Setting fe E mail Setting is reflected after reset P LDAP setting pxseng Ca gt IPP Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings gt FTP Setting Ethernet Frame Type Auto Detect 7 gt sme setting N m Print Server Name gt DPWS Settings wi acuis gt Bonjour Setting Print Server Password NetWare Setting Polling Interval L _ sec 1 65535 NetWare Setting Bindery NDS Setting NDS x gt Network Fax setting i N NDS Context Name P WebDAV Settings P jo IEEE802 i Printer Number 255 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting ON a Settings Description IPX Setting Select ON to use the IPX OFF is specified
327. ent certificates depending on the application This machine can manage multiple certificates and use different certificates depending on the application protocol In the administrator mode click Security PKI Settings Protocol Setting Create then select a certifi cate to be used for the protocol Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print f Maintenance aa Security Autecount Network Box Print Setting ears Fax Settings Wizard Customize Protocol Setting Protocol 1 Protocol 2 Edit Delete sst http Server Create Delete x ss E Mail Transmission SMTP E Delete x ssi E mail RX POP Ei Delete ss TCP Socket Create Delete x SSL LDAP gt Certificate cation SSL WebDAV Client Settings sst OpenaPl Create Delete f SSL Web Service SSL IPsec SSL Remote Panel x IEEE802 1x E bates x SMME Eat Datete le J Protocol Protocol2 Application SSL http Server If this machine is used as an http server it encrypts transmission from a client to the machine For example it is used for the following application e Accessing Web Connection via HTTPS e Printing via IPPS SSL E Mail Transmission If this machine is used as an SMTP client it submits a SMTP certificate of the machine according to a request from the E mail server SMTP SSL E mail RX POP If this machine is used as an POP client it submits a certificate of the machine
328. enter the host name or IP address of a destination WebDAV server using up to 253 characters e File Path Enter the name of a destination folder in the WebDAV server specified in Host Address using up to 142 characters e User ID Enter the name of a user who is authorized to access the fold er specified in File Path using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user specified in User ID SSL Settings When SSL is used in your environment select ON Proxy When a proxy server is used in your environment select ON Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number Only one destination can be specified Basic Setting Application Setting Configure the Scan option settings For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 19 15 Registering a program 15 3 15 3 5 Registering a User Box program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the User Box program In the administrator mode select S
329. entered into User ID using up to 64 characters excluding anonymous When authentication is not required in the destination FTP server select ON OFF is specified by default PASV Mode When the PASV mode is used in your environment select ON OFF is specified by default Proxy When a proxy server is used in your environment select ON OFF is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number 21 is specified by default Limiting Access to Desti nations Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 5 15 Registering address books 15 1 15 1 3 Registering an SMB destination An SMB destination can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration SMB then click OK to configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs System gt User Maintenance S ya Security Auth Account Network Box ettings z Track Print Setting CC Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Group No Fars ta 1 Use opening number Eabregramy ssia C Direct Input gt Temporary One
330. entication Setting Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting gt External Server Settings Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Public User Box Setting M Set the maximum number of User Boxes Maximum Number of User Boxes 1000 0 1000 Cancel 11 3 2 Deleting all empty User Boxes A User Box in which no files are saved is recognized as an unnecessary User Box and deleted In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box then click OK gt Machine Setting gt Register Support Information Sp Administrator Ready to Scan EY rezov to Print g Maintenance SE Security E Network Box Settings Track Delete Unused User Box Are you sure you want to delete empty User Boxes gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box gt Standard Size Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 13 11 Configuring User Box environment 11 3 11 3 3 Automatically deleting files from a User Box For all the Public User Boxes Personal User Boxes and Group User Boxes the administrator specifies the time to automatically d
331. environment for printing through a Bluetooth compatible device 8 28 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this MACHINEC eecceesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeneseeees 8 30 8 10 1 Specifying the default print settings 2 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaaeeeeaeeeeseneeseeneeeenaeeess 8 30 8 10 2 Specifying the default PCL print settings 20 0 0 eee eeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeesnaeeeeeneeeeeeneeeenneeees 8 32 8 10 3 Specifying the default PS print SCttiNgS 0 eeeeeeesneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeesneeeeeneeeenaeeees 8 33 8 10 4 Specifying the default TIFF print settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeenneteneeeess 8 34 8 10 5 Configuring security settings for XPS or OOXML printing eeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeneeeeneeees 8 35 8 10 6 Configuring the default OOXML print SettingS eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesneeeeaeesesaeeeeeneeensaeees 8 36 8 10 7 Configuring the default combination settings ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeteeneeeeeeneeeenaeeess 8 37 8 11 Specifying the time out time by interface csseccceeseseeeeeeeseneeeeeeesneneeeeeeseenneeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeseenees 8 38 8 12 Restricting users from obtaining device information USING PASSWOMG csssseeeesseeeeteeeees 8 39 Configuring the Fax Environment 9 1 Configuring basic fax Settings eccces
332. equesting user name z User Name user I Password is changed Password is currently set Password realm Settings Description IPP Authentication Set ting Select this item to use the IPP authentication ON selected is specified by default Authentication Method Select the IPP authentication method requesting user name is specified by default User Name Enter a user name using up to 20 characters excluding a colon This entry is required if you have selected basic or digest for Authenti cation Method Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 20 characters This entry is required if you have selected basic or digest for Authenti cation Method To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password realm If digest is selected for Authentication Method enter the domain realm using up to 127 characters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 4 Configuring the IPP printing environment 8 Communicating using SSL IPPS You can enhance security by encrypting communication between the computer and this machine with SSL when using IPP printing on this machine To use SSL communications a certificate must be registered in advance For details on configuring the set ting refer to page 13 3 If you use IPPS printing in an operating system of Windows Vis
333. er In the administrator mode select Network WebDAV Settings WebDAV Server Settings then configure the following settings Be Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print Fs User Maintenance geen Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting WebDAV Server Settings gt E mail Setting WebDAV Settings OFF eee T Access Rights Settings LDAP Settini z M Password is changed Password is currently set New Password Retype New Password gt DPWS Settings Cancel Network Fax Setting WebDAV Settings gt WebDAV Server Settings OpenAPI Setting Settings Description WebDAV Settings Select ON to use the WebDAV server OFF is selected by default 16 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 4 Using the machine WebDAV server for association 16 Settings Description Access Rights Settings Specify the password to restrict accesses to the WebDAV server of this Using SSL communication machine using up to 64 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Clicking Initial Password resets the set password Default sysadm OFF not selected is specified by default Encrypt communication between this machine and the WebDAV client application with SSL 1 Register a certificate for this machine and enable SSL com
334. er Box ee User Box Attribute Change User Box Number 4 bbs box1 I User Box Password is changed New Password Retype New Password I User Box Owner is changed Type Public ok cancel d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 2 Settings Description User Box Name Change the User Box name using up to 20 characters User Box Password is changed To change the password of a User Box select this check box then enter a new password using up to 64 characters excluding User Box Owner is changed Select this check box to change the type or owner user of a User Box Select Public Personal or Group depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings e f Personal is selected specify the owner user e lf Group is selected specify the owner account 11 2 5 Changing Relay User Box settings If you log in to the administrator mode you can change settings for a registered Relay User Box or delete it without entering the password for the Relay User Box Tips To use Relay User Box an Fax Kit is required 1 In the administrator mode select Box Open System User Box Relay User Box to select a user box 2 Click User Box Setting gt Clicking Delete User Box deletes the User Box you selected Se Administrator id Ba Ready to Scan EB Ready to Prin
335. er Number Enter the printer number Status Allows you to check the server name queue name or queue status 17 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 User Authentication Setting NDS To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings NetWare Settings User Authentication Setting NDS Select whether to use the NDS Novell Directory Service authentication ON is specified by default HTTP Server Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings HTTP Server Settings Select whether to restrict the use of Web Connection and configure your environment for IPP printing Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use this machine as an HTTP server ON is specified by default Settings Select whether to use Web Connection ON is specified by default IPP Settings Select whether to use IPP ON is specified by default Accept IPP Jobs Select whether to use IPP printing ON is specified by default Support Information Select whether to allow the following IPP operations Print Job Allows a print job Valid Job Allows you to check a valid job Cancel Job Allows you to cancel a job Open Job Attributes Allows you to obtain job attributes Open Job Allows you to obtain a list of job attributes Open Printer Attributes Allows you to obtain printer attributes ON Allow is specified b
336. er an NDS context name for print server connection using up to 191 characters excluding L lt gt and NDS Tree Name Enter an NDS tree name for print server connection using up to 63 char acters excluding lt gt and For NetWare 5 x 6 Novell Distributed Print Service NDPS Vv Vv Before starting the NDPS setting make sure that an NDPS broker and NDPS manager have already been created and loaded Check that TCP IP protocol is configured in the NetWare server Check that this machine starts and an IP address is assigned From the client log in the NetWare file system with administrator authority Start NWAdmin Right click the Organization and Organization unit containers for printer agent creation and select NDPS Printer from Create Enter a NDPS Printer Name in the Printer Name field Select Create a New Printer Agent in the Printer Agent Source field and click Create Confirm the printer agent name and browse and register the NDPS manager in the NDPS Manager Name field Set the Gateway Types to Novell Printer Gateway and register it In the Configure Novell NDPS for Printer Agent screen set the Printer to None and the port hander to Novell Port Handler and register the settings Set Connection type to Remote LPR on IP and register the setting For the host address enter the IP address of this mac
337. er mode 3 77 3 73 User account common setting 72 67 WebDAV 75 7 WebDAV server 76 72 Weekly timer setting 74 5 Wizard 3 20 WS print 8 74 WS scan 7 27 20 2 20 3 20 4 A Administrator Settings 77 3 AppleTalk Settings 77 25 Bluetooth Setting 77 38 Bonjour Setting 77 25 m v Client Settings 77 76 17 39 Communication Check 77 10 D Detail Settings 77 33 Device Setting 77 34 Direct Hosting Setting 77 77 Distributed Scan Settings 77 32 DNS Domain 77 6 DNS Host 77 6 DNS Server Settings IPv4 77 7 DNS Server Settings IPv6 77 7 DPWS Common Settings 77 37 DPWS Extension Settings 77 37 DPWS Settings 77 30 E E Mail RX POP 77 22 E Mail Settings 77 20 E Mail TX SMTP 77 20 Enable IPsec 77 70 Error Code Display Setting 77 37 F FTP Server Settings 17 15 FTP Settings 77 74 FTP TX Settings 77 74 H HTTP Server Settings 77 73 l IEEE802 1x Authentication Settings 77 37 IKE Settings 77 8 Internet ISW Settings 77 40 IP Filtering Deny Access 77 77 IP Filtering Permit Access 77 77 IPsec SA Settings 77 8 IPsec Settings 77 7 IPv4 Settings 77 5 IPv6 Settings 77 6 IPX Settings 77 72 IWS Settings 77 38 L LDAP Settings 77 78 LLMNR Setting 77 77 LPD Setting 77 36 NetWare Print Settings 77 72 NetWare Settings 77 72 Network Fax Function Settings 77 27 Network Fax Settings 77 26 Network Settings 77 4 P Peer 77 9 PING Confirmation 77 36 Prefix Suffix Se
338. er to enable the LPD Line Printer Daemon Select Enable to use the LPR print function Enable is specified by default 17 36 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Prefix Suffix Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Prefix Suffix Setting Register a prefix and suffix of an E mail address Also configure the setting for recalling the registered prefix and suffix when entering an E mail address Settings Description ON OFF Setting Select whether to use Prefix Suffix Setting If you select ON you can recall the registered prefix and suffix which are registered in Prefix Suffix Setting when entering an E mail address OFF is specified by default Prefix Suffix Setting Register a prefix and suffix to complement E mail address entry U to 8 prefixes suffixes can be registered e Prefix Enter a prefix using up to 20 characters e Suffix Enter a suffix using up to 64 characters Error Code Display Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Error Code Display Set ting Select whether to display network error code on the Touch Panel OFF is specified by default IEEE802 1x Authentication Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings IEEE802 1x Authentication Settings Select whether to use IEEE802 1x authentication To use IEEE802
339. ere ect cetnedostnndeidh nian cesdedinenienece 3 6 LOQINSCIECN sicsseeccisaceuessadeesiessasasectaasceraeaceaivadnenaeaicadaada caddeeavanccdasdhsansatea vaesaudunededuavesa aseaeasiazeasticaedesiica 3 6 LOGINMOG EE T E dads cdecudscdussecuasusnsdaide cava redpsdecedcagedsazsnavedtestaues cdvealedandadebaanasstidadpenaares 3 7 SWITCHING login MOUSS si iacccscctssscceasascea asccacsadeacaanvesasaccinaacevadensveaatecsancesasizcasstesdaanaeaaisdeaneensscdteaecedeasaa 3 8 Logging in to the administrator MOC cceesceeeeneeeeenaeeeeneeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeenaeeeeeaeeeeeaeesenaeeeseaeerseaees 3 9 LOGGING INTO ThE USEF MMOS as ccccececccsesstcessescaasaceeeasigedsnseaeanseseveeccsascseeecduedsenbicanad anagandanswoacgeanagenend 3 11 User Mode OVerview ccccsstsssennnsnessseeeeseeeeensnenenseneesseeesnseneeaseeeeasneeeesenesaseeeeensneeeaseeeenaneeeanenennes 3 12 M in MON isses csaseccassccestseeecaiacsnasanesanssssazsseaneuesenaves idea cabsaazusagaastedaesatenereacetercesvacssaaaiadevabeaselizeaaaacagenand 3 12 Each Mode in the USEF MOdE is c vcsseeccceeccateas ceaceces ceceeeuees canenigceacacerencencesteey ike cuveisecencnceesssaacecetdeaneeeenace 3 13 IMPOPMALION sis sesceccaccactnesecuesech cues suceepcocezasexhis estexacaspasacnaceanodganacestecadsaeichedatensaetacecavaeraaveeanes paced inaatyare 3 13 SOD sececvereeserveesetacuseovalbdsusausdesucteactenauttestecnaveceatesy rua cevs suasanteavacyauachvtaruauacurvcta estan bastatsadesscettaassuss
340. ermission Setting gt Function Display Key gt Temporarily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings Ge Administrator Logout Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Network Box Temporarily Change Language Temporarily Change Language OFF x Lok cancer d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 19 1 4 Notifying of the machine status via E mail 14 4 14 4 Notifying of the machine status via E mail Overview If a warning such as paper addition toner replacement or paper jam occurs on this machine it can be sent to a registered E mail address To send the machine status via E mail follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure the Scan to E mail environment gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 3 gt Inthe administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and set E mail Notification to ON 3 Configure the machine status notification settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 14 20 Configuring the machine status notification settings Register destination E mail addresses Up to 10 destination E mail addresses can be registered Also select warnings to send a notification when any of the
341. ertificate Verification Level Settings gt sme setting Validity Period Confirm E Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt Network Fax Setting Timeout 0 sec 5 300 WebDAV Settings Max Search Results oo s 1000 I Search Attributes Authentication Search Attribute ia ox cance Settings Description Enable SSL Select this check box to use SSL communication OFF not selected is specified by default Port Number SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 636 is specified by default Certificate Verification To verify the certificate select items to be verified Level Settings If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 2
342. erver Address I Please check to enter host name Setting 0 0 0 0 Account Track Settings Port No 389 1 65535 gt Prohibited Function Login I Enable SSL Setting Port No SSL 1 65535 gt Print without Certificate Verification Level Settings Authentication Expiration Date Confirm X Y Simple Print CN Do Not Confirm x Authentication Setting Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm x Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm x Register Simple Print Search Base Authentication Server Timeout 60 sec 5 300 LDAP IC Card General Settings Simple X Authentication Setting Login Name _ _ External Server Settings I Password is changed gt Authentication Device eee l Settings Domain Name Public User Box Setting Use Referral ON gt UserlA nte m Search Attribute uid Setting External Server Connection No Selection Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder OK Cancel Settings gt Authentication Card ID Number Counter Remote Control Settings Description Enable SSL Select this check box to use SSL communication OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 636 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each
343. erview ccscsssssserenssessssneseneceeeneneesescousnsccessneneseseneesaneesenneseseceesneneeeeseoesneceeseneesenes 3 12 Main Men k inna a A Milian aoe Aiea inde lig eee ed arlene eal 3 12 Each mode in the user mode ececeseeeeeeeeceeseeeeenseeeeseeceneneeeseseeeeeseneeeseeesesueeenseaseseeeeeseeeeeeseaeeneees 3 13 information fsuien seid ieselebe a vi gaveees gecvani a ia E E ee i EE AEAEE ei een enti 3 13 POD E ESEE ETE E Dare E A EEEE E E E E T 3 14 B k i ae E tinted a A T atl ane ee ia eat 3 14 LEIRE AA Aa n E TE E A EEE EA A et Sen ened E E E E tee 3 15 Store Address EE E E A E E A E lot dy E EEA AE 3 16 EEST aS EEE E E E E EE E E 3 17 CUStOMIZE oi eoa a eee oi dk eee ee 3 17 Using the Shortcut Fun tion icic secs he feces cesccteer cechacdeced sdecaceccgacsat de eaa estancecedsshandeeceedenacacctevsuedeccetsee 3 18 Registering a function in Bookmarks of the Web DrowSe ceesceesseeeeeneetesseeeeeaneeseaeeeensneeeaes 3 18 Creating a shortcut for a SPECIFIC PAGE eeeeceeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenee teats eeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeaeesesaeeeneneeeee 3 18 Using the Help f ncti N s ansin asrar coceteasetedeciestencceestaanedeves anaandaa arreda cccendvectendeuavetiiwneeeed 3 19 Using the online help isis icsececassseceescienssatieacsistanenepanscavhascdadaanteeashsasacetesadelenssadejaecceasadessaucdthacaeasuenasaanee 3 19 Displaying the meaning of the setting in the POPUP WINKOW eeeseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeteeneee
344. eseaaeeeeecesaaaeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseceeeeeeseeaee 12 69 Authenticating in the LDAP server using the authentication card LDAP IC Card Authentication 12 69 OVGIVIGW2i edi decent aA NA AEE auch waite iii aidan aaa aan nediiee ened aga 12 69 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP IC card authentication 0 00 2 eeseeeeesseeeeneeeeseeteeeneeeennes 12 70 USING SSL COMMUNICATION ssai aaae eaa aaaea aaaea aa aaraa a aar aaa dTe PA eaa aaa 12 72 Recording the authentication card ID in counter information of this machine cesceeeeees 12 73 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate Via SSL ss sssunssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 13 3 OVGIVIQW EEEE T E E T 13 3 19 5 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 2 14 3 14 3 1 14 3 2 14 3 3 14 3 4 14 3 5 14 3 6 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 7 1 14 7 2 14 8 14 8 1 14 8 2 Using the certificate registered UPON SNIPMENL ee eeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeeeneeeeeaneeenneeenneeeeee 13 4 Self Creating ja COrtifl CALS nisi iee hucecaseceneicecdcddvanosuchadaceaadanacdvade casbdes A aAA Eaa E Raa aa E aean eaaa 13 5 Requesting the Certificate Authority for issuing a certificate esseseseeeeeeeerrrsriresrresrrrnrrrnerrrnsrennee 13 6 Managing the certificates for this MACHING cc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeessneeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeaneee
345. eseeaeeesneeeeeeaneeenaees 8 9 Configuring the IPP printing environment sssessssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanmanna 8 10 OVOIVIOW AEE E E E TEA A A heen dha urachentiy 8 10 Configuring basic settings for the IPP printing essessesssiessrresrrssrrnssrnnsrrnnrrntntinnsrnnsrnnnrrnnntennennnnne 8 10 Using the IPP authentication ai sie aut apnena a aa ch et ancea n aa EA a el 8 12 Communicating using SSL IPPS ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeaeeeesaneeseaeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeaeees 8 13 Configuring the WS printing environment sssssssssennnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 8 14 OVGIVIOW A E EE E EA A A A benuiabieniveneaavieet 8 14 Configuring basic settings for the WS printing eeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesneeseaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeennetes 8 15 Using the Proxy Sorel ves A incite n a ie ain dteenntia A aa ati 8 17 USING SSL COMMUNICATION n asta cesceeasen cxtctenescdtinnveds caceveveled dudel ch ehanceauuvebavane densecvgpdwcyhannedenseneusttdeegs 8 18 Configuring the Bonjour printing environment ssssssssenssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 8 19 Configuring the AppleTalk printing environMent s s sssussseussnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 8 20 Configuring the NetWare printing environment ssssssunsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 8 21 OVENVIOW EE E A E ten ce gn tsd
346. eseeeeeesneeeeeaeeeseaeeees 16 11 Using the machine WebDAV server for association ssessnssesunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 16 12 OLETA EN AEE A E E E E A E T A E A a oeere acon HM 16 12 Configuring the WebDAV server settings 0 eecceeesceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeneeeseaeeeeeneeeeneneeeeneeees 16 12 USING SSL COMMUNICATION sisis cecceictsestsenitisacessegenstechovctiaa ints canas aececatassoeescctegnasdecatastsdhenienasanabaassenas 16 13 Releasing the association with application ecccesseseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseens 16 14 Associating with the distributed Scan Server seccceseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeneeeesees 16 15 OVGINVICW siete hee Ade E E A E aie ee ein eae 16 15 Configuring the environment to use Distributed Scan Management ceeseeesseeeeeneeeeseeeeneees 16 15 Enabling the Distributed Scan Management cccesseeesseeeeeseeeeeneeeeesaeesesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeenneeeenaeeess 16 16 Allowing for upload of contents to this MACHINE ss ssseusssunssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 16 17 Associating with the remote diagnosis system cccssseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeensneeeeeeenenseeeneessees 16 18 Registering a proxy server used for remote diagnosis ee ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeaeeeenaeeeesaeeeesneees 16 18 Allowing acquisition of the machine counter cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaeee
347. eseeneeaeeeessneeeaeeeesseeaeeeesseseeeeeeeeees 12 6 OVGIVIOW i E E A AT EEE A T T ETT 12 6 Configuring basic settings for the user authentication eesseeesresssrssrireriresrrnnsirnssinnsrnnnrrnnsrnnnsrene 12 7 12 3 Employing the account track function sssssnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 12 10 DA E RE A A E heveskih cubureaedadbecdu ans aii 12 10 Configuring basic account track settings 0 eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeeeseneeeeneeees 12 11 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentiCation cccssseeecceessseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaes 12 13 Contents 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 11 1 12 11 2 12 11 3 12 12 12 13 12 13 1 12 13 2 12 13 3 12 13 4 12 14 12 15 12 16 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 19 1 12 19 2 12 19 3 CV OMVIOW EE acs ss scvamtce dun Na E A E tees Gaetecdsceutsauetvwcbuoteade te suet aes busatsaita deb AA A AE EN 12 13 Configuring basic settings for the Active Directory authentication cceesceesseeeesneeeeeneeeesneeees 12 14 Sending to Your Computer Scan to HOME eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeetess 12 17 Using the SINGIO SIQMSON raas atas arenei aaaeeeaa dedana septs iaa aai AAEN pa KAREA ENNEA Ee EEN 12 18 Employing the NTLM authentication ccssseccccseseeeeeeesseseeeeeesseneee
348. ess using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer A combination of address information and the fax scan transmission option settings can be registered in a program The following describes the WebDAV program In the administrator mode select Store Address Program Registration WebDAV then click OK to configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print s User Maintenance tne Security aaa Network Box Print Setting 5 5 Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Address Book Program WebDAV gt Group No 2 Temporary One Touch ra erara Destination Information eubjec Select from Address Book gt Text Search from List gt Prefix Suffix Registered Address Number Direct Input Host Address T Please check to enter host name File Path User ID Password SSL Settings OFF Proxy OFF Port No o Ja 65535 Basic Setting Scan Resolution 200 x 200 Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination WebDAV from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination WebDAV select Direct Input and enter the WebDAV e Host Address Select the Please check to enter host name check box and
349. ess of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Set the date and time for the machine gt The date and time of this machine must match those of Active Directory For details on how to set the date and time of this machine refer to page 4 5 Configure basic settings for the Active Directory authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 14 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s Home directory page 12 17 Scan to Home Use the single sign on page 12 18 Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 sheen how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 ou Restrict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 12 Employing the Active Directory authentication 12 4 Configuring b
350. ess the Menu key on the Control Panel to display the main menu In the main menu shortcut keys can be arranged to which you have assigned desired functions The main menu can be expanded to dual screen and you can freely select up to 23 shortcut keys according to your operating environment 1 In the administrator mode select System Settings Main Menu Default Settings to select Assign ment No for the main menu key arranging shortcut keys then click Edit gt Assignment No 1 to 11 are assigned to the first screen of the main menu These keys should be assigned to frequently used functions Print Setting Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings List Counter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account Function Display Key Permission Setting Temporarily Change Language Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings System een ep Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready
351. et tings Qe Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan Ready to Print g Print Setting Store Addres Fax Settings Wizard Customize Client Setting SMB TX Setting ON SMB Authentication Setting Kerberos 2 Default Domain Name C SMB User Credential Setting ON F Edit SMB User Credentials Restrict User Authentication NTLM ON F DFS Setting Disable gt ox Settings Description SMB TX Setting Select ON to use the single sign on function OFF is selected by default SMB Authentication Set ting Select Kerberos NTLM v1 v2 to use the single sign on function NTLMv2 authentication is performed if Kerberos authentication fails and NTLMv1 authentication is performed if NTLMv2 authentication fails NTLM v1 is selected by default Default Domain Name Enter the default domain name to be added to the host name of the desti nation at SMB transmission using up to 64 characters The default do main name cannot be prefixed by an asterisk If the domain name of the destination is not specified by the user when sending data using SMB the domain name specified here is added This item is not required when Active Directory is used as an authentication server SMB User Credential Set ting When using the user authentication information login name and password of this machine as SMB destination authentication information host name and password select ON If Activ
352. et aaa pa aade aa aT AA eaa a salaried lant Ucar Sn ales 8 14 Configuring basic settings for the WS printing eeeseeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeesaneeseaeeeeeaneeeesneeteeeees 8 15 USING ThE proxy Serve sescesiectedonceguntcelientveincehevaedtvhalceesuicaunend ognvl ekeatadende Aa a aaa aeea aa cualendigusestattndeees 8 17 USING SSL COMMUNICATION snein aaa ap econ aA an apaa riaa raaa aantas 8 18 8 6 Configuring the Bonjour printing environment sssssssssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 8 19 8 7 Configuring the AppleTalk printing environment ssssunssenunnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 8 20 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 2 c scsseeceeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeessseeeeeesseseeeeeeesseeeees 8 21 OVE EW in ano aeee cece de ce ec aaa Eea aed een a verde ended 8 21 In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation 2 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 21 In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation eesceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 8 23 In the NetWare 4 x Remote Printer mode NDS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeaee 8 24 In the NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 Print Server mode NDS ceesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaes 8 26 For NetWare 5 x 6 Novell Distributed Print Service NDPS 2 ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetennees 8 27 8 9 Configuring the
353. ethod to display destinations ceeesceeesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseeeeeenaeeeeaes 14 39 Changing the default scan data file NAME eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaneeeesaeeeseneeeeeaeeeeneeess 14 40 Previewing the original being scanned in realtiMe ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeteeneeeeeeees 14 41 Printing a stamp ON blank pages hea aaaea r aaa aa a a a a a a a aaaeei 14 41 Setting the Skip job Condi OAS aaar a e a aaa raaa aE aeea a aAa a a Eara Aaa RA ara denina sahe 14 42 Setting the processing accuracy of outline PDF eeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeereaes 14 43 Allowing transmission of the machine usage frequency or function settings information 14 44 Using an advanced function by registering the license cccssssecccesseeeeeesseeeeeeeeessneeeeeenees 14 45 ISSUING THE FEQUESE COGS saisai aen aaar KESA ea subladsaaseaveant evaded esoreeesennasvees 14 45 Enabling the advanced function smesni eenei ee ia r ae Kaada Eaa A iaaa aai 14 46 Enabling the function using the function and license codes s sseeessiesrirerriesrrrssrrnrirrnnrinnerrnsseene 14 46 Enabling the function using the token NUMDET esceeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaneeseaeeenaeeeeeneeteneeees 14 47 Updating the firmware of this Machine ssssnssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 14 48 OV NVIOW ioana area e arta a Ea A a a EE 14 48 Prepa
354. etting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure the basic OpenAPI settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 16 7 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Encrypting communication between this machine and application software with page 16 9 SSL 16 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 2 Associating via OpenAPI 16 Configuring the basic OpenAPI settings Enable the SSDP function If necessary change the OpenAPI communication port number 1 In the administrator mode select Network SSDP Settings then configure the following settings Maintenance gt SSDP Settings amt sennae Settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan EP Ready to Print 2 User au os Auth Account Network Box Track SSDP Settings Those settings marked with an will take effect after the main switch is turned OFF ON SSDP ON Multicast TTL Setting f__Ja 10 ox cancel Description SSDP Select ON to use the OpenAPI This allows for the following actions e Notifying of OpenAPI service having started on this machine e Returning a response to a search for OpenAPI service ON is specified by default Multicast TTL Setting Change TTL Time To Live for SSDP multi cast packet if necessary The value is decremented by one each time a commu
355. ettings eessseeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeceseseeeeenacensseeeneseeesesenseseeneesenenenes 16 11 16 4 Using the machine WebDAV server for association s eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesensneeeeeess 16 12 OVGEIVIGW irea a ea e teens id cvsun ay E a a Ea a aN Aaaa EE ae a 16 12 Configuring the WebDAV server settings eeceeesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeesaeeseneneeeeneeees 16 12 USING SSL COMMUNICATION siisii aeia naina naaa aaa aaia aaa arad adaa anaa a rahaaa tarekat 16 13 16 5 Releasing the association with application s s nsunssnnsuneunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn enneunen nenn 16 14 16 6 Associating with the distributed Scan Server usssesunsenennnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunnan nnmnnn nna 16 15 OAVCT DYI EAT AO E ET A E A E E A 16 15 Configuring the environment to use Distributed Scan Management s sseesesrrsesrresrieerrrerrresrnnns 16 15 Enabling the Distributed Scan Management cccesseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeseneeennaeeens 16 16 16 7 Allowing for upload of contents to this machine s ssnssunsunsnnsnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen na 16 17 16 8 Associating with the remote diagnosis System ccccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesenneeeeeeneseeeeeeeseneneeeeeeseees 16 18 16 8 1 Registering a proxy server used for remote diagnosis eccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeenneeeeees 16 18 16 8 2 Allowing acq
356. ew 3 4 User Mode Overview Main Menu Displaying the Main Menu enables you to display the menus available in Web Connection on a single screen By doing this you can quickly access the screen to use to implement required operations To display the Main Menu click the icon on the upper right of the screen __ Device Information Function Permission Information Print Information Current Jobs Open User Box Create System User Box Direct Print Customize Option Q usen Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Online Assistance Network Setting Information N Job Check the status of your job and job history Job History Box Store data in the HDD print stored date from the HDD Create User Boxes according to purpose and save documents Create User Box Store Address The other party who wants to transmit data can be registered 13 Customize display settings by user Logout Change Password 2l Information RD Check device information and consumables information such as Toner Change User Password Print Setting Information Communication List Open System User Box Direct Print Print following file types XPS PDF TIFF PS PCL JPEG Text OOXML PPML 2 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 4 User Mode Overview 3 4 2 Information Each mode in the user mode Enables you to confirm the information on the system configuration and settings of thi
357. ey Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm 15__ min 1 60 POP Server Address Login Name T password is changed Password Connection Timeout Port Number D Use SSL TLS Port No SSL M Check for New Messages Polling Interval Cancel Settings Description APOP Authentication If you use APOP in your E mail server POP select ON OFF is specified by default Use SSL TLS When using SSL to encrypt a communication with the E mail server POP select this check box OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 995 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path
358. ey used for com rithm munication Diffie Hellman Group Select the Diffie Hellman group Group 2 is specified by default Key Validity Period Specify the validity period of a common key to securely create a common key used to encrypt communications When this period has expired a new key is created This can secure the communication 28800 sec is specified by default Negotiation Mode IPsec SA Settings Select the method to securely create a common key used to encrypt com munications This option is not available in IKEv2 Settings Main Mode is specified by default To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPSec Settings IPsec Settings IPsec SA Settings Edit Configure SA Security Association required for encrypted communication Up to 10 groups can be regis tered for the SA Select a group then press Edit Settings ON OFF Description To register SA select ON OFF is specified by default Group Name Enter the SA name using up to 10 characters Encapsulation Mode Select an IPsec operation mode Transport Mode is specified by default Security Protocol Select a security protocol Key Exchange Method Select the key replacement method to securely create a common key used to encrypt communications When using a device that does not support the automatic key replaceme
359. f a certificate with the number of days that have elapsed since the starting date Encryption Key Type Select a type of encryption key 2 When the certificate has been installed enable SSL communication gt For details refer to page 13 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 5 1 3 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL 13 1 Requesting the Certificate Authority for issuing a certificate Create certificate signing request data in this machine and request a trusted Certificate Authority CA for issuing a certificate for the machine When the data is returned from the Certificate Authority after its review register the data with this machine 1 In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting New Regis tration Request a Certificate and enter information required for issuing a certificate then click OK The certificate signing request data to be sent to the Certificate Authority is created Sp Administrator Logout J 2 i Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs User Maintenance System Settings Auth Account Box Track Print Setting Wizard PKI Settings Request a Certificate Organization org Organizational Unit aiv Locality loc State Province state Country Us Admin E mail Address mfp server com Encryption Key Type RSA 1024_MD5 Settings Description Common Name Displays t
360. f necessary change the time to reconnect to the authentication server e Reconnect for every login Connects to the authentication server at the time authentication is carried out on this machine If the authentica tion server is in the shutdown state at the time authentication is carried out on this machine first confirm that the authentication server is down and use the temporarily saved authentication information to log in to this machine Set Reconnect Interval Connect to the authentication server at the time specified in Reconnection Time and check the status of the au thentication server If the authentication server is in the shutdown state use the authentication information temporarily saved in the main unit to log in Set Reconnect Interval is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 39 12 Sending to your address Scan to Me 12 9 12 9 Sending to your address Scan to Me The Scan to Me function is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine to your address easily To use the Scan to Me function the following preparation is required e Configuring the Scan to E mail environment e Installing the MFP authentication or external server authentication e Registering an E mail address as user s registration information In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Registra tion and enter your E mail address int
361. f the FTP transmission function on this machine For details refer to page 17 14 FTP Server Settings Configure settings to enable use of the FTP server function of this machine Also configure security settings to use this machine as an FTP server For details refer to page 17 15 FTP TX Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings FTP Settings FTP TX Settings Configure settings to enable use of the FTP transmission function on this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the FTP transmission function of this machine Selecting this option sends the scanned original data to the FTP server ON is specified by default Proxy Server Address To access to the FTP server via a proxy server enter the proxy server ad dress Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number Normally you can use the original port number 21 is specified by default Port No If necessary change the FTP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 21 is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the FTP server 60 sec is speci
362. ficate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation EN Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 13 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Using the SMTP authentication Configure the setting if your environment requires the SMTP authentication for sending an E mail If the SMTP authentication is used the user ID and password is sent from this machine when sending an E mail to perform authentication To use the SMTP authentication enable the SMTP authentication on this machine In addition enter infor mation required for authentication In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following
363. ficates OFF is specified by default Print S MIME information Select whether to print the S MIME information if necessary OFF is specified by default Certificate Verification To verify the certificate select items to be verified Level Settings If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default 13 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 4 Registering user s certificates automatically on this machine 1 3 Settings Description Expiration Date Con firmation Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default 2 Send the E mail attached with digital signature from the computer to this machine The certificate received by this machine is automatically registered when the E mail address registered in that certificate matches
364. fication when periodic inspection is re quired Replace Staples Select this check box to send a notification when staples run out Replenish Toner Select this check box to send a notification when toner runs out Finisher Tray Full Select this check box to send a notification when the finisher tray is full Service Call Select this check box to send a notification when a service call occurs Job Finished Select this check box to send a notification when a job is completed Hole Punch Scrap Box Full Select this check box to send a notification when hole punch scrap must be removed Waste Toner Box Full Select this check box to send a notification when the waste toner box must be replaced Drum Unit Developing Unit Life Select this check box to send a notification when replacing a drum unit or development unit Fusing Unit Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the finishing unit must be replaced Transfer Roller Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the transfer roller unit must be replaced Transfer Belt Unit Yield Select this check box to send a notification when the transfer belt unit must be replaced Ozone Filter Yield Select this check box to send a notification when replacing the ozone filter d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 21 1 4 Notifying of the machine counter via E mail 14 5 1
365. fied by default 17 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 FTP Server Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings FTP Settings FTP Server Settings Configure settings to enable use of the FTP server function of this machine Using this machine as an FTP server allows you to associate this machine with an application that operates as an FTP client Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the FTP server function of this machine ON is specified by default Deny Reception Com mand Select a command to deny a receiving job from an FTP client when using the FTP server of this machine Set this option to return an error when a PORT EPRT command or PASV EPSV command is sent from an FTP client to this machine Allow is specified by default PORT Command En hanced Security SMB Settings Select whether to enable the security of this machine against FTP bounce attacks This option is not available if Deny Reception Command is set to PORT EPRT When a PORT EPRT command is sent from an FTP client the data con nection is established only if both of the following conditions are satisfied e A port number less than 1024 is not specified e The IP address specified by the command is same as that specified when a control connection is established Enable is specified by default To display Utility Administrator Settings
366. figure basic settings for the NDS over IPX authentication cc cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 12 32 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication ssssnnnsennunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 12 36 OVGIVIOW AE A A AE IE E cd eae E E E a ee ee 12 36 Configuring basic settings for the NDS over TCP IP authentication cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 12 37 Sending to your address Scan to Me eccceseseeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeessenaeeeeeesseeeeeeesseneaes 12 40 Constructing a single sign on environment for the SMB transmisSion cessseeeees 12 41 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or accountt csssseee 12 43 Restricting available functions by user OF ACCOUNT eeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeseneeeenees 12 43 Specifying the default function permission setting when the external server authentication is used 12 44 Restricting functions available to public users 20 0 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeteseaaeeeeeeseeneeeeeeees 12 45 Managing the maximum number of copies by user OF aCCOUNt s ssssunssnnnsnnunennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 12 46 Limiting the access to destinations for each USCL s secceeseeeeeneeeeseneeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesees 12 47 Methods to limit access to destinations eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeenneeeneneeess 12 47 Managing based on the
367. firm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con Confirm whether the certificate has expired firmation Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default A late Reference In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 77 7 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 5 Configuring the WS scan environment 7 7 5 Configuring the WS scan environment Overview The WS scan transmission is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine to the computer on the network on the computer loaded with Windows Vista or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 The computer uses the Web service function of Windows to automatically detect this machine connected to the network and smoothly install this function as a Web service scanner HTTP is used for communication between this machine and the computer Use SSL to encrypt a communi cation between the this machine and the computer
368. from Power Save Mode by Touching Control Panel BES Reference Select whether to return to the normal mode when you press the Touch Panel in the Power Save mode If you select OFF the machine returns to the normal mode only using the Power key ON is specified by default For details on the Power key and Power Save functions refer to User s Guide Control Panel 14 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 1 Managing the machine power for power saving 14 14 1 2 Switching to Power Save mode at specified time Weekly Timer You can use the weekly timer for automatic switching between normal and power save modes Using the weekly timer function enables you to save power efficiently according to your operating environment The following three methods are available to configure the weekly timer schedule Setting the switching schedule manually e Using the tracking function to automatically set On or Off time according to the operating status of this machine In the administrator mode select Maintenance Timer Setting Weekly Timer Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan a Ready to Print Syst gees oR Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard User Track Auth Account Meter Count Weekly Timer Setting gt ROM Version W Use Weekly Timer gt Import Export Power Save Mode Set
369. fter reset et di aa Se Administrator B Ready to Scan ie Ready to Print User Auth Account Box Track Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings M Port 4 M Port 5 ovis 1 65535 M Port 6 pns 1 65535 DNS Host DNS Host Name Dynamic DNS Setting Disable LLMNR Setting Disable DNS Domain Name Setting DNS Domain Auto Obtain Enable DNS Search Domain Name Enable Auto Retrieval Enable i DNS Default Domain Name DNS Search Domain Name1 DNS Search Domain Name2 DNS Search Domain Name3 DNS Server Setting IPv4 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable DNS Server 0 0 0 0 m n N LOK Cancel_ Description DNS Domain Auto Obtain When using the DHCP the domain name can be automatically specified Select Enable to automatically configure setting Enable is specified by default DNS Search Domain Name Auto Retrieval When using the DHCP the search domain name can be automatically specified Select Enable to automatically configure setting Enable is specified by default DNS Default Domain Name When not automatically configuring setting using DHCP enter the default domain name of this machine using up to 253 characters including the host name Only and are allowed for symbol mar
370. g Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting wa gt Network Setting Clear gt Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro User Auth Account Track __ Fax Settings Wizard Format All Destination All the registered destinations are deleted Customize amp Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Format d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 35 14 Outputting job logs 14 9 14 9 Outputting job logs Operations required to use this function You can download logs of the jobs executed on this machine The job log allows you to check usage paper usage operations and job history for each user or account For details on viewing the output job logs contact your service representative On the Control Panel press Utility Administrator Settings Security Settings Security Details Job Log Settings and configure the following setting Settings Utility Specify settings for the job log The log is retrieved by turning the power OFF and ON Obtain Log Type Overwrite Accounting Log oe Off ee Counting Log on orff Erase Job Log 4 07 29 2011 Administrator Settings Security Settings Security Details Restrict J 13 43 Description Yes No To output job logs selec
371. g gt Daylight Saving Time gt Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting gt Reset Y License Settings Get Request Code Install License gt List of Enabled Functions gt Edit Font Macro Network Customize Logout 2 2 Box This setting can be configured when the extension memory is installed that is included in the Upgrade Kit d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 45 14 Using an advanced function by registering the license 14 11 14 11 2 Enabling the advanced function Enabling the function using the function and license codes Register the function and license code which were obtained from the Licence Management Server LMS with this machine and enable the advanced function In the administrator mode select Maintenance License Settings Install License and enter the function and license codes then click OK Qe Administrator logout 2l Ready to Scan B Ready to Print 2 User Eincunut System Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track f i Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count ROM Version Import Export Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Reset gt Get Request Code gt Install License gt List of Enabled Functions
372. g User Box environment 1 1 11 3 4 Specifying how to process a file after printing or transmission Specify whether to keep the file in the Public User Box Personal User Box Group User Box or Annotation User Box after it is printed or sent In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting Document Hold Setting then con figure the following settings Bp Administrator 2 Ready to scan B Ready to Print System pee Maintenance vse Security Auth Account Network Box Settings aie l l Fax Settings Wizard Customize Print Setting Store Address Machine Setting Document Hold Setting gt Register Support Document Hold Setting Hold bd Information Delete confirmation screen Not Specify gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings Cancel User Box Setting gt Document Hold Setting gt Standard Size Setting Settings Description Document Hold Setting You can specify to hold or clear a file from the box after file printing or sending Hold is specified by default Delete confirmation Select whether to display the deletion confirmation dialog box when keep screen ing a file in a User Box If ON is set the user can select to leave or not the file in the User Box after printing or sending of the file Not Specify is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 15 11 Configuring System User Box environment 11 4 1
373. g a USer Boxers checnseccsetineh tas slats evince rac sevted T A E 11 3 11 1 2 Changing User BOX SettinGS ssrosrinesnniun a A 11 4 11 2 Creating and editing a System User BOX ssssuunssennnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunnan nnmnnn nnmnnn 11 6 11 2 1 Creating a Bulletin Board User Box cc ccccscccseseeeeeseeeeeseneeesceeesneneseseeseeeeeeeseseeseseeneseseeeneseeenseneenees 11 6 11 2 2 Greating a Relay Usep Box zsido a a cbubeceaicatbust te dyacs e a eiae ae aeaa raai iaaa tarai 11 7 11 2 3 Creating an Annotation User Box 0 cceeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseneeseneeeseneeeen 11 8 11 2 4 Changing Bulletin Board User Box settings ceeesceeesneeeesneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeseaeeeeeaeeeeseneeeneeeeeeeeee 11 9 11 2 5 Changing Relay User Box settings cceeseceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaeeeeeneeeeeeneeenaeeess 11 10 11 2 6 Changing Annotation User Box Setting S cceecceeseseeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeeenneeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeaees 11 11 11 3 Configuring User Box Environment ccscseecceesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeessneeeeeeessneeeeeseeseeneeeeessseneeeeeeseeenees 11 13 11 3 1 Specifying the maximum number of User BOXES 0 c cceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeneeeeneeeeeeeeeesaees 11 13 11 3 2 Deleting all empty User Boxes ccceeeceseseeeseeeesesceseseeseneseeenesoeesesaeesseneeseseeeeseesseseeaeseseeensnenenes 11 13 11 3 3 Aut
374. g machine If Normal is selected for the scanning resolution for sending a fax it is converted into Normal to prevent characters from becoming corrupted and unreadable Minimal is specified by default Print Receiver s Name Select whether to print a destination fax number as a TTI If OFF is selected the fax number of this machine is printed instead of the fax number of the destination ON is specified by default This option is not displayed in the USA model Footer Position Specify whether to print reception information date time and reception number on faxes received on this machine To print them select the posi tion to print the reception information If you select OFF the reception in formation is not printed OFF is specified by default 9 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 2 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a fax 9 9 2 2 Changing print settings when receiving a fax Change print settings for faxes received on this machine In addition specify how to handle files in a polling transmission In the administrator mode select Fax Settings TX RX Settings then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2j Ready to Scan B Ready to Print s User Maintenance aren Security Auth Account Network Box ttings Track Print Setting Store Address poo Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position TX RX Settings gt Line Parameter Setti
375. g posi tion is adjusted and printing is started e Control Adjustments The printing position is not adjusted The pages are printed according to the settings specified in the printer driver Finishing Priority is specified by default Line Width Adjustment Select how the width of text or lines is adjusted e Thin Select this option to draw letters and lines thinly Details of let ters and figures can be printed elaborately e Std Select this option to draw letters and lines with a normal thick ness e Thick Select this option to draw letters and lines thickly Letters and figures are printed clearly Thin is specified by default Gray Background Text Correction Select whether to prevent text or lines on a gray background from looking thicker than they actually are ON Select this option to make the text and lines against a gray back ground look as thought they have the same width as text and lines against a non gray background ON is specified by default Minimal Print Select whether to slightly reduce the entire page when directly printing a PDF PPML or OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 31 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 Settings Description OOXML Print Mode Select whether to give priority to either the image quality or speed when directly printing an OOXML docx
376. g settings M Port 4 M Port 5 Joris 1 65535 M Port 6 ore 1 65535 DNS Host DNS Host Name Dynamic DNS Setting Disable LLMNR Setting Disable DNS Domain Name Setting DNS Domain Auto Obtain Enable DNS Search Domain Name enable Auto Retrieval Enable DNS Default Domain Name DNS Search Domain Namel DNS Search Domain Name2 DNS Search Domain Name3 DNS Server Setting IPv4 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable DNS Server 0 0 0 0 e ance Settings Description DNS Host Name Enter the host name of this machine using up to 63 characters including only for symbol marks Any symbol cannot be prefixed or suffixed to the host name Dynamic DNS Setting Select Enable to use the Dynamic DNS function If your DNS server supports the Dynamic DNS function the set host name can be automatically registered to the DNS server or changes can be au tomatically updated Disable is specified by default 5 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 1 Using in the IPv4 environment Registering the domain name Register the name of a domain this machine joins In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Settings System Settings Print Setting TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting gt TCP IP Setting is reflected a
377. g the settings for using SNMP Enable SNMP Also specify whether to use the authentication setting or TRAP function of SNMP 1 In the administrator mode select Network SNMP Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 Ba Ready to Scan B Ready to Print GEJ senos EG ace a i Fax Settings Wizard Customize 7 TCPIP Seting SNMP Setting LDAP Seting B M SNMP v3 IP P PP Seting T SNMP v1 PX gt SNMP Setting CE setng Read Community Name public M Write Community Name private SNMP v3 Setting Context Name M Discovery User Name public Read User Name initial Security Level auth password priv password I Password is changed Password is currently set auth password T Password is changed Password is currently set priv password Write User Name restrict Security Level auth password priv password z auth password I Password is changed Password is currently set New Password Retype New Password priv password T Password is changed Password is currently set Current Password Current Password New Password Retype New Password Encryption Algorithm DES x Authentication Method MD5 TRAP Setting Allow Setting Allow Trap Setting when Disable Authentication Fails Disable Administrator Information Device Name Device Location Administrator Name Settings Description SNMP To enable SNMP select ON and select the check box of SN
378. g up to 255 characters The shared folder name is generally referred to as a share name e Entry example scan When specifying a folder in the shared folder insert a symbol between folder names e Entry example share document User ID Enter the name of a user who is authorized to access the folder specified in Host Address using up to 64 characters 15 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 1 Registering address books 15 Settings Description Password Enter the password of the user you entered into User ID using up to 64 characters excluding Limiting Access to Desti nations 15 1 4 Limit access to this destination if necessary For details refer to page 12 47 Registering a WebDAV destination A WebDAV destination can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a dif ficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration WebDAV then click OK to configure the following settings amp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan eB Ready to Print Maintenance Syam Security RENATA Network Box Settings 3 ee 5 Print Setting gt SOOO Fax Settings Wizard Customize Address Book Address Book WebDAV i p No Use opening number Direct Input Name Sort Character j Index Specify
379. gs Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation 15 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Registering address books 15 Settings Description Host Address Enter the host name or IP address of the destination FTP server using up to 253 characters e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 File Path Enter the name of a destination folder in the FTP server specified in Host Address using up to 127 characters e Entry example scan User ID If authentication is required in the destination FTP server enter the availa ble user name to log in using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user you
380. gs Box Print Setting gt Basic Setting Basic Setting gt PCL Setting PDL Setting Auto v gt PS Setting Paper Tray Auto X gt TIFF Setting Output Tray Tray3 v gt Security Setting 2 Sided Print OFF gt Interface Setting Bind Direction LeftBind v gt Assign Account to Acquire sen ba Device Info Punch OFF gt OOXML Print Settings Fold OFF z gt page Layont Sellieys Half Fold Tri Fold Operation Selection By Copy Job Multiple Sheets v Specified Page Page 1 Number of Sets ft __ 1 9999 Default Paper Size 8 1 2 x 11 X Original Direction Portrait X Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP ON Banner Sheet Setting OFF Banner Sheet Paper Tray Auto X No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Stop Printing Tray Fixed v A4IA3 lt gt LTRILGR Auto Switch OFF Binding Direction Adjustment Finishing Priority Line Width Adjustment Thin Gray Background Text Correction ON v Minimal Print OFF OOXML Print Mode Prioritize Speed v oK Cancel Settings Description PDL Setting Select the Page Description Language When you select Auto this ma chine automatically switches between PCL and PS Auto is specified by default Paper Tray Select the paper tray for the printing paper Auto is specified by default Output Tray Select the primary output tray Tray 2 is specified by default 2 Sided Print Select whether to print an original on both sides of paper when data con taining multiple pages is printed OFF is specified by defau
381. gure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings for the WS printing gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 8 15 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference WS print using the discovery proxy page 8 17 Communicate with the computer using SSL page 8 18 A late Reference For details on how to configure settings in the computer side refer to User s Guide Print Operations 8 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 5 Configuring the WS printing environment Configuring basic settings for the WS printing Enable printing using the Web service Also configure settings used to detect this machine using the Web service and define information of this machine used as a printer 1 In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Common Settings then con figure the following settings Maintenance Friendly Name SSL Setting OFF 7 Publication Service Disable gt sme setting NT jm Validity Period Confirm kd v Key Usage Do net conte E gt DPWS Common Chain Do Not Confirm z Settings Settings Print Setting Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User Auth Account Box Track System Settings Wizard Customize DPWS Common Settings is reflected
382. h Account Network Box Guiness Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Se Administrator ready to scan ry Ready to Print ge f E Track TIFF Setting Auto Paper Select Auto bl Settings Description Auto Paper Select Select how the paper size used for printing is determined Auto Prints data on paper of the same size as for an image when han dling a TIFF or JPEG JFIF file However a JPEG EXIF image is enlarged or reduced for printing to fit the paper size specified in Print Setting Basic Setting Default Pa per Size in the administrator mode Priority Paper Size Images are enlarged or reduced to the paper size specified before they are printed When they are printed from a Bluetooth device the paper size specified in User Settings Cellular Phone PDA Setting Print Paper on the Control Panel is used When they are printed from Web Connection or a USB memory device the paper size specified in Print Setting Basic Setting Default Paper Size in the administrator mode is used Auto is specified by default 8 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 10 5 Configuring security settings for XPS or OOXML printing Specify whether to perform the verification of a digital signature or printing of error information when directly printing an XPS or OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file
383. haracter recogni tion technology e Language Selection Select a language for OCR processing Select the language used in the original to correctly recognize text data e Adjust Rotation Select Adjust to automatically perform the rotation adjustment for each page based on the direction of text data detected by OCR processing OFF is specified by default File Name If necessary change the file name of the scanned original Page Setting Select a filing page unit when an original consists of multiple pages e Multi Page Select this check box to convert all pages to a single file e Page Separation Used to convert the specified number of pages as a single file However if File Type is set to JPEG you cannot select Page Separation Multi Page is specified by default Subject Click Subject List or select a fixed phrase used as the E mail subject If you select Not Specified the subject specified by default will be inserted When necessary it can be changed before transmission Not Specified is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 27 15 Registering a program 15 3 Settings Description Text Click Text List or select a fixed phrase used as the E mail body If you se lect Not Specified the body specified by default will be inserted When necessary it can be changed before transmission Not Specified is specified by default
384. he Password is changed check box then enter a new password Inform users who obtain device information from the printer driver of the password you have entered in this field d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 39 8 Restricting users from obtaining device information using password 8 12 8 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 Configuring the Fax Environment 9 1 Configuring basic fax settings 9 9 Configuring the Fax Environment 9 1 9 1 1 Configuring basic fax settings Configuring the line usage settings Configure the settings such as the telephone line type dialing method and fax receiving mode In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Line Parameter Setting then configure the following set tings Settings Maintenance gt Header Footer Position Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings gt Function Setting gt PBX Connection gt Report Settings Multi Line Settings gt Network Fax Setting Sound gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings Print Setting Store Address g 02 Be Administrator Logout 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print s User l System Security Auth Account Network Box Settings ori Wizard Customize Line Parameter Setting Dialing Method Auto Rx 2k 15 B ko B Jmn 1 15 Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Setting Number of Redials Redial Interval I TEL FAX Auto Swit
385. he IP address or domain name of this machine Organization Enter an organization or association name using up to 63 ASCII charac ters Organizational Unit Enter the organization unit name using up to 63 ASCII characters You can also specify a null Locality Enter the locality name using up to 127 ASCII characters State Province Enter the state or province name using up to 127 ASCII characters Country Enter the country name As the country name specify a country code de fined in IS003166 using up to two ASCII characters United States US Great Britain GB Italy IT Australia AU The Nether lands NL Canada CA Spain ES Czech Republic CZ China CN Den mark DK Germany DE Japan JP France FR Belgium BE Russia RU Admin E mail Address Enter the E mail address of the administrator of this machine using up to 128 characters excluding spaces If the E mail address of the administrator was already registered from Sys tem Settings Machine Setting in the administrator mode this field dis plays the registered E mail address Encryption Key Type Select a type of encryption key 13 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 1 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL 1 3 2 Click Save gt Click this button to save certificate signing request data in your computer as a file Se Administrator Logout 2 e Ready to Scan aB Ready to Print fs User Main
386. he administrator mode select Network WebDAV Settings WebDAV Client Settings then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting Y WebDAV Settings gt WebDAV Client Settings Settings Proxy Server Address System Settings Bp Administrator fd Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print 2 WebDAV Client Settings WebDAV TX Setting ON z Proxy Settings I Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0 8080 1 65535 Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port Number User Name C I Password is changed Chunk Transmission JorF Connection Timeout 60 secus 300 Server Authentication Character Code UTF 8 bd Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm en Do Nor Confirm il Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm x Description Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number 8080 is specified by default User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 chara
387. he more basic function keys than Standard tings screen in Copy or User Box mode select Allow Send Save Screen Tips To select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed on the send or save settings screen in Fax Scan or User Box mode select Allow e Full Displays all function keys e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays the more basic function keys than Standard Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model To check the functions available for each pattern setting select in the administrator mode System Settings Custom Function Pattern Selection then click Details A function key display pattern can be added to suit your environment For details contact your service representative d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 59 12 Specifying the operations of the ID amp Print function 12 15 12 15 Specifying the operations of the ID amp Print function The ID amp Print function saves print data in the ID amp Print User Box of this machine in an environment where user authentication is installed Because the data is not printed soon this function prevents printed materials from being missing or left unattended Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function Also specify the action that this machine takes when it re ceives a print job from a public use
388. hine you have configured Enter Print for the printer name then press Finish Display the registration window of the printer driver On the registration window for the printer driver select None for both OS and finish registration d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 27 Configuring the environment for printing through a Bluetooth compatible device 8 9 Configuring the environment for printing through a Bluetooth compatible device The Bluetooth is the standard for near field communication that is used for connection between handheld terminals or other devices several meters away each other By connecting a Bluetooth compatible mobile phone smartphone tablet PC or other terminal to this ma chine you can print files saved in the terminal Tips The Local Interface Kit EK 607 is required to use the Bluetooth function The settings by the service representative are required to use the Bluetooth function For details con tact your service representative 1 In the administrator mode select Network Bluetooth Setting and set Bluetooth to Enable De fault Enable Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs User Auth Account Box Track r Fax Settings Wizard Customize Bluetooth Setting Bluetooth Enable z Lox cancel_ gt Bluetooth Setting 8 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 9 Configuring the environment for printing through a Bluetooth compatible
389. his machine by account For details on how to configure account track settings refer to page 12 10 6 p gt oS x 12 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 1 Overview of User Authentication and Account Track 12 Combining user authentication and account track You can use a combination of user authentication and account track for management of each user for each department To combine user authentication and account track specify whether to synchronize account in formation with users according to your environment Relationship between us ers and accounts Description When the user and account is in one to one relation By synchronizing account information with a user you can associate the user with an account on a one to one basis For example you can allow a company staff member belonging to a certain department to use color printing and another member belonging to another department to use black and white printing only Also you can count the number of printed sheets by department to encourage each department to develop awareness of costs If you specify the department of a user when registering him her you can log in as the account only by logging in as the user When a user joins multiple accounts Tips To manage the use status not only by actual department but also by project do not synchronize the user with an account For example for a project across multiple departmen
390. hosTasuutediats E 8 21 In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation essesseeesresesreerererrrrerrrnerresrenn 8 21 In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation sssssssseessseesrresrresrrrerrrrerrreerrnsrennee 8 23 In the NetWare 4 x Remote Printer mode NDS c c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeaee 8 24 In the NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 Print Server mode NDS c cccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeenees 8 26 For NetWare 5 x 6 Novell Distributed Print Service NDPS 2 ccceeeeseeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesenaees 8 27 Configuring the environment for printing through a Bluetooth compatible device 8 28 Specifying the default print settings for this MACHINEC ccceeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesenteneeeeneseenees 8 30 Specifying the default print settings 2 0 eeeseeeeeseee cence eeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaneeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaeeeessaeeeeeneeeeneeeees 8 30 Specifying the default PCL print settings 20 0 0 eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseneeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeneeessaeeess 8 32 Specifying the default PS print SCttINGS 0 ce eeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeenaeeess 8 33 Specifying the default TIFF print settings ce eeseeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeeneeesnenenaeeess 8 34 Configuring security settings for XPS or OOXML printing eeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaee
391. icate Verification When verifying the obtained certificate while Automatically Obtain Certifi Level Settings cates is set to Yes select an item to be verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default Digital Signature Type To add a digital signature when sending E mails select its authentication method SHA 1 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 23 17 SNMP Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings SNMP Settings Configure the settings to obtain information of this machine or to monitor the machine using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use SNMP ON is specified by default SNMP v1 v2c IP Select whether to use SNMP v1 or SNMP v2 ON is specified by default SNMP v3 IP Select whe
392. icate zide Erieg ne Seca eid cee eee ae Be seep eeeae 13 10 13 3 Configuring certificate verification Settings ccsssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesenneeeeenseneeeeeessseeeeeeesseenees 13 11 13 3 1 Verifying a certificate for DOOR yeeie inr e ea a aaea a Eana A a Aaaa aa barra aea iaeano iae 13 11 13 3 2 Importing external certificates used for validating the chain ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 13 12 Types of external certificates that Can be imported eee eceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseceeeeeetenaaee 13 12 HOW TOnIMPOM EPERE EEATT AE cabtacleractas talens ctu E EATE TA eal Shad 13 13 13 4 Registering user s certificates automatically on this machine cccccceseesseneneseeseeseeeeeeeeees 13 14 13 5 Controlling the access to this machine by IP Address ecccsseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseenees 13 16 13 6 Using IPSEC COMMUNICATION 2 se censceecnececsnaccecectstnccenceantedeceestbgnscdeevandndqneeesctudedeceatanceccexectuseceasede 13 17 13 7 Using the IEEE802 1X authentication ccccccsseccccessseeeeeeesseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneneeeeeeseeneeeeeeesseeneeeess 13 23 13 8 Sending data to the authenticated share folder Scan to Authorized Folder s s0 13 25 Scan to Authorized Folder ETETE a daa sche acsa A sap vanced ecetadisiandg das 13 25 Limiting the direct input Of addresses ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 13 2
393. icel fetes Auth Account Box ettings Ta xternal Certificate Trusted CA Root Certificate __ Changes the display New Registration Subject Waidiy Detail Delete F Click Browse to specify the certificate to be imported External Certificate Setting User gt O Auth Account Box wake Tak se Qe Administrator togu 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Wizard Customize Import Certificates PEM DER File rose OK Cancel The import result is displayed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 13 13 Registering user s certificates automatically on this machine 13 4 13 4 Registering user s certificates automatically on this machine Register a user s certificate used for encrypting E mail message with S MIME The following two methods are available for registering a user s certificate Registering a user s certificate as destination registration information when the E mail address is reg istered on this machine Sending an E mail attached with a digital signature user s certificate to this machine to register the certificate automatically in this machine using S MIME function The following describes the method to send an E mail attached with digital signature user s certificate to this machine for automatic registration VY Before registering the certificate you must r
394. ict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 31 12 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication 12 7 Configure basic settings for the NDS over IPX authentication Register your authentication server on this machine In addition change the authentication method of this machine so that authentication is performed using the registered authentication server 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then configure the following settings gt General Settings User Authentication Setting External Server Name I gt Account Track Settings External Server Type Active Directory gt Prohibited Function Active Directory Login Setting Default Domain Name gt Print without Timeout eo sec 5 300 Authentication eo i NTLM P a a fi SEAS ng Default Domain Name NDS V External Server Settings Default NDS Tree Name gt External Server Settings Default NDS Context Name LDAP Server Address IF Please check to enter host name gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Sp Administrator amp Ready to Scan a Ready to Print a Sse i M E User RPA Maintenance ves iv Auth Account Network Bo
395. ified by default Proxy Settings Configure the proxy server used for remote diagnosis Synchronize Web DAV Client Setting Select whether to use the proxy server used for WebDAV transmission as a proxy server for remote diagnosis To use a different proxy server for remote diagnosis select OFF and enter the proxy server information ON is specified by default Proxy Server Ad dress Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary enter the proxy server port number User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password 16 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 8 Associating with the remote diagnosis system 1 6 16 8 2 Allowing acquisition of the machine counter When using a service that diagnoses the machine status remotely the counter information managed by this machine can be acquired from the remote diagnosis system In the administrator mode select User Authentication Account Track Counte
396. ified by default User Authentication Set ting Select ON to authenticate the users using the NDS server ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 35 12 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication 12 8 12 8 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication Overview When you use NDS Novell Directory Service of NetWare 5 1 or later for user management you can restrict users of this machine by authentication using NDS Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine This section describes how to use NDS authentication in the TCP IP environment NDS over TCP IP using NetWare 5 1 or later Apply the latest service pack to each NetWare version When employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure basic settings for the NDS over TCP IP authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 37 gt To use the authentication with NDS over TCP IP you must register the DNS server When perform ing authentication this machine inquires the DNS server about the tree name and context name to obtain the IP address of the NDS server For details on how to register the DNS server refer to page 5 5 Set the following
397. ignano anaa EaR Eara a 17 37 IEEE802 1x Authentication SettingS ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeteeeeeeees 17 37 Web Browser Setting sti cciesaccicesczccaticeadeccedvavesdavsibcesinc daaweceadshuvened cthucenedgeteeedvad tbareredessbenenelsaeeerd 17 37 Bluetooth Setting cises cccscatepssec caasacepeesectagcceecesesceasacaceuscdseucenesactasuaticadusacanazeccasachazsacazcnauaiagazacdagaaeeie 17 38 Single SIGN ON Setting sai scssseses cases cziscesienteecuecetavccaecsavens cheastaceaenshcevyense Aa dense caesoies dhadinavanceectatuetizs 17 38 MR ae E EEE TEE TE ee aecataac ste weyn abe eh adek le E T 17 38 Remote Panel Settings ains anan a a aa a aa a a ea S eee 17 39 Server Settings Remote Panel SettingS cee eesseeeseeeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneeseaeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeneeees 17 39 19 9 18 1 18 2 Client Settings Remote Panel SettingS ccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 17 39 Internet ISW Settings arssinat onesna a droa are aE a E a AEEA a aaa Aaaa a cease 17 40 a E T A A TTT 18 3 aS AoAo n ao a Aa E A A A T E E E T 18 6 19 10 Account track 72 4 12 10 Active Directory authentication 72 73 Address book 75 3 Administrative setting 72 60 Administrator mode 3 9 Administrator password 6 4 Annotation user box 77 8 77 77 AppleTalk 8 20 Application registration 76 20 Assign account to acquire device info
398. ily operate the machine To perform authentication using the authentication card follow the below procedure to configure the set tings 1 Enable the use of Authentication Unit IC card type in this machine gt Authentication Unit IC card type must be configured by your service representative For details contact your service representative 2 Configure basic settings for the LDAP IC card authentication 3 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Communicate with the LDAP server using SSL page 12 72 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 69 1 2 Using the authentication unit 12 19 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP IC card authentication 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting set LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting to ON Default OFF ep Administrator a Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print fa General Settings LDAP C Card Authentication Setting KUser Athentcaion LDAP C Card Authentication FE et Setting ng Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting Y LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting External Server Settings 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track LDAP IC Card Au
399. ing gt iPP setting Proxy Server Address T Please check to enter host name Enable SSL OFF amp server Fort unter tas eee a Proxy Server Address T Please check to enter host name gt DPWS Extension Settings File Path Scanner Settings Proxy Server Port Number fo 1 65535 gt Bonjour setting TPO a Proxy Server Address T Please check to enter host name gt AppleTalk Setting a pathy _ es any Enable SSL Or gt WebDAV Settings Proxy Server Port Number 80 1 65535 ok cancel gt SSDP Settings Settings Description Enable Proxy Select ON to use the discovery proxy OFF is specified by default Proxy1 to Proxy3 Register the discovery proxy server used on this machine Proxy Server Ad Enter the discovery proxy server address dress Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 File Path Enter the service name at the path part of the URL where the WS Discov ery service is published in the discovery proxy server using up to 255 char acters Enable SSL When using SSL to encrypt a communication with the discovery proxy server select ON OFF is specified by default Proxy Server Port If necessary change the port number of the discovery proxy server Number Normally you can use the
400. ing environment for this machine 14 10 14 10 7 Setting the skip job conditions When a job being output is stopped by a warning such as shortage of paper overloaded output tray or un matched paper the subsequent job can be executed This is called Skip Job Whether to skip the current job can be selected for each case where the subsequent job is a fax job or it is other than a fax job In the administrator mode select System Settings Job Priority Operation Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Settings Bp Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print Logout a User Maintenance eS Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings gt Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Wizard Customize Job Priority Operation Settings Fax RX Job Priority OFF Skip Job Fax ON Skip Job Copy Print ON OK _ Cancel Description Fax RX Job Priority Select whether to give priority to the printing of a fax if it is received during copying or printing OFF is specified by default Skip Job Fax Select whether to handle the subsequent job as long as it is a printing job for the received fax when
401. ings DPWS Common Set tings Configure settings to detect this machine using the Web service Settings Description Friendly Name Enter the name of this machine to be displayed when being searched using the Web service from the computer using up to 62 characters Use a name that helps you easily identify this machine Publication Service When using this machine in one of the following environments select En able e Environment where NetBIOS is disabled in Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 e Environment constructed so that only communications using IPv6 are allowed Up to 512 connection destinations can be detected in Publication Service including detection counts by NetBIOS Invalid is specified by default Enable SSL Specify whether to use the SSL for Web service communication OFF is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates
402. ings Description F Code TX Select whether to use F Code TX F Code TX is a function that sends documents to a destination by entering a SUB address and a sender ID communication password of a specific user box The remote machine must support the F Code TX RX Faxing is possible without specifying a sender ID communication password This setting is used for Confidential Communication Relay Distribution or PC Fax RX ON is specified by default Relay RX Select whether to use this machine as a fax relaying station If this machine is used as a relaying station it is possible to receive a fax from a remote machine and automatically relay it to multiple programmed destinations ON is specified by default Relay Printing Select whether to distribute and print a received fax when this machine is used as a fax relaying station OFF is specified by default Destination Check Display Select whether to show a list of specified destinations before sending a fax Function Select ON if you want to check destinations before sending a fax Using this function helps to prevent wrong transmission or not forget sending of a fax OFF is specified by default Confirm Address TX Select whether to require the user to enter a fax number twice to send a fax by directly entering the fax number This is helpful to prevent a fax from being sent to an incorrect destination OFF is specified by default 9 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3
403. inistrator User Mode Password j Help Display Setting Help Display is a network only function On Mouse OFF z On Focus OFF x SSL is not set up Please set up SSL after admin logins to secure safety of the information Settings Description On Mouse If you select ON the popup help is displayed when you place the mouse cur sor on an item of the screen On Focus If you select ON the popup help is displayed when you click the entry area or option of a setting item The popup help is displayed as shown below By Administrator 2 D ready to Scan EB e209 10 Print fs System Maintenance Settings Print Setting TCP Socket Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing TCP Socket M TCP Socket Port Number b la 6s535 T use SSL TLS Port No SSL TLS fp a 65535 F TCP Socket ASCII Mode Port No ASCII Mode fo Ja essas d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 19 Using the Help function 3 6 Using the wizard when configuring function settings Some settings can be simply configured by entering settings as instructed in the screen via a wizard Setting using the wizard is available for the following functions TX Setting for scan documents Transmit the scanned data via E mail e Transmit the scanned data via E mail attach Digital Signature Transmit the scanned data via E mail Public Key Encryption Network print settings LPR
404. inistrator mode select Security Copy Security then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan GP Ready to Print 2 System Maintenance Settings Security 3 Box Print Setting Copy Security Copy Guard ong Password Copy oN E ok cancer Settings Description Copy Guard Select ON to use the copy guard function Copy Guard is a copy protection function that prints concealed security watermarks such as FOR INTERNAL USE or a date in the background to prevent unauthorized copying and embeds a copy restriction pattern on all printed sheets OFF is specified by default Password Copy Select ON to use the password copy function Password Copy is a copy protection function that prints concealed secu rity watermarks such as FOR INTERNAL USE or a date in the back ground to prevent unauthorized copying and embeds a password for the password copy function on all printed sheets OFF is specified by default 13 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 11 Saving the operation log of the control panel 13 13 11 Saving the operation log of the control panel The operation log on the Control Panel for scanning or sending faxes can be saved as a send operation log The Control Panel of this machine can be used to save the log information of when and what keys are pressed This helps to analyze a security issue if it occurs I
405. ins iniiai aina agoen eana anaa a aaa doteuiad radu di auh E aaa A suantecusennstaceest 17 24 AppleTalk Settings ten naaa aa aa beside ee ie ee 17 25 Bonjour Setting ee inaen eaa nae eraann aan tacpecy eSa aaa EEan edn raa Aaa aaa te eee tees 17 25 TCP Socket Settings aeaaeae aaa bande aaea Saara ei iaaa adata 17 25 MEE EE ee E EEE T T AA T TT 17 26 TCP Socket ASCII MOde siriene aaa aa aae aaaea aaa aaa raa adar iaapela niia 17 26 Network Fax SeT NOS a a a a a Sika a a a ane ea AA aE dese a ea a anai 17 26 Network Fax Function Settings ici ssiceatscccsveceadsctevesadaccedeccasdsccavenedsstedvestiescuarenndscceusetesascteaeassa des 17 27 SMTP IX Settings ives cccsccctiscctesasuseceiacceandidusa deez adacs sdaadivassgeaheagesasang ii anaa dasaceaa iaaa nAn aaiae biasa 17 27 SMTP RX SOttinGS aaan aiea anpa ae Na aeia Paan aaa daa Raa ae ANAA aa Ei Peata drata EENAA 17 27 WebDAV Settings irnia e eea a a n a aa a iii 17 28 WebDAV Client Settings r asin cette Aa ee ae et ee eee aaa 17 28 WebDAV Server Settings isiin auian ana a a Eai E a a aaa 17 29 Proxy Setting for Remote ACCESS ssccceeseeeeeseeeeseneeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeesneeeeeaeeeseneeeesaeeeeeeeeesaeeees 17 30 DPWS Settings innin hon WHat eis an eine a 17 30 DPWS Common Settings aaa chi ted ar aaa Taea aa a aa aa Aa E aaa Aa aaae ea A a aae aA EAER rea Aa e DA aR ARRA 17 31 DPWS Extension Settings sisri aiiin paninin astiero r araia aai Aa A AREE 17 31 Pri
406. int Mode OFF x PServer Print Server Name L T Password is changed Print Server Password J Y NetWare Setting Polling Interval M heca 65535 NetWare Setting Bindery NDS Setting 5 Bindery File Server Name NDS NDS Context Name NDS Tree Name Nprinter Rprinter C C Do ES Print Server Name Printer Number 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting ON eames imal Sie r webOnv sertngs onary gt rer sockerSering aa Ea oo ae ox cance Description IPX Setting Select ON to use the IPX OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default NetWare Print Mode Select PServer OFF is specified by default 8 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 Settings Description Print Server Name Enter a print server name to enable Pserver using up to 63 characters ex cluding 3 L lt gt and Enter the print server name registered in the NWadmin Print Server Pass If necessary enter a print server password using up to 63 characters word Polling Interval Set a job inquiry interval 1 sec is specified by default Bindery NDS Setting NDS should be selected NDS is specified by default NDS Context Name Ent
407. ion E mail Address F Registration of Certification Information Registration of Certification Information TS Browse Deletion of Certification Information Limiting Access to Destinations Hidden Search from Reference Allowed Group Search from List Registered Reference Group Number a Set direct Reference Allowed Level eal Apply Levels to Destinations ja a 12 48 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 12 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Reg istration Edit then select the Access Allowed Level check box and set the access allowed level for the registered user Sp Administrator Ready to Scan E Ready to Print User Registration User Authentication No Setting Use opening number User Name SS E mail Address gt Administrative Setting Retype User Password H SS _ 7 REET TERI ST ETS Temporarily stop use Continue Job gt Prohibited Function Login Seang Function Permission PAEA Copy Full ColorBtack E Authentication Scan Full Color Black gt Simple Print Save to External Memory Restrict Authentication Setting External Memory Document Scan Restrict External Server Settings Fax Full Color Black gt Serge as Print Fur coraa E 5 User Box Allow Setting Print Scan Fa
408. ion Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination SMB from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination SMB select Direct Input and enter the SMB e Host Address Select the Please check to enter host name check box and enter the destination computer name host name or IP ad dress using up to 253 characters e File Path Enter the shared folder name of the computer specified in Host Address using up to 255 characters The shared folder name is generally referred to as a share name e User ID Enter the name of a user who is authorized to access the fold er specified in File Path using up to 64 characters e Password Enter the password of the user specified in User ID Only one destination can be specified To specify the host name use uppercase letters Basic Setting Application Configure the Scan option settings Setting For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 15 15 3 4 Registering a WebDAV program A program can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult proc
409. ion Printer Information Printer URI URI TestData00 URI TestData01 URI TestData02 URI TestData03 URI TestData04 URI TestData05 Support Operation M Print Job M valid Job M Cancel Job M Open Job Attributes M Open Job M Open Printer Attributes IPP Authentication Setting Authentication Method requesting user name User Name user I Password is changed Password is currently set Password realm d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 4 Configuring the IPP printing environment Settings Description IPP Setting Select ON to use the IPP printing function ON is specified by default Accept IPP job Select ON to use the IPP printing function ON is specified by default Printer Name If necessary enter a printer name of this machine using up to 127 charac ters Printer Location If necessary enter the location where to install this machine using up to 127 characters Printer Information If necessary enter printer information of this machine using up to 127 characters Printer URI Displays the URI of the printers that can print data using the IPP Support Operation If necessary select the operations to enable in IPP Print Job Select this item to use the IPP printing Specify whether to allow a print job ON Selected is specified by default Valid Job Select this item to allow confirmation of a valid job ON Se
410. ion server is in the shutdown state use the authentication information temporarily saved in the main unit to log in Set Reconnect Interval is specified by default 12 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 4 Employing the Active Directory authentication 12 Sending to Your Computer Scan to Home Scan to Home is a function that easily sends the original data scanned in this machine to a shared folder on a server or that on your computer To use the Scan to Home function the following settings are required e Register the Home directory in Active Directory as registration information of the user When using the host name enter it using uppercase letters Enable the Scan to Home function of this machine In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Scan to Home Settings and then set Scan to Home Settings to Enable Default Disable Qe Administrator togou 2 D Ready to scan ry Ready to Print 2 User Maintenance Sew Security EOLCTMA Network Box Settings Trac j Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Scan to Home Settings gt User Authentication Allows login users to scan documents to their Home Folder Seung Scan to Home Settings Enable gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting Lox J cancer gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting gt External Server
411. ion unit 12 19 12 74 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 3 Reinforcing security 13 1 Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL 1 3 i a 13 13 1 Reinforcing security Creating a certificate for this machine to communicate via SSL Overview Communication between this machine and the computer can be encrypted with SSL to enhance security A certificate for this machine is used for the SSL communication between the machine and the computer As a certificate was registered on this machine upon shipment you can only enable SSL TLS on the machine to start the SSL encrypted communication immediately after setup This machine can manage multiple certificates and use different certificates depending on the application protocol You can self create a new certificate or install a certificate issued by the Certificate Authority CA The following shows how to use the certificate on this machine Usage Description Using the certificate regis The certificate that was registered on this machine upon shipment can be tered upon shipment used as it is Using a self created certifi Create a certificate with this machine cate The Certificate Authority CA is not required for a self created certificate and it can be used simply after entering necessary information for creating the certificate Using a certificate issued Create certificate signing request data in this machine and request
412. is specified by default Multi Line Usage Setting Specify how to use the additional line Line 2 Setting Select one of TX Only RX Only and TX and RX as the multi line usage TX and RX is specified by default Sender Fax No Enter the fax number of the additional line using up to 20 digits including symbols and spaces The fax number you entered is printed as a TTI 9 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 5 Specifying fax report print conditions 9 5 Specifying fax report print conditions Specify the conditions for printing fax related reports There are some reports automatically printed and oth ers to be printed manually In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Report Settings then configure the following settings System Maintenance Settings gt Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings gt Function Setting gt PBX Connection Setting gt Multi Line Settings gt Network Fax Setting gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings Print Setting Store Address Z IZ LE Be Administrator D Ready to Scan QB Ready to Print User Security Auth Account Track Wizard Report Settings Activity Report Output Time Settings Hour Minute TX Result Report Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential Rx Report Bulletin TX Report Relay TX Result Report Relay Request Report PC Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Result
413. iscovery Protocol or not To use SSDP change the multicast TTL as necessary Detail Settings Configure the detailed network settings IEEE802 1x Authentication Settings Select whether to use IEEE802 1x authentication To use IEEE802 1x au thentication check the authentication status and configure the certification verification items Web Browser Setting Select whether to enable a Web Browser Bluetooth Setting Select whether to enable Bluetooth Single Sign On Setting Join the machine to the Active Directory domain and establish the single sign on environment IWS Settings Set the operating environment of IWS Internal Web Server function Remote Panel Settings Configure settings for remotely controlling the Control Panel of this ma chine from another computer Internet ISW Settings Configure the settings to download the machine firmware via the Internet and update the existing firmware d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 TCP IP Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings Configure the settings to use this machine in a TCP IP environment Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use TCP IP ON is specified by default IPv4 Settings Assign an IP address IPv4 to this machine For details refer to page 17 5 IPv6 Settings Assign an IP address IPv6 to this machine
414. ission follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 Configure basic settings for the WebDAV transmission gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 23 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send files to the WebDAV server via the proxy server page 7 24 Communicate with the WebDAV server using SSL page 7 25 7 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 4 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment Configuring basic settings for the WebDAV transmission Enable the WebDAV transmission In addition configure the settings for connecting to the WebDAV server In the administrator mode select Network WebDAV Settings WebDAV Client Settings then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print Maintenance Print Setting Store 5 Fax Settings Wizard User Track 2 Q work Fax Y WebDAV Settings gt WebDAV Client Settings aaa ee a Chain Expiration Date Confirmation Settings P TeP iP setting WebDAV Client Settings WebDAV TX Setting ON z Proxy Settings I Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0 Proxy Server Port Number 8080 1 65535 User Name I Password is changed Password Chunk Transmi
415. ist Button Name Default Value Sender Name CS Walkup Fax Number CS TEL Number CS Subject Billing Code 1 Billing Code 2 BIBIEIBIEIE g a a a a Ri FEFREEE Beck 0k canca 6 inthe Function Setting page of the selected custom item configure the following settings Settings Function Setting No 1 Button Name Sender Name CS The blank becomes unregistered Function Name Nme Message on Panel E Display Method Eme iy Default Value Wap SiS SE F Input string shown as Keyboard Type ASCII Device Dependent OK Cancel Description Button Name Enter the button name using up to 16 characters Function Name Select a function name Message on Panel Enter the name to be displayed on the Touch Panel using up to 32 char acters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 21 16 Associating with the fax server 16 9 Settings Description Display Method Select a method to display on the Touch Panel Default Value Enter the default value The number of characters that can be entered dif fers depending on the function selected in Function Name To hide the default value select the Input string shown as check box Keyboard Type Select a keyboard type displayed on the Touch Panel Options Set the option according
416. istration change of a User Box Se Administrator 2l D Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs System l ser LN Maintenance Settings Security pami Accoun Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting User Box Operation gt Register Support Allow Restrict User Box Allow Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings i aa Standard Size Setting Settings Description Allow Restrict User Box You can enable or disable each user s ability to create edit and delete a user box strict Allow is specified by default If only the administrator creates edits and deletes User Boxes select Re d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 19 1 1 Disabling user s operation of registration change of a User Box 11 6 11 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 2 Restricting Users from Using this Device 12 1 Overview of User Authentication and Account Track 1 2 TS 12 Restricting Users from Using this Device 12 1 Overview of User Authentication and Account Track User Authentication Employing User Authentication enables you to manage users who can use this machine It also enables se curity and cost conscious advanced operations of this machine By employing User Authentication you can use the following functions to users of this machine Functions Description Identification This function allows you to restrict users of this machine
417. istrator Logout 2 D Ready to scan ie Ready to Print eg Io p System Se Sn z Security Auth Account Network Box Settings ae peas Networ l PS Setting PS Error Print OFF ICC Profile Settings Photo Figure Table Graph RGB Color Device Color Output Profile Auto Simulation Profile None Auto Trapping OFF A Black Overprint OFF bal ox Cancel Settings Description PS Error Print Specify whether to print error information when an error occurs during PS rasterization OFF is specified by default ICC Profile Settings Specify the default profile setting to be displayed in the printer driver Photo Select the default setting for RGB color and output profile for photographs RGB Color Device Color Output Profile Auto are selected by default Text Select the default setting for RGB color and output profile for text RGB Color Device Color Output Profile Auto are selected by default Figure Table Graph Select the default setting for RGB color and output profile for figures ta bles and graphs RGB Color Device Color Output Profile Auto are selected by default Simulation Profile Select the default setting for simulation profile None is specified by default Auto Trapping Select whether to superimpose neighboring colors to print so as to prevent white space being generated around a picture Selecting
418. istrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print a saxn s Maintenance a Security Auth Account Network Box ettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Register Support Information inienmanon Contact Information SSS SER P Network TWAIN Product Help URL C V P peset settings Corporate URL Ae OE Supplies and Accessories gt Standard Size Setting Online Help URL L V Stamp Settings Driver URL Blank Page Print Settings Engine Serial Number gt Job Priority Operation NN Settings gt Flash Display Setting a gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Settings Description Contact Name Enter the contact name of this machine using up to 63 characters Contact Information Enter the contact information of this machine such as the phone number or URL using up to 127 characters Product Help URL Enter the Product Help URL of this machine using up to 127 characters Corporate URL Enter the URL of the Web page for the manufacturer of this machine using up to 127 characters Supplies and Accessories Enter consumables supplier information using up to 127 characters Online Help URL If necessary change the Web Connection online help URL using up to 127 characters The online help appears when you click on the upper right of the Web Connection screen Driver URL If necessary enter the URL of the place where
419. istrator mode select Print Setting OOXML Print Settings and configure the following set tings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print g Maintenance 2 nae Box Print Setting Customize gt Basic Setting OOXML Print Settings gt PCL Setting Sheet Book Print Current sheet gt gt PS Setting Paper Setting gt TIFF Setting Default Paper Size mo 5 z Paper Type un gt Security Setting gt Interface Setting a eT gt Assign Account to o cancet_ Acquire Device Info gt Page Layout Settings Settings Description Sheet Book Print Select whether to print the currently selected sheet or the entire book when handling an Excel file The Current Sheet is specified by default Default Paper Size Select a paper size to print an OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file Auto is specified by default Paper Type Select a paper type to print an OOXML docx xlsx or pptx file Auto is specified by default 8 36 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 8 10 7 Configuring the default combination settings Configure the default combination settings for direct printing In the administrator mode select Print Setting Page Layout Settings and configure the following settings Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print s System Maintenance Settings 7 User Security Auth Account Track L A T St
420. item Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default 12 66 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 18 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing 12 Settings Description Expiration Date Con firmation Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 67 12 Using the authentication unit 12 19 12 19 Using the authentication unit 12 19 1 Setting operations of the authentication unit Authentication Unit IC card type If you use the Authentication Unit IC card type you can log in to this machine or execute a print job using the IC card authenticatio
421. ithm Authentication Method Select an authentication method TRAP Setting Set TRAP function to notify of the machine status using the SNMP TRAP function Allow Setting Select Allow to use the SNMP TRAP function Trap Setting when Authentication Fails Select whether to send TRAP when authentication fails Ad ministrator Information If necessary enter the information of this machine Device Name Enter the name of this machine MIB sysName using up to 255 charac ters Device Location Enter the location where to install this machine MIB sysLocation using up to 255 characters Administrator Name Enter the administrator name MIB sysContact using up to 255 charac ters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 27 14 Managing the machine via SNMP 14 6 2 To notify of the machine status using SNMP TRAP function select in the administrator mode Mainte nance Status Notification Setting IP Address or IPX Address Edit then configure the following settings Se Administrator Logout 2l ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs User Maintenance System Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Meter Count Status Notification Setting gt ROM Version Destination IP Address1 Notification Address cr gt rtiExport Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0
422. ition configure settings for connecting to the FTP server In the administrator mode select Network FTP Setting FTP TX Setting then configure the following settings Be Administrator Logout 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs u Maintenance 3 nas Security Auth Account eo Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize P TCP IP Setting FTP TX gt E mail Setting FTP TX ON LDAP Setting Proxy Server Address I Please check to enter host name gt IPP Setting 0 0 0 0 Proxy Server Port Number et 1 65535 Connection Timeout 60 sec 5 300 Port Number i a 65535 gt SNMP Setting ee gt SMB Setting ok _cancel_ Settings Description FTP TX Select ON to use the FTP transmission function ON is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the FTP server 60 sec is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the FTP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 21 is specified by default 7 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 3 Configuring the FTP transmission environment 7 Using the proxy server When the proxy server is used in your network environment you can configure settings so that the FTP server is accessed via the proxy server To use the proxy server register the proxy server information on this machine In the ad
423. ity Administrator Settings Network Settings Network Fax Settings Select whether to use Internet fax and IP address fax respectively To use IP address fax configure the SMTP transmission environment Settings Description Network Fax Function Set tings Select whether to use IP address fax and Internet fax For details refer to page 17 27 SMTP TX Settings To use IP address fax set up the operating environment of the SMTP transmission function on this machine For details refer to page 17 27 SMTP RX Settings Tips To use IP address fax set up the operating environment of the SMTP re ceiving function on this machine For details refer to page 17 27 To use the Internet Fax and IP Address Fax functions ask your service representative to configure set tings For details contact your service representative e To use the IP Address Fax function the Fax Kit is required d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Network Fax Function Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Network Fax Settings Network Fax Function Settings Select whether to use IP address fax and Internet fax Settings Description IP Address Fax Function Select whether to use IP address fax OFF is specified by default Internet Fax Function Select whether to use Internet fax OFF is specified by default Tips To use the Internet Fax
424. izard Customize Pe TCP IP Setting TCP Socket Setting gt E mail Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing TCP Socket gt LDAP setting M TCP Fock ae Port Number be 1 65535 a ae I Use SSL TLS gt FTP setting Port No SSL TLS E a es535 gt SNMP setting M TCP Socket ASCII Mode F SMB Setting port NoASCII Mode E a 6553s gt ews settings O gt Bonjour setting E gt Netware setting gt AppleTalk setting gt Network Fax Setting Webpav settings J openapi setting Description Settings TCP Socket ASCII Mode Select this check box to use TCP Socket ASCII Mode ON selected is specified by default Port No ASCII Mode A late Reference If necessary change the port number of TCP Socket ASCII Mode Normally you can use the original port number 59160 is specified by default For details on how to enable the flash view refer to page 3 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring flash view settings 6 5 6 5 2 Restricting the flash view You can restrict the flash view in Web Connection Use this function when you do not allow the user to install Flash Player If you restrict the flash view Web Connection is displayed in HTML format In the administrator mode select System Settings Flash Display Setting and set Flash Display to Re strict Default Allow Bp Administrator kd D Rea
425. job is being executed ON is specified by default Banner Sheet Setting Select whether to print a banner page front cover that contains the sender or title of print data OFF is specified by default Banner Sheet Paper Tray Select a paper tray to print a banner page front cover Auto is specified by default No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation to be taken when there is no appropriate sized paper in the specified paper tray e Switch Trays Tray Priority Switches to the paper tray where paper of the same size is loaded e Stop Printing Tray Fixed Stops printing Load paper to the specified paper tray or switch to another paper tray manually Stop Printing Tray Fixed is specified by default A4 A3 lt gt LTR LGR Auto Switch Select whether to use paper of a size close to the size specified in Default Paper Size if the specified paper is not loaded in the paper tray In normal circumstances select OFF When you select ON size conver sion between A4 and Letter and between A3 and Ledger automatically oc curs and images may be partially lost OFF is specified by default Binding Direction Adjust ment Select how the binding position is adjusted on two sided printed sheets e Finishing Priority After all pages are received the binding position is adjusted and printing is started e Productivity Priority Each time a page is received the bindin
426. key display pattern can be added to suit your environment For details contact your service representative 12 58 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 14 Changing the function key display pattern by user or account 12 Selecting a function key display pattern by account In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Account Track Settings Edit then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print System pas Maintenance Settings Track Print Setting EEE General Settings Account Track Registration User Authentication No 1 Setting Prohibited Function Login TM Password is changed Setting Print without Authenti Fax Print Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black Custom Function Profile by Account Copy Print Screen Restrict E Pattern Setting Fu E Send Save Screen Restrict Pattern Setting Fu E Max Allowance Set tal Allowance Security Auth Account Network Box Account Name at Account Track Settings Use alphanumeric characters or symbols with exception of 4 an Cancel Settings Description Copy Print Screen To select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed in the print set e Full Displays all function keys Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays t
427. ks DNS Search Domain Name1 to DNS Search Domain Name3 When not automatically configuring setting using DHCP enter the search domain name using up to 251 characters including only and for symbol marks d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 7 5 Using in the IPv6 environment 5 2 5 2 Using in the IPv6 environment This machine supports the IPv6 network environment To use this machine in the IPv6 network environment assign an IPv6 address to this machine It can be used in the IPv4 and IPv6 environments simultaneously Tips To use this machine in the IPv6 environment note the following You cannot use the IP filtering function In Windows XP you cannot use the installer of the printer driver Web Connection cannot be displayed in the flash view when you use Adobe Flash Player 9 0 or earlier The following SMB sharing functions are also available in the IPv6 environment by enabling the direct hosting SMB service enabled by default Printing on a SMB sharing printer Transmission to a SMB sharing folder Search of SMB sharing device NTLM based authentication In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting then configure the following settings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 2 Using in the IPv6 environment Se Administrator Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset T
428. lected is specified by default Cancel Job Select this item to allow the cancel of a job ON Selected is specified by default Open Job Attributes Select this item to allow obtaining job attributes ON Selected is specified by default Open Job Select this item to allow obtaining a job list ON Selected is specified by default Open Printer At tributes Select this item to allow obtaining printer attributes ON Selected is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the IPP printing environment 8 4 Using the IPP authentication To perform authentication during IPP printing enable the IPP authentication In addition enter information required for authentication In the administrator mode select Network IPP Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting r gt IPP Setting Sp Administrator 21 Ready to Scan Ready to Print fz User s o e i Track e Fax Settings Wizard Customize E J IPP Setting IPP Setting ON 7 Accept IPP job ON F Printer Name Printer Location Printer Information Printer URI URI TestData00 URI TestData01 URI TestData02 URI TestData03 URI TestData04 URI TestData05 Support Operation M Print Job M valid Job M Cancel Job M Open Job Attributes M Open Job M Open Printer Attributes IPP Authentication Setting Authentication Method r
429. lic User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fz System User Maintenance Security Uzi Network Box Settings Bieta Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize User Auth Account Track Account Track Settings New Regis Sp Administrator Account Track Registration No Use opening number Input directly 1 500 Account Name Use alphanumeric characters or symbols with exception of space and Password Retype Password Temporarily stop use Continue Job Function Permission Copy Full Color Black Scan Full Color Black Fax Full Color Black Print Full Color Black Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black Max Allowance Set Total Allowance I Total 1 9999999 Individual Allowance I Color 1 9999999 TM Black 1 9999999 Box Administration I Box Count 0 1000 x Cancel Settings Description No Account registration number Select Use opening number to automatical ly assign the smallest available number When you want to specify a number select Input directly and then enter a number Account Name Enter the account name to log in to this machine using up to eight charac ters excluding spaces and This entry is required if you have selected Account Name amp Password at Account
430. limit a communication between this machine and a computer or configure settings of a communication with the printer driver Fax Settings Configure the settings to use the fax or network fax function System Connection Configure settings to establish the association of this machine and other system Security Settings Configure the security function of this machine such as password setting or data management method License Settings Issue a request code required to use an advanced function or enable an advanced function OpenAPI Certification Management Setting Specify a restriction code to prevent an OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine Remote Access Setting Specify whether to remotely import or export user data such as address in formation using the remote diagnosis system d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 3 Network Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Configure the network function such as setting up TCP IP and configuring your environment for Scan TX Settings Description TCP IP Settings Configure the settings to use this machine in a TCP IP environment NetWare Settings Configure the settings for using this machine in a NetWare environment HTTP Server Settings Select whether to restrict the use of Web Connection and configure your environment for IPP printing FTP Se
431. lly added without performing special setting before sending an E mail e Select when sending The user must select whether to add digital sig nature before sending an E mail e Do not add signature Does not add the signature Do not add signature is specified by default Digital Signature Type To add digital signature when sending E mails select a digital signature type SHA 1 is specified by default E Mail Text Encrypt Meth Select an E mail encryption method od BDES is specified by default Tips When using the S MIME function the E mail address of the administrator E mail address of the certif icate of this machine is used as the sender address d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 13 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 2 Configuring the SMB transmission environment Overview The SMB Send is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine to a shared folder in a spec ified computer The shared folder is shared using the SMB Server Message Block protocol If the WINS server is installed to resolve the name register it Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows communications using the IP address IPv4 IPv6 or host name Enabling this service allows you to use the SMB Send function even in the IPv6 environment Using LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution enables you to resolve the name even in an environ ment with no DNS server This function is
432. lor MF552 452 362 282 222 12 43 12 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or account 12 11 12 11 2 A EN Reference You can specify the default function permission setting applied to users who use an external authentication server For details refer to page 12 44 When public users accesses are allowed you can restrict functions available for public users For details refer to page 12 45 Specifying the default function permission setting when the external server authentication is used Specify the default function permission applied to users when an external authentication server is used Functions available to users who log in to this machine for the first time are limited according to the settings configured here In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting Default Func tion Permission then configure the default function permission setting when using an external authentication server Qe Administrator Logout D Ready to Scan on B Ready to Print s System User Maintenance y Security POLCA Network Box Settings Tark Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize P General Settings Default Function Permission User Authentication Copy Full Color Black Settin 3 Scan Full Color Black Save to External Memory Restrict Default Function External Memo
433. lt 14 10 3 Configuring the default method to display destinations Configure the default method to display destinations in the fax scan mode In the administrator mode select System Settings Default Address Display Settings and configure the following settings System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize a gt Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings gt Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt List Counter Custom Function Pattern Selection Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key Permission Setting gt Temporarily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User A Security Auth Account Network Box Track Default Address Display Settings Default Address Sort Method Registered No v Default Address Display Method One Touch Button Layout LOK Cancel Default Address Display Settings Settings Description
434. lt Bind Direction Select the binding position for 2 sided printing Left Bind is specified by default Staple Select whether to staple printed sheets To staple printed sheets select the number of staples OFF is specified by default Punch Select whether to punch printed sheets To punch printed sheets select the required number of punched holes OFF is specified by default 8 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this machine Settings Description Fold Select whether to fold the printed sheets When you want to fold the print ed sheets select the folding mode OFF is specified by default Half Fold Tri Fold Opera tion Selection Select the unit by which the paper is folded from By Copy Job Multiple Sheets Sheet and By Page When you select By Page enter the number of pages to be folded at one time at Specified Page By Copy Job Multiple Sheets is specified by default Number of Sets Enter the number of copies to be printed 1 is specified by default Default Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing 8 1 2 x 11 A4 is specified by default Original Direction Select the orientation of the image to be printed Portrait is specified by default Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP Select whether to save the next print job on the hard disk if the job is re ceived while another print
435. lve the name even in an environment with no DNS server This function is supported in an operating system of Windows Vista or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 It is useful to resolve the name in the IPv6 environment Disable is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 11 17 NetWare Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings NetWare Settings Configure the settings for using this machine in a NetWare environment Pressing OK finalizes a change of settings Settings Description IPX Settings Select whether to use IPX When using IPX select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment For details refer to page 17 12 NetWare Print Settings Configure the NetWare printing environment For details refer to page 17 12 User Authentication Set Select whether to use the NDS Novell Directory Service authentication ting NDS For details refer to page 17 13 IPX Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings NetWare Settings IPX Settings Select whether to use IPX When using IPX select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use IPX OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default NetWare Print Se
436. m Settings User Box Setting ID amp Print Delete Time then con figure the following settings Maintenance Information Network TWAI Y User Box Setti gt Standard Size gt Machine Setting gt Register Support gt Reset Settings Se Administrator 2 D Ready to scan B Ready to Print sem es vee Security Auth Account Network Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize ID amp Print Delete Time Specify the operation settings for printing ID amp Print User Box documents and My Spool documents N Delete after Print Confirm with User 7 ng Ok Cancel gt ID amp Print Delete Time Setting Settings Description Delete after Print Select whether to always delete files in the ID amp Print User Box without checking with the user if they are to be deleted after printing them Confirm with User is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 17 11 Configuring the USB Memory Device settings 11 5 11 5 Configuring the USB Memory Device settings Specify whether to allow users to print and read files from a USB memory device and to save files to a USB memory device In the administrator mode select System Settings User Box Setting External Memory Function Set tings then configure the following settings gt Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TW
437. m occurs In the administrator mode select Maintenance Status Notification Setting E mail Address Edit then configure the following settings BS Administrator Logout 2 D ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs User Maintenance System Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count Status Notification Setting gt ROM Version Destination E mail Address1 gt Notification Address Alert gt Total Counter Notification JAM Setting nn PM Call R Dateie Setiig F Replace Staples Daylight Saving Time I Replenish Toner Timer Setting I Finisher Tray Full gt Network Error Code Display Senice Call Setting I Job Finished Reset I Hole Punch Scrap Box Full License Settings I Waste Toner Box Full gt Edit Font Macro F Drum Unit Developing Unit Life I Fusing Unit Yield F Transfer Roller Yield I Transfer Belt Unit Yield I Ozone Filter Yield Settings Description Notification Address Enter the E mail address of the destination with 320 characters excluding spaces Replenish Paper Tray Select this check box to send a notification when paper on tray runs out JAM Select this check box to send a notification when paper jam occurs 14 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Notifying of the machine status via E mail 14 Settings Description PM Call Select this check box to send a noti
438. machine directly from another computer on the network and operates the Control Panel of the machine using a Web browser A dedicated remote control software program is not required but the com puter used for the remote control must be able to access this machine Using the dedicated software Configure the settings for operating the Control Panel of this machine from a computer on the network using a dedicated software program In the administrator mode select Network Remote Panel Settings Remote Panel Client Settings then configure the following settings Remote Panel Settings gt Remote Panel Client Settings Maintenance System Settings E nutiaccount Box Print Setting amp Administrator Logout 2 5 Ready to Scan D to Print 2 Fax Settings Customize B Remote Panel Client Settings Client Setting OFF v Server Address I Please checkto enter host name poo Port Number 443 1 65535 Connection Timeout 60 sec 20 300 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Do Not Confirm v CN Do Not Confirm v Key Usage Do Not Confirm v Chain Do Not Confirm v Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Synchronize WebDAV Client Setting ON Proxy Settings Proxy Server Address IT Please check to enter host name Proxy Server Port Number 1 65535 User Name I Password is changed Password Cancel d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 25 16 Oper
439. mal use while downloading firmware updates Firmware Download Internet ISW Settings Firmware Update Parameters Settings Description Firmware Download Sta tus Displays the status of downloading a firmware Clicking Refresh refreshes the status Firmware download Click this button to download a firmware via the Internet Delete Firmware Click this button to delete the downloaded firmware Firmware Update Parame ters Click this button to update the firmware of this machine using the firmware downloaded d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 51 1 4 Updating the firmware of this machine 14 12 14 52 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 5 Registering Various Types of Information 15 1 Registering address books 1 5 CO 15 Registering Various Types of Information 15 1 Registering address books 15 1 1 Registering E mail address E mail addresses can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer When using S MIME function you can register a user certificate an the E mail address In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration E mail then click OK to configure the following settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan a Ready to Print User Maintena
440. ministrator B Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings J TCP IP Setting gt TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset psec Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings SLP Setting SLP Enable 7 LPD Setting LPD Enable gt d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 3 Configuring the Port9100 printing environment 8 2 Configuring the Port9100 printing environment Overview The Port9100 printing function directly specifies the RAW port Port9100 of this machine as a printing des tination printer and prints data via the network When using the Port9100 printing function follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 if necessary change the RAW port number gt For details on how to change the setting refer to page 8 4 Changing the RAW port number In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting and change the Raw pot number Default ON selected as required Se Administrator e Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User Auth Account Network Box System Maintenance Settings Customize
441. ministrator Logout Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print Fa eae seins a Print Sening store adaress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Eee Machine Setting Set Paper Name by User gt Register Support Set Paper Name by User ON Information Be et Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Y Set Paper Name by User Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings 2 Inthe administrator mode select System Settings Set Paper Name by User Edit Paper Name Edit then configure the following settings Gp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print m Maintenance SERE t Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Edit Paper Name gt Register Support No Information Paper Name gt Network TWAIN Paper Type 1 customt Plain Paper gt Reset Settings User Box Setting Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Scan File Name Settings Y Set Paper Name by User Edit Paper Name gt Enlarge Display Settings
442. ministrator mode select Fax Settings Multi Line Settings then configure the following settings Se Administrator B Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print Maintenance ES Sines Security anh een Network Box Trac Print Setting B Address rEZ TE Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position Multi Line Settings gt Line Parameter Setting Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Dialing Method 20pps Function Setting Number of RX Call Rings E 0 15 P pex commesuon sewing penan O F gt Report Settings PC Fax TX Line Setting No Selection I Number Display Function gt Network Fax Setting Name Display Function s Number a Fax Print Quality Settings Sender Fax No _ ___ re Numeric characters space Cancel Settings Description Line Parameter Setting Configure your environment for using fax functions in multiple lines Dialing Method Select the line type according to your environment Number of RX Call If necessary change the number of times the phone rings before automat Rings ically receiving a fax 2 is specified by default Line Monitor Sound Select whether to play sounds on the telephone line from speakers during fax communication OFF is specified by default Function Setting Enable or disable functions that are used for multiple lines PC Fax TX Line Set Select the line used for PC Fax TX If No Selection is selected either line ting whichever is not busy is used for transmission No Selection
443. ministrator mode select Network FTP Setting FTP TX Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan a Ready to Print j User Maint System Secu Auth Account B jaintenance Settings rity aa OX Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize ee FTP TX De PeT on E LDAP Setting Proxy Server Address I Please check to enter host name gt IPP Setting 0 0 0 0 Proxy Server Port Number 21 1 65535 gt SNMP Setting ike SMB Setting ok Cancel Settings Description Proxy Server Address Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number 21 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 21 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment 7 4 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment Overview The WebDAV transmission is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine to a specified folder in the WebDAV Server WebDAV which is an extension to the HTTP specification provides the same security technologies as HTTP Use SSL to encrypt a communication with the WebDAV server you can send a file more securely When using the WebDAV transm
444. mission environment c cceseeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesenneeeeeeneeeeneees 7 20 OVOGIVIOW AE E uaa don vecharuchee teh ts hleaatenenicece sat deedoonad aed E E ETET 7 20 Configuring basic settings for the FTP transmission cssceeseeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeneeeees 7 20 USING the Proxy SOrVEl tissccsisscctsactepaascacsaqcgacnadecasaceaeaiqeauadacscasdsasavededasatendanedadassaaandagapaeseadaadeasaasaaanazdl 7 21 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment cssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneneeeeeeseenees 7 22 OVGFVIOW PETET E dicate lias E EE ETA TTE 7 22 Configuring basic settings for the WebDAV transmission cceeseeseneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeee 7 23 Using the Proxy SOIVEN t scei cagecdsaceiceases caeageceazatcasecdepeaeid eueulhcgsasatecaieetaeviyecnsderdyssasaneucapauiadeqsesdesneteaaeds 7 24 USING SSL COMMUNICATION ss rrien sat 35 sede cess ea naa aada ave dev vad cua aeaa E aA aAa a aS caus cya dh cua d sctevanhaeeiss 7 25 Configuring the WS scan environment ccceseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeesneeneeeeeeseneeaeeeseeeneaeeeeseneeneees 7 27 OVGIVIOW EE ieteen seme bi a eee Rie ae Se eek A ane 7 27 Configuring the basic settings for the WS scan transmission sceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeees 7 28 USING the Proxy SEMV Ol sncccsdiacee deve aaslsiaceuteavvestg duaseusesyitensuasdcusedheueucdsausueu sn tupVusedeanededvavddgvbiacsunceewtags 7 30 USING SSE
445. mmunicate with the E mail server using SSL TLS page 10 12 Use of SMTP Authentication when sending E mails page 10 14 Use of POP Before SMTP Authentication when sending E mails page 10 16 Search for an E mail address using the LDAP server or Active Directory page 7 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 3 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving an Internet fax Enable the Internet fax function In addition specify the information of this machine and settings required to send and receive E mail 1 In the administrator mode select Network Network Fax Setting Network Fax Function Settings and then set I Fax Function Setting to ON Default OFF Se Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan ie Ready to Print rs User Maintenance ae Auth Account ttings na 5 Fax Settings Wizard Customize Network Fax Function Settings IP Address Fax Function Settings ON z SIP Fax Function Settings or E Turn the machine power OFF and ON after changing the SIP Fax Function Settings IP Address CL 7 Port Number 0 65535 l Fax Function Setting ON F Kems ranapsamo esm E gt sume semg esuesering pews semings gt mmpoerserng ee ee a gt replete saming V Network Fax Setting Network Fax Function Settings 2 Inthe administrator mode select System Settings Machine Setting then configure the following
446. mory RX or Relay User Box to enable you to use a file saved in the User Box or change the settings of the User Box This item is available when the Fax Kit is installed Create System User Box Direct Print Allows you to create a new Bulletin Board User Box or Relay User Box This item is available when the Fax Kit is installed Enables you to send PDF or TIFF data on the computer directly to this machine and print it without using the printer driver Alas Reference For details on the direct print function refer to User s Guide Print Operations Information Job Select File Printing of the following format files is supported XPS PDF Verl 6 TIFF PS PCL JPEG Text OOXML PPML This Screen Settings cannot be reflected for PS and PCL files amp usert Ready to Scan a Ready to Print me To Login Screen 2 File Browse Basic Setting Number of Sets L 1 9999 Sort on E Offset orr z Paper Tray Auto z Printed Side i sidea Z Original Orientation fuer Finish Punch OFF gj Staple OFF M Binding Position Left eina OOXML Print Settings Sheet Book Print Al Sheets Page Layout Settings Combination orr E Line L 1 5 Row L 1 5 Page Zoom Auto Manual LJ ees 400 Application Setting Caer d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 User Mode Overview 3 4 Store Address Enables you to register frequently used destinations and edit
447. mple of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number Normally you can use the original port number 8080 is specified by default User Name Enter the user name to log in to the proxy server using up to 63 charac ters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into User Name using up to 63 characters Chunk Transmission Select whether to transmit data by dividing it into some chunks Configure the setting if your WebDAV server supports chunk transmission NO is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the WebDAV server 60 second is specified by default Server Auth Character Code Select a character code to perform the authentication under the WebDAV server You can use this setting when Japanese is specified for the language to be displayed on the Touch Panel UTF 8 is specified by default 17 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Settings Description Certificate Verification To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be Level Settings verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose appro
448. munication gt For details refer to page 13 3 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network WebDAV Settings WebDAV Server Settings and set SSL Setting to SSL Only or SSL Non SSL Default Non SSL Only Qe Administrator i Ready to Scan Ready to Print User Maintenance pa ieee Auth Account ettings Trach Bi re Addre Fax Settings Wizard Customize WebDAV Server Settings WebDAV Settings SSL Setting Access Rights Settings New Password Retype New Password WebDAV Settings WebDAV Server Settings ON z Non SSL Only z I Password is changed Password is currently set Initial Password d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 13 16 Releasing the association with application 16 5 16 5 Releasing the association with application You can cancel the connection from this machine to the server when an error occurs on the server while My Panel Manager or My Print Manager is running In the administrator mode select System Settings System Connection Setting then configure the follow ing settings Settings Qs Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User i System k Maintenance sarn Authiaccount Sam Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Machine Setting System Connection Setting Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting Application Connection Setting PageScope My Panel Manager Register Suppo
449. n Fax Forwarding Settings Select ON to use the Forward TX function OFF is specified by default Output Method Select whether to print a received fax on this machine when forwarding it e Forward amp Print A received fax is forwarded and printed on this ma chine e Forward amp Print If TX Fails A received fax is printed on this machine if forwarding fails Forward amp Print is specified by default Forward Dest Specify a forwarding destination for a received fax e Select from Address Forwards a fax to a destination registered in the address book on this machine e Select from Group Forwards a fax to a group registered on this ma chine e Direct Input Forwards a fax to the fax number you enter Line Setting If two lines are used select the line used to send a fax If No Selection is selected either line whichever is not busy is used for transmission No Selection is specified by default File Format Select a file type to forward a fax You can convert a fax into a file except when the destination is a fax PDF is specified by default Page Setting Select a filing page unit when an original consists of multiple pages e Multi Page Select this check box to convert all pages to a single file However if File Format is set to JPEG you cannot select Page Sep aration e Page Separation Select this check box to convert each page to
450. n Do Not Confirm M Check for New Messages Polling Interval 5 Imin 1 60 Settings E mail RX Setting Description Select ON to use the POP Before SMTP ON is specified by default POP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server POP Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe1 0 2f16 Login Name Enter the login name when receiving E mails using the E mail server POP using up to 63 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 15 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server POP as required 30 sec is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server POP Normally you can use the original port number 110 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the Scan to E mail environment 7 1 3 Set the POP over SSL and APOP settings according to your environment In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail RX POP and configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 E
451. n 2 It is recommended that you assign frequently used functions to No 1 to No 7 Qe Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a User ae g race Ea B Track Print Setting Store Adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Copy Print Function List Register Support No Function Name Edit Information 1 None Edit gt Network TWAIN 2 Color Edit gt Reset Settings 3 Booklet Edit User Box Setting 4 Paper Edit gt Standard Size Setting 5 Zoom Ea Stamp Settings 6 Duplex Combine Edit 7 Finishing Edit Blank Page Print Settings 8 Density Edit Job Priority Operation Settings 9 None Eai Flash Display Setting 10 _ None Ea Customize i ione Esn 12 None Edit gt System Connection Setting 13 None Edit gt Outline PDF Setting 14 None Edit Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt List Counter Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account Function Display Key Permission Setting Function Display Key gt Copy Print Temporarily Change Language Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 15 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 2 Select a function
452. n Settings for Turn the machine power OFF and ON after changing the SIP Fax Function Settings IP Address Port Number 0 65535 I Fax Function Setting ON 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network Network Fax Setting SMTP TX Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fz User _ io Te Track r Fax Settings Wizard Customize SMTP TX Setting Port Number 25 1 65535 Connection Timeout o sec 30 300 ox cancer V Network Fax Setting gt SMTP TX Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 19 10 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 2 Settings Description Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 60 sec is specified by default 3 Inthe administrator mode select Network Network Fax Setting SMTP RX Setting then configure the following settings Settings SMTP RX Sp Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting S SMTP RX Setting SMTP RX ON Port Number 1 65535 Connection Timeout 300 sec 5 1000 E mail setting gt FTP Serting ox cancer Netware se
453. n configure the server for registering and using applications When using the fax server communicates in the E mail format you can configure settings to automatically add a prefix and suffix to a destination number Tips You can view and operate the registered application from the Control Panel of this machine However the following conditions must be satisfied The Fax Kit is not installed The Internet fax function is disabled Registering applications Register applications and configure a server for using the application VY This setting is not available when the Fax Kit is installed 1 In the administrator mode select Store Address Application Registration to select the location where you wish to register applications and click Registration Edit 2 Select Use application template and select a template to be used gt If you do not use a template select Not use application template gt For details on template that can be used on this machine refer to page 16 22 3 Click Next 4 Register applications and configure the server settings then click Next Maintenance Print Setting gt L Fax Settings Wizard Customize Sp Administrator B Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print Q System Settings Application Registration Application Setting No 1 Application Name a Server Setting Host Address pooo i O File Path User ID Password anonymous
454. n function In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Authentication Device Settings and then se lect how to log in to this machine Default Card authentication Card authentication Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card Card Authentication Password Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password Bp Administrator Logot 2 Ready to Scan reai 0 Ft a Maintenance Gat Security autecoun Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Authentication Device Settings gt User Authentication Card Authentication Setting Operation Settings Card authentication z gt Account Track Settings p gt Prohibited Function Login Lok Cancet_ Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings Public User Box Setting Mote OR 12 68 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 19 Using the authentication unit 1 2 Authentication Unit biometric type If you use the Authentication Unit biometric type you can log in to this machine or execute a print job using the bio authentication function In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Authentication Device Settings then set the operation of the bio authentication unit and how to log in to this machine Qe Administrator Logout Ready to Scan ED Reavy to Print a Syan U
455. n isccccscecccsssccts repann see cevctacceasavensa dened seta vaeuse causddense AETA a AEA RANEE 10 8 Specifying the reception ability of this machine 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeeteaeeeeseneeeeeneeeesaeees 10 9 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white e 10 10 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission iN COIOM ceeeeeeseeeeeereeteeeeeees 10 11 Using SSL TLS communicatio eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaaeeessaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeets 10 12 Using the SMTP authentication 0 eecceeeseeeesneeseneeeeeneeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeseneeesnaeeees 10 14 Using the POP Before SMTP Authentication eccceesceeessneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeseaeeseeneeseneeeeneneeeee 10 16 10 2 Configuring the IP address fax environMent sssnsssussennssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nananman 10 18 OVGIMIOW E E E E vatataaccvaateon soa E E 10 18 Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving faxes using IP address fax eeeeeeees 10 19 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white e 10 22 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission iN COIOM eeeeeeseeeeeereeteeeees 10 23 ser Box Environment 11 1 Creating and editing a User BoX cccssseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeesneneneessneeeeeessseneaeeeesseneaaeseessenaeeseesssnenees 11 3 11 1 1 Creatin
456. n manage authentication of any new users will not be permitted Select whether to allow the user to overwrite registered user information for that case If you select Allow the oldest authenticated user information is erased and the new user is registered Restrict is specified by default Default Authentication Method If you have selected ON MFP External Server at User Authentication select the authentication method you use normally ON External Server is specified by default When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the maximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 33 12 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication 12 7 3 if you select ON MFP External Server in Step 2 select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information in the administrator mode and configure the following settings Login gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function gt Print without Authentication Simple Print ex Cancel Authentication Setting Qe Administrator Logout 2 E Ready to Scan GB eaa to print a s System uss Maintena
457. n page 8 21 In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation page 8 23 In the NetWare 4 x Remote Printer mode NDS page 8 24 In the NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 Print Server mode NDS page 8 26 For NetWare 5 x 6 Novell Distributed Print Service NDPS page 8 27 In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation Y When you use the Bindery Emulation make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the NetWare server From the client log in the NetWare file system as Bindery with the administrator authority Start Pconsole Select Quick Setup from Available Option list box and press the Enter key Fill in Print Server Name Printer Name and Print Queue Name Set the Type of the printer to Oth er Unknown and save them Terminate Pconsole by pressing the Esc key Load the PSERVER NLM file on the NetWare Server console Log in to the administrator mode of Web Connection d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 21 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 8 8 Inthe administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then configure the following settings Y NetWare Setting gt NetWare Setting Se Administrator fdl Ready to Scan B Ready to Print rs User 5 Fax Settings Wizard Customize NetWare Setting is reflected after reset IPX Setting orr Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Etherne
458. n the administrator mode click Security TX Operation Log Setting and select Save Default Do Not Save a Administrator Logout e Ready to Scan B Ready to Print r User Maintenance System Settings Security Auth Account Box Track idress Fax Settings Wizard Customize TX Operation Log Setting TX Operation Log Setting DoNotSave v OK Cancel gt TX Operation Log Setting Tips To print the saved sending operation logs or save them in USB memory select Utility Administrator Settings System Settings List Counter TX Operation Log Output on the Control Panel d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 29 1 3 Saving the operation log of the control panel 13 11 13 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 Managing the Machine Status 14 1 Managing the machine power for power saving 14 0 Managing the Machine Status 14 14 1 14 1 1 Managing the machine power for power saving Setting the Power key Power save function The usage of Power on the Control Panel and settings relevant to the power save function of this machine can be changed In the administrator mode select Maintenance Timer Setting Power Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Y Timer Setting Weekly Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display ep Administrator Logout 2 E Ready to Scan e e209 t0 Print 2
459. n the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs raed setting Ea Ea Print Setting Fax Settings Customize TCP IP Setting mise Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings fe E mail Setting Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps z PP LDAP Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings 7 IPP Setting iva Presem ee setng s gt SNMP Setting F DHCP owe sein Poot M AutolP P Netware Setting subnet Mask pooo Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Settings Description TCP IP Select ON to use the TCP IP ON is specified by default Network Speed Select the network speed according to your environment The default is Auto 10M 100Mbps IP Address Setting Meth To manually enter the IP address select Manual Setting od To automatically obtain the IP address select Auto Setting then specify the auto input method In normal circumstances select the DHCP check box Auto Setting is specified by default IP Address If you select Manual Setting for IP Address Setting Method enter the fixed IP address assigned to the machine Subnet Mask If you select Manual Setting for IP Address Setting Method enter the subnet mask Default Gateway If you select Manual Setting for IP Add
460. nal Server ON External Server ON With Login 600 _ Minute 1 600 ON 7 Synchronize bd Number of Counters Assigned for Bo 500 1 999 Skip Job 7 ox Cancel Settings Description User Authentication When performing authentication using an external authentication server select ON External Server or ON MFP External Server If you want to configure setting so that you can log in to this machine using its authentication function in consideration of an occurrence of some sort of problem on the external authentication server select ON MFP Exter nal Server Overwrite User Info When the external server authentication is used authenticated user infor mation is also managed on this machine If the number of users who have executed the external server authentication reaches the maximum number of users this machine can manage authentication of any new users will not be permitted Select whether to allow the user to overwrite registered user information for that case If you select Allow the oldest authenticated user information is erased and the new user is registered Restrict is specified by default Default Authentication Method If you have selected ON MFP External Server at User Authentication select the authentication method you use normally ON External Server is specified by default When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the m
461. nal port number This option is available when SMTP over SSL is selected for SSL TLS Settings 465 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Detail Settings Configure SMTP authentication or POP before SMTP authentication ac cording to your environment SMTP Authentica tion Select whether to use SMTP authentication If ON is selected configure the following settings OFF is specified by default e User ID Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication using up to 64 characters e Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into
462. name into Reference Allowed Group Name using up to 24 characters to register the reference al lowed group Qs Administrator bogot 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a System Maintenance Settings Auth Account User Security Track Reference Allowed Group Registration No 1 Reference Allowed Group Name public news r ion Address Reference Access Allowed Level Or Setting Lok cancel Print Setting 12 50 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 2 Inthe administrator mode select Store Address Address Book Edit select Search from Refer ence Allowed Group then assign the reference allowed group for the address book Se Administrator Ready to Scan E Ready to Print System ae pone se Print Setting 3 0 Fax Settings Wizard Customize No rae Use opening number gt Program Direct Input gt Temporary One Touch Name tet Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name P Promisor ABC z T Main Destination Information Email Adcess F Registration of Certification Information Registration of Certification Information T Browse Deletion of Certification Information Limiting Access to Destinations Apply Levels to Destinations Search from Reference Allowed Group Registered Reference Group Number Co Set direct Refer
463. nce Edit Font Macro New Registration then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User System n ga Settings Security al Network Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count Add Font Macro gt ROM Version Font Macro settings Type PCL Font gt Import Export ia ID IF Manual Setting gt Status Notification Setting 0 32767 Total Counter Notification Location HDD io 2 z Box Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro Job Log LOK Cancel Settings Description Type Select a type of font or macro to be registered ID Enter the ID of the font macro This item cannot be configured if a PS font or PS macro is selected If you enter an ID that has already been used the existing ID will be over written by it Location Select the storage location of the font macro d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 35 1 5 Registering a paper name and paper type 15 9 15 9 Registering a paper name and paper type Register a paper name and paper type as custom paper Custom paper can be added to the paper type op tion 1 In the administrator mode select System Settings Set Paper Name by User then set Set Paper Name by User to ON Qs Ad
464. nce Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information gt User Authentication Temporarily Save Authentication Setting Information Disable 3 Reconnection Settings Reconnect for every login Set Reconnect Interval Reconnection Time Minute 1 1440 Setting gt Temporarily Save Authentication Information gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Settings Description Temporarily Save Authen tication Information To temporarily save authentication information in the main unit against a case where an external authentication server shuts down select Enable Disable is specified by default Reconnection Settings If necessary change the time to reconnect to the authentication server e Reconnect for every login Connects to the authentication server at the time authentication is carried out on this machine If the authentica tion server is in the shutdown state at the time authentication is carried out on this machine first confirm that the authentication server is down and use the temporarily saved authentication information to log in to this machine e Set Reconnect Interval Connect to the authentication server at the time specified in
465. nce T Auth Account Box g Track Print Setting 1 Fax Settings Wizard Customize Group No Use opening number Diret input E i Name 2 Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC z I Main Destination Information E mail Address F Registration of Certification Information Registration of Certification Information Deletion of Certification Information Limiting Access to Destinations Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation E mail Address Enter the E mail address of the destination with 320 characters excluding spaces d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 15 Registering address books 15 1 Settings Description Registration Certification Information To encrypt E mail messages using S MI
466. nd the new user is registered Restrict is specified by default Default Authentication Method If you have selected ON MFP External Server at User Authentication select the authentication method you use normally ON External Server is specified by default Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Change the time to hold the Kerberos authentication ticket if necessary 600 minutes is specified by default When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the maximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 15 12 Employing the Active Directory authentication 12 4 3 Ifyou select ON MFP Settings Temporaril following settings External Server in Step 2 select User Auth Account Track External Server y Save Authentication Information in the administrator mode and configure the Qe Administrator togour 2 D Ready to Scan O tovto rine a System tee Maintenance es security EOC Network Box Settings i Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize E gt General Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information ib User Authentication Temporarily
467. ne according to the EAP Type provided by the authentication server Do not select OFF OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 23 1 3 Using the IEEE802 1X authentication 13 7 Settings Description EAP TTLS Configure the EAP TTLS settings if EAP Type is set to EAP TTLS or De pend on Server e anonymous Enter the anonymous name used for EAP TTLS authen tication using up to 128 characters e Inner Authentication Protocol Select an internal authentication proto col for EAP TTLS Server ID To verify CN of the certificate enter the server ID using up to 64 charac ters Client Certificates Select whether to encrypt the authentication information using a certificate for this machine if necessary This setting can be configured if the following conditions are satisfied e The certificate is registered on this machine e EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP or Depend on Server is selected from EAP Type Encryption Strength If EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP or Depend on Server is selected from EAP Type select an encryption strength for encryption by TLS if neces sary e Low Keys of any length are used for communication e Mid Keys that are more than 56 bits in length are used for communi cation e High Keys that are more than 128 bits in length are used for commu nication Certificate Verifica To verify the certificate select items to b
468. ne as a relay machine of the password you entered here Changing Annotation User Box settings If you log in to the administrator mode you can change settings for a registered Annotation User Box or de lete it without entering the password for the Annotation User Box 1 user box 2 Click User Box Setting In the administrator mode select Box Open System User Box Annotation User Box to select a gt Clicking Delete User Box deletes the User Box you selected System Maintenance Settings gt Open User Box gt Create User Box gt Create System User Box Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Ready to Print fz ite User Security Auth Account Network Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings User Box Number 6 Type gt Open System User Box Box Operation Cancel Wizard Customize User Box Name Owner Name Public User Box Setting Delete User Box fil box1 Public d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 11 11 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 2 3 Use User Box Attribute Change to change User Box settings Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print s i 7 User 7 Maintenance 2 ystem Security Auth Account Network ettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Open User Box gt Create User Box User Box Number 4 User Box Name numea E Auto Delete Docume
469. ne touch destination cccccsseeccessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseees 15 30 Registering the subject and body of an E mail ccccsssseeeeeeseeeeeeeesenneeeeeeessneeeeesnesneneeeensenes 15 31 Registering the SU Dj O 24 re ae a aa a a die te Taa ae eaa Aana aa aAa Eaa Oa AAEE AAE Ea aa E ai 15 31 Registering the DODY ii cca secaeds cdi cracucs deeceneTeccedvenacd a rrr aa ar aaa AE paara a aa aa aa eaa aaa draia 15 31 19 7 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 10 1 15 10 2 15 10 3 15 10 4 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 8 1 16 8 2 16 8 3 16 8 4 16 9 16 10 Registering a prefix and suffix of each destination ss sssunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 15 32 Registering the information to be added to header footerf sseusssenssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 15 33 Adding A TONU MAGI iaaea annaas eee detec enced aapa EA cceweedesueceusudeesuaseteadecssustceceyseucdesdeesuetee 15 35 Registering a paper name and Paper type cccecseeeecceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeensneeeeeseeseeneeeenseees 15 36 Using data management utility cccseeeeeeesseeeeeeeensneeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeenseneeeeeessseeeeeesesseneaeeess 15 38 Data Management Utility sisri aeea iiad a arian ad nate ae 15 38 Managing the copy protect data cccccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeceaaeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeeieeeeeeess 15 39 Managing the stamp
470. ng gt For the administrator password refer to the booklet manual Quick Assist Guide gt To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box and then enter a new password Dp Administrator L oon 2 Ready to scan ry Ready to Print stem i Maintenance ae S Security Auth Account Track Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize PKI Settings Administrator Password Setting jerification I Password is changed Current Administrator Password New Administrator Password Re type New Administrator Password a S OK Cancel gt Administrator Password Settin Click OK The administrator password is changed If you change the administrator password in this screen the administrator password on the Control Panel of this machine is also changed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 6 3 Customizing the initial screen 6 3 Customizing the initial screen You can specify the screen to be initially displayed when you log in to the user mode of Web Connection Setting an appropriate screen as the initial screen according to your operating environment improves work efficiency of the user For example if you frequently use the direct print function on this machine set Direct Print as the initial screen In the administrator mode select System Settings Customize then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout
471. ng Duplex Print RX OFF Function Setting Print Paper Selection Auto Select gt PBX Connection ing Print Paper Size 11x17 Incorrect User Box No Entry Print ped gt Report Settings RX from Rejected Fax No Disconnect gt Multi Line Setti ngs Tray Selection for RX Print Auto a ED Min Reduction for RX Print g F Fax Print Quality Settings Print Separate Fax Pages OFF File After Polling TX Delete No of Sets RX 1 set 1 10 Individual Receiving Line Setup OFF Individual Sender Line Setup OFF 7 Fax Rx Print Setting Full Color Black 7 Cancel Settings Description Duplex Print RX Select whether to print an original on both sides of paper when multi page fax is received This option is not available if Print Separate Fax Pages is set to ON OFF is specified by default Letter Ledger over A4 A3 Select whether to preferentially print an original on inch sized paper when a fax is received The default differs depending on sales territories This item is not displayed for Taiwan models Print Paper Selection Select the criterion of selecting paper for printing a fax e Priority Size Prints a fax on paper specified in Print Paper Size If the machine runs out of specified paper paper of the next closest size is used e Fixed Size Always prints a fax on paper specified in Print Paper Size e Auto Select Prints a fax on paper that is automatically selected to suit the fax recei
472. ngs SMB Settings Print Settings Configure settings to perform SMB printing on this machine Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the SMB print function OFF is specified by default NetBIOS Name Enter the NetBIOS name of this machine to be displayed as a shared name using up to 15 upper case characters Print Service Name Enter a print service name using up to 12 upper case characters Workgroup WINS Settings Enter a work group name or domain name using up to 15 upper case char acters WORKGROUP is specified by default To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings SMB Settings WINS Settings Register the WINS server when it is installed to resolve the name Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the WINS server ON is specified by default Automatic Retrieval Set tings Select whether to automatically obtain the address of the WINS server This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled Enable is specified by default WINS Server Address Enter the WINS server address when manually specifying it Use the following entry formats e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Node Type Setting Select the name resolution method e B Node Makes inquiries by broadcast e P Node Makes inquires to the WINS server e M Node Makes inquiries to the broadcast and WINS server in se
473. ngs Line Setting Quick Memory TX Polling TX Polling RX Timer TX Password TX and F Code TX in the Scan Fax mode The network fax function is not available Outside Tone Pause and Line Settings are not available when registering a fax destination in the address book You cannot print an activity report TX report and RX report from the job display screen of the Control Panel Numbers excluding a prefix and suffix are displayed in job history Send job types are handled as E mail The Fax TX in the counter is not updated 16 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 10 Operating the machine Control Panel remotely 16 16 10 Overview Operating the machine Control Panel remotely The Control Panel of this machine can be operated remotely from a computer on the network The following two methods are available for operating the Control Panel Operation method Description Using the dedicated soft ware This method uses the dedicated software that collects screen information of the Control Panel of this machine periodically and operates the Con trol Panel from a computer on the network You must prepare a dedicated remote control software program and serv er Despite the burden this method enables you to control the machine re motely even from a computer located outside the router network Accessing the machine di rectly This method accesses this
474. ngs rdn aeia aaa a a ate gah Aaa e aA aaah aroa ania baai aaa aa 17 12 User Authentication Setting NDS ccceecseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeetegeaaeeeeeescaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 13 HTTP Server Settings rninn eee eee aa a een ii 17 13 FTP Settings sete ccssiavevsdescwsnva caaenceventcaas vuteeadddcaeeuendeStoneuastensanavavdhsedusuteceraureavesaileadote daa ANE aaa 17 14 FTP TX Settings iiinn a E eee eel ae 17 14 FTP Sewer Settings a aise os eee oe Ae sees eh ae ea eet 17 15 SMB Settings naiai eA ee de EAEE A 17 15 Client S ttinGS tscicsieeitacseetedsscesaegcossveddnaias cxsuscatenstianessedoaicsanaeaiadigdenadebteraundansacecandadectedcnavasaceruattae 17 16 Print Setos aeneae aeaaea aeaea eaaa cea te cena aaa a aa apaa a RA Erika gests tanec a Ea Ea aaa EE 17 17 WINS Settings cis scctaseicescctagseecceatacessasedcaptccezaceissavicavanscdvedetazacaczaatap nasacenaecensachapaacdsceauacaganacdagtaceae 17 17 Direct Hosting Setting tonsini a decor atte we a a oaa 17 17 LDAP Settings nnna a A R ciate A aa EA AAE AEEA Ka En EE Aaaa 17 18 E Mail Settings Network SettingS ceceeseeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseaeseaeeeaeeseaeseaeesaaeseeeeeeeeaeees 17 20 E Mail TX SMTP ieee araa gaia e a e 17 20 EMail RXAPOP tene a e a E E e EEE T E eee ot a EN Rar 17 22 S MIME Communication SettingS ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseseaaeesesesenaeeeeees 17 23 SNMP SO t
475. nication is estab lished via the router When the value reaches 0 packets are discarded 1 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 7 16 Associating via OpenAPI 16 2 2 Tips In the administrator mode select Network OpenAPI Setting and change the port number if neces sary Default 50001 gt Normally you can use the original port number Qe Administrator e Ready to Scan E Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting OpenAPI Port Number Certificate Verification Level Settings Client Certificates Validity Period CN Key Usage Chain Expiration Date Confirmation gt OpenAPI Setting E Auth Account Network Box Track 1 65535 Do not request Confirm If you click OK after changing multiple port numbers collectively in Web Connection or on the Control Panel a port number duplication error may appear If a port number duplication error appears change multiple port numbers one by one instead of changing them collectively 16 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 2 Associating via OpenAPI 1 6 Using SSL communication Use SSL to encrypt communication between this machine and application software via OpenAPI 1 Register a certificate for this machine and enable SSL communication gt For details refer to page 13 3 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network OpenAPI Setting then configur
476. nications enable SSL In addition specify how to verify the certificate In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Common Settings then configure the following settings gt Bonjour Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm 7 Se Administrator Logout 2l E Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User Maintenance Se Security Auth Account Box Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting DPWS Common Settings tis reflected after reset Friendly Name SSL Setting OFF Publication Service Disable Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm ox Cancel Settings Description SSL Setting Select ON to make SSL communications OFF is specified by default This item is displayed when the device certificate is installed on this ma chine and SSL communication is enabled by selecting Security PKI Set tings SSL Setting Mode using SSL TLS in Administrator mode Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the in
477. ning an IP address from DHCP default enabled For details refer to page 2 3 gt For details on how to use this machine in the IPv6 environment refer to page 5 8 2 Confirming the IP address assigned to this machine gt When you access Web Connection you need the IP address of this machine For the IP address confirmation procedure refer to page 2 4 NOTICE To enable changed network settings turn the main power of this machine off and on again When restarting this machine turn the main power off and on again after 10 or more seconds have passed Not doing so may result in an operation failure Assigning an IP address If this machine has a fixed IP address manually enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway ad dress In the Control Panel press Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings then configure the following setting Select item and enter the IP address using the keypad Administrator Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IPv4 Settings Display Keypad 2 FEL ApRiication utitity vanua apt Parcs C Cielete 0 0 0 0 Le Cte gt Subnet Mask Settings T Network Settings Default Gateway 0 o oO oO TCP IP Setting Le Crete gt 4 07 29 2011 09 09 Settings Description IP Application Method To manually enter the IP address select Manual Input To automatically obtain the IP a
478. nnection Setting gt Register Support Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting OFF I Information Application Connection Setting gt Network TWAIN PageScope My Panel Manager ON My Spool ON Reset Settings Bluetooth Print Settings ON x User Box Setting Standard Size Setting ox Gna Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting gt Customize Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Settings Description Prefix Suffix Automatic Select whether to automatically add a prefix and suffix to a destination Setting number If ON is selected characters set in registration No 1 are automatically added in the administrator mode Store Address Prefix Suffix OFF is specified by default If Prefix Suffix Automatic Setting is set to ON the following restrictions will be applied The Fax Settings are not available in the administrator mode excluding Destination Check Display Function Confirm Address TX Confirm Address Register and PC Fax Permission Setting Store Address Application Registration is not available in the administrator mode Bulletin Board User Box Polling TX User Box Compulsory Memory RX User Box and Re Transmission User Box are not available Bulletin Board User Box and Relay User Box cannot be registered Confidential RX is not available The Off Hook key is not available You cannot configure Fax Header Setti
479. nt User mee a o Track Print Setting s5 Fax Settings Wizard Customize ox cancer_ 7 TCP 1P setting Client Setting mE g SMB TX Setting on gt LDAP S SMB Authentication Setting kerberos H gt iPP setting Default Domain Name E _ __ PR FTP Setting SMB User Credential Setting orr z gt SNMP Setting Edit SMB User Credentials Sun sang User Authentication NTLM fon DFS Setting Enable Z d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 19 Configuring the FTP transmission environment 7 3 Configuring the FTP transmission environment Overview The FTP transmission is a function that transmits original data scanned on this machine to a specified folder in the FTP server When the proxy server is used you can configure settings so that the FTP server is accessed via the proxy server When using the FTP transmission follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 N Configure basic settings for the FTP transmission gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 20 3 Setthe following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send files to the FTP server via the proxy server page 7 21 Configuring basic settings for the FTP transmission Enable the FTP transmission In add
480. nt gt Create System User Box De Not Delete Do Not Keep Specify days lday Specify Time L dmin s 720 I User Box Password is changed New Password E Retype New Password C7 I Change Count Up Count Up eyiob E I Change Stamp Elements Primary Field Secondary Field E I Date Time Setting Date Type ozn E Time Type None Print Position Mo E Density Normal Number Type Number only User Box Attribute Change Lok cancer Settings Description User Box Name Change the User Box name using up to 20 characters Auto Delete Document Change the period from the date time when a file was saved in last print ed or sent form a User Box to the date time when it is to be deleted auto matically e Do Not Delete Keeps the file in the User Box e Do Not Keep Select this option to use a document to give an annota tion only without saving or using it for copying e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted e Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted User Box Password is changed To change the password of a User Box select this check box then enter a new password using up to 64 characters excluding Change Count Up To change the Count Up method select this check box and change set tings e By Job Adds a number per file Even if a file has multiple pages a
481. nt by IKE select Manual Key to manually configure detailed parameters IKEv1 is specified by default Lifetime After Establishing SA Tips Enter the lifetime of a common key used to encrypt communications 8600 is specified by default To check the registered SA settings select a group name then press Mode Check 17 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Peer To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPsec Settings IPsec Settings Peer Register the peer of this machine to use IPsec Up to 10 peers can be registered Select a group then press Edit Settings Description ON OFF To register a peer select ON OFF is specified by default Group Name Enter a peer name using up to 10 characters Addressing Mode Select the method to specify the peer address Specify the IP address of the peer depending on the selected method Pre Shared Key Text Enter the Pre Shared Key text to be shared with the peer using up to 64 characters Specify the same text as that for the peer Key ID String Tips Enter the Key ID to be specified for the Pre Shared Key using up to 64 characters To check the registered peer settings select a group name then press Mode Check Protocol Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings
482. nt color of the text Pages Select the range of pages on which the text is printed in the header footer Size If necessary select the size of the text Text Type If necessary select the font type of the text Date Time Setting Select the display format of date and time if the Date Time Setting of Header or Footer is set to Print Distribution Number Specify the content of distribution number to be displayed if the Distribu tion Number of Header or Footer is set to Print e Text Enter a text to be added to the distribution number for printing using up to 20 characters Output Method Select the number of digits Start Number Specification Specify the number to start distribution numbers d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 33 15 Registering the information to be added to header footer 15 7 Settings Description Header Footer Specify the items to be printed on header footer e Header String Footer String Enter a text to be printed using up to 40 characters e Select whether to print Date Time Setting Distribution Number Job Number Serial Number Engineering number of the machine and User Name Account Name 15 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 8 Adding a font macro 15 15 8 Adding a font macro Add a font or macro to this machine Also delete the registered font or macro In the administrator mode select Maintena
483. nter Settings DPWS SettingS cccceeeecseeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaaeeesesssaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 17 32 Scanner Settings esnia aaae a aaraa A aa ea EAA aae a Eaa AAE aa E aAA AA EAE AEAN NA aA dea deshtvadseei cee 17 32 Distributed Scan SettingS i svcscccscsccssacheccuscesazecasenscscnosctesainecenshsesecedesadsocesacteaneaszectaseavacedanascuenestecaas 17 32 SSDP Settings esinaine aa eaaa aaa ra paaa aA p aA Aa A EER aA a AeA ar aaa aparen naig 17 33 D tail Settings inini iaaea aa n iee dane ea ada aa aea a diaaa 17 33 Device Setting k cP oh fal oa os Resale OA at eee ee a 17 34 Time Adjustment Setting sisir siea ariy eanan Eire aana Teu E eE AN aiaa 17 34 St t s Notification Setting iria a aane dias eae e aaa aa ea dA aa kauaa deve ie teen 17 35 Total Counter Notification Settings cc eeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeesesaeeeeeaeeeeseeees 17 36 PING Confirmation ccccircdeersciencesustvatecenretecensvteasatatcvauunpetecbbeaiet chash tate auecuasctgusednabstspetteha eguevbevaenent 17 36 SLP Setting isiin inrer sehcoa est ceasndeevnsta ty sntdbecaceegatectadalenataaagiebdneaidyaastecnaccetasdhagecacasenseechuseendte 17 36 PD Setting csezissten ct oct oo eaa a Gouge cha aae aa ia aaae a Aaaa aae iA aaie 17 36 Pretix Suffix Setting seana ra anaa ra te Hendin his saada Deck Gia a aaraa Sanar aa aaa a e 17 37 Eiror Code Display Setting e rl aa ae aapa icc aa a aAa a aa
484. nticated e Print All Jobs One successful authentication session allows the user to print all jobs e Print Each Job One successful authentication session allows the user to print one job Print All Jobs is specified by default Default Operation Selec Select the default value for the operation that is performed after authenti tion cation in the login window e Print amp Access Basic Screen The ID amp Print job is executed and the user is logged in to this machine e Access The user is logged in to this machine The ID amp Print job is not executed Print amp Access Basic Screen is specified by default 12 60 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 16 Configuring common settings when using the authentication function 12 12 16 function Configuring common settings when using the authentication Set how to manage color printing and the operation when logging out of this machine if user authentication or account track is installed on this machine In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Account Common Setting then config ure the following settings Settings Single Color gt 2 Color Output Management Qe Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User Syam Security AuthlAccount Maintenance Settings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard gt General Settings User Account Common Setting Single Color gt 2 Color Output Management
485. ntication information allowing construction of a single sign on environment for SMB transmission For details refer to page 12 47 7 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 2 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 Configuring basic settings for the SMB transmission Enable the SMB Send function In addition select the authentication method for SMB transmission In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Client Setting then configure the following set tings Qe Administrator togou e Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fs System r uer Maintenance Settings Security Auch Account Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting Client Setting SMB TX Setting ON 7 SMB Authentication Setting Kerberos fd Default Domain Name SMB User Credential Setting OFF Edit SMB User Credentials estrict E Tsi User Authentication NTLM ON 7 Se wiNs setting DFS Setting Disable Settings Description SMB TX Setting Select ON to use the SMB transmission function ON is specified by default SMB Authentication Set ting Tips Select an authentication method for SMB transmission according to your environment e NTLM v1 NTLM v2 NTLM v1 v2 Select this to use the function in the NT domain environment If you select NTLM v1 v2 NTLMv1 au thentication is performed when NTLMv2 authentication fails e Kerberos Select this to use
486. ntry cn users dc example dc com Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the LDAP server 60 sec is specified by default 12 64 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 18 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing 1 2 Settings Description General Settings Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server Select one appropriate for the authentication method used for your LDAP server e Simple e Digest MD5 e GSS SPNEGO e NTLM v1 e NTLM v2 Simple is specified by default Login Name Log in to the LDAP server and enter the login name to search for a user using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 64 characters excluding To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Domain Name Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server using up to 64 char acters If GSS SPNEGO is selected for General Settings enter the domain name of Active Directory Use Referral Select whether to use the referral function if necessary Make an appropriate choice to fit the LDAP server environment ON is specified by default Search Attribute Enter the search attribute to be used for search of user using the LDAP server using up to 64 characters including a symbol mark The
487. o E mail Address using up to 320 characters Se Administrator Ready to Scan B Ready to Print System Se Maintenance Lui Auth Account Box Settings Track Print Setting General Settings User Registration User Authentication No poe Use opening number E mail Address C O aoe cacsuors n Administrative Setting Retype User Password gt Account Track Settings z eae cuon Temporarily stop use Continue Job ox cancer Tips If Active Directory is used as an authentication server register the user s E mail address in Active Di rectory A late Reference For details on the E mail transmission environment refer to page 7 3 For details on how to use the Scan to Me function refer to User s Guide Scan Operations 12 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 10 Constructing a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission 12 12 10 Constructing a single sign on environment for the SMB transmis sion By using the user authentication information login name and password of this machine as SMB destination authentication information host name and password you can avoid the problem of having to specify SMB destination authentication information allowing construction of a single sign on environment for SMB trans mission In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Client Setting then configure the following s
488. o 64 characters Pressing Initial Password returns the password to the default sysadm is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 29 17 Proxy Setting for Remote Access To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings WebDAV Settings Proxy Setting for Re mote Access To use the remote diagnosis system via a proxy server register the proxy server currently used Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use a proxy server when using the remote diagnosis sys tem OFF is specified by default WebDAV Client Settings and Synchronization Select this option to use the proxy server registered in WebDAV Client Set tings as a proxy server for remote diagnosis WebDAV Client Settings and Synchronization is specified by default Individual Settings Select this option to register a proxy server for remote diagnosis separately from the proxy server registered in WebDAV Client Settings Proxy Server Ad dress Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number Normally you can use the original port number 8080 is specified by default User Name
489. o a certain department to use color printing and another member belonging to another department to use black and white printing only Also you can count the number of printed sheets by department to encourage each department to develop awareness of costs You can log in to this machine only by entering the user name There is no need to spec ify the account When employing Account Track follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure basic account track settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 11 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Synchronize with User Authentication page 12 6 Restrict available functions by account page 12 43 Specify how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 out 12 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 3 Employing the account track function 12 Configuring basic account track settings Enable the account track function Also register the account 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print a Em User Maintenance Settings Security peel bea Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt User Authentication User Authentication ON MFP z Setting Ove
490. o access 3 3 ID amp print delete time 77 77 IEEE802 1X authentication setting 73 23 Import 74 32 Incomplete TX hold 9 72 Install license 74 46 Interface setting 8 38 Internet fax 70 3 15 77 Internet ISW settings 74 48 IP address fax 70 18 15 12 IP address IPv4 5 4 IP filtering 73 76 IPP print 8 70 IPPS print 8 73 IPsec setting 73 77 IWS settings 76 77 J Job log 74 37 Job log settings 74 36 Job priority operation settings 74 42 L Layout of Web Connection screen 3 4 LDAP authentication 72 26 LDAP search 7 34 LDAP IC card authentication setting 72 69 Limiting access to destinations 72 47 Line parameter setting 9 3 LLTD setting 5 72 Login mode 3 7 Login screen 3 6 LPR print 8 3 M Machine setting 4 3 20 1 Main menu 3 72 Main menu default settings 74 9 Main menu display settings 74 77 Manual setting 4 5 Max allowance set 72 46 Memory RX setting 9 73 Meter count 74 30 Meter count and device confirmation Tx settings 14 44 MFP authentication 72 6 Multi line settings 9 22 N IN NDS over IPX authentication 72 37 NDS over TCP IP authentication 72 36 NetWare setting 5 77 8 27 Network error code display setting 5 73 Network setting clear 74 34 NTLM authentication 72 20 OOXML print settings 8 36 OpenAPI 76 6 Operating environment 7 3 Outline PDF setting 74 43 P Page layout settings 8 37 PBX connection setting 9 4 PC fax RX setting 9 76 PC fax TX setting 9 27 PCL setting
491. o send and receive faxes via enterprise network and Internet Internet fax is sent or received via E mail The same network as computer network is used for fax transmission Therefore you can send and receive faxes without having to worry about high communication costs to distant locations or to send a large number of pages Since this machine supports SSL TLS encryption and POP before SMTP authentication security can be as sured When the LDAP server or Active Directory is used for user management you can search for or specify E mail address from the server When using Internet Fax follow the below procedure to configure the settings Y These items must be configured by your service representative in advance For details contact your service representative Configure settings for connecting to the network such as the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 N Configure basic settings for sending and receiving an Internet fax gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 10 4 3 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Check of a fax reception page 10 8 Change of the reception capability of this machine that is notified to a peer page 10 9 Change of default compression type setting for transmission in black and white page 10 10 Change of default compression type setting for transmission in color page 10 11 Co
492. ocket ASCII Mode displays Web Connection in the flash view For details refer to page 17 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 25 TCP Socket To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP Socket Settings TCP Socket Configure settings to establish a communication with this machine via TCP Socket Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use TCP Socket on this machine ON is specified by default Use SSL TLS Select whether to use SSL when establishing a communication via TCP Socket OFF is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the TCP Socket port number 59158 is specified by default Port Number SSL TLS If necessary specify the SSL communication port number 59159 is specified by default TCP Socket ASCII Mode To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP Socket Settings TCP Socket AS Cll Mode Configure settings to establish a communication with this machine via TCP Socket ASCII Mode Enabling TCP Socket ASCII Mode displays Web Connection in the flash view Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use TCP Socket ASCII Mode on this machine ON is specified by default Port Number ASCII Mode If necessary change the port number of TCP Socket ASCII Mode 59160 is specified by default Network Fax Settings To display Util
493. od 60 Day s 1 3650 Encryption Key Type RSA 1024_MD5 ok Cancel Settings Description Common Name Displays the IP address or domain name of this machine Organization Enter an organization or association name using up to 63 ASCII charac ters Organizational Unit Enter the organization unit name using up to 63 ASCII characters You can also specify a null Locality Enter the locality name using up to 127 ASCII characters State Province Enter the state or province name using up to 127 ASCII characters Country Enter the country name As the country name specify a country code de fined in S003166 using up to two ASCII characters United States US Great Britain GB Italy IT Australia AU The Nether lands NL Canada CA Spain ES Czech Republic CZ China CN Den mark DK Germany DE Japan JP France FR Belgium BE Russia RU Admin E mail Address Enter the E mail address of the administrator of this machine using up to 128 characters excluding spaces If the E mail address of the administrator was already registered from Sys tem Settings Machine Setting in the administrator mode this field dis plays the registered E mail address Validity Start Date Displays the starting date of the certificate validity period Displays the date and time of this machine when this screen is displayed Validity Period Enter the validity period o
494. og Current Job Log will be deleted and new Job Log will be gt Import Export created Are you sure you want to continue gt Status Notification Setting y Total Counter Notification Setting Date Time Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro Y Job Log gt Create Job Log Download Job Log 2 Inthe administrator mode select Maintenance Job Log Download Job Log then click OK Se Administrator 2l Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print a User se ssn a Print Setting Store Add Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Meter Count Download Job Log gt ROM Version Job Log download will begin Are you sure you want to continue gt Import Export gt Status Notification Setting ox Total Counter Notification Setting gt Date Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Timer Setting gt Network Error Code Display Setting Reset License Settings gt Edit Font Macro gt Create Job Log gt Download Job Log 3 Click Download This starts downloading the job log d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 37 1 4 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 10 14 10 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 10 1 Configuring default settings for Normal Display and Enlarge Display collec tively Select whether to arrange a single
495. olicy while IPsec communication is enabled Select Deny to discard IP packets that do not meet the IPsec Policy settings Allow is specified by default e Dead Peer Detection If no response can be confirmed from the peer within a certain period the SA with the peer is deleted Select a time that elapses before sending survival confirmation information to the peer how has not responded 15 sec is specified by default Communication Check To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IPsec Settings Com munication Check Select this option to confirm IPsec communication error logs Pressing Communication Error Log displays a list of IP addresses at which a communication error occurred error details and occurrence times To confirm the details select a target communication error then press Details 17 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 IP Filtering Permit Access To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings IP Filtering Permit Ac cess Specify an IP address of a computer to which you want to allow access to this machine Settings Description Enable Disable Select whether to specify an IP address that allows access to this machine Disable is specified by default Set 1 to Set 5 Enter the range of IP addresses that allow access using the following for mat e Entry example
496. om Function Profile User Account Function Display Key Permission Setting Y Function Display Key Send Save gt Temporarily Change Language Main Menu Default Settings Default Address Display Settings 14 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 14 3 6 Allowing the change of display language on the Touch Panel Display the Language key on the Touch Panel to allow temporary change of the display language on the Touch Panel of this machine In the administrator mode select System Settings Temporarily Change Language and set Temporarily Change Language to ON Default OFF S gt User h Maintenance Security Auth Account Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN gt Reset Settings gt User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User gt Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings gt Preview Settings gt List Counter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key P
497. omain Name gt Print without Timeout so sec 5 300 Authentication b NTLM Simple Print fi H cation z Default Domain Name i NDS Y External Server Settings Default NDS Tree Name a _ External Server Settings Default NDS Context Name LDAP Server Address IF Please check to enter host name gt Public User Box Setting Port No Ess Ja 65535 gt User Account Common I Enable SSL Setti ng Port No SSL 536 a 65535 gt H p Scat Settings Search Base gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Timeo E0 sec 5 300 General Settings Simple x gt Counter Remote Control Search Attribute d I Search Attributes Authentication Login Name T Password is changed Password Cancel Maintenance Print Setting Store di gt General Settings Sp Administrator e Ready to Scan E rezov to Print E ee u TRA System security W F POAN ee Ps ut ccount Network x Settings f Taree Track asi Fax Settings Wizard Customize External Server Registration Settings External Server Name Description Enter the name of your NDS server using up to 32 characters Assign an easy to understand name to the NDS server to be registered External Server Type Select NDS over TCP IP Default NDS Tree Name Enter the default NDS tree name using up to 63 characters Default NDS Context Name Enter the default NDS context name using up to 191 characters d
498. omatically deleting files from a User BOX eesceeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeseeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeesseeeeenaeeeeeas 11 14 11 3 4 Specifying how to process a file after printing Or transmission cceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeteeneeeesaeeees 11 15 11 4 Configuring System User Box environment ecccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeeenssneeeeeeeesneneeeeesseeeees 11 16 11 4 1 Deleting all Secure COCUMENINS cccceeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeaeeesescaaeeeeeesneieeeeeeees 11 16 11 4 2 Automatically deleting files from a System User BoOX esscceesseeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneeeenaeeeeeeeeeas 11 16 11 4 3 Specifying operations of printed ID amp print COCUMENTHS ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeteneeeeesneeeeeeeeesaeeees 11 17 11 5 Configuring the USB Memory Device SettingS cssssseccessseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesneeeeeenssnenees 11 18 11 6 Disabling user s operation of registration change of a User BOX scccsseeeeeeesesseeeeeeesenes 11 19 Re g frot ji Devi 12 1 Overview of User Authentication and Account Track ss ssssusssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 12 3 User Authentication ACCOUNT Ma k a aa Daaa aa aaa a aaa A a a ar a Ea aaa aa Aaa Daaa aaea orana ENEA Combining user authentication and account trACK eeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenneesseneeseeaeeeeeaeees 12 5 12 2 Employing the MFP authentication cccssseecceesseeeceeeeesseneeee
499. options according to your environment Purpose Reference Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 Specify how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 out Restrict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 12 36 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 8 Employing the NDS over TCP IP authentication 12 Configuring basic settings for the NDS over TCP IP authentication Register your authentication server on this machine In addition change the authentication method of this machine so that authentication is performed using the registered authentication server 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then configure the following settings User Authentication No 2 Setting External Server Name gt Account Track Settings External Server Type Active Directory gt Prohibited Function Active Directory Login Setting Default D
500. options according to your environment Purpose Reference Communicate with the LDAP server using SSL page 12 30 Send original data scanned on this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 Specify how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 out Restrict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 12 26 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 6 Employing the LDAP authentication 1 2 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP authentication Register your authentication server on this machine In addition change the authentication method of this machine so that authentication 1 In the administrator mode is performed using the registered authentication server select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then configure the following settings Setting Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Y External Server External Server Settings LDAP Rete Server Address T Please check to enter host name
501. opy Print Screen Pat Select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed in the print set tern tings screen in Copy or User Box mode e Full Displays all function keys e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays the more basic function keys than Standard Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model Send Save Screen Pat Select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed on the send or tern save settings screen in Fax Scan or User Box mode e Full Displays all function keys e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays the more basic function keys than Standard Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model Tips Click Details to check the functions that can be used in each display pattern 14 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 1 4 14 3 5 Selecting function keys to be displayed on the main screen Individual spec ification Overview Change the type or layout of function keys to be displayed on the main screen in each mode You can arrange the commonly used function keys on the main menu or hide unused function keys depend ing on function key usage conditions To change function keys to be displayed on the screen in each mode take the following procedure to con figure the settings Allow the change of functions keys in each mode gt For
502. opy Protect Data Manage Stamp Data eiManage Font Macro 1 1 Can only run on Windows Internet Explorer and Flash Player Version 9 and above environments Select Administrator Admin Mode Web Connection Select Login Administrator Admin Mode Administrator User Mode Password Help Display Setting Help Display is a network only function On Mouse OFF On Focus OFF SSL is not set up Please set up SSL after admin logins to secure safety of the information gt When the administrator of this machine wants to log in to the user mode select Administrator User Mode gt The display of the password entry screen differs depending on the settings of this machine d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Login methods 3 3 3 Enter the administrator password then click OK Web Connection Select Login Administrator Admin Mode Administrator User Mode Password Help Display Setting Help Display is a network only function On Mouse OFF On Focus OFF ok cance Please set up SSL after admin logins to secure safety of the information The administrator mode window appears Tips Logging in to the administrator mode locks the Control Panel of this machine and you will not be able to use it on the Control Panel e Depending on the status of this machine you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode 3 10 d Color
503. or details contact your service representative VY The Fax Kit is required to use this function Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 Configure basic settings for sending and receiving faxes using IP address fax gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 10 19 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Change of default compression type setting for transmission in black and white page 10 22 Change of default compression type setting for transmission in color page 10 23 10 18 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 2 Configuring the IP address fax environment 1 0 Configuring basic settings for sending and receiving faxes using IP address fax Enable the IP address fax function In addition configure settings for sending and receiving faxes sender information of this machine and operation mode for IP address fax 1 In the administrator mode select Network Network Fax Setting Network Fax Function Settings and then set IP Address Fax Function Settings to ON Default OFF Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fz User Maintenance Bese Auth Account Box Settings Track r Fax Settings Wizard Customize Network Fax Function Settings IP Address Fax Function Settings Jon SIP Fax Functio
504. or the NTLM authentication gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 12 21 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Resolve the name using the WINS server page 12 24 Use the NTLM authentication function in the IPv6 environment page 12 25 Send original data scanned by this machine easily to the login user s own address page 12 40 using E mail Scan to Me Construct a single sign on environment for the SMB transmission page 12 41 Restrict available functions by user page 12 43 Restrict the access to destinations by user page 12 47 Change function keys displayed in the Touch Panel by user page 12 57 Specify the operations of the ID amp Print function page 12 60 Specify how to manage color printing and operations of this machine when you log page 12 61 out Restrict print jobs without authentication information page 12 62 Print data from the printer driver without using the password page 12 63 12 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 5 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 Configurig basic settings for the NTLM authentication Register your authentication server on this machine In addition change the authentication method of this machine so that authentication is performed using the registered authentication server 1 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Edit then configure the following settings Maintenance V Exte
505. ord OK cance 2 Click Download Preparation for download has been completed Click the Download button to start the save When the save is completed click the Back button Download Back The certificate for this machine is saved to the computer d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 9 1 3 Managing the certificates for this machine 13 2 13 2 3 Importing a certificate The exported certificate can be imported on this machine 1 In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting Setting Im port Certificate then click Browse to specify the certificated to be imported Se Administrator Logout 2l eS Ready to Scan Ready to Print f User Auth Account Box Track Maintenance System Settings Security Print Setting SS Wizard Customize PKI Settings Import Certificates PKCS 12 gt Device Certificate Setting File Password C e Verification 2 Enter the password using up to 32 characters and click OK gt Enter the password specified when exporting the certificate The import result is displayed 13 2 4 Deleting a certificate A certificate for this machine can be deleted if necessary In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting Setting Remove a Certificate then click OK ep Administrator togou 2 Ready to Scan GD Ready to Print a User Maint
506. ore Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize d Basic Setting Page Layout Settings gt PCL Setting Combination orr E gt PS Setting Number of Page Combinations gt TIFF Setting Une LI Lo gt Security Setting ey Combination Direction gt Interface Setting Pane Spacing gt PEET Row Interval bo 0 0 2 0 inch gt OOXML Print Settings Mesias bo AREEN Top Margin bo 0 0 2 0 inch a Bottom Margin po 0 0 2 0 inch Left Margin po 0 0 2 0 inch Right Margin bo 0 0 2 0 inch Page Zoom Auto Manual C es 400 Page Frame Do Not Print ox Cancel Settings Description Combination Select ON to reduce multiple pages onto one sheet for printing OFF is specified by default Number of Page Combi Enter the number of pages to be combined onto one sheet for Line and nations Row The default is 1 for Line and Row Combination Direction Select a method to arrange pages Sideways from Upper Left is specified by default Page Spacing Enter the page space in the row and column directions The default is 0 inch or mm Margin Enter page margins at the top bottom right and left sides The default is 0 inch or mm Page Zoom Select whether to automatically adjust the zoom ratio or specify any zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce a page Auto is specified by default Page Frame Select to print a border line between pages Do Not Print is specified by defaul
507. ore SMTP Time B sec 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User 1D CT T Password is changed Password S Domain Name i Authentication Setting I Binary Division Divided Mail Size 100 15000 Step100 oL cance Settings Description POP before SMTP Select ON to use the POP Before SMTP OFF is specified by default POP before SMTP Time If necessary change the waiting time until starting E mail transmission af ter the POP authentication is successful Depending on your environment it may take time before the E mail trans mission is allowed after the POP authentication is successful In that case if a time period that is too short is specified E mail transmission may fail 5 sec is specified by default 10 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 1 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 2 Set the POP over SSL and APOP settings according to your environment In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail RX POP and configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout D Ready to Scan Ready to Print a Maintenance Print Setting E mail Setting gt E mail RX POP System Settings E mail RX POP E mail RX Setting ON F T Please check to enter host name Cd APOP Authentication OFF 30 Zjsec mo 1 65535 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm CN Do Not Confirm K
508. original port number 80 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 17 Configuring the WS printing environment 8 5 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the computer is encrypted with SSL To encrypt SSL communication between this machine and the computer you must set the bidirectional SSL communication between them Before starting this procedure confirm the following Name resolution must have been performed in the DNS server If the certificate of this machine is not the one issued by the Certificate Authority CA you must register the certificate of this machine in Trusted Root Certification Authorities of the computer e Create a certificate in the computer side in advance and associate it with the TCP IP communication port default port number 5358 Enable the SSL communication In addition specify how to verify the certificate In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Common Settings then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Se Administrator Logout 2l E Ready to Scan B Ready to Print User System n Settings Security En Aeron eo Box DPWS Common Settings is reflected after reset Friendly Name SSL Setting OFF a Publication Service Disable Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm
509. ork WebDAV Settings WebDAV Client Settings then con figure the certificate verification method Sp Administrator 2 ready to Scan Bp Ready to Print User Maintenance ae Auth Account Box ettings Track Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize Q WebDAV Client Settings WebDAV TX Setting ON z Proxy Settings Proxy Server Address I Please check to enter host name 0 0 0 0 Proxy Server Port Number 8080 1 65535 User Name I Password is changed Password Chunk Transmission OFF Connection Timeout 60 sec 5 300 Server Authentication Character Code UTF 8 z Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm z V WebDAV Settings ca aa Co jot Confin gt WebDAV Client Saati j Key Usage Do Not Confirm z Chain Do Not Confirm z Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm x Settings Description Certificate Verification To verify the certificate select items to be verified Level Settings If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Validity Period Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Con
510. ort Schedule Setting Schedule 1 Daily Interval of Day s E a31 Date Time Setting C Weekly Daylight Saving Time Interval of Week s E 11 Timer Setting Day of the Week Mon E Monthly Network Error Code Display Setting Interval of Month s E las Date of the Month 1 1 31 Schedule 2 License Settings Daily Edit Font Macro Interval of Day s 1 1 31 Weekly Interval of Week s 1 1 6 Day of the Week Mon Monthly Interval of Month s 1 1 6 Date of the Month 1___ 1 31 Status Notification Setting Total Counter Noti Setting Reset Register Notification Address Address 1 E mail Address Eco Related Information Notification I Notifies by Schedule1 I Notifies by Schedule2 Address 2 E mail Address Eco Related Information Notification I Notifies by Schedule1 I Notifies by Schedule2 Address 3 ON E mail Address Eco Related Information Notification I Notifies by Schedule1 I Notifies by Schedule2 ON Test Notice Send notice after setting complete OFF x Cancel Settings Description Model Name Enter a model name to be included in the notification mail message using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the device Schedule Setting Specify the notification schedule by day week or month Up to two schedules can be registered You can use different schedules for different purposes
511. otect data and click OK gt You can edit data while checking the result in the preview Settings Edit Copy Protect Data Nal Copy Protect Name Copy Protect Text Font Name Arial X Font Size Bold a gt Italic Rotation Angle hh 0__Joeerees ser o0 v gor 180 180 180 OK Cancel Description Copy Protect Name Enter the Copy Protect name using up to 16 characters Copy Protect Text Enter a text to be printed using up to 32 characters Font Name Select the font type of the text Font Size Select the size of the text Bold Select this check box to display the text in bold Italic Select this check box to display the text in italic Rotation Angle Specify the rotation angle of the text The angle can be adjusted in incre ments of one degree d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 39 15 Using data management utility 15 10 15 10 3 4 Click Export to the device gt Clicking Undo returns to the state before the change The registered or edited copy protect data is written to this machine Tips Clicking System displays the system menu The following menu items are available in the system menu Auto Protect Setting Lock the computer screen if a specified amount of time has elapsed without the machine being operated You can change the time until the screen is locked Export Save th
512. ou log in to the LDAP server to search for the user ID Login Name and Pass word OFF not selected is specified by default 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Maintenance Qe Administrator Logout ready to Scan B Ready to Print r System User ys Security EOMME Network Box Settings Heri Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings General Settings General Settings gt User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting gt External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control User Authentication Overwrite User Info Default Authentication Method Public User Access Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Account Track Account Track Input Method Wizard Customize ON MFP Zj ON With Login __ Minute 1 600 ON F Synchronize 7 Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Number of Counters Assigned for prr Users 500 1 999 When Number of Jobs Reach Panna Skip Job OK Cancel Settings User Authentication Description When performing authentication using an exte
513. ou the practical information you need and the instructions for handling the waste correctly for example location and times of the waste collection centres etc b When you purchase a new device of ours give a used device similar to the one purchased to our dealer for disposal The crossed dustbin symbol on the device means that when it to be disposed of the device is to be taken to the equipped waste collection centres and is to be handled separately from urban waste The producer guarantees the activation of the treatment collection recycling and disposal procedures in accordance with Directive 2002 96 EC and subsequent amendments 2 FOR OTHER COUNTRIES NOT IN THE EU The treatment collection recycling and disposal of electric and electronic devices will be carried out in accordance with the laws in force in the country in question
514. ox to send a notification when replacing the ozone filter d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 29 14 Checking the printer information 14 7 14 7 Checking the printer information 14 7 1 Checking the counter of this machine You can check the information of various types of counters such as the total counter and counters for re spective functions In the administrator mode select Maintenance Meter Count to check the information of various counters of this machine Se Administrator Ready to Scan a Ready to Print fz User System me E Eca a Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt ROM Version Total 0 Total Duplex 0 of Originals 0 Paper Counter 0 gt Import Export No of Total F Status Notification Setting Pages Output J gt Total Counter Notification Copy Counter Setting Total Large Size Date Time Setting Total 0 0j Black 0 0 gt Daylight Saving Time Copy Full Color o ol Timer Setting Single Color 0 0 2 Color 0 o Network Error Code Display Setting Print Counter Reset Total Large Size Total 0 0 License Settings Print 0 ol gt Edit Font Macro Full Color 0 0 2 Color 0 o Total Copy Print Total 0 Total Full Color 0 See steels Cote 2 Color 0 Scan Fax Counter Total
515. pecified in Black Compression Level You cannot send data in color or gray scale Whichever file format you specify data is converted to the TIFF format JPEG Color is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 11 10 Configuring the Internet fax environment 10 1 Using SSL TLS communication Encrypt communications between this machine and the E mail server SMTP using SSL or TLS This ma chine supports the SMTP over SSL and Start TLS Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL TLS encryption communication with the E mail server In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Se Administrator Logout 2j E Ready to Scan Ready to Print Maintenance is Box M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail fon E mail Notification on Total Counter Notification on SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name Use SSL TLS OFF x Port Number Ps a 65535s Port No SSL fe 1 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm x CN Do Not Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Connection Timeout 60 F sec Max Mail Size No Limit Server Capacity E Jmbyea 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address i Authentication Setting POP before SMTP orF POP before SMTP Time B sec 0 6
516. port Export Minute 1 150 Specify Method Day x Status Notification Setting Total Counter Notification Start Date Time Setting Month Date Time Setting Day Daylight Saving Time Weeliy ist E Day Sun Timer Setting m Hour gt Network Error Code Minute Display Setting B E gt Reset End Date Time License Settings Month oo Edit Font M a ont Macro Weekly 1st Week amp Day Sun Hour Minute Cancel Settings Description Daylight Saving Time Select ON to use the daylight saving time Also enter the time to be adjusted for the daylight saving time in minutes OFF is specified by default Specify Method Select the method to specify the date and time to start the daylight saving time and the date and time to end it e Weekly Specify the start date and end date by week and day of the week e Day Specify the start date and the end date by date Start Date Time End Date Time Respectively select the date and time to start the daylight saving time and the date and time to end it d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 7 14 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 14 3 14 3 1 Customizing the Control Panel environment Changing a Function to be Assigned to a Register Key Select a function to be assigned to a Register key on the Control Panel to suit your environment In the administrator mode select System Settings Registered Key Settings and f
517. printing has stopped because for example there is no paper ON is specified by default Skip Job Copy Print there is n o paper ON is specified by default Select whether to handle the subsequent job as long as it is not a printing job for the received fax when printing has stopped because for example 14 42 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 10 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 14 10 8 Setting the processing accuracy of outline PDF When you save data in the Outline PDF format the text is extracted from the original and converted into a vector image The following explains how to set the outline processing accuracy of images figures In the administrator mode select System Settings Outline PDF Setting then configure the following set tings Settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a User Maintenance eS Security Auth Account Network Box Track J Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Outline PDF Setting gt Register Support Graphic Outlining OFF gt Information gt Network TWAIN ox Canal gt Reset Settings User Box Setting gt Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting gt
518. quence e H Node Makes inquiries to the WINS server and broadcast in se quence H Node is specified by default Direct Hosting Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings SMB Settings Direct Hosting Setting Select whether to enable the direct hosting SMB service If enabled a peer can be specified using the IP ad dress IPv4 or IPv6 or host name ON is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 17 17 LDAP Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings LDAP Settings Configure the settings to search for destinations from the LDAP server or Active Directory Settings Description Enabling LDAP Select whether to use the LDAP server to search for a destination Using this function allows you to search for an E mail address or fax number via the LDAP server when sending the scanned original data OFF is specified by default Setting Up LDAP Register the LDAP server used to search for a destination Select an unregistered key and enter the required information LDAP Server Name Enter the name of the LDAP server using up to 32 characters Use a name that helps you easily identify the server LDAP Setting Configure settings for LDAP search operations e Max Search Results Change the maximum number of destinations to be displayed as search results if necessary 100 is specified b
519. r External Server Connection No Selection 7 Settings Authentication Card ID Number ox cence Counter Remote Control Settings Description Enable SSL Select this check box to use SSL communication OFF not selected is specified by default Port No SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 636 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify the certificate select items to be verified If you select Confirm at each item the certificate is verified for each item Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is still valid Confirm is specified by default CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default Key Usage Confirm whether the certificate is used according to the intended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default 12 72 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 19 Using the authentication unit 12 Settings Description Expiration Date Con firmation Confirm whether the certificate ha
520. r Remote Control and set Counter Remote Control to Allow Default Restrict Qe Administrator toot Ready to Scan a Ready to Print r Maintenance ae Security Network Box Print Setting PEE Fax Settings Wizard Customize User Ahntiennioni Counter Remote Control Restrict Tien Tea e K eca Baa Function Login Tips This setting is available if you use the remote diagnosis system and user authentication and account track is installed on this machine 16 8 3 Sending the machine operating status When using a service that diagnoses the machine status remotely send the operating status of this machine to the remote diagnosis system In the administrator mode select Maintenance Call Remote Center then click Call Remote Center Tips This setting is available if you use the remote diagnosis system 16 8 4 Allowing read and write of the machine setting information When using a service that diagnoses the machine status remotely addresses address book group and pro gram registered with this machine and authentication information user authentication and account track can be imported or exported from to the remote diagnosis system In the administrator mode Maintenance Remote Access Setting then set Import Export User Data to Allow d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 19 16 Associating with the fax server 16 9 16 9 Associating with the fax server Overview When using a fax server you ca
521. r a refer ence allowed group Settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print ag User Maintenance petal fetus AuthiAccount Network Box ettings Gack SEEN Print Setting Store Adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt PKI Settings __ Reference Allowed Group Registration gt Certifie icate Verifica fication No 1 Settings Reference Allowed Group Name pubiic news gt Address Reference Access Allowed Level o Setting gt Restrict User Access gt Copy Security Auto Logout gt Administrator Password Setting LOK Cancel gt Tx Operation Log Settings Description Reference Allowed Group Name Enter the name of the reference allowed group using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the registered group Access Allowed Level To manage the address book by combining the access allowed level and reference allowed group select an access allowed level of the reference al lowed group 12 54 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 13 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 2 Inthe administrator mode select Store Address Address Book Edit then set a reference allowed group or access allowed level for the address book gt To manage the address book by combining the access allowed level and reference allowed group assign a reference allowed group for which an access allowed level i
522. r details refer to page 17 36 Prefix Suffix Setting Register a prefix and suffix of an E mail address Also configure the setting for recalling the registered prefix and suffix when entering an E mail ad dress For details refer to page 17 37 Error Code Display Set ting Select whether to display network error code on the Touch Panel For details refer to page 17 37 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 33 17 Device Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Device Setting Check the MAC address of this machine enable or disable LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery and spec ify the network speed Settings Description MAC Address Displays the MAC address of this machine LLTD Setting Select whether to use LLTD Link Layer Topology Discovery Using LLTD allows you to display this machine on the network map if your computer is equipped with Windows Vista or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Enable is specified by default Network Speed Select the network speed according to your environment The default is Auto 10M 100Mbps Time Adjustment Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings Time Adjustment Set ting Configure settings to automatically adjust the date and time of this machine using the NTP Network Time Protocol server Set
523. r mode select Network SMB Setting WINS Setting then configure the following set tings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan a Ready to Print o Maintenance S ee Security Auth Account mot Print Setting Sa Fax Settings Wizard Customize WINS Setting E WINS ON Auto Obtain Setting Enable v WINS Server Address1 0 0 0 0 WINS Server Address2 0 0 0 0 gt SNMP Setting a Node Type Setting BNode V SMB Setting SSS 000 ox eae Settings Description WINS Select ON to use the WINS server ON is specified by default Auto Obtain Setting Select Enable to automatically obtain the WINS server address This item is necessary when DHCP is enabled Enable is specified by default WINS Server Enter the WINS server address Address1 WINS Server This item is necessary when you do not automatically obtain the WINS Address2 server address using the DHCP Use the following entry formats e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Node Type Setting Select the name resolution method e B Node Query by broadcast e P Node Query the WINS server e M Node Query by broadcast and then query the WINS server e H Node Query the WINS server and then query by broadcast H Node is specified by default 12 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 5 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 Using the direct hosting SMB service Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows you to specify the
524. r or a print job without authentication information In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting Administrative Setting Be Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print i f a Maintenance cea Security Network Box Print Setting EEA Fax Settings a gt General Settings Administrative Setting Y User Authentication ID amp Print OFF x Public User Print immediately User Registration ID amp Print Operation Settings Print Al Jobs E Account Track Settings gt Pronpieg Function Login Print without Authentication Settings Description ID amp Print Select whether to handle jobs normally printed from the printer driver as ID amp Print jobs e ON Jobs that are normally printed are handled as ID amp Print jobs e OFF Only jobs for which ID amp Print is set are handled as print jobs OFF is specified by default Public User Select the process performed when a public user job or a job without user authentication information is received e Print Immediately Prints the job without saving it in the ID amp Print User Box e Save Saves the job in the ID amp Print User Box Print Immediately is specified by default ID amp Print Operation Set When using the Authentication Unit function on an Authentication Unit tings select whether to request user authentication for printing each job or to al low the user to print all jobs once the user is authe
525. r service representative 17 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 18 1 Index by item 18 Index by item A Account track 72 4 12 10 Active Directory authentication 72 73 Address book 75 3 Administrative setting 72 60 Administrator mode 3 9 Administrator password 6 4 Annotation user box 77 8 77 77 AppleTalk 8 20 Application registration 76 20 Assign account to acquire device info 8 39 Authentication card ID number 72 73 Authentication unit 72 68 Auto logout 6 6 B Basic setting 8 30 Blank page print settings 74 47 Bluetooth setting 8 28 Bonjour 8 79 Bulletin board user box 77 6 77 9 C Certificate verification settings 73 77 Closed network RX 9 77 Copy security 13 28 Custom function pattern selection 74 12 Custom function profile user account 72 57 Customize 6 5 D Data management utility 75 38 Date time setting 4 5 Daylight saving time 74 7 Default address display settings 74 39 Default function permission 72 44 Delete secure print file 77 76 Delete time setting 77 76 Delete unused user box 77 73 Device certificate setting 73 5 73 6 13 9 13 10 DNS domain name setting 5 7 DNS host 5 6 DNS server setting 5 5 Document delete time setting 77 74 Document hold setting 77 75 E Edit font macro 75 35 E mail 75 3 Enlarge display settings 74 38 Export 74 33 External certificate setting 73 72 External memory function settings 77 78 F Fax 75 9 Fax print quality settings 9 9
526. r to print a report when transmission is reserved using the Tim er TX function ON is selected by default Confidential Rx Report Select whether to print a report containing the results of confidential faxes received ON is selected by default Bulletin TX Report Select whether to print a report containing records of faxes registered with the bulletin for being received by polling ON is selected by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 23 Specifying fax report print conditions 9 5 Settings Description Relay TX Result Report Select whether to print a report containing results of faxes sent by relay dis tribution ON is selected by default Relay Request Report Select whether to print the report when the machine has received a fax Relay RX as a relaying station ON is selected by default PC Fax TX Error Report Select whether to print a report if PC Fax TX using the fax driver has failed OFF is specified by default Broadcast Result Re port Select whether to combine results of broadcast on all destinations involved or list them for each destination All Destinations is specified by default TX Result Report Check Select whether to display a screen that asks if you want to print a TX Result Report each time a fax is sent Not Specify is specified by default Remark Column Print Setup Select whether to print user or account nam
527. rack Print Setting ress Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP Socket Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing TCP Socket M TCP Socket Port Number be 1 65535 I Use SSL TLS Port No SSL TLS o 1 65535 M TCP Socket ASCII Mode Port No ASCII Mode o 1 65535 Description Select this check box to use the TWAIN scan function ON selected is specified by default Port Number Changing the If necessary change the TCP Socket port number Normally you can use the original port number 59158 is specified by default Control Panel lock time While the TWAIN scan is running the Control Panel of this machine is automatically locked If necessary change the time period before the control panel is unlocked In the administrator mode select System Settings Network TWAIN and change the value of TWAIN Lock sec Time Default 120 F Ready to Scan B Ready to Print ge User mers EI ve st a Track Print Setting Store adaress Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Network TWAIN gt Register Support TWAIN Lock Time Information gt Reset Settings 120 sec 30 300 ox cancer gt User Box Setting d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 33 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server 7 7 7 7 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server Overview When a direc
528. rd is specified by default e Write User Name Settings Enter the user name of the user in the read write enable state using up to 32 characters restrict is specified by default e Security Level Select a security level of the user in the read write en able state auth password priv password is specified by default e Password Setting Enter the authentication password and privacy password of users in the read only state and read write enable state e Encryption Algorithm Select an encryption algorithm DES is speci fied by default e Authentication Algorithm Select an authentication algorithm MD5 is specified by default TRAP Setting Select whether to allow a notification of the status of this machine using the SNMP TRAP function Allow is specified by default TRAP Setting When Au Select whether to send TRAP when authentication fails thentication Fails Invalid is specified by default 17 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 AppleTalk Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings AppleTalk Settings Configure the AppleTalk operating environment if the machine is running under Mac OS control Enabling the AppleTalk function on this machine enables the computer to automatically detect this networked machine and display it as an addable printer in the list Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use AppleTalk
529. rd TX When using two lines you can select Fax Settings TX RX Settings Individual Receiving Line Set up in the administrator mode to enable the Memory RX function for each line 1 In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Settings RX Data Operation Settings Memory RX Setting then click OK Se Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print g User Maintenance Biase Auth Account Box a Track Print Setting idress MELET O Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position RX Data Operation Settings gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Forward TX Setting 3 C PC Fax RX Setting Function Setting C TSI User Box Settings Memory RX Setting Rear Di gt RX Data Operation Settings 2 At Memory RX Setting configure the following settings Se Administrator ready to scan B Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store gt Header Footer Position Memory RX Setting gt Line Parameter Setting I Password is changed IX RX Settings Memory RX User Box Password C gt TX RX Settings gt RX Data Operation Settings gt PBX Connection Setting Settings Description Fax Line 1 Fax Line 2 When using two lines select a line to assign the Memory RX function to This option is available when a fax can be received for each line in the two line mode OFF is specified by
530. re is searched Example of entry cn users dc example dc com Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the LDAP server 60 sec is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 35 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server 7 7 Settings Description Max Search Results Change the maximum number of destinations to be displayed as search results if necessary 100 is specified by default Authentication Method Select the authentication method to log in to the LDAP server Select one appropriate for the authentication method used for your LDAP server e anonymous Login Name Password and Domain Name can be omitted e GSS SPNEGO Log in to the server using the Kerberos authentication method Select this to use the Active Directory anonymous is specified by default Login Name Log in to the LDAP server and enter the login name to search for a desti nation using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 64 characters excluding To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Domain Name Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server using up to 64 char acters If GSS SPNEGO is selected for General Settings enter the domain name of Active Directory Sele
531. refer to page 7 32 3 f necessary configure the following options Purpose Reference Change the time for locking the Control Panel while the TWAIN scan is running page 7 33 Configuring the basic settings for the TWAIN scan On the computer on the network configure settings necessary for controlling this machine 1 In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting and set SLP to En able Default Enable Se Administrator e Ready to Scan re Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting User Auth Account Box Track gt TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset SS pel rire Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps gt Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings DNS Server Setting IPv6 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable Primary DNS Server Ed Secondary DNS Serverl EE amp dS Secondary DNS Server2 ES E SLP Setting SLP Enable z LPD Setting LPD Enable E ox eere 7 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 6 Configuring the TWAIN scan environment 2 Inthe administrator mode select Network TCP Socket Setting then configure the following set tings Settings TCP Socket Se Administrator 2 D Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print g User Maintenance eee coy Auth Account Box T
532. ress Setting Method enter the de fault gateway d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 5 1 Using in the IPv4 environment Registering the DNS server used by this machine If you resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or server on the network from this machine register your DNS server address to this machine In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting then configure the following settings Se Administrator B Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print ge System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fe msec a Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings gt E mail Setting Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps z PR LDAP Setting Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings P iPP Serting ams Method Auto Setting 7 SNMP Setting F pcre gt smese F too P DPWS Settings Spod M AutolP gt Bonjour Setting ip adress moo P Netware setting subnet Mask booo 7 AppleTalk Setting pefaut Gateway foo gt weboav semings m nE gt TCP Socket Setting eoa ada jis Link Local Address ee euro sening Mean a ee DNS Server Setting IPv4 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable z Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Serverl 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server2 0 0 0 0 DNS Server Setting IPv6 DNS Server Auto Obtain Enable Primary DNS Server EE Secondary DNS Server R
533. rily Change Language gt Main Menu Default Settings gt Default Address Display Settings Logout 2 Se Administrator D Ready to Scan re Resdy to Print rz Edit Main Menu Default Settings Assignment No 1 Function Name Shortcut Key Scan Fax Program Shortcut Key Specify Icon Registered icon ok Cancel Settings Function Name Description Saa a category of function to be assigned to a shortcut key Function Create a shortcut key to the main screen such as Copy mode or Fax Scan mode e Copy Function Settings Create a shortcut key to the setting screen for copy function e Scan Fax Function Settings Create a shortcut key to the setting screen for fax scan function System User Box Create a shortcut key to the System User Box Copy Program Create a shortcut key to a copy program This catego ry can be selected when a copy program is registered on this machine e Scan Fax Program Create a shortcut key to a fax scan program This category can be selected when a fax scan program is registered on this machine e Registered Application Creates a shortcut key to the registration ap plication e Not Set Does not create any shortcut key Shortcut Key Select a function to be assigned to a shortcut key corresponding to the category selected in Function Name Scan Fax Program Short cut Key Select a program to be displayed from the list when a shortcut key to a s
534. ring for downloading a fir MWaAPe ceeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesneeeeaeesesaeeeseaeeeeesneeseeaeeeesaeeees 14 48 Updating the firmware automatically at the specified time sssesseesseesrieerresrirsernsrirnerirnrrnnsrennne 14 50 Updating the firmware Manually eesceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeneeseaeeeesaeeeesaneeseaaeeeeaeeeeseneeseneeees 14 51 Registering address BOOKS se ce 25s sc eietics aannamen aaa Kear aada a aaa aaa Aasaa anaE aeaaea enanada daana 15 3 Registering E mail address mirrin vonden taraa anrai Tina ea a aaa ada aka oegi da 15 3 Registering an FTP destinations 3 h 0 ee Been ee ar a nl te Ae ey 15 4 Registering an SMB destination ce eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneesesaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeessaeeeeeas 15 6 Registering a WebDAV destination ccccceeceeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeseeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeessnaeeeeeeeaees 15 7 Registering a USer Box iss iiceseteveeiveiciatea a davidii anal a deal waned 15 8 Registering afax address anran iarna aaraa aa a daaa sh raa r aa Ea Na riaa 15 9 Registering an Internet fax addresS ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseceaeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 15 11 Registering an IP address fax destination cesceeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeesaeeessaeeeeseaeeeeeneeeeseeess 15 12 REGISTOMiING E GFOUP E E E sented cca cc ete E T 15 14 R gistefring a pr gram si saeco nad scence cence enti caS cc c
535. rint RX is set to ON OFF is specified by default File After Polling TX Select whether to delete a file after it is sent in response to a polling request if Polling TX is used to register files for polling Delete is specified by default No of Sets RX If necessary change the number of copies to print a fax 1 is specified by default Individual Receiving Line Setup Specify whether to receive faxes via respective lines separately if two lines are operating In receiving faxes per line you can use reception functions such as TSI Routing and Forward TX OFF is specified by default Individual Sender Line Setup Specify whether to use different sender names for the respective lines if two lines are operating OFF is specified by default Fax RX Print Setting Select whether to print a received network fax in color or black and white To restrict the print to only black and white print select Black Only Full Color Black is specified by default 9 2 3 Canceling stamp setting when sending a fax You can automatically cancel stamp setting when sending a fax without a stamp In the administrator mode select System Settings Stamp Settings Fax TX Settings then set Cancel Setting to Cancel Sp Administrator Logout 2 d Ready to Scan a Ready to Print Maintenance Te Security AEEA Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard
536. rnal Server Settings Default NDS Tree Name External Server Print Setting Store 4 gt General Settings gt Print without Timeout sec 5 300 Authentication NTLM gprs i fi Authentication Setting Default Domain Name NDS Sp Administrator amp Ready to Scan a Ready to Print User Auth Account Network Box Track System Settings Wizard Customize External Server Registration User Authentication No 2 Setting External Server Name I Account Track Settings External Server Type Active Directory gt Prohibited Function Active Directory Login Setting Default Domain Name Default NDS Context Name Settings LDAP Server Address IF Please check to enter host name gt Public User Box Setting Port No 389 a 65535 gt User Account Common I Enable SSL Setti ng Port No SSL 536 Ja 65535 5 H z Tiia Sate Search Base gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Timeout 60 sec 5 300 General Settings Simple x gt Counter Remote Control 2 me Search Attribute uid I Search Attributes Authentication Login Name T Password is changed Password ox Cancel Settings Description External Server Name Enter the name of your authentication server using up to 32 characters Assign an easy to understand name to the authentication server to be reg istered External Server Type Select NTLM v1 or NTLM v2 NTLM v2 is applied on th
537. rnal authentication server select ON External Server or ON MFP External Server If you want to configure setting so that you can log in to this machine using its authentication function in consideration of an occurrence of some sort of problem on the external authentication server select ON MFP Exter nal Server Overwrite User Info When the external server authentication is used authenticated user infor mation is also managed on this machine If the number of users who have executed the external server authentication reaches the maximum number of users this machine can manage authentication of any new users will not be permitted Select whether to allow the user to overwrite registered user information for that case If you select Allow the oldest authenticated user information is erased and the new user is registered Restrict is specified by default Default Authentication Method If you have selected ON MFP External Server at Public User Access select the authentication method you use normally ON External Server is specified by default 12 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 6 Employing the LDAP authentication 1 2 Settings Description When Number of Jobs Sets the maximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select Reach Maximum an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job c
538. rom Copy Scan Fax User Box Web Browser Utility APP and 10 Keypad select the function to be assigned to each Reg ister key The following shows the default settings for the inch area Register Key 1 Scan Fax Register Key 2 Copy Register Key 3 10 Keypad The following shows the default settings for the centimeter area Register Key 1 User Box Register Key 2 Scan Fax Register Key 3 Copy Qe Administrator Logout Ready to Scan GB Ready to Print fs User F j System Maintenance Settings Security Auth Account Network Box Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize Machine Setting Registered Key Settings Register Support Register Key 1 Box infomation Register Key 2 Scan Fax Network TWAIN Register Key 3 Copy Hak gt Reset Settings User Box Setting OK Cancel gt Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings 14 8 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 14 3 2 Selecting functions to be arranged in the main menu Pr
539. roxy server port number 21 is specified by default HTTP Settings Configure the settings for downloading a firmware via HTTP Proxy Connection Select ON to connect with the Internet via a proxy OFF is specified by default Proxy Server Ad dress Enter the proxy server address Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Proxy Server Port Number If necessary change the proxy server port number 80 is specified by default Proxy Authentication Select ON to use proxy authentication e Login Name Enter the login name to perform proxy authentication e Password Enter the password of the user you entered into Login Name To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password OFF is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 49 Updating the firmware of this machine 14 12 Updating the firmware automatically at the specified time This machine can download a firmware automatically at the specified time and update the firmware In the administrator mode select Network Internet ISW Settings Update Firmware at Specified Time then configure the following settings Maintenance Y Internet ISW E gt Bisons Firmware at Sp
540. rt Information gt Network TWAIN Snare My Spool eset Settings E Bluetooth Print Settings User Box Setting Network Customize Moles Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Customize System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting Cancel Description My Panel Manager ager ON is specified by default Select OFF to cancel the connection from this machine to My Panel Man My Spool ager ON is specified by default Select OFF to cancel the connection from this machine to My Print Man 16 14 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 6 Associating with the distributed scan server 1 6 16 6 Associating with the distributed scan server Overview This machine can be integrated into the system using the Distributed Scan Management The Distributed Scan Management is a function of Windows Server2008 R2 integrating scanner devices supporting the func tion into the document workflow of an organization The function sends the original data scanned on this machine to the distributed scan server When receiving the file the scan server carries out SMB Transmission or Scan to E mail or sending to Microsoft Office SharePoint Server based on the registered PSP POST SCAN PROCESS Y This machine must join the Active Directory domain in ad
541. rwrite User Info Restrict gt Account Track Settings Default Authentication Method Exter Server gt Prohibited Function Public User Access ON With Login Login Setting E Ticket Hold Time Setting Active an EEEa Directory Minute 1 600 Authentication Account Track ON gt Simple Print Account Track Input Method ACCO Na z Authentication Setting Synchronize User Authentication amp fo ynchronize x gt External Server Settings Account Track _ Number of Counters Assigned for p7 gt Public User Box Setting Users 500 1 999 gt When Number of Jobs Reach Beer Arcount Common lanii Skip Job g gt Scan to Home Settings T gt Scan to Authorized cancel _ Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Settings Description Account Track Select ON to employ the account track function OFF is specified by default Account Track Input Meth od Select an account authentication method This setting is required when you only use the account track function Account Name amp Password is specified by default Synchronize User Authen tication amp Account Track When using user authentication and account track in conjunction specify WHEE to synchronize user authentication and account track Synchronize Select this option when the user and account is in one to one relation If you specify the department of a user when registering him her you can log in as the account only by logging in as the
542. ry Document Scan Restrict Permission a Fax Full Color Black Print Full Color Black User Box Allow gt Account Track Settings Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black gt Prohibited Function Manual Destination Input Allow z Login Settin a Mobile PDA Allow gt Print without Authentication Simple Print E Cancel Authentication Setting gt External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control A late Reference To use the external authentication server user information is registered once you execute authentication To restrict functions accessible by users edit user information registered on this machine For details refer to page 12 43 12 44 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 11 Setting privileges to use the functions of this machine by user or account 1 2 12 11 3 Restricting functions available to public users When public users unregistered users accesses are allowed you can restrict functions available for public users Also you can restrict destinations public users can access In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting Public User then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan QB Ready to Print 2 Rosie aes i User iat Maintenance wat Security Auth
543. ryption Algorithm Select the encryption algorithm used for generating a common key used in communication Authentication Algorithm Select the authentication algorithm used for generating a common key used in communication Encryption Key Validity Period Enter a validation period of a common key used for encrypted communi cation When this period has expired a new key is created This can secure the communication Diffie Hellman Group Select the Diffie Hellman group Negotiation Mode Select the method to securely generate a common key used for encrypted communication d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 17 Using IPsec communication 13 6 3 From SA in IPsec Setting click Create and register the Security Association SA gt Up to 10 groups can be registered for the SA Qe Administrator 2 Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print eZ n System Prai a a Ea i Print Setting Customize Y TCPIIP Setting L Encapsulation Mode Transpor f ra aeaee Security Protocol AH Les Key Exchange Method Ket Lifetime After Establishing SA s00 Jsec 600 604800 IKE Setting Authentication Method Pre Shared Key ESN Disable Replay Detection Disable ESP Encryption Algorithm M DES CBC M 3DES CBC M AES CBC Key Length 128 M AES CTR Key Length 128 Ty AES GCM Key Length 128 X M AES GCM 64 Key Length 128 X M ENC NU
544. s 14 44 MFP authentication 72 6 Multi line settings 9 22 N NDS over IPX authentication 72 37 NDS over TCP IP authentication 72 36 NetWare setting 5 77 8 27 Network error code display setting 5 73 Network setting clear 74 34 NTLM authentication 72 20 OOXML print settings 8 36 OpenAPI 76 6 Operating environment 7 3 Outline PDF setting 74 43 P Page layout settings 8 37 PBX connection setting 9 4 PC fax RX setting 9 16 PC fax TX setting 9 27 PCL setting 8 32 Port9100 printing 8 4 Power settings 74 3 Prefix suffix 75 32 Preparation 2 3 Print without authentication 72 62 Program 75 75 Protocol setting 73 8 PS setting 8 33 Public user 72 45 Public user box setting 77 73 D B Real time preview 74 41 Register support information 4 4 Registered key settings 74 8 Relay user box 77 7 11 10 Remote diagnosis system 76 18 Remote panel 76 25 Report settings 9 23 Reset 74 34 Reset settings 74 38 Restrict user access 73 27 ROM version 74 37 Q S MIME 73 14 Scan file name settings 74 40 Scan server 76 75 Scan to authorized folder settings 73 26 Scan to E mail 7 3 Scan to FTP 7 20 Scan to home 72 77 Scan tome 72 40 Scan to SMB 7 74 Scan to WebDAV 7 22 Security setting 8 35 Set paper name by user 75 36 Simple print authentication setting 72 63 Single sign on 72 78 12 41 SMB 75 6 SMB print 8 5 SNMP setting 74 25 SSL 73 3 SSL setting 6 3 13 4 Status notification setting 74 20 Subjec
545. s expired e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service 12 19 3 Recording the authentication card ID in counter information of this machine You can configure settings so that the authentication card ID is recorded in counter information that collects the use status of this machine In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Authentication Card ID Number set Authen tication Card ID Number to Notify Default Not Notify Qs Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a oo user Maintenance Settings Security purniAceoane Network Box rack Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings Authentication Card ID Number User Authentication Authentication Card ID Number Notify Setting gt Account Track Settings a ae OK Cancel gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings gt Authentication Device Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Authentication Card ID Number Counter Remote Control d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 73 1 2 Using the authenticat
546. s machine Information Y Device Inform gt Configuration Summary gt Option Eco Info Information gt Consumables gt Meter Count Online Assistance gt Change User Password Black gt Function Permission gt Network Setting Information Print Setting Information gt Print Information R user Logout ChangePassword P E Resdy 10 Scan ry Ready to Print fs Job a Box Dl Direct Print D Device Information Device Name Device Location Engine Serial Number Device Type Print Copy Scan Fax Toner Status Yeow SERRERRREE 0 Magenta cyan Paper Tray Select Tray Paper Size Paper Type Paper Status e Bypass 8 1 2 x11 LEF Plain Paper Empty Cc Tray 1 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready O Tray 2 A4 LEF Plain Paper Ready O Tray 3 8 1 2 x 11 LEF Plain Paper Ready e Trays 81 2 x11 LEF Plain Paper Ready PI Tray 1 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready PI Tray 2 12 x 18 SEF Plain Paper Ready Detail Output Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Saddle Tray Tray 3 Administrator Information Administrator Name Extension No Admin E mail Address Menu Description Device Information Enables you to check the components options consumables meter counts and eco information of this machine Online Assistance Enables you to check the online assistance about this product Change User
547. s not used delete the registration information of the LDAP server from this machine Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Limit the direct input of addresses For details refer to page 13 26 The following restrictions are enabled when Scan to Authorized Folder is used Addresses cannot be specified by direct input for scan transmission Users cannot save files to User Boxes Users cannot send files from User Boxes Users cannot use annotation User Boxes Users cannot select addresses from transmission log Users cannot use the URL notification function d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 25 13 Sending data to the authenticated share folder Scan to Authorized Folder 13 8 Limiting the direct input of addresses In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Scan to Authorized Folder Settings and set Scan to Authorized Folder Settings to ON Default OFF System gt General Settings User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Counter Remote Control Q Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print Security Wizard Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Allows s
548. s set to the address book Se Administrator B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print Address Book Address Book E mail No Use opening number Direct Input Name Destination Information E mail Address Apply Levels to Destinations User we seins te wack te i dy Print Setting 3L Fax Settings Wizard Customize Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC z T Main lel sever com F Registration of Certification Information Registration of Certification Information Browse Deletion of Certification Information Limiting Access to Destinations Hidden Search from Reference Allowed Group Search from List Registered Reference Group Number a Set direct Reference Allowed Level bi 0K canes d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 55 12 Limiting the access to destinations for each user 12 13 3 In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track User Authentication Setting User Reg istration Edit then set a reference allowed group and access allowed level for the registered user gt To specify a reference allowed group for a registered user means that you specify a reference al lowed group itself Therefore even if an access allowed level has been set for the selected reference allowed group that setting of access allowed level is not applied here Se Administrator Ready to Sc
549. s specified by default WINS Server Address1 to Enter the WINS server address WINS Server Address2 This item is necessary when you do not automatically obtain the WINS server address using the DHCP Use the following entry formats e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Node Type Setting Select the name resolution method e B Node Query by broadcast e P Node Query the WINS server e M Node Query by broadcast and then query the WINS server e H Node Query the WINS server and then query by broadcast H Node is specified by default 7 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 2 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 Using the direct hosting SMB service Enabling the direct hosting SMB service allows you to specify the destination using the IP address IPv4 IPv6 or host name In the administrator mode select Network SMB Setting Direct Hosting Setting and then set Direct Hosting Setting to ON Default ON Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Settings Maintenance Print Setting S Direct Hosting Setting Direct Hosting Setting ON z gt Direct Hosting Setting E Se g d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Configuring the SMB transmission environment 7 2 Resolving the name using LLMNR Using LLMNR Link local Multicast Name Resolution enables you to resolve the name even in an environ ment with no DNS server This fun
550. s this machine Disable is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number 50443 is specified by default Client Settings Remote Panel Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Remote Panel Settings Client Settings Configure settings to operate the Control Panel of this machine using dedicated software on a different com puter Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to operate the Control Panel of this machine using dedi cated software on a different computer OFF is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number of the server where the dedicated software was installed 443 is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the timeout time of communication with the server where the dedicated software was installed 60 sec is specified by default Server Address Enter the address of the server where the dedicated software was installed Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 39 17 Settings Description Certificate Verification Level Settings To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be verified Expiration Date
551. saeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 9 8 Adjusting the image quality depending on the resolution of a received fax eeeeeeesseeesneeeeeneeees 9 9 Specifying useful transmission and reception FUNCTIONS cccceseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenseeeeeeenenseeees 9 10 Enabling disabling the fax FUNCTIONS 00 0 eeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaneetenaeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeteaeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeae 9 10 Using the Closed Network RX function 00 0 eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeneeeeneeeeeas 9 11 Using the Fax Retransmit fUNCtION ce eeeeeeenee een eeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaneeseeeeeeeaeeeeas 9 12 Using the compulsory Memory RX FUNCTION 00 0 eee eeeeee tence eeeeeeteeaee teense eeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeseaeeeeeneeeeas 9 13 Using the Forward TX TUNCHHON penuti inana a aeta a aa eaaa da badaia Maa daada nar iaaa 9 14 Using the PC Fax RX TUNCHON uiie a ae ee ia a o aden araa 9 16 Using the TSI ROUTING t ntoer inaani eainnt oinean pae eA a sures das aai eaa yaa aeae aas 9 18 Restricting PC FAX tranSMiSSion ccesscessseeseceeeseeeesesceesesenenesceeeeseeeseesenseceeseseneseseeseensceenesee 9 21 Using an additional line Specifying fax report print ConditionS sssssnsnesenunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 9 23 19 3 10 1 10 2 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 11 2 3 11 2 4 11 2 5 11 2 6 11 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11
552. scovery proxy server Normally you can use the original port number 80 or 443 in use of SSL is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 31 17 Printer Settings DPWS Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings DPWS Settings Printer Settings Configure settings to perform Web service printing Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the WS print function OFF is specified by default Printer Name Enter the name of this machine when using it as the WS printer using up to 63 characters Printer Location Enter a printer location if necessary using up to 63 characters Printer Information Enter printer information if necessary using up to 63 characters Scanner Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings DPWS Settings Scanner Settings Configure settings to perform Web service scanning Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the WS scan transmission function OFF is specified by default Scanner Name Enter the name of this machine when using it as the WS scanner using up to 63 characters Scanner Location Enter a scanner location if necessary using up to 63 characters Scanner Information Enter scanner information if necessary using up to 63 characters Connection Timeout Change the time out time to limit a communication with th
553. scription Server Settings To access this machine directly and control the Control Panel of the ma chine remotely select ON OFF is specified by default Port Number SSL If necessary change the port number used when operating the Control Panel of this machine 50443 is specified by default Password Authentication Select whether to request password entry for connecting with this ma chine To request for a password entry select ON and enter the pass word using up to 64 characters To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box and enter the current password and new password IP Filtering Permit Ac cess Select Enable to specify IP addresses allowed to access Also enter the range of IP addresses allowed to access If a single IP address is allowed to access you can only enter the address in one side of the range e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Disable is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 27 1 6 Operating the machine Control Panel remotely 16 10 16 28 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 Description of Setup Buttons Administrator Settings 17 17 Description of Setup Buttons Administrator Set tings Administrator Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Press this button to display settings that can be configured only by the administrator To configure settings you need
554. seeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeeesneeesaaes 15 27 Registering a temporary one touch destination cccccsseececeeseeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseeeneeeeseees 15 30 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Contents 7 15 5 Registering the subject and body of an E Mail cccssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeensseeneeeeeseees 15 31 Registering thes bject dernes iniri sa eaa tea tad ana Aa Ean a AAR Ed aaa e trade dA A ADDAA E dete we aae Eataa Maen 15 31 Registering the DOdY evcciiicedivs Bevivs che iv e aaa aare a e raean ianiai iiiaae di 15 31 15 6 Registering a prefix and suffix of each destination cccsssseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeneneeeeeeeenseeeeeneeenees 15 32 15 7 Registering the information to be added to header footef sssusssunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 15 33 15 8 Adding ATONU MAGI s lt 5 ccnp ccccssscvede cost sccene chznesce stesso seceded entatectes ecensesdassznntaceecsecodecebedesatcnedccessccees 15 35 15 9 Registering a paper name and Paper type ssssunssunsnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnana nnen 15 36 15 10 Using data management utility etaan anaandaa dana aaan taaan araa ce descent eee aa danan annara 15 38 15 10 1 Data Management Utility micisisrani ennaii a aap aaa A Ara a are aaa paaa raa 15 38 15 10 2 Managing the copy protect data ccceeescceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeensaeeeeess 15 39 15 10 3 Managing the
555. seeeeeesseeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeesnneeeeeeesseeeeeseesseneaeesenseneaeneeseee 14 25 OVGIVIGW E E each td tenes ie banectis A E E ad sia ctes Shae inven eeere cuumtanvesthedtenyae E 14 25 Configuring the settings for using SNMP eccsceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeees 14 26 14 7 Checking the printer information cccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseneneeaeessnnneeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeessenees 14 30 14 7 1 Checking the counter of this Machine eeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeteneeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeseeeeeneeees 14 30 14 7 2 Checking the ROM Version siicievscichedcdiwscleteesucisiies A a aray EEES 14 31 14 8 Managing the setting information ccsseseeeeeesseeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeeeeeseneaneeeesseneeeeeeesseeneseeenees 14 32 14 8 1 Writing the setting information to this Machine IMpPOrt ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 14 32 Contents 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 8 2 14 8 3 14 8 4 14 8 5 14 9 14 10 14 10 1 14 10 2 14 10 3 14 10 4 14 10 5 14 10 6 14 10 7 14 10 8 14 10 9 14 11 14 11 1 14 11 2 14 12 Types of information that Can be iMported cccccececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaee 14 32 HOW 16 IM POMtive Aeictecs E E A E E Baeledea de iseaes iva eis Wain ad ete aet 14 32 Saving the setting information of this machine Export eeeeeeseeeseneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeesee
556. sent and received In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Header Footer Position then configure the following set tings Sp Administrator Logout fdl B Ready to Scan EB ready to Prim ls User Security Auth Account Network Box Track System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store Address 0 oe Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting Header Position Outside Body Text gt TX RX Settings ies Position and Character Minimal gt Function Setting Print Receiver s Name ON 7 gt PBX Connection Setting Footer Position OFF hd gt Report Settings A gt Multi Line Settings x Cancel gt Network Fax Setting gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings Settings Description Header Position Specify the position at which a Header Position is printed on a fax If you select OFF Header Position is not printed If Inside Body Text is selected part of the original may be lost Outside Body Text is specified by default OFF is not available in the USA or Hong Kong model TTI Print Position and Select the size of characters to print a TTI Minimal is the character height Character Size that is half that of the characters in Normal size It is recommended that you select Minimal to prevent a fax image from being cut off or to prevent a page from being divided when pages are print ed at a receivin
557. ser Maintenance Settings Security Audiltecoane Network Box rack Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt General Settings Authentication Device Settings ie User EE Bio Authentication Setting Beep Sound ON gt Account Track Settings Operation Settings Tto many authentication gt Prohibited Function Login Setting OK Cancel gt Print without Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings Authentication Device Settings Public User Box Setting User Account Common Setting Settings Description Beep Sound Select whether to give a blip sound when the finger vein pattern is scanned successfully ON is specified by default Operation Settings Select how to log in to this machine e 1 to many authentication Simply place his or her finger to log in e 1 to 1 authentication Enter the user name and place his or her finger to log in Bio information is used instead of the password 1 to many authentication is specified by default 12 19 2 Authenticating in the LDAP server using the authentication card LDAP IC Card Authentication Overview You can configure settings so that authentication is performed in the LDAP server using the card ID registered in the authentication card LDAP IC Card Authentication Authentication is completed only by placing the IC card This enhances security without damaging users ability to eas
558. seseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseneeeeeeessneeaaeeenseeeaeeeeesseeaeeseeseneenenenss 9 3 9 1 1 Configuring the line usage SCTLINGS ceeccceseeeeessceneseneeesseeeeseeneneeceeseseeenesseeeessnsenesoeeteneeseseneeeesees 9 3 9 1 2 Configuring connection settings for a PBX ENViIrONMeNt 00 eeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneae 9 4 9 1 3 Registering the sender information cc ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeggaaeeeseeseaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeaaees 9 5 9 2 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a faXx ccsssseeeeeeesseneeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 9 6 9 2 1 Specifying how to print the sender name reception information esescceeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeneeeeneeeees 9 6 9 2 2 Changing print settings when receiving a fAX ce eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeas 9 7 9 2 3 Canceling stamp setting when sending a FAX 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeee teense tenes eesneeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeas 9 8 9 2 4 Adjusting the image quality depending on the resolution of a received fax ceeeeesseeeeseteeneeees 9 9 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception FUNCTIONS cccssseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeeeeneeeneeseenees 9 10 9 3 1 Enabling disabling the fax FUNCTIONS eee eeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeesaeeeeneeesaeeeeeneeeeeaaeesnneeeeeeeeeas 9 10 9 3 2 Using the Closed Network RX function e es eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee tenses eesaeeeeea
559. setting key for Default Copy Settings and Default Enlarge Display Set tings or Default Scan Fax Settings and Default Enlarge Display Settings If you wish to change the settings in Normal Display and Enlarge Display at the same time select in the ad ministrator mode System Settings Reset Settings and then set Default Basic Enlarge Display Common Setting to Apply to all Default Do not Apply Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print a System User Maintenance Setti Security Auth Account Network Box ettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Job Reset gt Register Support pie Let aaa a Display Apply to ai Information ommon Setting gt Network TWAIN Ci User Box Setting 14 10 2 Setting the action for switching the display to Enlarge Display The default display mode of the Touch Panel can be set to Enlarge Display mode You can also set the action to be taken when the display mode is switched to Enlarge Display In the administrator mode select System Settings Enlarge Display Settings then configure the following settings Qe Administrator logout 2 e Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print 2 System User Maintenance Security Aueuaorount Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Machine Setting Enlarge Display Settings gt Register Support Defaul
560. side line number specified here is added to fax numbers registered with the address book or program 9 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 1 Configuring basic fax settings 9 1 3 Registering the sender information Register the machine name your company name sender name and the fax number that are to be printed as sender information when faxes are transmitted TTI information is automatically added to a fax to be sent from this machine Up to 20 sender names can be registered You can use different names for different purposes depending on the destination In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Header Information then configure the following settings Maintenance gt Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Function Setting gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings gt Network Fax Setting gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings Print Setting Store Address g 0h Se Administrator Logout 21 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print ge User aysien Security Auth Account Network Box Settings Arak Wizard Sender Fax No Sender Fax No TTI List No Default Sender Name Edit Delete 1 s Eait perete 2 Eai petete a je ait petete 4 e Edit Delete 5 e Eat eet s e ea Losier 7 s Ean Deter 8 amp i Delete m a
561. sing the DHCP or other protocols select whether to automatically retrieve the domain name Enable is specified by default Search Domain Name Auto Retrieval When using the DHCP or other protocols select whether to automatically retrieve the search domain name Enable is specified by default DNS Default Domain Name When not automatically retrieving the default domain name enter the de fault domain name of this machine using up to 253 characters including the host name DNS Search Domain Name 1 to DNS Search Domain Name 3 When not automatically retrieving the search domain name select a number to be registered and enter the search domain name using up to 251 characters 17 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 DNS Server Settings IPv4 To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings DNS Server Settings IPv4 To resolve the name using the host name when accessing a computer or server on the network from this ma chine register your DNS server address IPv4 on this machine Settings Description DNS Server Auto Obtain Select whether to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server Enable is specified by default Priority DNS Server Enter the address of your primary DNS server Secondary DNS Server 1 or Secondary DNS Server 2 When using multiple DNS servers select a number to be registere
562. specified in Administrator Settings Network Settings TCP IP Settings DNS Host Domain Name Enter the domain name of Active Directory using up to 64 characters Account Name Enter the administrator account name of the Active Directory domain us ing up to 64 characters Password Enter the administrator password of the Active Directory domain using up to 64 characters TX Timeout Change the time out time of domain joining processing if necessary 30 is specified by default Applications and Settings Displays a list of services of this machine that join the Active Directory do main When this machine joins the Active Directory domain PRINTER appears Auto Log Out Time When the user uses services of this machine in the Active Directory do main change the time to hold the user s authentication information on this machine Since the user can reuse authentication information while it is held on this machine they can use the services of this machine without performing au thentication again 1 Hour is specified by default IWS Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings IWS Settings Set the operating environment of IWS Internal Web Server function Enabling the IWS function allows you to transfer Web page contents to this machine and use the machine as a Web server For details contact your service representative 17 38
563. sponse Monitoring Setting haz zo Monitoring Time 24 Hour 1 99 par a Maximum Resolution Ultra Fine 7 ARIS Add Content Type Information OFF E aa Setting gt Header Information Settings Description MDN Request Select whether to request for fax reception result MDN request to the des tination If a MDN request is sent the recipient machine returns a response mes sage upon reception of a fax so that you can check that the fax is success fully received by the destination Also by receiving a response message from the destination you can ob tain the reception capability information of the destination When new re sponse message is received from a destination registered in the address book the capability information is overwritten with new one ON is specified by default DSN Request Select whether to request for fax reception result DSN request to the des tination mail server If you select ON for MDN Request priority is given to the MDN request OFF is specified by default MDN Response Select whether to return a response message when a sender requests for fax reception result MDN request ON is specified by default MDN DSN Response Select this check box to specify the waiting time for a response from the Monitoring Setting destination after a MDN request or DSN request is sent by this machine If necessary change the waiting time for a response from the destination at Monitoring Time If
564. ssful To use the POP Before SMTP authentication enable the POP Before SMTP on this machine In addition con figure settings for connecting to the E mail server POP used for authentication 1 In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings a z D Ready to Scan Ready to Print System Sane Auth Account Network Box Maintenance Customize Print Setting Si E mail TX SMTP Y E mail Setting M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail ON E mail Notification Jon Doe SMIME Total Counter Notification Jon SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name LDAP Setting gt iPP setting Use SSL TLS OFF ha gt FTP Setting Port Number ps 1 65535 gt SNMP Setting Port No SSL Ess a 65535 PR SMB Setting Certificate Verification Level Settings DPWS Settings Validity Period confirm H Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm P AppleTalk Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt Network Fax Setting Connection Timeout 50 F sec WebDAV Settings Max Mail Size No Limit Server Capacity C moyen 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address Authentication Setting POP before SMTP orz POP before SMTP Time 5__lsec 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID I Password is changed Password Domain Name Authentication Setting I Binary Division
565. ssion OFF Connection Timeout 60 sec 5 300 Server Authentication Character Code UTF 8 z Certificate Verification Level Settings Confirm z Validity Period CN Do Not Confirm z Key Usage Do Not Confirm z Proxy Server Address Do Not Confirm z Do Not Confirm z Description WebDAV TX Setting Select ON to use the WebDAV transmission function ON is specified by default Chunk Transmission Select whether to transmit data by dividing it into some chunks Configure the setting if your WebDAV server supports chunk transmission OFF is specified by default Connection Timeout If necessary change the time out time to limit a communication with the WebDAV server 60 sec is specified by default Server Authentication Character Code Select a character code to perform the authentication under the WebDAV server You can use this setting when Japanese is specified for the language to be displayed on the Touch Panel UTF 8 is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 23 Configuring the WebDAV transmission environment 7 4 Using the proxy server When the proxy server is used in your network environment you can configure settings so that the WebDAV server is accessed via the proxy server To use the proxy server register the proxy server information on this machine In addition configure the set tings for connection to the proxy server In t
566. stem menu Auto Protect Setting Lock the computer screen if a specified amount of time has elapsed without the machine being operated You can change the time until the screen is locked Exit Exit the utility 15 42 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 6 Associating with External Application 16 1 Associating via TCP Socket 1 6 16 Associating with External Application 16 1 Associating via TCP Socket Overview To use application software that communicates with this machine via TCP Socket configure the TCP Socket settings of this machine If a certificate for this machine is registered you can encrypt communication between the machine and ap plication software using SSL To perform the association via TCP Socket follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 N Configure the basic TCP Socket settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 16 4 3 Setthe following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Encrypting communication between this machine and application software with page 16 5 SSL If you installed user authentication using an external authentication server relevant settings are required d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 3 16 Associating via TCP Socket 16 1
567. stered in Notification Schedule Setting Set a schedule to be applied to ON Model Name Enter a model name to be included in the notification mail message using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the device Send Now Send counter information to the registered E mail address PING Confirmation To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings PING Confirmation Configure settings to send a ping to the device communicating with this machine to check that the connec tion has been set up correctly Settings Description PING TX Address Enter the address used to send a ping Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6b fe10 2f16 Check Connection Send a ping to check that this machine has been correctly connected SLP Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings SLP Setting Select whether to enable the SLP Service Location Protocol Select Enable when operating this machine as a scanner through a computer connected to the network us ing the TWAIN driver Enable is specified by default LPD Setting To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings Detail Settings LPD Setting Select wheth
568. stered name erea F Man Destination Information E mail Address p Fax Resolution F Standard m Fine F Super Fine T Ultra Fine Paper Size rA4 r B4 r A3 Compression Type EMH CMR C MMR T JPEG Gray Scale T JPEG Color Limiting Access to Destinations OK Cancel Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation E mail Address Enter the E mail address of the destination with 320 characters excluding spaces Fax Resolution Select a resolution of the original data that the recipient machine can re ceive Paper Size Select a paper size of the original data that the recipient machine can re ceive d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 11 1 5 Registering address books 15 1 Settings Description Compression Type Select a compression t
569. stinguished Name when performing authentication via the LDAP server At Search Attribute enter the search attribute to be automatically added before the user name In normal circumstances specify uid before the user name however depending on your environment you need to specify other attribute such as cn uid is specified by default Clicking Check Connection at LDAP Server List enables you to confirm whether you can connect to the LDAP server according to the registered contents d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 7 Searching for a destination using the LDAP server 7 Using SSL communication Communication between this machine and the LDAP server is encrypted with SSL Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL encryption communication with the LDAP server To make SSL communications enable SSL In addition specify how to verify the certificate In the administrator mode select Network LDAP Setting Setting Up LDAP Edit then configure the following settings Be Administrator Ready to Scan re Ready to Print fs User Auth Account Box Track t Fax Settings Wizard Customize System Settings Maintenance Setting Up LDAP Y LDAP Setting LDAP Server Name LDAP1 gt LDAP Setting Server Address I Please check to enter host name eal ace 7 iPP setting O ess P FTP Setting Port Number SSD E la 65535 gt SNMP Setting C
570. supported in an operating system of Windows Vista or later Win dows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 It is useful to resolve the name in the IPv6 environment When using the SMB Send function follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings for the SMB transmission gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 15 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Resolve the name using the WINS server page 7 16 Use the SMB Send function in the IPv6 environment page 7 17 Specify a destination with a host name in an environment where the DNS server is page 7 18 not running supported in the computer loaded with Windows Vista or later Use the SMB Send function in the DFS environment page 7 19 A late Reference If user authentication by Active Directory is installed the Scan to Home function is available which you can easily send data to a shared folder on the server or that on the login user s computer For details refer to page 12 17 If the user authentication is installed using the user authentication information login name and password as SMB destination authentication information host name and password avoids the problem of having to spec ify SMB destination authe
571. sword Password ASCII a 3 Password Auth Authentication None 4 Delivery Method Delivery E Secure 5 Subject Subject ASCII 6 Billing Code 1 BillingCode1 ASCII 7 Billing Code 2 BillingCode2 ASCII 8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet 2 a lt 9 Document PW DocumentPassword ASCII Certified Delivery No Button Name Function Name Keyboard initial val Options Type ue 1 User ID ID ASCII Walkup 2 Password Password ASCII 3 Password Auth Authentication 3 None 4 Delivery Method Delivery z Certified 5 Subject Subject ASCII 6 Billing Code 1 BillingCode1 ASCII 7 Billing Code 2 BillingCode2 ASCII 8 CoverSheet Type CoverSheet z 9 Document PW DocumentPassword ASCII S d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 23 16 Associating with the fax server 16 9 Associating with the fax server communicating in E Mail format When using a fax server that communicates in the E mail format a prefix and a suffix can be automatically added to the destination number In the administrator mode select System Settings System Connection Setting then configure the follow ing settings Qe Administrator Logout P Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Maintenance Security rent Network Box Track Print Setting aa Fax Settings Wizard Machine Setting System Co
572. sword to restrict the obtainment of device information from the printer driver When you attempt to obtain device information from the printer driver this machine prompts you to enter the password This enables you to restrict users who can obtain device information In the administrator mode select Print Setting Assign Account to Acquire Device Info then configure the following settings Qe Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print fsi R User s System P EER MEANA co senos atid wooo Network Box j Print Setting Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Basic Setting Assign Account to Acquire Device Info gt PCL Setting You can designate if you wish to use a password protected account for the acquisition of device information from the print driver Assign Account to Acquire Device OFF gt TIFF Setting Info gt PS Setting I Password is changed Password gt Interface Setting gt Assign Account to Acquire Device Info ox Cancel gt OOXML Print Settings gt Security Setting Settings Description Assign Account to Acquire Specify ON to restrict users from obtaining device information from the Device Info printer driver using a password OFF is specified by default Password Enter a password to restrict device information to be obtained using up to eight characters excluding spaces and To enter change the password select t
573. t d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 37 Specifying the time out time by interface 8 11 8 11 Specifying the time out time by interface Change the time out time to limit a communication between this machine and the computer if necessary You can change the time out time to limit communications via a network and USB respectively In the administrator mode select Print Setting Interface Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print User Auth Account System Maintenance Settings Print Setting gt Basic Setting Interface Setting gt PCL Setting Network Timeout 60__ sec 10 1000 gt PS Setting USB Timeout 60 sec 10 1000 gt TIFF Setting secur sting ox anc gt Assign Account to Acquire Device Info gt OOXML Print Settings Settings Description Network Timeout When this machine is connected via a network to the computer change the communication time out time if necessary 60 sec is specified by default USB Timeout When this machine is connected via a USB device to the computer change the communication time out time if necessary 60 sec is specified by default 8 38 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 12 Restricting users from obtaining device information using password 8 8 12 Restricting users from obtaining device information using pass word You can use a pas
574. t Yes No is specified by default Obtain Log Type Select whether to obtain job logs for each type e Accounting Log Enables you to obtain information relevant to paper consumption for each user or account On is specified by default e Counting Log Enables you to obtain information about paper con sumption and the reduction rate of paper used for printing On is spec ified by default e Audit Log Enables you to obtain user operation or job history Your can track unauthorized actions or the leakage of information On is specified by default Overwrite Select whether to allow the oldest job log to be overwritten by a new job log when the hard disk space becomes full Allow is specified by default Erase Job Log Select this to delete job logs saved on this machine 14 36 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 9 Outputting job logs 14 Downloading job logs 1 In the administrator mode select Maintenance Job Log Create Job Log then click OK gt If any job logs have not been obtained download them before creating new job log data The job logs that have not been obtained are deleted when the new job log data is created This starts creating job log data Be Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a System Settings User Auth Account Box Track Customize Print Setting gt Meter Count Create Job Log gt ROM Version Creates Job L
575. t 75 37 System connection setting 8 28 16 14 16 24 TCP socket 76 3 TCP socket setting 6 7 TCP IP setting IPv4 5 3 TCP IP setting IPv6 5 8 Temporarily change language 74 79 Temporary one touch 75 30 Text 75 37 TIFF setting 8 34 Time adjustment setting 4 6 Total counter notification 74 22 TSI user box settings 9 78 TWAIN scan 7 32 TX operation log setting 73 29 TX RX setting 9 7 I U User authentication 72 3 User box 77 3 11 4 15 8 User box operation 77 19 18 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 18 1 Index by item 1 8 User mode 3 77 3 73 User account common setting 72 67 WebDAV 75 7 WebDAV server 76 72 Weekly timer setting 74 5 Wizard 3 20 WS print 8 74 WS scan 7 27 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 18 5 18 Index by button 18 2 18 2 Index by button A N Administrator Settings 77 3 NetWare Print Settings 77 72 AppleTalk Settings 77 25 NetWare Settings 77 72 B Network Fax Function Settings 77 27 Network Fax Settings 77 26 Bluetooth Setting 77 38 Network Settings 17 4 Bonjour Setting 77 25 D m Peer 77 9 Client Settings 17 16 17 39 PING Confirmation 17 36 Communication Check 77 70 Prefix Suffix Setting 17 37 D Print Settings 77 77 Detail Settings 77 33 Printer Settings 77 32 Device Setting 17 34 Protocol Setting 77 9 Direct Hosting Setting 17 77 Proxy Setting for Remote Access 77 30 Distributed Scan Settings 77 32 R DNS Domain 177 6 RAW Port Number 77 77 DAS Postar Remote Panel Se
576. t Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Default Authentication Method Public User Access Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Directory Account Track Account Track Input Method Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Number of Counters Assigned for Users When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum N External Server ON With Login pal 0 _ Minute 1 600 on Synchronize z 500 1 999 Skip Job 7 or cancer Settings User Authentication Description When performing authentication using an external authentication server select ON External Server or ON MFP External Server If you want to configure setting so that you can log in to this machine using its authentication function in consideration of an occurrence of some sort of problem on the external authentication server select ON MFP Exter nal Server Overwrite User Info When the external server authentication is used authenticated user infor mation is also managed on this machine If the number of users who have executed the external server authentication reaches the maximum number of users this machine can manage authentication of any new users will not be permitted Select whether to allow the user to overwrite registered user information for that case If you select Allow the oldest authenticated user information is erased a
577. t Enlarge Display Setting OFF Information Enlarge Display Setting Normal E gt Network TWAIN oy Base Setting to Enlarge zE Reset Settings User Box Setting asp Standard Size Setting gt Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Job Priority Operation Settings Flash Display Setting Customize gt System Connection Setting Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings gt Set Paper Name by User Registered Key Settings Settings Description Default Enlarge Display Select whether to use Enlarge Display mode as the initial display of the Setting Touch Panel OFF is specified by default 14 38 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 10 Setting the operating environment for this machine 1 4 Settings Description Enlarge Display Setting If you have set Default Enlarge Display Setting to ON select whether to enable Enlarge Display mode when Reset is pressed If you wish to enable Enlarge Display mode when Reset is pressed select Enlarge Normal is specified by default Apply Basic Setting to En large Display Select whether to inherit the settings configured on the normal screen dis play when switching the screen from Normal to Enlarge Display Mode 2 e Mode 1 Inherit all normal mode settings e Mode 2 In Copy mode only inherit Normal mode settings that can be set in Enlarge Display mode In Fax Scan mode reset the settings is specified by defau
578. t Frame Type Auto Detect NetWare Print Mode OFF g PServer Print Server Name LoS E T Password is changed Print Server Password Polling Interval M heca 65535 Bindery NDS Setting ND x Bindery File Server Name NDS NDSContextNamex N NDS Tree Name Nprinter Rprinter Print Server Name L Printer Number 255 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting ON 7 Settings Description IPX Setting Select ON to use the IPX OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default NetWare Print Mode Select Nprinter Rprinter OFF is specified by default Print Server Name Enter a print server name to enable Noprinter Rprinter using up to 63 char acters excluding L lt gt and Enter the print server name registered in the Pconsole Printer Number Enter the Nprinter Rprinter number 255 is specified by default 8 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment In Print Server mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulation A ON SS oO o When you use the Bindery Emulation make sure that the Bindery Emulation has been enabled on the NetWare server When you select the Print Server mode the IPX protocol must already be loaded on the NetWare server From the cli
579. t Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting gt Customize gt System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting Set Paper Name by User Settings Description Function Mode Initial Select whether to use an initial of the relevant function as a prefix for the file name The following letters are used as a prefix for the file name C Copy S Scan Fax or User Box P Print Attach is specified by default Supplementary File Name Select whether to add a device name or desired text to the file name e Device Name Use the name of this machine for the file name The name of this machine can be changed from in the administrator mode System Settings Machine Setting Device Name e Arbitrary Characters Use any desired text for the file name Enter a text to be added to the Arbitrary Characters using up to 10 charac ters Device Name is specified by default 14 40 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 10 Setting the operating environment for this machine 14 14 10 5 Previewing the original being Display a preview image for each page of an original when it is scanned in Scan Fax mode scanned in realtime In the administrator mode select System Settings Preview Settings and set Real time preview to ON Default OFF gt Machine Setting gt Register Support Information Network TWAIN Reset Settings User Box Setting Stan
580. t a long time for the user mode you can keep convenience of use of the Web browser such as address registration that is difficult to perform on the Touch Panel In the administrator mode select Security Auto Logout then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print User Security Auth Account Track System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize Auto Logout Admin Mode Logout Time 10 jMinute User Mode Logout Time 60 Minute Settings Description Admin Mode Logout Select a time period until the user is automatically logged out of the admin Time istrator mode 10 minutes is specified by default User Mode Logout Time Select a time period until the user is automatically logged out of the user mode 60 minutes is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 6 5 Configuring flash view settings 6 5 Configuring flash view settings 6 5 1 Configuring settings for display in flash view To display Web Connection in the flash view enable the TCP Socket ASCII Mode of this machine In the administrator mode select Network TCP Socket Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting es Administrator 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Settings User Auth Account Network Box Track Fax Settings W
581. t f Maintenance SE l Print Setting Sto Open User Box User Box User Box gt Create User Box ae name sj Type Public Owner Name Public Box Operation User Box Setting Delete User Box gt Create System User Box Relay Address 1 Cancel 3 Use User Box Attribute Change to change User Box settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan E Ready to Print rs User es seins wack om E Print Setting Ste dress Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Open User Box User Box Attribute Change gt Create User Box User Box Number 5 pan Acer San pr Relay Address gt Create System User Box Registered Address Number 1 T Relay TX Password is changed New Relay TX Password Retype New Relay TX Password Settings Description User Box Name Change the User Box name using up to 20 characters 11 10 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 Settings Description Relay Address To change a destination click Search from List and select a group in which fax destinations are registered When registering a group destination as a relay destination be sure to set the fax address in the group destination in advance Relay TX Password is changed 11 2 6 To change the relay TX password select this check box then enter a new password using up to eight characters The entered password is required when sending a relay request to this ma chine Inform the sender who want to use this machi
582. t is extended HTTP is used to forward printing data enabling you to print data on a printer on a dis tance location via the Internet Using authentication when printing with IPP can prevent unauthorized use by a third party s In addition us ing SSL to encrypt a communication between this machine and the computer enables more secure printing When using the IPP printing function follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings for the IPP printing gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 8 10 3 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Perform authentication when performing IPP printing page 8 12 Communicate with this machine using SSL IPPS printing page 8 13 Configuring basic settings for the IPP printing Enable the IPP printing In addition register the information of this machine used for IPP printing In the administrator mode select Network IPP Setting then configure the following settings Bp Administrator 2 Ready to Scan g Ready to Print g User Maintenance pais coy Auth Account Box Track Print Setting we Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize IPP Setting IPP Setting ON 7 Accept IPP job ON 7 Printer Name Printer Locat
583. t saving it in a box e Memory RX User Box Saves received documents in a Memory RX User Box e Specified User Box Saves received documents in a specified box Click Search from List then select the box to save the received documents from the list Automatically Print is specified by default Print Select whether to print a received fax after it has been received OFF is specified by default 4 Click Register Forwarding Destination then click OK TSI User Box Registration is displayed d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 3 5 Inthe TSI User Box List click Create then configure the following settings Settings Sender TSI System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Stor gt Header Footer Position gt Line Parameter Setting gt TX RX Settings Y Function Setting gt RX Data Operation Settings PC FAX Tx Setting gt PBX Connection Setting gt Multi Line Settings Network Fax Setting gt Header Information gt Fax Print Quality Settings es Administrator Ready to Scan iy Ready to Print TSI User Box Registration No 1 Sender TSI Numeric characters T P Forwarding Destination Select from Address Book Search from List Registered Address Number Check Destination Search from List Registered Address Number Check Destination Registered Box N
584. ta or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Serv er 2008 R2 confirm the following When using the IPPS to print data on this machine configure settings for this machine using the follow ing procedure https host name domain name ipp For the host name and domain name enter DNS Host Name and DNS Default Domain Name you specified for TCP IP Setting of this machine e Confirm that the name resolution of this machine is possible using the DNS server from the computer Register this machine in the DNS server in advance In addition configure DNS settings on the compu ter e If the certificate of this machine is not the one issued by the Certificate Authority CA you must register the certificate of this machine in Trusted Root Certification Authorities of the computer d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 13 Configuring the WS printing environment 8 5 Configuring the WS printing environment Overview The computer uses the Web service function of Windows Vista or later Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 to automatically detect this machine connected to the network and easily install this function as Web service printer HTTP is used for communication between this machine and the computer In addition using SSL to encrypt a communication between the this machine and the computer enables more secure printing When using the WS printing function follow the below procedure to configure the settings Confi
585. tenance System Settings Security Auth Account Box Track Print Setting tore s Wizard Customize Certificate Signing Request Data gt cate Setting BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIB DCCAWUCAQAwgbsxCzAJBgNVBAYTAIVT MQ4wDAYDVQQIDAVzdGF0ZTEMMA0G A1UEBwwDbG9jMQwwCgYDVQQKDANvemexizAh BgNVBAsTGktPTkIDQSBNSUSPTFRB IGJpemh1YiBDMzY OMRUwEwYDVQQLDAwwMDI wNkIxMDMzNOUxEDAOBgNVBAsMB29y Z3VuaXQxEzARBgNVBAMTCKtNQIQxMDMzNOUx HTAbBgkghkiG3w0BCQEWDm1mcEBz ZXJ2ZXluY 29tMIGAMADGCSqGSIb3DQEBAQUAA4 3 Send the certificate signing request data to the Certificate Authority When the data is returned from the Certificate Authority after its review register the data with this ma chine 4 Inthe administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting Setting In stall a Certificate and paste the text data sent from the Certificate Authority CA and then click In stall e Administrator 2 Ready to Scan GB Ready to Print 2 Y PKI Settings Install a Certificate gt Device Certificate a Setting TX Oper L 5 When the certificate has been installed enable SSL communication gt For details refer to page 13 4 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 7 13 Managing the certificates for this machine 13 2 13 2 Managing the certificates for this machine 13 2 1 Using differ
586. tended purpose approved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain certificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default Expiration Date Con firmation A late Reference Confirm whether the certificate has expired Confirm for expiration of the certificate in the following order e OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol service e CRL Certificate Revocation List Do Not Confirm is specified by default In the administrator mode select Security Certificate Verification Settings then configure whether to ver ify the certificate The certificate is verified by default For details refer to page 13 11 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 31 Configuring the TWAIN scan environment 7 6 Configuring the TWAIN scan environment Overview Using the TWAIN driver enables you to use this machine as a scanner by controlling it from a computer con nected to the network When using the TWAIN scan follow the below procedure to configure the settings 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure the basic settings for the TWAIN scan gt For details on configuring the setting
587. ternal Server or ON MFP External Server If you want to configure setting so that you can log in to this machine using its authentication function in consideration of an occurrence of some sort of problem on the external authentication server select ON MFP Exter nal Server Overwrite User Info When the external server authentication is used authenticated user infor mation is also managed on this machine If the number of users who have executed the external server authentication reaches the maximum number of users this machine can manage authentication of any new users will not be permitted Select whether to allow the user to overwrite registered user information for that case If you select Allow the oldest authenticated user information is erased and the new user is registered Restrict is specified by default Default Authentication Method If you have selected ON MFP External Server at User Authentication select the authentication method you use normally ON External Server is specified by default When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum Sets the maximum number of sheets that each user can print Here select an operation if the number of sheets exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be printed e Skip Job Stops the job currently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default 12 38 d Color MF552 4
588. the PSERVER NLM file on the NetWare Server console Log in to the administrator mode of Web Connection 8 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 7 Inthe administrator mode select Network NetWare Setting NetWare Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance NetWare Setting gt NetWare Setting count Print Setting sore ares Fax Settings Wizard Customize Ea Eune z Ready to Scan B Ready to Print fs User NetWare Setting is reflected after reset IPX Setting orF Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Ethernet Frame Type Auto Detect z NetWare Print Mode OFF bd PServer Print Server Name T Password is changed Print Server Password Polling Interval M seca 65535 Bindery NDS Setting NDS x Bindery File Server Name E i NDS NDS Context Nam S N NDS Tree Name LoS i Nprinter Rprinter C Print Server Name Printer Number 0 255 255 Auto User Authentication Setting ON 7 Settings Description IPX Setting Select ON to use the IPX OFF is specified by default Ethernet Frame Type Select the Ethernet frame type according to your environment Auto Detect is specified by default NetWare Print Mode Select Nprinter Rprinter OFF is specified by default Print Server Name Enter a print server name to enabl
589. the default font size value e Scalable Font Enter the font size in points for scalable fonts with dif ferent widths for each character 12 00 Point is specified by default e Bitmap Font Enter the font width in pitches for bitmap fonts with the same width for each character 10 00 Pitch is specified by default Line Page Enter the number of lines of text data to be printed on one page 64 is specified by default CR LF Mapping Select whether to replace the line feed codes when printing text data When you want to replace the line feed codes select the replacement method OFF is specified by default 8 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 10 Specifying the default print settings for this machine 8 8 10 3 Specifying the default PS print settings Configure the PS print settings Specify default settings for error information printing and the default settings of various profiles In the administrator mode select Print Setting PS Setting then configure the following settings Maintenance Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard gt Basic Setting gt PCL Setting gt PS Setting gt TIFF Setting gt Security Setting RGB Color Device Color gt Interface Setting Output Profile Auto gt Assign Account to Text Acquire Device Info RGB Color Device Color gt OOXML Print Settings Output Profile Auto gt Page Layout Settings Sp Admin
590. the name even in an environ ment with no DNS server This function is supported in an operating system of Windows Vista or later Win dows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 It is useful to resolve the name in the IPv6 environment In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting and set LLMNR Setting to Enable Default Disable Se Administrator Ba Ready to Scan B Ready to Print System LETE Settings User Auth Account Network Box Ti rack Wizard Customize Print Setting Y TCP IP Setting TCP IP Setting gt TCP IP Setting is reflected after reset TCP IP ON z Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings Network Speed Auto 10M 100Mbps gt Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings DNS Host DNS Host Name Dynamic DNS Setting Disable z LLMNR Setting Disable z DNS Domain Name Setting DNS Domain Auto Obtain Enable z DNS Search Domain Name Enable Auto Retrieval Enable i DNS Default Domain Name DNS Search Domain Namel DNS Search Domain Name2 DNS Search Domain Name3 LPD Setting LPD Enable d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 9 Configuring the IPP printing environment 8 4 Configuring the IPP printing environment Overview IPP printing uses the Internet Printing Protocol IPP and prints information via the network IPP tha
591. the registration content 2 usert Logout Change Password 2 Ready to Scan Cy Ready to Print fs Information Job g Box D Direct Print G Sarea A Address Book List gt Group The other party who wants to transmit data can be registered gt Program New Registration gt Popes Se Search by number fi so E gt Subject i 7 Search from Index E gt Text No Function Name S MIME Edit Delete Menu Description Address Book Enables you to register frequently used destinations on this machine Also it enables you to confirm or edit the registered content of the destination registered on this machine Group Enables you to register multiple destinations as a group Also it enables you to confirm or edit the registered content of the group destination reg istered on this machine Program Enables you to register a combination of frequently used option settings as a recall key program Also it enables you to confirm or edit the registered content of the program registered on this machine Temporary One Touch Enables you to register a program used on a temporary basis A temporary one touch destination is deleted once data is sent to the registered desti nation or when the machine is turned OFF Subject Registers subjects when sending E mails Text Registers body messages when sending E mails 3 16 d Color
592. the user s E mail address registered on this machine d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 15 13 Controlling the access to this machine by IP address 13 5 13 5 Controlling the access to this machine by IP address The computers access to this machine can be controlled via IP address This is called IP address filtering You can specify both IP addresses that are allowed to access this machine and those refused to access the machine Tips IP address filtering is not supported in the IPv6 environment In the administrator mode select Network TCP IP Setting IP Filtering then configure the following set tings Se Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a Print Setting Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize TCP IP Setting IP Filtering gt IP Filtering Sett 0 0 0 0 0000 gt Emaii seing O e Ses poo Deny Access Disable eo Set pooo ooo SNMP Setting ay foooo fooo 4 gt SMB Setting Set3 0 0 0 0 pooo JP Bonjour Setting ses a mo 7 Netware Seting 7 AppleTalk Seting ox caret gt Network Fax Setting Settings Description Permit Access Select Enable to specify IP addresses allowed to access Also enter the range of IP addresses allowed to access If a single IP address is allowed to access you can only enter the address in one side of the range e Example of entry 192 168 1 1 Dis
593. then configure the following settings Maintenance gt IWS Settings Print Setting Se Administrator iel Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print a User SE EE AuthlAccount Box Track Fax Settings Wizard Customize IWS Settings Those settings marked with an will take effect after the main switch is turned OFF ON IWS Settings OFF T Password is changed Password is currently set File Upload Password i Port Number 1 65535 Connect IWS Apps to Network A Cancel Settings Description IWS Settings Select ON to use the IWS function OFF is specified by default File Upload Password Enter the password of the WebDAV server for IWS of this machine using 8 to 64 characters excluding To change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password The entered password is required for uploading Web page contents to this machine Port Number If necessary change the port number used for accessing the Web page contents uploaded to this machine 8090 is specified by default Connect IWS Apps to Net work If Web page contents uploaded to this machine have dynamic contents such as scripts select whether to enable external connection of the dy namic contents Allow is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 17 16 Associating with the remote diagnosis system 16 8 16 8 16 8 1 Associa
594. thentication Setting Server Registration Edit then register information of the LDAP server to be used for authenticating the user ID of the IC card Se Administrator i Ready to Scan E Ready to Print User Auth Account Track Print Setting General Settings Server Registration User Authentication Server Address F Please check to enter host name patia Account Track Settings Port No 389 1 65535 gt Prohibited Function Login F Enable SSL Setting Port No SSL 1 65535 gt Print without Certificate Verification Level Settings Authentication Expiration Date Confirm X CN Do Not Confirm z Simple Print Authentication Setting Key Usage Do Not Confirm Y LDAP IC Card Chain Do Not Confirm x ation Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Search Base Cc Timeout 60 fsec 5 300 Login Name I Password is changed Password Cd Domain Name CT Use Referral ON Search Attribute uid User Name Use Cara D User Name Attribute uid External Server Connection No Selection v ox canca 12 70 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 19 Using the authentication unit 12 Settings Description Server Address Enter the address of the LDAP server to be used for authenticating the user ID of the IC card Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192
595. thentication Setting gt User Authentication Simple Print Authentication Setting Allow Setting Account Track Settings OK _ Cancel Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication Y Simple Print Authentication Setting Simple Print Authentication Setting gt External Server Settings d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 63 12 Printing without a password Quick Authentication for Printing 12 18 Registering the quick authentication for printing server You must inquire the LDAP server about the user name to obtain permission to access this machine in an environment where external server authentication is employed This LDAP server is called the quick authen tication for printing server In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Simple Print Authentication Setting Register Simple Print Authentication Server Edit then register information of the quick authentication for printing server Be Administrator Logout 2 e Ready to Scan EB Ready to Print a System j j Lo Maintenance Settings Security on Network Box Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Register Simple Print Authentication Server User Authentication Server Address I Please check to enter host name Setting 0 0 0 0 Account Track Settings Port No 389 1 65535 Prohibited Function Login Enable SSL Setting
596. ther to use SNMP v3 ON is specified by default SNMP v1 IPX Select whether to use SNMP v1 in the IPX environment ON is specified by default UDP Port Number If necessary change the UDP port number Normally you can use the original port number 161 is specified by default SNMP v1 v2c Settings Press SNMP v1 v2c Settings to configure SNMP v1 or v2c settings e Read Community Name Settings Enter a read only community name using up to 15 characters public is specified by default e Write Setting Select whether to enable the read and write functions Enable is specified by default e Write Community Name Settings If Write Setting is set to Enable enter the community name in the read write enable state using up to 15 characters private is specified by default SNMP v3 Setting press SNMP v3 Setting to configure SNMP v3 settings Context Name Settings Enter the context name using up to 63 char acters e Discovery User Permissions Select whether to allow a discovery user ON is specified by default e Discovery User Name Settings If Discovery User Permissions is set to ON enter the discovery user name using up to 32 characters public is specified by default e Read User Name Settings Enter the read only user name using up to 32 characters initial is specified by default e Security Level Select a security level for the read only user auth password priv passwo
597. this ma chine to the machine IEEE802 1X If this machine is used as an IEEE802 1X authentication client it is used for the following applications e Encrypting communication if this machine is au thenticated by the IEEE802 1X server via EAP TLS Submitting a certificate of this machine upon re quest by the server via EAP TTLS or EAP PEAP S MIME Tips e e 13 2 2 Exporting a certificate When sending an S MIME E mail it attaches a certifi cate of this machine to ensure the sender of the E mail If the certificate to be used was registered a mark appears for the protocol Clicking Edit changes the registered certificate or check details of the certificate Clicking Delete deletes the registration information A certificate for this machine can be exported You can export the certificate if you wish to manage it on the computer or transfer it to other device 1 In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings Device Certificate Setting Setting Ex port Certificate and enter a password using up to 32 characters and click OK gt The entered password is required for importing the certificate Be Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan GBD Ready to Print E E 2 Maintenance oa Autiocount f Network Box Print Setting Store Adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize EX Export Certificates PKCS 12 Device Certificate Password E Setting Retype Passw
598. ti Page C Page Separation CL 1 999 Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program 15 16 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program 15 Settings Description Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination FTP from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination FTP select Direct Input and en ter the FTP e Host Address Select the Please check to enter host name check box and enter the host name or IP address of a destination FTP server using up to 253 characters e File Path Enter the name of a destination folder in the FTP server specified in Host Address using up to 127 characters e User ID Enter the available user name to log in using up to 64 char acters if authentication is required in the destination FTP server Password Enter the password of the user specified in User ID anonymous When authentication is not required in the destination FTP server select ON e PASV Mode When the PASV mode is used in your environment se lect ON Proxy When a proxy server is used in your environment select ON Port No If necessary change the port number Normally you can use the original port number Only one destination can be specified Basic Setting Application
599. ti Val Select the default compression type for transmission in full color or gray ue Compression Method scale format format JPEG Color is specified by default e JPEG Color Compresses image data in color JPEG format e JPEG Gray Scale Compresses image data in black and white JPEG e Unset Compress data according to the compression type specified in Black Compression Level You cannot send data in color or gray scale Whichever file format you specify data is converted to the TIFF d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 23 1 0 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 2 10 24 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 1 1 Configuring User Box Environment 11 1 Creating and editing a User Box 11 I Configuring User Box Environment 11 11 1 11 1 1 Creating and editing a User Box Creating a User Box Create a Public Personal or Group User Box Personal User Box can be used when user authentication is employed Group User Box can be used when account track is employed In the administrator mode select Box Create User Box then configure the following settings Maintenance gt Open User Box Create User Box Box is the function to save documents in the machine Open System User Box gt Create System User Box Print Setting store address Fax Settings Wizard Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan Ready to Print fs System Se
600. ti models can receive such a color fax e Mode 2 This mode allows communication between Olivetti models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and between models com patible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ Communica tions and Information Network Association of Japan The method compatible with the Direct SMTP standard Profile C format is used to send a color fax Mode 1 is specified by default Sending Colored Docu Select whether or not to accept sending of color faxes when selecting ments Mode 2 for Operating Mode To send a fax to a machine that does not support color reception based on the Direct SMTP standard select Restrict Allow is specified by default Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in black and white If necessary change the default compression type setting when sending a fax in black and white In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting Black Compression Level then configure the following settings Se Administrator Logout 2 D Ready to Scan Ready to Print User Maintenance pn Security Auth Account Network Box Settings 7 Track Print Setting Store Address g E 000Z Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position Black Compression Level gt Line Parameter Setting Black Compression Level MMR 7 gt TX RX Settings G a gt Function Setting OK Cancel gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt M
601. tication method e Use Settings Use the settings of Login Name Password and Do main Name e Use User Authentication Synchronizes with the user authentication of this machine Uses the user name and password of the registered user of this machine as Login Name and Password e Dynamic Authentication The system prompts you to enter the user name and password at LDAP searching Set Value is specified by default Referral Setting Specify whether to use the referral function as required Make an appropriate choice that fits the LDAP server environment ON is specified by default Login Name Log in to the LDAP server and enter the login name to search for a user using up to 64 characters Password Enter the password of the user name you entered into Login Name using up to 64 characters Domain Name Enter the domain name to log in to the LDAP server using up to 64 char acters If GSS SPNEGO is selected for Authentication Type enter the domain name of Active Directory Search Attributes Au thentication Select whether to enable the attribute based authentication when Authen tication Type is set to Simple and Select Server Authentication Method to Dynamic Authentication If enabled the user does not need to enter all of the DN Distinguished Name when performing authentication via the LDAP server No Limit is specified by default Search Attrib
602. tificate is issued by an inter mediate certificate authority You must also import the root certificate of the CA which certifies the in termediate certificate authority on this machine in advance Trusted EE End Entity Certificate Trusted EE refers to the certificate to be submitted By importing a certificate on this machine in advance the certificate will be identified as a trusted certificate when it is submitted If a certificate is registered as the trusted EE certificate in advance this ma chine will skip validation of the certificate chain when it is submitted and will recognize it as a trusted certificate Non Trusted Certificate Register non trusted certificates on this machine 13 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 3 Configuring certificate verification settings 13 How to import Import external certificates used for validating the certificate chain certificate path in this machine 1 New Registration In the administrator mode select Security PKI Settings External Certificate Setting then click gt To change certificates to be shown in the list select a certificate you wish to change and click Changes the display gt To delete the registered certificate click Delete 2 3 Click OK Print Setting Y PKI Settings External Certificate Setting fication Be Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print r User ped
603. tification ON z Total Counter Notification ON z SMTP Server Address I Please check to enter host name Use SSL TLS OFF z Port Number 25 1 65535 Port No SSL Bss a 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period conim en Do Nor Confirm f Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm E Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Connection Timeout 60 sec Max Mail Size No Limit E Server Capacity E voyea 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address Cc 7T Authentication Setting POP before SMTP orr POP before SMTP Time B jse 0 60 I SMTP Authentication User ID IF Password is changed CT Password Ld Cc Domain Name Authentication Setting Set Value I Binary Division Divided Mail Size kbye 100 15000 Step100 Settings Description E mail TX Setting Select this option to use the Internet fax function ON selected is specified by default Scan to E mail Select ON to use Internet fax ON is specified by default SMTP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server SMTP Use one of the following formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number
604. ting ErP Auto Power OFF Status Notification Setting Date Setting 2011 x J X Settir Total Counter Notification E une E Setting Work Time Setting Date Time Setting ON Time OFF Time Se F Sun 0 p 0 aylight Saving Time I Mon 0 0 0 Jo te FSS l Se 0 Power Settings Cwed E0 E Ne Weekly Timer Setting C Thu gt Network Error Code I Fri Display Setting sa m C b i gt Reset T Use Power Save License Settings Power Save Start Time Power Save End Time Edit Font Macro T Use Overtime Password F Password is changed M Enable Tracking Function Auto Standby Adjustment Level Level 3_ Display ON OFF Time ON Time OFF Time Sun a 00 Mon Tue Wed 00 00 00 Thu 00 Fri 00 Sat sisisisisisis 6 6 6 6 6 6 F Clear Usage Data 00 Cancel Settings Description Use Weekly Timer Select this check box to use the weekly timer function Also specify the schedule Setting power save mode to be switched by the weekly timer and the weekly timer The weekly timer schedule can be used with Date Setting and Work Time If the Enable Tracking Function check box is selected the schedule auto matically set by the tracking function is specified by default for Date Set ting and Work Time Setting More flexible operation is possible by changing the automatically set schedule
605. ting with the remote diagnosis system Registering a proxy server used for remote diagnosis To use a proxy server for using a service that diagnoses the machine status remotely register the proxy serv er information with this machine A proxy server used for WebDAV transmission can also be used as a proxy server for remote diagnosis You can also a different proxy server In the administrator mode select Network WebDAV Settings Proxy Setting for Remote Access then configure the following settings Bs Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print User Security Auth Account Track System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Proxy Setting for Remote Acce E mail Se Proxy Setting for Remote Access Proxy Settings Synchronize WebDAV Client Setting Proxy Server Address LDAP Setting gt IPP Setting FTP Setting gt SNMP Setting gt SMB Setting P DPWS Settings Bonjour Setting gt AppleTalk Setting Network Fax Setting Y WebDAV Settings Proxy Server Port Number User Name T Password is changed Password gt Proxy Setting for Remote Access EI Logout 2 Customize ss OFF ON Bl IE Please check to enter host name 1 65535 Cancel gt OpenAPI Setting Settings Description Proxy Setting for Remote Access Select ON to use a proxy server for remote diagnosis OFF is spec
606. tings Description ON OFF Select whether to automatically adjust the date and time of this machine via the NTP server OFF is specified by default Auto IPv6 Retrieval In the IPv6 environment select whether to automatically specify the NTP server address by DHCPv6 On is specified by default NTP Server Setting Register a discovery proxy server to perform Web service printing or scan ning Select a number to be registered and configure the following items Host Address Enter the NTP server address Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6b fe10 2f16 Port Number If necessary change the NTP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 123 is specified by default Set Date Connect to the NTP server and adjust the date and time of this machine Auto Time Adjustment Select whether to automatically adjust the date and time by connecting to the NTP server at periodical intervals Off is specified by default Polling Interval If you select On for Auto Time Adjustment specify an interval to auto matically adjust the date and time 24 hours is specified by default 17 34 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 Status Notification Setting To display Utility
607. tion in Sleep Mode Select whether to reduce the power consumption in the Sleep mode e Enabled Further reduces the power consumption in the Sleep mode Select Enabled in normal conditions e Disabled Select this option when a smooth network communication is not established while Enabled is enabled Enabled is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 3 14 Managing the machine power for power saving 14 1 Settings Description Power Save Settings If Power Save is selected for Power Key Setting select the type of the Power Save mode you want to switch when pressing the Power key on the Control Panel e Low Power Switches to the Low Power mode Turns off the display of the Touch Panel to reduce power use e Sleep Switches to the Sleep mode Sleep mode provides a greater power saving effect than the Low Power mode However the time re quired to return to the normal mode is longer than the time required to recover from the Low Power mode Low Power is specified by default Power Key Setting Select whether to use the Power key on the Control Panel as a sub power off key or power save key e Sub Power OFF Press the Power key to turn the sub power off If the Power key is held down the power save mode shifts to the ErP Auto Power Off mode close to main power off mode which offers a higher power saving effect than sub power off mode e Power Save Press the
608. to Print Main Menu List Assignment Function Name Shortcut Key Edit 1 Function Copy Edit 2 Function Scan Fax Est 3 Function Box Eat 4 Not Set Est 5 Not Set Est 6 Not Set Ear 7 Not Set Est 8 Not Set Est 9 Not Set Eai 10 Not Set Edit 11s NotSet Edit 12 Not Set Ear 13 Not Set Est 14 Not Set Eai 15 Not Set Eai 16 Not Set Est 17 Not Set Ear 18 Not Set Est 19 Not Set Est 20 Not Set Eai 21 Not Set Es 22 Not Set Est 23 Not Set Eai d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 14 9 14 Customizing the Control Panel environment 14 3 2 Select a function to be assigned to a shortcut key Machine Setting gt Register Support Information gt Network TWAIN Reset Settings User Box Setting Standard Size Setting Stamp Settings gt Blank Page Print Settings gt Job Priority Operation Settings gt Flash Display Setting Customize System Connection Setting gt Outline PDF Setting gt Scan File Name Settings Set Paper Name by User Enlarge Display Settings gt Registered Key Settings Main Menu Display Settings Preview Settings ListiCounter gt Custom Function Pattern Selection gt Custom Function Profile User Account gt Function Display Key Permission Setting gt Tempora
609. to be deleted automat ically e Do Not Delete Keeps the file in the User Box e Specify days Select the number of days until the file is automatically deleted e Specify Time Enter the time period before the file is automatically de leted 11 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 2 Creating and editing a System User Box 1 1 11 2 2 Creating a Relay User Box Relay User Box is a box used to relay data when you use this machine as a relay machine to the facsimile If you use the Relay Distribution and when you send a fax to the relay machine it distributes the fax to all recipients being registered in the Relay User Box If you are using broadcasting to distant places you can reduce the total communication cost by using the relay machine Tips To use Relay User Box an Fax Kit is required In the administrator mode select Box Create System User Box Relay User Box then configure the following settings Sp Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan a Ready to Print 2 E 7 u Maintenance Seine Security Auth Account Network Print Setting store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Open User Box Create System User Box Relay gt Create User Box User Box Number Use opening number gt Open System User Box Miani ai User Box Name Relay Address Search from List Registered Address Number Relay TX Password Retype Relay TX Password Cz o Cancel Settings Description User Box N
610. to enter the administrator password for this machine You can specify the initial operations of the copy print fax or User Box function power saving function and network function to suit your environment Also you can manage the use status of this machine or inhibit an information leakage by specifying the authentication or security function For the administrator password refer to the booklet manual Quick Assist Guide Settings Description System Settings Configure the operating environment of this machine such as the date and time of this machine power saving function functional operations and screen displays Administrator Machine Settings Register information on the administrator and this machine One Touch User Box Registration Register destinations or User Boxes Also print an address list or specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created User Authentication Ac count Track Configure user authentication and account track This function allows you to restrict users who can use this machine or man age the use status of this machine Specify the authentication method or register user information or account track information Network Settings Configure the network function such as TCP IP settings or Scan to Send function operating environment Copier Settings Configure each function used in the copy mode Printer Settings Specify the time out time to
611. to the user if necessary For details refer to page 12 43 Max Allowance Set Sets the maximum number of sheets the user can print and User Boxes they can register For details refer to page 12 46 Limiting Access to Desti Restricts destinations the user can access if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 Tips If you click Continue Registration after registering a user you can register another user successively without going back to the user list screen If you select Stop Job at Temporarily stop use you can temporarily disable the registered user If the user authentication and account track functions are synchronized Account Name is displayed At Account Name you can specify the account name of the user d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 9 12 Employing the account track function 12 3 12 3 Employing the account track function Overview Installing Account Track enables you to collectively manage multiple users on an account basis Account au thentication information is managed internally by this machine A password can be set by account to restrict users from using this machine Also this function allows you to restrict available functions or manage the use status of this machine by account You can use a combination of user authentication and account track for management of each user for each department For example you can allow a company staff member belonging t
612. tor 2 ready to Scan B Ready to Print a User Ea Track ii re res Fax Settings Wizard Customize Auto Log Out Time Turn the main switch OFF and then ON when changing settings lhour F ox cancer Single Sign On Setting gt Auto Log Out Time Tips e In the administrator mode select Network Single Sign On Setting Applications and Settings to view the list of services of this machine that joins the domain of Active Directory When this machine joins the Active Directory domain PRINTER appears d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 19 12 Employing the NTLM authentication 12 5 12 5 Employing the NTLM authentication Overview When you use Active Directory of Windows Server NT compatible domain environment or Windows NT 4 0 for user management you can restrict users of this machine by authentication using NTLM Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine When employing the NTLM authentication function follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings f
613. tore Address Program Registration User Box then click OK to configure the following settings Maintenance Sp Administrator 2 D ready to Scan ie Ready to Print Es System Settings 5 Print Setting gt Fax Settings Wizard Customize Program User Box lke Select from Address Book search fom ist Registered Address Number Check Destination Direct Input User Box No Search from List Registered Box Number 1 999999999 Basic Setting Scan Resolution 200 x 200 File Type PDF x Outline PDF OFF E File Name Page Setting Multi Page Page Separation z a 999 Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination User Box from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually specify a destination User Box select the Direct Input option Click Search from List and select a destination User Box from the list Only one destination can be specified Basic Setting Application Configure the Scan option settings Setting For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 3 Registering a program
614. tory server such as the LDAP server or Active Directory is used for user management you can search for a destination E mail address or fax number from the server Use SSL to encrypt a communication with the server you can make communications more securely When using the LDAP server to search for a destination follow the below procedure to configure the settings Y To use the LDAP function of the Active Directory server you must register the DNS server that synchro nizes the Active Directory on this machine before starting the procedure For details on how to register the DNS server refer to page 5 5 Y To use the LDAP function of the Active Directory server you must match the date and time of this ma chine and Active Directory For details on how to set the date and time of this machine refer to page 4 5 1 Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure basic settings for the LDAP search gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 34 3 Setthe following options according to your environment Purpose Reference Communicate with the LDAP server using SSL page 7 37 Configuring basic settings for the LDAP search Configure settings so that you can search for a destination from the LDAP server In addition register your LDAP server configure settings for connecting to the LDAP and search method
615. tration Y User Authentication No Setting Use opening number User Name Lo E mail Address Retype User Password Print Scan Fax TX Full Color Black Manual Destination Input Allow X Mobile PDA Allow z Custom Function Profile by User Copy Print Screen Restrict gt Pattern Setting Full E Send Save Screen Restrict _ Pattern Setting Full E Max Allowance Set Total Allowance F Total 1 1 9999999 Settings Description Copy Print Screen To select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed in the print set tings screen in Copy or User Box mode select Allow e Full Displays all function keys e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays the more basic function keys than Standard Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model Send Save Screen To select a display pattern of function keys to be displayed on the send or save settings screen in Fax Scan or User Box mode select Allow e Full Displays all function keys e Standard Displays the standard function keys e Basic Displays the more basic function keys than Standard Full is specified by default Standard is not displayed in the USA model Tips To check the functions available for each pattern setting select in the administrator mode System Settings Custom Function Pattern Selection then click Details A function
616. ts you can analyze the use status of this machine by project as well as by company staff mem ber or department To log in to this machine enter the user name then specify the account When switching between synchronization and non synchronization of user authentication and account authentication depending on the business status configure the following settings to allow each user to select whether to perform synchronization In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then set Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track to Synchronize by User E In the administrator mode select Security Restrict User Access then set Synchronize User Authen tication amp Account Track By User to Allow d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 5 12 Employing the MFP authentication 12 2 12 2 Employing the MFP authentication Overview Users of this machine can be restricted by the authentication function ON MFP of this machine Authenti cation information of users are managed internally by this machine Employing the user authentication enables security and cost conscious advanced operations such as re stricting users from accessing this machine restricting users from using the functions by user and managing the use status of this machine When employing the MFP authentication follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure basic
617. tting V Network Fax Setting gt SMTP RX Setting Description Select ON to use the IP address fax function ON is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the port number of the E mail server SMTP Normally you can use the original port number 25 is specified by default Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server SMTP as required 300 sec is specified by default 10 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 2 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 4 Inthe administrator mode select Fax Settings Header Information then configure the following set tings Settings Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ie Ready to Print rs User man setings EE ac oe Print Setting re 5 Fax Settings Customize gt Header Footer Position Sender Fax No gt Line Parameter Setting Sender Fax No C gt TX RX Settings Function Setting TILS No Default Sender Name Edit Delete gt PBX Connection Setting 1 e Edit Delete gt Report Settings 2 e Edit Delete gt Multi Line Settings 3 Edit Delete gt Network Fax Setting 4 e Edit Delete mae 5 C Edit Delet gt Fax Print Quality Settings Eai Letete 6 e Edit Delete Description Line 1 Line 2 Select the default setting for the sender name
618. tting 77 37 Print Settings 77 77 Printer Settings 77 32 Protocol Setting 77 9 Proxy Setting for Remote Access 77 30 F R RAW Port Number 77 77 Remote Panel Settings 77 39 S MIME Communication Settings 77 23 Scanner Settings 77 32 Server Settings Remote Panel Settings 77 39 Single Sign On Setting 77 38 SLP Setting 77 36 SMB Settings 77 75 SMTP RX Settings 77 27 SMTP TX Settings 77 27 SNMP Settings 77 24 SSDP Settings 77 33 Status Notification Setting 77 35 TCP Socket 77 26 TCP Socket ASCII Mode 77 26 TCP Socket Settings 77 25 TCP IP Settings 77 5 Time Adjustment Setting 77 34 Total Counter Notification Settings 77 36 U User Authentication Setting NDS 77 73 Ww W Web Browser Setting 17 37 WebDAV Client Settings 77 28 WebDAV Server Settings 77 29 WebDAV Settings 77 28 WINS Settings 77 77 DIRECTIVE 2002 96 EC ON THE TREATMENT COLLECTION RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS INFORMATION 1 FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION EU The disposal of electric and electronic devices as solid urban waste is strictly prohibited it must be collected separately The dumping of these devices at unequipped and unauthorized places may have hazardous effects on health and the environment Offenders will be subjected to the penalties and measures laid down by the law TO DISPOSE OF OUR DEVICES CORRECTLY a Contact the Local Authorities who will give y
619. ttings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings NetWare Settings NetWare Print Set tings Configure the NetWare printing environment Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to enable NetWare printing OFF is specified by default NetWare Print Mode Select an operation mode of the print server according to your environ ment PServer is specified by default PServer Press PServer to configure settings for using this machine as PServer e Print Server Name Enter the print server name using up to 63 char acters e Print Server Password If necessary enter a print server password using up to 63 characters e Polling Interval Specify a job inquiry interval 1 sec is specified by default e NDS Bindery Setting Select NDS or NDS amp Bindery NDS is spec ified by default e File Server Name Enter the priority file server name to be used in the Bindery emulation mode using up to 47 characters e NDS Context Name Enter the context name of the NDS to be con nected via the print server using up to 191 characters e NDS Tree Name Enter the tree name of the NDS to be connected via the print server using up to 63 characters Nprinter Rprinter Press Nprinter Rprinter to configure settings for using this machine as Nprinter or Rprinter e Print Server Name Enter the print server name using up to 63 char acters e Print
620. ttings Configure the FTP transmission environment and the FTP server function setting of this machine SMB Settings Set the SMB Server Message Block operating environment LDAP Settings Configure the settings to search for destinations from the LDAP server or Active Directory E Mail Settings Configure the settings for sending and receiving E mail with this machine SNMP Settings Configure the settings to obtain information of this machine or to monitor the machine using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP AppleTalk Settings Configure the AppleTalk operating environment if the machine is running under Mac OS control Bonjour Setting Configure the Bonjour operating environment if the machine is running un der Mac OS control TCP Socket Settings Configure the TCP Socket operating environment Network Fax Settings Select whether to use Internet fax and IP address fax respectively To use IP address fax configure the SMTP transmission environment WebDAV Settings Configure the WebDAV transmission environment and the WebDAV server function setting of this machine DPWS Settings Configure the settings for print and scan using the Web services such as Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS Distributed Scan Settings Select whether or not to use the Distributed Scan Management on this ma chine SSDP Settings Select whether to use the SSDP Simple Service D
621. ttings 77 39 DNS Server Settings IPv4 77 7 DNS Server Settings IPv6 77 7 d DPWS Common Settings 77 37 S MIME Communication Settings 77 23 DPWS Extension Settings 77 37 Scanner Settings 77 32 DPWS Settings 77 30 Server Settings Remote Panel Settings 77 39 E Single Sign On Setting 17 38 Ta SLP Setting 77 36 E Mail BOR hae SMB Settings 17 15 E Mail Settings 77 20 SMTP RX Settings 17 27 EMail TX SMTE 1 7220 SMTP TX Settings 77 27 Enable Po 17 10 SNMP Settings 17 24 Error Code Display Setting 77 37 SSDP Settings 17 33 F Status Notification Setting 77 35 FTP Server Settings 77 75 T PUP Set indes T A14 TCP Socket 17 26 EE TSG s 1714 TCP Socket ASCII Mode 17 26 Hi TCP Socket Settings 77 25 HTTP Server Settings 17 73 TCP IP Settings 77 5 Time Adjustment Setting 77 34 l Total Counter Notification Settings 77 36 IEEE802 1x Authentication Settings 77 37 IKE Settings 77 8 bad Internet ISW Settings 77 40 User Authentication Setting NDS 77 73 IP Filtering Deny Access 77 77 V IP Filtering Permit Access 77 11 Web Browser Setting 17 37 Peer nee nds dig WebDAV Client Settings 17 28 See Se tnOe 175r WebDAV Server Settings 17 29 Pye Sends tie WebDAV Settings 17 28 ia 108 WINS Settings 17 17 IPX Settings 77 72 IWS Settings 77 38 L LDAP Settings 77 78 LLMNR Setting 77 77 LPD Setting 77 36 18 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 Web Connection Web Connectionin tis deh aint tear a ee et ee 1 3 Operating environ Mente iser eae Hide aa aaa aaa
622. ttings Security Auth account a Customize Create User Box Public Personal Documents in the Box can be used for printing sending etc User Box Number Use opening number Input directly 1 999999999 User Box Name I Assign User Box Password User Box Password Retype User Box Password Index Specify a keyword for Box search and display by Name asc E Type Pubic Auto Delete Document Do Not Delete Specify days Specify Time hon 5 720 User Box Expansion Function Display Settings Description User Box Number Registration number of the box Select Use opening number to automat ically assign the smallest available number When specifying a number se lect Input directly and enter a value between 1 and 999999999 User Box Name Enter the User Box name using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the User Box Assign User Box Pass word When restricting usage of User Box using a password select this check box and then enter a password using up to 64 characters excluding Index Select a corresponding character so that a User Box can be index searched with User Box Name Type Select Public Personal or Group depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings e f Personal is selected specify the owner user e f Group is selected specify the owner account d Color MF552
623. ublic user performs a color copying operation In this case the user can log in to this machine as an other user for whom color copy is allowed and use the color copy function In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track Prohibited Function Login Setting then set Prohibited Function Login Setting to Request d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 45 12 Managing the maximum number of copies by user or account 12 12 12 12 Managing the maximum number of copies by user or account Employing User Authentication or Account Track enables you to specify the maximum number of copies by user or account Also you can set the upper limit of the number of User Boxes that can be registered Management of the upper limit of copies by user or account depending on the use status of this machine encourages users and accounts to develop awareness of costs and also contributes to cost reduction Tips To use the MFP authentication set the upper limit when registering each user or account track e To use the external authentication server user information is registered once you execute authentica tion To set the upper limit edit user information registered on this machine The setting items are as follows Functions Description Total Allowance To manage the upper limit according to a total number of copies in color and black and white select the Total check box then enter the maximum allowance OFF not sel
624. uisition of the Machine counter c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeaaeeeeeesceaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaee 16 19 16 8 3 Sending the machine Operating status eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeaneeesaeeseeaeeeesaaeeseaeeeeenneeennes 16 19 16 8 4 Allowing read and write of the machine setting information cccceceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaee 16 19 16 9 Associating with the fax server OVOIVIOW E TET E a O E E ET Registering Application Sissies aeaeaei a a i aa er EE i eea Application setting templates essneeeosennneeeenneneeenen e Associating with the fax server communicating in E Mail format 2 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 16 24 16 10 Operating the machine Control Panel remotely cccscsssessssscesscesesesssesscessseessussenesneesanees 16 25 OVGIVIGW incest ened E Sacto advance cetune A A EE ddenusa cies Eaa A aNs 16 25 Using the dedicated SOfWAIEC ccceseceeescceteseeeeeseeeeeneeeeesaneeseseeeeeeceneceeseseeeeeseaseseeseseseeeeeneetens 16 25 Accessing the machine directly ccccccceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeescaeeeeesesseaeeeeeeeeeeaee 16 27 Up A Administrator Settings renr e a A a a e aea 17 3 NStWork Settings neadan aaa oaa eaaa a eaire eaaa a aa a aata e a aAa ainean iea 17 4 iC P IP Settings aiai iin e a e aa a N a EA 17 5 IPVA SOTHINGS E E A AT A E E E E TE 17 5 Py6 Setti gS jrn nii a eri etl ee ee eet 17 6 DNSiHOSt ici sid
625. ult Density Adjust the density Dark or Light to scan the original O Standard is specified by default Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area when printing originals with colored background newspaper recycled paper etc or originals that are so thin that text or images on the back would be scanned e Bleed Removal Select this option to prevent a back side bleeding when printing a double sided original that is so thin that the contents of the back side would be scanned e Discoloration Adjust Select this option to scan an original with the colored background such as a map Bleed Removal is specified by default Scan Size Select a size of original to scan Auto is specified by default In Application Setting configure the application option settings for the fax scan mode Settings Description E mail Notification Send an E mail which contains a destination where to save original data to a specified E mail address after SMB transmission FTP transmission WebDAV transmission or User Box filing has been ended Click Search from List and select a destination E mail address from the list You can manually enter an E mail address OFF not selected is specified by default Timer TX To set a time to start fax transmission select ON Also specify when to start fax transmission OFF is specified by default Password TX To send fax with a
626. ulti Line Settings V Network Fax Setting gt Black Compression Level gt Header Information Settings Description Black Compression Level Select the default compression type for transmission in black and white e MH The data size is larger than MMR e MR The data size is intermediate between MH and MMR e MMR The data size is the smallest MMR is specified by default 10 22 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 10 2 Configuring the IP address fax environment 10 Configuring default compression type setting for transmission in color If necessary change the default compression type setting when sending a fax in full color or gray scale In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Network Fax Setting Color Grayscale Multi Value Com pression Method then configure the following settings gt PBX Connection Setting gt Report Settings gt Multi Line Settings V Network Fax Setting gt Color Grayscale Multi Value Compression Method gt Header Information Be Administrator 2 Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print p System Maintenance Settings Box Print Setting store adress Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Header Footer Position Color Grayscale Multi Value Compression Method gt Line Parameter Setting Color Grayscale Multi Value PEG Color 7 Compression Method gt TX RX Settings ema m Settings Description Color Grayscale Mul
627. umber Select from Group Select from User Box No Description Enter the fax number TSI of the sender you want to register the forwarding destination in using up to 20 digits including symbols and spaces Forwarding Destina tion chine Specify a forwarding destination when a fax is received from the fax number entered at Sender TSI e Select from Address Book Forwards a fax to a destination registered in the address book on this machine e Select from Group Forwards a fax to a group registered on this machine e Select from User Box No Forwards a user box registered on this ma 9 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 9 3 8 Restricting PC FAX transmission Select whether to allow PC Fax TX using the fax driver To restrict PC FAX transmission select in the administrator mode Fax Settings Function Settings PC Fax TX Setting Restrict Default Allow Se Administrator 2 Ready to Scan EB rezov to Print ga z System mee SER a ma Print Setting Fax Settings Wizard Customize PC FAX TX Setting PC Fax Permission Setting Allow oe Lee d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 21 9 Using an additional line 9 4 9 4 Using an additional line Set how you want to use a second line if any In the ad
628. umber Registration number of the box Select Use opening number to automat ically assign the smallest available number When specifying a number se lect Input directly and enter a value between 1 and 999999999 User Box Name Enter the User Box name using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the User Box Relay Address Click Search from List and select a group in which fax destinations are registered When registering a group destination as a relay destination be sure to set the fax address in the group destination in advance Relay TX Password Re To restrict the usage of User Box using password enter the password us type Relay TX Password ing up to eight characters The entered password is required when sending a relay request to this ma chine Inform the sender who want to use this machine as a relay machine of the password you entered here d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 11 7 11 Creating and editing a System User Box 11 2 11 2 3 Creating an Annotation User Box Annotation User Box is a box used to automatically add the date time and filing number to a file saved in this box when it is printed or sent When a file is read from the Annotation User Box and used for printout or transmission to a recipient the date time and annotation previously determined for management are added to the header or footer of each image
629. unction Fax Retransmit is a function that stores a fax that could not be sent by Redial in the machine s user box for a given period of time A stored fax job can be resent later by recalling it from the box In the administrator mode select Fax Settings Function Setting Incomplete TX Hold then configure the following settings Se Administrator Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print g Maintenance S Print Setting Stor Header Footer Position Incomplete TX Hold gt Line Parameter Setting I Incomplete TX Hold gt TX RX Settings File Storage Duration 12 Hour aa gt Dial in settings gt Closed Network RX JF Remote RK Settings Description Incomplete TX Hold Select this option to use the Fax Retransmit function OFF not selected is specified by default File Storage Duration Specify the time period during which a fax failed to be sent is stored in the machine s user box 12 hours is specified by default 9 12 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 3 Specifying useful transmission and reception functions 9 9 3 4 Using the compulsory memory RX function Memory RX is a function to save a received fax in the Memory RX User Box of this machine without printing it You can check the contents of incoming faxes and print only those you need to print by which you can reduce the printing cost Tips The compulsory memory RX function cannot be used together with the following functions TSI User Box PC Fax RX Forwa
630. undaete 3 14 er E canaais casaneceiaskecnasuctesoasssenzbecddasdasaveixecsavasaadeuavaadeas asus iundscsndeiedexsssaceiueecauass x scedsauieveeeatacessdis 3 14 Direct Print sic ciesec ects cehesvesces ciccasets Que sdevaeaesadscaitessdecadle stideal a wabadadastethlertetaaled laced ded Coseiteleadestetenests 3 15 Store Address s 28 fen eA a ee ea Raed ele a eaaa Rae ea 3 16 EUCERA 3 17 CUSLOMIZE as iaiia eesin iene elias de a a nicer aint ee a NAG viele 3 17 Using the Shortcut Function iss acccec esectecscnctncctcessctnndeacesctenscceeceuantennessuedseuedsszesccegecdtneasuencevestanentcee 3 18 Registering a function in Bookmarks of the Web DrowWSe cceesseeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeteesneeeaes 3 18 Creating a shortcut for a SPECIFIC PAGE eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenee tease tease eeeaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeee 3 18 Using the Help function Using the Online Help sersiscs inanki aa anaa ar e EE E AEAEE Ee EEE aa EErEE Displaying the meaning of the setting in the POPUP WINdOW ssssessssssresrrrerrrrsrrnssirnerrnnerrnnrennsrennne 3 19 Using the wizard when configuring function settings eee eeseeeeeeneeteeneeeeeaeeeeesaeeesneeeenneteeeneeeeaaes 3 20 Restricting use of Web Connection ccccssseeeeeeeessenneeeeessnnneeeeeeesseaeeeeesaseeeeeeeessennaeeeesseeneneees 3 22 Configuring Basic Information Settings of this Machine 4 1 4 2 4 3 Registering information of this MACHINE cceesee esse ee
631. ur environment requires the POP Before SMTP Authentication for sending an E mail The POP Before SMTP authentication is a function that performs POP authentication using the E mail server POP before sending an E mail and allows E mail transmission only when the authentication is successful To use the POP Before SMTP authentication enable the POP Before SMTP on this machine In addition con figure settings for connecting to the E mail server POP used for authentication 1 In the administrator mode select Network E mail Setting E mail TX SMTP and configure the following settings Se Administrator 2 Ready to scan B Ready to Print T User lt OO Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize tcp ip setting E mail TX SMTP E mail Setting M E mail TX Setting Scan to E mail on eae E mail Notification fon Total Counter Notification on SMTP Server Address IT Please check to enter host name Use SSL TLS OFF x Port Number Bs a 6553s Port No SSL Fes__ 65535 Certificate Verification Level Settings Validity Period Confirm gt CN Do Not Confirm oa Net contol Chain bo Nor confirm ial Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm Connection Timeout 60 sec Max Mail Size No Limit Server Capacity C moyen 100 Admin E mail Address Device Mail Address Authentication Setting POP before SMTP orF POP bef
632. urrently running and starts printing the next job e Stop Job Stops all jobs Skip Job is specified by default 3 f you select ON MFP External Server in Step 2 select User Auth Account Track External Server Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information in the administrator mode and configure the following settings Be Administrator Logout 2 Ready to Scan re Ready to Print System User Maintenance Ye Security ECET Network Box Settings d LLET S Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Temporarily Save Authentication Information User Authentication Temporarily Save Authentication Setting Information Disable Z Reconnection Settings Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting Reconnect for every login Set Reconnect Interval Reconnection Time Minute 1 1440 Print without Authentication Simple Print o K Cancel Authentication Setting ex Temporarily Save Authentication Information Public User Box Setting gt User Account Common Setting gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Folder Settings Counter Remote Control Settings Description Temporarily Save Authen To temporarily save authentication information in the main unit against a tication Information case where an external authentication server shuts down select Enable Disabl
633. us ing between 8 to 32 characters excluding spaces and To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password priv password If auth password priv password is selected from Security Level enter a password used for privacy encryption of the read only user using be tween 8 and 32 characters excluding spaces and To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Write User Name Enter a user name used of the read and write user using up to 32 charac ters excluding spaces and Security Level Select a security level of the read and write user auth password If auth password or auth password priv password is selected from Se curity Level enter an authentication password for the read and write user using between 8 and 32 characters excluding spaces and To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password priv password If auth password priv password is selected from Security Level enter a password used for privacy encryption of the read and write user using between 8 and 32 characters excluding spaces and To enter change the password select the Password is changed check box then enter a new password Encryption Algorithm Select an encryption algor
634. ustomize User mode Enables a user such as a registered user public user or User Box admin istrator to log in to this machine The user can confirm the status of this machine use the files in the user box perform direct print register an address and other functions of this machine The login method and operations available after login differ depending on the login user type Registered User Enables a user or account track registered to this machine to log in To log in enable the authentication setting on this machine and register the user or account track Logging in as a registered user enables you to use the following category menus Information Job User Box Direct Print Store Address Customize Administrator User Mode Enables the administrator of this machine to log in as a user with adminis trator authority When you log in to this machine in this mode you cannot change the settings of this machine To log in you need to enter the administrator password of this machine In this mode you can delete jobs User Box Administra tor Enables you to log in as the administrator dedicated to the user box To log in you need to enter the box administrator password of this machine In this mode you can use the box registered on this machine regardless of the setting of box password To use the UserBoxAdmin Setting mode enable the box administrator on this machine Public User
635. ut 2 e Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print 2 Maintenance E Security auth Account Network Print Setting Eoee Fax Settings Wizard Customize gt Open User Box Create System User Box Bulletin Board gt Create User Box User Box Number gt Open System User Box Use opening number l gt create system E Input directly 999999999 User Box Name I Assign User Box Password User Box Password Retype User Box Password Type Public Auto Delete Document Do Not Delete Specify days ay Specify Time L Jmin 720 ox Cancel Settings Description User Box Number Registration number of the box Select Use opening number to automat ically assign the smallest available number When specifying a number se lect Input directly and enter a value between 1 and 999999999 User Box Name Enter the User Box name using up to 20 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the User Box Assign User Box Pass When restricting usage of User Box using a password select this check word box and then enter a password using up to 64 characters excluding Type Select Public Personal or Group depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings e f Personal is selected specify the owner user e f Group is selected specify the owner account Auto Delete Document Specify the period from the date time when a file was saved in last printed or sent form a User Box to the date time when it is
636. ut other users or accounts can use only the black and white printing function Configuring settings according to the business requirements of users or accounts provides you with security measures and cost reductions simul taneously Tips To use the MFP authentication set restrictions of functions accessible by users or accounts when reg istering them To use the external authentication server user information is registered once you execute authentica tion To restrict functions accessible by users edit user information registered on this machine The setting items are as follows Functions Description Copy Select whether to allow use of the copy function Black Only allows black and white copy only Full Color Black is specified by default Scan Select whether to allow use of the scan function Black Only allows scan in black and white only Full Color Black is specified by default Save to External Memory Select whether to enable to save files on a USB memory This option is available when saving files in a USB memory device is ena bled on this machine This option is disabled for an account Restrict is specified by default External Memory Docu ment Scan Select whether to allow to scan files from a USB memory device This option is available when scanning files from a USB memory device is enabled on this machine This option is disabled for an account Restrict is specified
637. ute s Enter the search attribute to be automatically added before the user name using up to 64 characters The attribute must start with an alphabet character uid is specified by default Check Connection Select this option to try connecting to the LDAP server using the entered information and check if the information registered is correct This option is displayed when ON is selected in Enabling LDAP Reset All Settings Press this key to reset all the contents you entered Default LDAP Server Set ting Select the default LDAP server to search for a destination When registering multiple LDAP servers set the frequently used LDAP server as the default Default Search Result Dis play Setting Select the default destination type to be displayed as the destination search result E Mail is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 19 17 E Mail Settings Network Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings E Mail Settings Configure the settings to send and receive E mails on this machine Settings Description E Mail TX SMTP Configure the settings to send an E mail from this machine For details refer to page 17 20 E Mail RX POP Configure the settings to enable this machine to receive an E mail For details refer to page 17 22 S MIME Communication Settings E Mail TX SMTP
638. vance 1 Enable WS scan and configure the SSL communication settings gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 27 2 Enable the Distributed Scan Management gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 16 16 Configuring the environment to use Distributed Scan Management Enable WS scan and configure SSL communication settings 1 Select Network DPWS Settings Scanner Settings in Administrator mode and set Scan Function to ON default OFF Se Administrator Logout 2l Ready to Scan ry Ready to Print 2 User Maintenance paren Security Auth Account Box ettings Track Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings TCP IP Setting _ Scanner Settings E mail Setting is reflected after reset Scan Function OFF Scanner Name Scanner Location Scanner Information Connection Timeout sec 30 300 ox Cancel d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 16 15 16 Associating with the distributed scan server 16 6 2 Select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Common Settings in Administrator mode and set SSL Setting to ON default OFF System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Y DPWS Settings gt DPWS Common Settings Se Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print g DPWS Common Settings rosou 2 User Auth Account Network Track Box Fax Settings Wizard Customize is reflected after reset
639. ved Auto Select is specified by default Print Paper Size Select size of paper for printing received fax The initial value varies depending on the setting for Letter Ledger over A4 A3 Incorrect User Box No En Select the action taken by the machine if unregistered user box is specified try for receiving a fax using the machine s box e Print Prints a received fax without saving it in a user box e Show Error Message Handles the fax as a communication error It is neither saved nor printed e Auto Create User Box Automatically creates a user box with a spec ified number and stores documents in it Print is specified by default RX from Rejected Fax No Select the action taken by the machine when a fax is sent from a blocked fax number blocked destination if you are using Number Display Function Disconnect is specified by default Tray Selection for RX Print Specify a paper tray if you want to fix the paper tray used to print a fax Auto is specified by default d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 9 7 Specifying operations when sending and receiving a fax 9 2 Settings Description Min Reduction for RX Print If necessary change the reduction ratio that is used when printing a fax 96 is specified by default Print Separate Fax Pages Select whether to print a fax longer than the standard size on separate pag es This option is not available if Duplex P
640. ved by the certificate issuer Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Chain Confirm whether there is a problem in the certificate chain cer tificate path The chain is validated by referencing the external certifi cates managed on this machine Do Not Confirm is specified by default e Expiration Date Confirmation Confirm whether the certificate has ex pired Do Not Confirm is specified by default e CN Confirm whether CN Common Name of the certificate matches the server address Do Not Confirm is specified by default WebDAV Server Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings WebDAV Settings WebDAV Server Set tings Configure settings to enable use of the WebDAV server function of this machine Using this machine as a WebDAV server allows you to associate this machine with an application that oper ates as a WebDAV client Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to use the WebDAV server function of this machine OFF is specified by default SSL Setting Specify whether to use the SSL for communication or not e Non SSL Only Only non SSL communication is allowed e SSL Only Only SSL communication is allowed e SSL Non SSL Both SSL communication and non SSL communica tion are allowed Non SSL Only is specified by default Password Setting Specify the password to restrict access to the WebDAV server of this ma chine using up t
641. warning oc curs while operating this machine after login Language Select a language to be used in display of Web Connection Tips e The flash view enables the use of active screen effect However there are restrictions on the use of flash view for example the plug in must be installed When you are in an environment where the flash view is not available or you use a screen reader we recommend you to select HTML The following are restrictions on the use of the flash view Flash Player must be installed The flash view is not available when you use Adobe Flash Player 9 0 or earlier in the IPv6 environment 3 6 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 3 3 Login methods Login mode Web Connection has multiple login modes and available operations differ depending on the mode Two login modes of Web Connection are provided the administrator mode which is used to configure set tings of this machine and the user mode which enables use of the functions of this machine Login mode Description Administrator Mode Enables the administrator of this machine to log in to configure settings of this machine To log in you need to enter the administrator password of this machine Logging in as the administrator enables you to use the following category menus Maintenance System Settings Security User Auth Account Track Network Box Printer Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard C
642. worked devices Enabling the AppleTalk function on this machine enables the computer to automatically detect this networked machine and display it as an addable printer in the list In the administrator mode select Network AppleTalk Setting then configure the following settings Sp Administrator ready to Scan ry Ready to Print System Settings Maintenance Print Setting Si AppleTalk Setting is reflected after reset AppleTalk orr Printer Name Zone Name E Current Zone Network Fax Setting Settings Description AppleTalk Select ON to use the AppleTalk OFF is specified by default Printer Name Enter a printer name to be displayed on the selector using up to 31 char acters excluding and Zone Name If necessary enter the zone name of this machine using up to 31 charac ters Current Zone The current zone name is displayed 8 20 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment 8 8 Configuring the NetWare printing environment Overview This machine supports IPX which is a communication protocol used in NetWare enabling printing in IPX based environment Setting items differ depending on the NetWare print mode Configure the appropriate settings to suit your environment Purpose Reference In Remote Printer mode using the NetWare 4 x Bindery Emulatio
643. write User Info Restrict gt Account Track Settings Default Authentication Method ON External Server gt Prohibited Function Public User Access ON With Login Login Setting Ticket Hold Time Setting Active Bo R Directory Minute 1 600 Authentication Account Track ON gt simple Print Account Track Input Method Account Name amp Password Gogh TEED SST Synchronize User Authentication amp po ynchronize gt gt External Server Settings Account Track Se aes Number of Counters Assigned for 39 _ 999 gt When Number of Jobs Reach Weegee Common bebe Skip Job g gt Scan to Home Settings gt Scan to Authorized Leancei Folder Settings gt Counter Remote Control Settings Description User Authentication Select ON MFP to employ the MFP authentication Public User Access Select whether to allow that public users unregistered users to use this machine e ON With Login Allows that public users to use this machine When a public user uses this machine press Public User on the Login screen to log in to this machine ON Without Login A public user can use this machine without log ging in to this machine Using this option you do not need to log in to this machine even when there are many public users Restrict Restricts public users from using this machine Restrict is specified by default When public users accesses are allowed you can restrict functions avail able for publi
644. x then click OK to configure the following settings Se Administrator B Ready to Scan a Ready to Print Maintenance SE Auth Account Box Print Setting 5 OOO Fax Settings Wizard Customize _ Program Internet Fax ial No 2 i Destination Information Select from Address Book Registered Address Number Direct Input E mail Address a Fax Resolution F Standard FM Fine F Super Fine F Ultra Fine Paper Size E A4 FB4 F A3 Compression Type FMH EMR E MMR F JPEG Gray Scale F JPEG Color Basic Setting Fax Resolution Fine a File Type PDF fd Settings Description Name Enter the program name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you easily identify the program Destination Information Click Search from List and select a destination Internet fax address from the list Click Check Destination to check registered address books If you wish to manually enter a destination Internet fax select Direct Input and enter the FTP e E mail Address Enters the destination E mail address e Fax Resolution Paper Size Compression Type Select the specifi cations of original data that the recipient machine can receive Only one destination can be specified Basic Setting Application Configure the Scan option settings Setting For details refer to page 15 27 Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 22 d Color MF552 452 3
645. x Settings SORR LLEIS Mey T Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize External Server Registration No Port No I Enable SSL Port No SSL 536 Ja 65535 Search Base CT Timeout Eo sec 5 300 General Settings Simple x Search Attribute uid I Search Attributes Authentication Login Name E T Password is changed Password CT esr 2 2 eI covet Settings Description External Server Name Enter the name of your NDS server using up to 32 characters Assign an easy to understand name to the NDS server to be registered External Server Type Select NDS over IPX Default NDS Tree Name Enter the default NDS tree name using up to 63 characters Default NDS Context Name Enter the default NDS context name using up to 191 characters 12 32 d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 7 Installing the NDS over IPX authentication 12 2 Inthe administrator mode select User Auth Account Track General Settings then configure the fol lowing settings Maintenance Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard General Settings General Settings User Authentication Setting gt Account Track Settings gt Prohibited Function Login Setting gt Print without Authentication gt Simple Print Authentication Setting External Server Settings gt Public User Box Setting gt User Account
646. x TX Full Color Black gt Manual Destination Input Allow SS E seanto Home setings Mobile PDA Allow x gt Scan to Authorized Folder Siu Max Allowance Set Counter Remote Control Total Allowance F Total fF 1 9999999 Individual Allowance F Color 1 1 9999999 F Black _ 1 8999999 Box Administration T Box Count fF 0 100 Limiting Access to Destinations I Reference Allowed Group Search from List Registered Reference Group Number Totalo bal W Access Allowed Level d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 12 49 1 2 Limiting the access to destinations foreach user 12 13 12 13 3 Managing based on the reference allowed group Reference Allowed Group This function sorts multiple destinations registered in this machine into a related group reference allowed group such as a group of customers per department Set a reference allowed group for each user to limit access to destinations For example assume that Group B is set for a certain user as a reference allowed group In this case that user can access destinations in Group B but cannot access destinations in other reference allowed groups s Gr A a Gr C Assigning a reference allowed group Register a reference allowed group on this machine In addition assign a reference allowed group to the des tination and user 1 In the administrator mode select Security Address Reference Setting Edit and enter the group
647. y Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings E Mail Settings E Mail RX POP Configure the settings to enable this machine to receive an E mail Settings Description ON OFF Select whether to enable this machine to receive E mails ON is specified by default POP Server Address Enter the address of your E mail server POP Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Connection Timeout Change the timeout period for a communication with the E mail server POP as required 30 sec is specified by default SSL Setting Select whether to use SSL for communication with the E mail server POP OFF is specified by default Port No If necessary change the port number of the E mail server POP Normally you can use the original port number 110 is specified by default Port Number SSL If necessary change the SSL communication port number Normally you can use the original port number 995 is specified by default Certificate Verification Level Settings To validate the certificate during SSL communication select items to be verified e Expiration Date Confirm whether the certificate is within the validity period Confirm is specified by default e Key Usage Confirm whether
648. y ID String DPWS Settings gt Bonjour Setting Lok Cancel NetWare Setting Settings Description Name Enter a peer name 1 to 10 characters Set IP Address Specify the IP address of the peer Pre Shared Key Text Enter the Pre Shared Key text to be shared with the peer using up to 128 characters Specify the same text as that for the peer d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 13 19 13 Using IPsec communication 13 6 Settings Description Key ID String characters Enter the Key ID to be specified for the Pre Shared Key using up to 128 5 From Protocol Setting in IPsec Setting click Create and specify the protocol used for IPsec com munication gt Upto 10 protocols can be specified Se Administrator Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print System Maintenance Settings Print Setting Fax Settings Y TCP IP Setting Protocol Setting Name PP Fitterig O Protocl Identification Setting No Selection Port Number gt IPsec No Selection Port Number User Auth Account Logout Network Track Wizard Customize CL From 1 65535 Destination C 1 65835 Set Range From CF J E 1 65635 Destination C J E 1 65535 Settings Description Name Enter the protocol name 1 to 10 characters Protocol Identification Select a protocol used for IPsec communication Setting Port Number If TCP or
649. y de fault e Timeout Change the timeout interval for communication with the LDAP server if required 60 sec is specified by default e Initial Setting for Search Details Specify the default LDAP search con ditions for each item OR is specified by default in every case e Change Search Attribute Select attributes to be specified when per forming the LDAP search The setting can be switched between Name cn and Nickname displayName Name is specified by default in every case e Search Select whether to display candidate destinations when enter ing part of aname OFF is specified by default Server Address Enter the LDAP server address Use one of the following entry formats e Example of host name entry host example com e Example of IP address IPv4 entry 192 168 1 1 e Example of IP address IPv6 entry fe80 220 6bff fe10 2f16 Search Base Specify the starting point to search for a user to be authenticated using up to 255 characters This option also searches in subdirectories under the entered starting point Example of entry cn users dc example dc com SSL Setting Specify whether or not to use SSL for communication with the LDAP serv er OFF is specified by default Port Number If necessary change the LDAP server port number Normally you can use the original port number 389 is specified by default Port Number SSL If necessary change
650. y default Printer Information If necessary enter the printer information of this machine e Printer Name Enter the printer name of this machine using up to 127 characters e Printer Location Enter the location where to install this machine using up to 127 characters e Printer Information Enter printer information of this machine using up to 127 characters e Print URI Displays the URI of the printers that can print data using the IPP IPP Authentication Set tings Select whether to use the IPP authentication ON is specified by default General Settings Select the IPP authentication method requesting user name is specified by default User Name Enter a user name using up to 20 characters This entry is required if you have selected basic or digest for General Settings Password Enter the password of the user specified in User Name This entry is required if you have selected basic or digest for General Settings realm If digest is selected for General Settings enter the domain realm using up to 127 characters d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 17 13 17 FTP Settings To display Utility Administrator Settings Network Settings FTP Settings Configure the FTP transmission environment and the FTP server function setting of this machine Settings Description FTP TX Settings Configure settings to enable use o
651. y identify the destination Index Select a corresponding character so that the destination can be index searched by registration name e Fora frequently used destination select also the Main check box If the Main check box is selected the destination will appear in the main screen of the fax scan mode enabling the user to easily select a desti nation d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 15 9 1 5 Registering address books 15 1 Settings Description Destination Enter the destination fax number using up to 38 digits including symbols _ T P and E e f your environment is Private Branch Exchange PBX entering E first inserts the registered outside line number automatically e If your environment is Private Branch Exchange PBX entering P fol lowing the outside line number ensures the dialing If you wish to send out a push signal over the dial line enter T Enter to separate a dial number It does not affect the dialing of the number Line Setting If two lines are used select the line used to send a fax If No Selection is selected either line whichever is not busy is used for transmission Communication Setting As necessary click Display and specify how to send a fax to a destination you wish to register You may change the settings you made here before sending a fax e V34 Off Generally faxes are sent in the Super G3 mode If it is not possible to send faxes in th
652. you can send a file more securely When using the WS scan transmission follow the below procedure to configure the settings Configure settings for connecting to the network such as setting of the IP address of this machine gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 2 3 2 Configure the basic settings for the WS scan transmission gt For details on configuring the setting refer to page 7 28 Set the following options according to your environment Purpose Reference WS scan using the discovery proxy page 7 30 Communicate with the computer using SSL page 7 31 BEX Reference For details on how to configure settings in the computer side refer to User s Guide Scan Operationsj d Color MF552 452 362 282 222 7 27 Configuring the WS scan environment 7 5 Configuring the basic settings for the WS scan transmission Enable the scan using the Web service In addition configure settings used to detect this machine using the Web service information for this machine as a scanner and the method to connect to this machine 1 In the administrator mode select Network DPWS Settings DPWS Common Settings then con figure the following settings Settings Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings amp Administrator Logout 2 B Ready to Scan QB Ready to Print User System Xi Maintenance Settings Security Aen Account frm Box Setti _ DPWS Common Settings
653. ype of the original data that the recipient machine can receive Limiting Access to Desti Limit access to this destination if necessary nations For details refer to page 12 47 15 1 8 Registering an IP address fax destination An IP address fax destination can be registered or edited using Web Connection Although character input is a difficult process using the Touch Panel it can be carried out easily if you use the computer In the administrator mode select Store Address Address Book New Registration IP Address Fax then click OK to configure the following settings Sp Administrator B Ready to Scan EP Ready to Print g E Z Maintenance Eiken Auth Account Box Track Print Setting i Fax Settings Wizard Customize Address Book IP Address Fax Powe O Use opening number d Direct Input Index Pet Specify a keyword for address search and display by registered name ABC 7 3 e i I Main Destination Information Destination Type IP Address X Address Port No f25___ 1 65535 Destination Machine Type Mono Model v Limiting Access to Destinations Cane Settings Description No Destination registration number Use opening number is automatically registered from a lower number that is not used When specifying a number select Direct Input and enter a value between 1 and 2000 Name Enter the destination name using up to 24 characters Assign a name that helps you
654. ypted with SSL Configure the setting if your environment requires SSL encryption communication with the LDAP server In the administrator mode select User Auth Account Track LDAP IC Card Authentication Setting Server Registration Edit then configure the following settings Qe Administrator 2 e Ready to Scan ED Ready to Print fz System 5 7 J55 Maintenance Settings Security Autiuhorount Network Box rack I s q Print Setting Store Address Fax Settings Wizard Customize General Settings Server Registration User Authentication Server Address I Please check to enter host name Setting 0 0 0 0 Account Track Settings Port No 389 1 65535 Prohibited Function Login O Enable SSL Setting Port No SSL 1 65535 gt Print witt Certificate Verification Level Settings Authentication Expiration Date Confirm X Simple Print CN Do Not Confirm 7 Authentication Setting Key Usage Do Not Confirm x Y LDAP IC Card Chain Do Not Confirm x Authentication Setting Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm gt Search Base Timeout 0 Jsec 5 300 Server Registration General Settings Simple X External Se Settings Login Name F Password is changed Authentication Device P d Settings asswor Domain Name Public User Box Setting lt gt s Use Referral ON p ieont ORTON Search Attribute uid Setting z User Name Use Card ID _ Santo H Semngs User Name Attribute uid Scan to Authorized Folde

d-COLOR - Olivetti

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents